Amends to SDs 2013

NP247(2)

ADMIRALTY ANNUAL SUMMARY OF NOTICES TO MARINERS -UPDATES TO SAILING DIRECTIONS AND

MISCELLANEOUS NAUTICAL PUBLICATIONS

CORRECT TO 31 DECEMBER 2012 (Week 52/12)

CONTENTS

PART 1

CURRENT EDITIONS OF ADMIRALTY SAILING DIRECTIONS

PART 2

SAILING DIRECTIONS UPDATES IN FORCE

PART 3

CURRENT EDITIONS OF ADMIRALTY MISCELLANEOUS NAUTICAL PUBLICATIONS

PART 4

MISCELLANEOUS NAUTICAL PUBLICATIONS UPDATES IN FORCE

ii

iii

INTRODUCTION

NP247(2), Admiralty of Notices to Mariners - Updates to Sailing Directions andMiscellaneous Nautical Publications, contains the text of all updates to currenteditions of Admiralty Sailing Directions and Miscellaneous Nautical Publicationswhich have been published in Sections IV and VII of Admiralty of Notices toMariners, and which remain in force on 31 December 2012 (Week 52/12).

HOW TO USE THIS PUBLICATION

Current editions of Sailing Directions and Miscellaneous NauticalPublications

Updates to Admiralty Sailing Directions and Miscellaneous Nautical Publicationsare alwaysapplied to themost recent edition of the volume in use.Details of themostrecent edition of any particular volume can be established by consulting:

Part 1 and Part 3 of this publication, published annually in January.

NP131 Admiralty Chart Catalogue, published annually in December.

NP234 Cumulative List of Admiralty Notices to Mariners, published6-monthly in January and July.

New editions of Admiralty Sailing Directions and Miscellaneous NauticalPublications are announced in Section I of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.A complete listing of current editions is updated and published quarterly in Part IBof Admiralty Notices to Mariners. It is also available on the UKHO website atwww.ukho.gov.uk.

Sailing Directions in Continuous Revision

Most volumes of Admiralty Sailing Directions are kept up to date in a “ContinuousRevision” cycle. This means that once a new edition is published it will becontinuously revised by its Editor for a period of approximately 3 years usinginformation received in the UKHO, and then republished. During the life of the book,it is updated as necessary by notices published weekly at Section IV of AdmiraltyNotices to Mariners. These updates will normally be restricted to those critical to thesafety of navigation, and information required to be published as a result of changesto national legislation affecting shipping, and to port regulations.

It is recommended that updates issued in this way are cut out and pasted into theparent book. Mariners may, however, prefer to keep updates in a separate file, andannotate the text of the book in the margin to indicate the existence of an update.This latter method may be more appropriate in some volumes where significantnumbers of updates, sometimes overlapping, may make the cut-and-paste methodunwieldy and confusing.

http://www.ukho.gov.uk

iv

Promulgation of Section IV and VII Notices to Mariners

Section IV and VII Notices to Mariners are published weekly in Admiralty Notices toMariners.

A check-list of all extant Notices, but not the text, is published quarterly at the endof Sections IV and VII respectively of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.

This volume, published annually, contains the full text of all extant Section IV andVII Notices.

Action on receipt of a volume of Admiralty Sailing Directions orMiscellaneous Nautical Publication.

(1) Check that the most recent Edition of the volume is held.

(2) Check that the updates at Part 2 or Part 4 of this volume have been applied.

(3) Check that all updates published at either Sections IV and VII of AdmiraltyNotices to Mariners subsequent to the publication of this volume have beenapplied, using the most recent quarterly check-list at Section IV or VII of theWeekly Edition.

Where it is found that the most up to date information is not held, the most recenteditions of all Admiralty publications can be obtained from Admiralty Distributors,and back copies of Admiralty Notices to Mariners can also be downloaded from theUKHO website.

1 - 1

UPDATES TO ADMIRALTY SAILING DIRECTIONS

PART 1CURRENT EDITIONS OF ADMIRALTY SAILING DIRECTIONS

NP No Title Edition Supplement Published /correct fromWeekly EditionNumber

1 Africa Pilot Vol 1 16th (2012) 29/12

2 Africa Pilot Vol 2 16th (2011) 12/11

3: Africa Pilot Vol 3 15th (2010) 20/10

4} South-East Alaska Pilot 7th (2010) 09/11

5 South America Pilot Vol 1 17th (2011) 23/11

6} South America Pilot Vol 2 18th (2011) 50/11

7: South America Pilot Vol 3 10th (2009) 41/09

7A: South America Pilot Vol 4 5th (2010) 18/10

8: Pacific Coasts of Central America and United States Pilot 12th (2010) 29/10

9} Antarctic Pilot 7th (2009) 31/09

10} Arctic Pilot Vol 1 7th (2010) 10/11



13 Australia Pilot Vol 1 3rd (2011) 40/11

14: Australia Pilot Vol 2 11th (2010) 21/10

15 Australia Pilot Vol 3 12th (2012) 48/12

18* Baltic Pilot Vol 1 15th (2009) 02/10

19 Baltic Pilot Vol 2 15th (2011) 26/11

20* Baltic Pilot Vol 3 11th (2010) 24/10

21 Bay of Bengal Pilot 11th (2010) 44/10

22: Bay of Biscay Pilot 11th (2010) 34/10

23} Bering Sea asnd Strait Pilot 7th (2009) 33/09

24: Black Sea and Sea of Azov Pilot 3rd (2010) 30/10

25 British Columbia Pilot Vol 1 14th (2010) 47/10

26} British Columbia Pilot Vol 2 10th (2011) 12/12

27 Channel Pilot 9th (2011) 17/12

28: Dover Strait Pilot 9th (2011) 01/12

30 China Sea Pilot Vol 1 8th (2010) 43/10



33 Philippine Islands Pilot 4th (2011) 41/11

34: Indonesia Pilot Vol 2 5th (2009) 47/09

35 Indonesia Pilot Vol 3 5th (2011) 28/11

36 Indonesia Pilot Vol 1 7th (2012) 19/12

37 West Coasts of England and Wales Pilot 18th (2011) 39/11

38: West Coast of India Pilot 16th (2010) 25/10

39 South Indian Ocean Pilot 13th (2011) 36/11

40 Irish Coast Pilot 18th (2010) 01/11

41 Japan Pilot Vol 1 10th (2012) 32/12

42A: Japan Pilot Vol 2 3rd (2011) 25/11

42B Japan Pilot Vol 3 9th (2011) 11/12

NP No Published /correct fromWeekly EditionNumber

SupplementEditionTitle

42C: Japan Pilot Vol 4 3rd (2011) 15/11

43 South and East Coasts of Korea, East Coast of Siberia andSea of Okhotsk Pilot

9th (2011) 33/11

44 Malacca Strait and West Coast of Sumatera Pilot 10th (2011) 09/12

45 Mediterranean Pilot Vol 1 14th (2011) 02/12





50} Newfoundland and Labrador Pilot 13th (2011) 36/11

51 New Zealand Pilot 18th (2010) 51/10

52 North Coast of Scotland Pilot 8th (2012) 35/12

54: North Sea (West) Pilot 8th (2009) 01/10

55 North Sea (East) Pilot 8th (2012) 46/12

56 Norway Pilot Vol 1 15th (2012) 21/12

57A Norway Pilot Vol 2A 10th (2011) 30/11

57B} Norway Pilot Vol 2B 9th (2012) 22/12

58A} Norway Pilot Vol 3A 7th (2010) 16/10

58B: Norway Pilot Vol 3B 6th (1984) 9/2004 48/04

59} Nova Scotia and Bay of Fundy Pilot 14th (2008) 11/09

60}: Pacific Islands Pilot Vol 1 11th (2007) 06/08

61} Pacific Islands Pilot Vol 2 12th (2011) 13/12

62: Pacific Islands Pilot Vol 3 12th (2010) 32/10

63: Persian Gulf Pilot 15th (2010) 08/11

64 Red Sea and Gulf of Aden Pilot 17th (2012) 40/12

65 St Lawrence Pilot 17th (2012) 38/12

66 West Coast of Scotland Pilot 17th (2011) 03/12

67 West Coasts of Spain and Portugal Pilot 11th (2011) 08/12

68: East Coast of the United States Pilot Vol 1 13th (2009) 10/10

69 East Coast of the United States Pilot Vol 2 12th (2011) 49/11

69A East Coasts of Central America and Gulf of Mexico Pilot 6th (2012) 23/12

70 West Indies Pilot Vol 1 5th (2011) 18/12

71} West Indies Pilot Vol 2 17th (2012) 50/12

72 Southern Barents Sea and Beloye More Pilot 2nd (2010) 31/10

: New Edition scheduled for publication in 2013.

} Volumes on an extended cycle of Continuous Revision of 5 or more years.

1 - 2

2 - 1

UPDATES TO ADMIRALTY SAILING DIRECTIONS

PART 2

INDEX OF UPDATES IN FORCE ON 31 DECEMBER 2012 (Week 52/12)

NP Pilot Page1 Africa Pilot Volume 1 2 - 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Africa Pilot Volume 2 2 - 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Africa Pilot Volume 3 2 - 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 South-East Alaska Pilot 2 - 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 South America Pilot Volume 1 2 - 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 South America Pilot Volume 2 2 - 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 South America Pilot Volume 3 2 - 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7A South America Pilot Volume 4 2 - 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Pacific Coasts of Central America and United States Pilot 2 - 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Antarctic Pilot 2 - 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Arctic Pilot Volume 1 2 - 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Arctic Pilot Volume 2 2 - 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Arctic Pilot Volume 3 2 - 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Australia Pilot Volume 1 2 - 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Australia Pilot Volume 2 2 - 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Australia Pilot Volume 3 2 - 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Baltic Pilot Volume 1 2 - 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Baltic Pilot Volume 2 2 - 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Baltic Pilot Volume 3 2 - 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Bay of Bengal Pilot 2 - 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Bay of Biscay Pilot 2 - 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Bering Sea and Strait Pilot 2 - 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Black Sea Pilot 2 - 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 British Columbia Pilot Volume 1 2 - 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 British Columbia Pilot Volume 2 2 - 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Channel Pilot 2 - 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Dover Strait Pilot 2 - 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 China Sea Pilot Volume 1 2 - 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 China Sea Pilot Volume 2 2 - 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 China Sea Pilot Volume 3 2 - 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Philippine Islands Pilot 2 - 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Indonesia Pilot Volume 2 2 - 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Indonesia Pilot Volume 3 2 - 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Indonesia Pilot Volume 1 2 - 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 West Coasts of England and Wales Pilot 2 - 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 West Coast of India Pilot 2 - 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 South Indian Ocean Pilot 2 - 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Irish Coast Pilot 2 - 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Japan Pilot Volume 1 2 - 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42A Japan Pilot Volume 2 2 - 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42B Japan Pilot Volume 3 2 - 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42C Japan Pilot Volume 4 2 - 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 South and East Coasts of Korea, East Coast of Siberia and Sea of Okhotsk Pilot 2 - 102. . . . . .44 Malacca Strait and West Coast of Sumatera Pilot 2 - 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Mediterranean Pilot Volume 1 2 - 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Mediterranean Pilot Volume 2 2 - 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Mediterranean Pilot Volume 3 2 - 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Mediterranean Pilot Volume 4 2 - 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Mediterranean Pilot Volume 5 2 - 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Newfoundland and Labrador Pilot 2 - 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 New Zealand Pilot 2 - 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NP Pilot Page52 North Coast of Scotland Pilot 2 - 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 North Sea (West) Pilot 2 - 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 North Sea (East) Pilot 2 - 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Norway Pilot Volume 1 2 - 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57A Norway Pilot Volume 2A 2 - 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57B Norway Pilot Volume 2B 2 - 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58A Norway Pilot Volume 3A 2 - 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58B Norway Pilot Volume 3B 2 - 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Nova Scotia and Bay of Fundy Pilot 2 - 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Pacific Islands Pilot Volume 1 2 - 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Pacific Islands Pilot Volume 2 2 - 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Pacific Islands Pilot Volume 3 2 - 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Persian Gulf Pilot 2 - 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Red Sea and Gulf of Aden Pilot 2 - 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 St Lawrence Pilot 2 - 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 West Coast of Scotland Pilot 2 - 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 West Coasts of Spain and Portugal Pilot 2 - 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 East Coast of the United States Pilot Volume 1 2 - 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 East Coast of the United States Pilot Volume 2 2 - 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69A East Coasts of Central America and Gulf of Mexico Pilot 2 - 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 West Indies Pilot Volume 1 2 - 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 West Indies Pilot Volume 2 2 - 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Southern Barents Sea and Beloye More Pilot 2 - 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 - 2

NP1

2 - 3

NP1 Africa Pilot Volume 1 (2012 Edition)

Guinea – Conakry — Directions; obstruction

247

After Paragraph 8.57 1 line 2 Insert:

Clear of an obstruction (3¼ miles S) with a depth of9 1 m, thence:

French Notice 12/44/105(SDD 2012000 220836) [47/12]

Ghana – Abidjan to Aboadi Point —Jubilee Terminal

303

Paragraph 10.19 and heading Replace by:

Spare10.19

Paragraph 10.22 4 line 6 For (10.19) Read (10.27a)

305

After Paragraph 10.27 3 Insert:

Jubilee Terminal

General information10.27a

1 Position and function. The Jubilee Terminalconsists of a turret-moored FPSO in position4 36 00N 2 53 40W. Its function is to extract,process, store and export crude oil from the JubileeField.Terminal Authority: Tullow Oil Ghana Ltd.

E-mail: [email protected]

Limiting conditions10.27b

1 Maximum size of vessel handled: 350 000 dwt;Length 366 5 m.Minimum size of vessel handled: 70 000 dwt;

length 270 m.

Arrival information10.27c

1 Notice of ETA: Vessels should send ETA 7 days,72, 48, 24 and 12 hours before arrival.Pilotage is compulsory; the Mooring Master boards

vessels in the anchorage area.Tugs are available; a tug is employed as a

holdback vessel secured to the vessels stern duringthe loading operation.Anchorage. An anchorage area with a radius of

3 miles, centred on 4 40 00N 2 40 00W, exists forvessels awaiting berthing.Restricted area. A designated Area To Be

Avoided, radius 5 miles, centred on 4 32 10N2 54 60W has been established.Regulations. Berthing of export tankers will only

take place during daylight hours, between 0700 and1800. Berthing must be completed by 1800.

Directions10.27d

1 The chart is sufficient guide.

Berths10.27e

1 Export tankers moor in tandem with the FPSO, withthe export tanker’s bow to the stern of the FPSO, anda floating hose arrangement between the two.

Services10.27f

1 None available. Limited medical facilities may beavailable in an emergency.

Tullow Oil Ghana Ltd(SDD 2012000 122777) [29/12]


Equatorial Guinea – Isla de Bioko –Puerto de Malabo – Arrival information;Prohibited anchorage; Submarine cable

97Paragraph 3.52 Replace by:

1 Anchorage may be obtained in Ensenada deGravina (3 45 40N 8 45 80E), clear of a submarinecable (3.52a). Anchoring further offshore where it iscooler, will enable a vessel to be free of mosquitos.Also, during the tornado season, it gives more searoom as winds frequently blow directly towards theland.Prohibited anchorages exist in the following areas:

Within 3 cables of the submarine cable (3.52a).Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in Bahia deMalabo.

After Paragraph 3.52 Insert:

Submarine cable3.52a

1 A submarine cable runs NE from the W side ofEnsenada de Gravina, as shown on the chart.


Cameroun – Limbe – Directions for enteringharbour — Obstruction

121Paragraph 4.63 5 lines 7 to 8 Replace by:

Thence the track leads to anchorage D (4.66), orthe required destination, noting an obstruction with adepth of 7 1m (3¼ miles NNW).


Angola – Approaches to River Congo –Soyo — Angola LNG Terminal

187Paragraph 6.108 1 line 4 Add:

Vessels should anchor clear of drilling rigs whichmay operate off this area and note the possibleexistence of underwater pipelines.

mailto:[email protected]

NP2

2 - 4

188

After Paragraph 6.117 2 line 2-3 Replace by:...(7.58), noting thepilot boardingposition for thePortof Soyo (Angola LNG) (3¼ miles WNW). Thence:

N of Ponta Padrão (6.9).(Directions for the Port of Soyo are at 6.120c)

Paragraphs 6.119 and 6.120, including headingsReplace by:

Port of Soyo

Chart 659General information6.119

1 Position and function. The Port of Soyo(6 06 95S 12 19 90E), comprises a newly constructedAngola LNG exporting terminal and the port ofKwanda Base. It lies at the head of Baía de DiogoCâo.As well as being a major LNG exporting terminal, it

is also used as a supply base for the offshore oilindustry.

2 Approach and entry. The port is entered viaPululu Channel, close E of Ponta Padrão to a basinarea N of the town of Kwanda.

3 Port Authority. Capitania do Porto Soyo.

Limiting conditions6.120

1 Controlling depths. The approach channel isdredged to 14 0 m. Depth in the Basin and alongsidethe LNG terminal is 14 0 m.Depths in the approaches to, and at the berths of

Kwanda Base are maintained at 7 5 m.

Arrival information6.120a

1 Outer anchorages. See 6.108.2 Pilotage. Pilot boarding position for vessels

destined for the LNG terminals is 3¼ miles WNW ofPonta Padrão.Pilots for vessels bound for Kwanda Base board at

the entrance to the Pululu Channel.Tugs are available.

Harbour6.120b

1 General layout. The port consists of Kwanda Basewhich lies on the W side at the head of Baía deDiogo Câo, and the Angola LNG terminal built onreclaimed land formerly known as Praia Quanda.

Directions6.120c

1 Caution. Due to strong surface currents at theentrance to the approach channel, 2-6 kts dependingon season, vessels transit speed will be in the regionof 8-10 kts to maintain the required track. Carefulattention is to be paid to the steering of the vessel atthis time.

Approach. From the pilot boarding position thetrack leads ESE for 3½ miles to a position N of PontaPadrão.

2 Port of Soyo. Directional lights.Entrance Channel Directional Light (6 07 05S

12 20 28E).Remaining in the white sector (179 2 -180 2 ) of

this light leads into the Pululu Channel marked bylight buoys (lateral) passing:

E of Ponta PadrãoEntrance Channel Directional Light (6 06 79S

12 19 07E).Remaining in the white sector (199 3 -200 1 ) of

this light continues passage through the PululuChannel to the turning basin N of the LNG terminal.Thence to required berth.

Berths6.120d

1 Kwanda Base:Main Quay - Can accommodate vessels of 150 mand is used by offshore support vessels, bulk andcontainer traffic.

Commercial Quay - Can accommodate vessels of140 m and is used by oil tankers and passengervessels.

Texaco Quay - Can accommodate vessels of 100 mand is used by oil tankers

ALNG Quay - Can accommodate vessels of 170 mand is used by container, bulk and RoRo vessels

2 Angola LNG Terminal:LNG Jetty - Can accommodate vessels between125 000m3 and 215 000m3.

LPG Jetty - Can accommodate vessels between35 000m3 and 120 000m3.

Pressurized Butane Jetty - Can accommodatevessels between 3 500m3 and 5 000m3.

Minor and river ports

Canal de Soyo6.120e

1 Canal de Soyo is entered between Ponta Quengue(6 07 14S 12 21 70E) and Ponta da Ilha, 1½ cablesNE. It is occasionally used by fishing vessels andsmall naval craft.

Sociedade Operacional Angola LNG SA(SDD 2011000 127131,131587,147980.) [49/11]

Angola – Approaches to River Congo – Soyo –Angola LNG Terminal — Pilotage

188

Existing Section IVNoticeWeek 49/11Paragraph 6.120a 2

lines 1-3 Replace by:

2 Pilotage. Pilot boarding positions for vesselsdestined for Angola LNG terminals are:

For vessels of length 120 m or more in position06 03 00S 12 12 00E.

For vessels less than 120 m in position 06 03 00S12 17 00E.

Angola LNG Marine Department(SDD 2012000 106089) [26/12]

NP2

2 - 5

Angola – River Congo to Ponta das Palmeirinhas— PSVM Terminal

202


PSVM Terminal


1 Position and function. The PVSM development issituated 92 miles W of the River Congo entrance.The FPSO PSVM (6 14 60S 10 43 90E) serves as

an offloading platform.Terminal Authority. BP Exploration (Angola)

Limited.E-mail: [email protected]


1 Local weather and sea state. See 7.10.


1 Terminal opertions. Mooring operations arenormally conducted during daylight hours only,between 0600 and 1500.Notice of ETA required. Notice is to be given on

commencement of passage to terminal and 96, 72,48, 24 and 4 hours prior to arrival.Waiting area. A designated waiting area lies N of

the FPSO. This is a circular area of diameter 10 milescentred on 6 07 50S 10 36 70E.

2 Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots board at position6 10 90S 10 40 30E.Tugs. A tug will normally be connected prior to the

export tankers final approach to the FPSO, and willremain connected to the vessels stern throughout theloading operation.Restricted area. It is prohibited to approach within

5 miles of the FPSO without a pilot or Terminalrepresentative on board.Due to continuing exploration and construction

activities within the vicinity of the Terminal, vesselsdue to offload will be advised in pre-arrivalcommunications of any temporary restricted areas orareas of high vessel activity.

Terminal7.13d

1 The FPSO PSVM is situated in a depth ofapproximately 2000 m. It is a mounted turret mooredFPSO used as a hub for subsea wells and as anoffloading platform.

Services7.13e

1 See 7.13.

BP Exploration (Angola) Ltd(SDD 2012000 012504) [06/12]

Namibia – Walvis Bay — Controlling depths;arrival information; directions for entering

harbour; berths

240

Paragraph 8.49 1 line 1 For 12 8 m Read 14 0 m

241

Paragraph 8.60 1 line 6 For 6 cables Read 7 cables

Paragraph 8.61 1 line 3 For (22 52 84S 14 30 00E)Read(22 51 82S 14 30 05E)

242

Paragraph 8.69 2 lines 2 to 4 Replace by:

...Buoy (22 51 62S 14 26 87E), the track leads ESE forabout 4¼ miles to the vicinity of the Fairway Buoy (safewater) (22 51 82S 14 30 05E) and the pilot...

Paragraph 8.70 1 line 2 For (22 52 84S 14 30 00E)Read(22 51 82S 14 30 05E)

Paragraph 8.70 1 line 5 For 4 miles Read 5 miles


South African Notices 7/58/2011; 7/61/2011(SDD 2011000 149087) [37/11]

Namibia – Walvis Bay — Outer anchorage

241

Paragraph 8.60 1 lines 1-4 Replace by:

1 There are 3 designated anchorages, the limits ofwhich are shown on the chart. Vessels may anchor asadvised and directed by Port Control. The holding isgenerally good on a mud bottom.

South African Notice 5/60/2012(SDD 2012000 111977) [30/12]


South Africa – Mossel Bay — Vessel trafficservice; outer anchorage; pilotage

85


Vessel traffic service2.64a

1 Vessel traffic service is in operation for the controlof shipping. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals 6(3).Reporting points are shown on the chart.


1 Anchorage may be obtained as indicated on thechart 3½ miles NNE of Cape Saint Blaize Light(34 11 17S 22 09 38E).


NP3

2 - 6


1 Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots board 1½ miles ENEof Cape Saint Blaize in position 34 10 52S22 11 23E. See Amiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(3).

South African Notice 82/2011, South African Chart 1020(SDD 2011000 229900,2012000 036208, 050082) [14/12]

South Africa – South coast –Storm Point — Depth

94


2 S of shoal patch (3½ miles ESE) with a least depthof 4 m (reported 2010), 5 cables offshore, over whichthe sea breaks in heavy weather. Thence:

South African Notice 77/2010(SDD 2010000 144921) [41/10]

South Africa – Port Elizabeth –Outer anchorages — Shoal depth

102


Caution. A shoal with a depth of 10 5 m (Reported2011) lies in the SE corner of No 2 anchorage inposition 33 52 37S 25 47 33E.


South Africa – Port of Ngqura —Directions; Leading lights

107Paragraph 2.192 3 and 4 Replace by:

3 Entry leading lights:Front (fluorescent orange rectangle with whitevertical stripe on lattice tower, red and whitebands, 51 m in height) (33 48 35S 25 40 66E).

Rear (similar structure, 60 m in height) (5½ cablesNNW of front light).

4 From the vicinity of the pilot boarding position(33 52 90S 25 42 80E), the alignment (342 4 ) ofthese lights leads through the entrance channel for2½ miles, passing with positions from the front light:

Clear of fairway buoy (safe water) (3½ miles SSE),thence:

E of a light buoy (E cardinal) (2½ miles SSE).

South African NM 32/2011(SDD 2011000 027288) [10/11]

South Africa – Algoa Bay —Directions; depth

109Paragraph 2.203 5 line 1 For 15 8 m Read 13 2 m


South Africa – Durban — Directions;major light; directional light

154After Paragraph 4.31 1 line 12 Add:

Durban North Breakwater Light (round metal towergreen platform, 10 m in height) (29 52 0S31 03 5E).


Durban North Breakwater Light (29 52 0S31 03 5E) (4.31).

Paragraph 4.71 3-5 Replace by:3 From the boarding position the track leads SW

within the white sector (217 6 -217 8 ) of the Portentry light (grey metal lattice tower with platform, 41 min height) (29 53 1S 31 02 6E), passing (withpositions from the Port entry light).

4 NW of the head of South Breakwater (pier)(1½ miles NE) from which a light (4.31) isexhibited, thence:

SE of the head of the North Breakwater (1¼ milesNE), fromwhich a light (4.31) is exhibited, thence:

5 Through a channel marked by light buoys(lateral) marking the narrowest part of theentrance, thence:

Into the harbour and as required for berthing.

South African NM 10/2010 (Lights and Fog Signals)(SDD 2010000 190238) [01/11]

South Africa – Durban offshore oil terminal —General information; arrival information

157

Paragraph 4.40 1 Replace by:

1 Position and function. Durban offshore oil terminal(30 00 47S 30 58 41E), is situated 9 miles SW of theentrance to Durban.It is used for the discharge of crude oil via a SBM

and subsea pipeline to shore tank farms.


The SBM is operated independently of Durban port,and only the vessel’s agent can give adviceconcerning operations at the terminal.

157-158


Notice of ETA required. ETA messages should besent at least 10 days prior to the first day of theallocated SBM berthing date range, with updatesevery 24 hours. Any changes of ETA in excess of onehour within the the final 24 hours must be advisedimmediately. See also 1.39.

158


2 Anchorages. The primary anchorage for vesselswaiting to berth at the SBM is at least 6 miles NE ofthe Durban Fairway Light Buoy (29 50 02S31 05 58E) (4.32). Vessels must keep 6 miles toseaward of the 20 m depth contour.

NP3

2 - 7

A secondary anchorage, to be used only ifinstructed by the authorities, lies 2½ miles SSW of theSBM. Vessels must keep 3 miles to seaward of the20 m depth contour.Pilotage is compulsory for vessels securing to the

SBM. The pilot will normally board the vessel byhelicopter approximately 2 miles E of SBM, seeAdmiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(3).Tugs. A tug is available and is compulsory for all

vessels while moored to the SBM.

SMIT Amandla Marine (Pty) Ltd(SDD 2011000 165117) [39/11]

Mozambique – Baía de Maputo — Depths;Recommended route; Directions

185Paragraph 5.19 1 lines 1-8 Replace by:

1 The route from No 1N to No 6 Light Buoy follows arecommended route shown on the chart.The route is a channel 100 m wide with a

maintained depth of 11 m.


Traffic regulations5.20a

1 Recommended route. A recommended route, thelimits of which are shown on the chart, is establishedin Canal do Norte. It follows the route from No 1NLight Buoy to the pilot boarding area at No 6 LightBuoy.

186

Paragraph 5.25 1 line 5 to 3 line 7 Replace by:

From a position in the vicinity of No 1N Light Buoy(N cardinal) (25 38 13S 32 53 07E), therecommended route marked by light buoys (lateral),leads generally S for 17½ miles to No 5 Light Buoy(starboard hand) (25 55 40S 32 51 54E), passing:

WofBaixoCutfield (25 39 27S32 52 97E), thence:E of shoals extending E from Ponta da Macaneta(25 51 96S 32 44 74E), a low sandy point with astranded wreck (position doubtful) close by.

Paragraph 5.26 1 & 2 Replace by:

1 Thence the track continues:E of Baixo Fawn (25 53 41S 32 50 62E) at the

entrance to Baía de Maputo, thence:W of shoal ground (25 53 53S 32 53 46E) which

forms the W extremity of Baixos da Inhaca,thence:

NWof Ponta dosElefantes (25 57 82S32 53 55E),the steep-to W extremity of Ilha dos Portugueses;No 5 Light Buoy lies 3 miles NW of Ponta dosElephantes.

2 Caution. Mariners should note that therecommended track turns sharply W in the vicinity ofNo 5 Light Buoy.

Paragraph 5.29 2 line 1 For Local knowledge is requiredRead Canal do Sul is no longer considered suitable as anapproach channel (2012).

187


...32 52 E), which leads into Baía de Maputo (5.17).Theport is entered via a...

Paragraph 5.41 1 line 2 For dredged (2006) to a depth of9 4 m Read maintained depth 11 m (2012)

Harbour Master, Maputo(SDD 2012000 128135) [45/12]

Mozambique – Beira — Approach and entry;arrival information; directions

201



202

Paragraph 5.167 1 line 3 For (19 56 03S 35 02 46E)Read (19 53 78S 34 59 21E)


204


Paragraph 5.177 2 lines 3 and 4 For (19 56 03S35 02 46E) Read (19 53 78S 34 59 21E)

Paragraph 5.178 1 lines 6 and 7 Replace by:

...9 m should make to a position 4 miles ESE of LightBuoy A, thence follow aWNWcourse to the vicinity of LightBuoy A.

Paragraph 5.179 1 line 2 For (19 56 03S 35 02 46E)Read. (19 53 78S 34 59 21E)

207


Mozambique NM 59/2011(SDD 2011000 185047) [01/12]

Mozambique – Beira — Berths; SBM

205


Single Buoy Mooring. An SBM has beenestablished in position 19 56 63S 35 16 08E. It is tobe used for mooring bulk carriers engaged in coaltranshipments. A 1 mile exclusion zone exists aroundthe buoy.

SMIT Amandla Marine (Pty) Ltd(SDD 2012000 161943) [39/12]

NP3

2 - 8

Tanzania – Msasani Bay —Submarine cable; anchorage

290


1 General information. Msasani Bay lies betweenRas Kankadya (6 44 N 39 17 E) and Kunduchi (8.93),5 miles NW. The bay is sheltered from the swell byByongoyo, 1¼ miles N of Ras Kankadya, and offersgood anchorage during either monsoon.Caution. A submarine cable has been laid from

Msasani, in the S part of the bay, leading N and thenE through the entrance channel between Bongoyo andRas Kankadya.


...about 15 m.

390

Index Left column Delete:

Masasani Bay 8.92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

391

Index Centre column After Msangazi, Mto Add:

Msasani Bay 8.92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tanzania Port Authority(SDD 2010000 087338) [25/10]

Tanzania – Msasani Bay —Submarine cable; anchorage

290Existing Section IV Week 25/10 Paragraph 8.92 1 line 2For N Read S

UKHO [51/10]

Kenya – Mombasa — Pilotage; buoyage

331


1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels unlessexempted by the port authorities, and is available24 hours. The pilot boards 4 miles SE of Ras Serani(10.26), as shown on the chart.

334

Paragraph 10.37 2 lines 6 to 7 Delete

Marine Safety Information Kenya(SDD 2010000 082530) [41/10]

Kenya – Lamu Bay and approaches —Directions; obstruction

349After Paragraph 10.117 2 line 7 Insert:

WNW of shoal patch (3¼ miles S), on which the seabreaks, thence:

(SDD 2011000 062177) [28/11]

NP4 South-East Alaska Pilot (2010 Edition)

Nil

NP5 South America Pilot Volume 1(2011 Edition)

Brazil – Rio Amazonas — Directions; light

85

Paragraph 3.53 2 lines 1-3 Delete

86


...covered in mangroves. Banks,...

Brazil Notice 15/79/12(SDD 2012000 166404) [37/12]

Brazil – Rio Pará — Directions; racon

93

Paragraph 3.125 1 line 5 Delete


Brazil - North coast — Directions; light

121

Paragraph 4.28 1 line 7 Including existingSection IVNoticeWeek 17/12 For (1 10 10S 45 38 20W) Read (1 10 00S45 38 10W)


Brazil – North coast — Directions; platform; light

142

Paragraph 4.227 1 line 3 Replace by:

Production Platform PAG II (4 52 45S 36 16 22W).

143


...positions from Production Platform PAG II (4 52 45S36 16 22W)):


NNE of the designated oilfield area (centred 3 milesSW) (4.178) in which lies Guamaré Oil Terminal(4.241), thence:

NP5

2 - 9

Paragraph 4.229 3 line 2ForAgulha LightReadProductionPlatform PAG II

Captain F Carvalho, Petrobras(SDD 2012000 176359) [38/12]

Brazil – North coast — Guamaré Oil Terminal;platform; light

144

Paragraph 4.241 1 lines 1-2 For 4 52 00S 36 21 00WRead 4 52 42S 36 22 45W

Paragraph 4.245 1 line 2 For WNW of Agulha Light(4 52 8S 36 16 3W) (4.229) Read W of ProductionPlatform PAG II (4.227)

Captain F Carvalho, Petrobras(SDD 2012000 176359) [38/12]

Brazil – E coast — Directions;Offshore marks

201Paragraph 6.106 2 line 8 Delete


3 Offshore marks:FPSO Espirito Santo (lit) (21 12 41S 39 44 64W)

(6.187a).FPSO Capixaba (lit) (21 14 05S 39 57 50W).

Marine Superintendent FPSO Espirito Santo(SDDs 2011000 088571; 100562) [25/11]

Brazil – E coast — Offshore terminal


Offshore terminal

Espirito Santo6.187a

1 General information. FPSO Espirito Santo(21 12 41S 39 44 64W) is moored within the BC-10oilfield.Approach to FPSO and berthing during daylight

only; unberthing may occur at anytime.Pilotage from Brazilian mainland ports see Admiralty

List of Radio Signals Volume 6(5).Tugs available. Compulsory for berthing, one

remains secured during loading operations.2 Tankers loading at Espirito Santo are not permitted

to approach closer than 2 miles without a pilot.Berth. In tandem; moored astern of FPSO.Repairs. None.Other facilities. None. No garbage is to be thrown

overboard in the vicinity of the terminal.

FPSO Espirito Santo Terminal Regulations(SDDs 2011000 088571; 092909) [25/11]

NP6SouthAmericaPilotVolume 2 (2011 Edition)

Canal Beagle – West Part – Canal Thomson —General information; directions

220-221

Paragraph 5.276 to 5.280 including heading Replace by:

CANAL THOMSON

General information

Chart 1373 (undetermined datum), Chilean Chart 12750(WGS84 datum), 12720 (yendegaia datum) (see 1.10)Route5.276

1 From the head of Bahía Cook (55 10 00S70 10 00W) (5.371) the route leads NNW, NNE, thenN, for about 17 miles, to a position ENE of Isla TimbalChico (54 54 20S 70 14 60W) in the W entrance toPaso Darwin (5.264) and the junction of CanalThomson with Brazo Noroeste del Canal Beagle(5.257) and Canal O’Brien (5.283).

Depths5.277

1 The fairway has depths of more than 100 m over aleast width of 1 mile.

Pilotage5.278

1 See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (7)and 5.54.

Traffic regulations5.279

1 See 5.285.

Directions(continued from 5.375)

Track5.280

1 From a position ESE of Islotes Salientes(55 08 03S 70 15 16W) the track leads NNW,passing:

ENE of Islotes Salientes; Islotes Salientes Light(white GRP tower, red band; 3 m in height)(55 08 03S 70 15 16W) is exhibited from the Eislet of the group. Thence:

2 ENE of Islotes Miño (55 07 25S 70 14 20W),thence:

WSW of Islote Goddard (55 06 00S 70 09 80W),thence:

ENE of the islets lying off the E side of Isla Herrera(55 06 30S 70 15 80W), thence:

WSW of Islote Redondo (55 05 20S 70 11 00W),thence:

3 WSW of Islotes Pollera (55 04 35S 70 12 90W);Islotes Pollera Light (red GRP tower, lateral;3 m in height), is exhibited from the W islet.Thence:

ENE of the dangers (55 04 10S 70 17 20W) lyingE, and NE, of Punta Mariana, thence:

ENEof the dangers (55 03 20S 70 17 60W) lyingNof Punta González, and:

4 WSW of Bajo Ana Maria (55 02 34S70 14 00W), a shoal, covered by kelp, lyingW of the W end of Isla Dos Cumbres; a lightbuoy (lateral) marks the shoal.

NP6

2 - 10

The track then leads NNE, passing:ESE of the rocks, islets and other dangers

(55 01 00S 70 16 00W) fronting Isla Kelvin(55 00 40S 70 17 80W), thence:

5 WNW of a dangerous rock (55 00 90S70 12 60W) lying close off the SW side ofIsla Thomson, thence:

WNW of Islote Uribe (54 59 10S 70 11 80W ) thelargest of the islets and rocks lying off the NWcorner of Isla Thomson, thence:

ESE of the E extremity of Isla Cook (54 57 80S70 13 80W).

6 The track then leads N, passing:W of Punta Howard (54 56 45S 70 12 20W), a

point of sheer cliffs, thence:E of Isla Maruja Light (white GRP tower, red band,4 m in height) (54 56 03S 70 14 10W) exhibitedfrom the E extremity of Isla Maruja (54 56 10S70 14 60W) the largest island of the Islas Ferrer.Thence:

E of Isla Timbal Chico (54 54 20S 70 14 60W) theE islet of the Grupo Timbales (5.283).

7 The track continues a short distance N to aposition ENE of Isla Timbal Chico.Useful mark:

Pico Huemul (54 55 60S 70 80 80W) (5.263).

(Directions for Canal O’Brien continue at 5.287,Directions for Brazo Noroeste del Canal Beagle

are given at 5.263, and forCanal Pomar at 5.292)

Chilean Chart 12750(SDD 2012000 045357) [25/12]

Bahia Cook – General information — Directions

235-236

Paragraph 5.371 to 5.375 including heading and existingsection IV Notice Week 10/12 Replace by:

BAHÍA COOK

General information

Charts 1373, 554 (undetermined datums), ChileanChart 12750 (WGS84 datum) (see 1.10)Description5.371

1 Bahía Cook (55 10 00S 70 10 00W), bounded SEby Islas Christmas and Isla Hoste, and NW by IslaLondonderry, is an extensive arm of the sea formingprobably the best approach from SW to the W part ofCanal Beagle (5.243) and Canal O’Brien (5.283).Though the bay has not been fully surveyed it is freeof dangers in the fairway.

2 From a position SW of Islotes (Rocas)Cabrestantes (55 23 80S 70 13 00W) the route leadsNNE for about 25 miles to a position at the junction ofthe route with Brazo Sudoeste del Canal Beagle(5.245) and Canal Thomson (5.276), ESE of IslotesSalientes (55 08 03S 70 15 16W).

Depths5.372

1 There is a least depth (55 15 80S 70 18 52W) of29 m close to track.

Pilotage5.373

1 A pilot boarding area for vessels entering Chileanchannels from S is situated, as shown on the chart,about about 2½ miles SE of Islotes Salientes Light(55 08 03S 70 15 16W). See 5.54.

Directions

Other aids to navigation5.374

1 Racon:Rocas Sandwich Light (55 12 55S 70 25 80W).

See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.Automatic Identification System:

Rocas Sandwich Light (55 12 55S 70 25 80W).See Mariner’s Handbook and Admiralty List of

Radio Signals Volume 2.

Track5.375

1 From a position SW of Islotes (Rocas)Cabrestantes (55 23 80S 70 13 00W) the track leadsNNE, passing:

WNW of Islotes (Rocas) Cabrestantes (5.355),thence:

WNW of Islotes Ripita (55 20 20S 70 12 40W), agroup of islets and rocks, thence:

WNW of Cabo Carfort (55 16 70S 70 12 80W) theW extremity of Isla Hamond; see 5.372. Thence:

2 WNW of a shoal (55 15 30S 70 16 70W) with adepth of 26m, thence:

ESEof Islotes Sandwich (55 12 55S70 25 80W), alarge group of islets and rocks; Islotes SandwichLight is exhibited from the group. Thence:

ESEof a shoal (55 12 60S70 18 80W)with adepthof 16 m lying ESE of the Islotes Exterior, thence:

3 WNW of Islote Niño (55 11 40S 70 09 10W),thence:

ESE of Islotes Salientes (55 08 03S 70 15 16W)(5.280); Islotes Salientes Light is exhibited fromthe E islet of the group.

Useful marks:Islote Redondo (55 05 20S 70 11 00W).Islotes Pollera Light (55 04 35S 70 12 90W)(5.280).

(Directions continue for Canal Thomson at 5.280;directions for Brazo Sudoeste del Canal Beagle

are given at 5.250)

Chilean Chart 12750(SDD 2012000 045357) [25/12]

Chile – Canal Cockburn — Directions; light

243


1 From a position NW of Islote Negro (54 31 2S72 02 8W) the track leads NE, passing (with positionsrelative to the SE islet (54 25 3S 71 59 2W) of IslasClavel):

NP6

2 - 11


SE of Islas Clavel, a small group of islets, thence:

244


252

Paragraph 6.92 1 line 1-6 Replace by:

1 From a position in Canal Cockburn, SSW of IslasClavel (6.24), Paso Sur (54 25 0S 72 03 0W) leadsN, between Isla Henry and Islas Clavel, to a positionNE of Isla Ballena (54 20 7S 72 07 3W), passing(with positions relative to the SE islet (54 25 3S71 59 2W) of Islas Clavel):


1 From a position in Canal Cockburn, ENE of IslasClavel (6.24), Paso Aguila (54 24 0S 71 59 0W)leads NW, between Islas Clavel and Isla VidalGormáz, to a position NE of Isla Ballena (54 20 7S72 07 3W), passing (with positions relative to the SEislet (54 25 3S 71 59 2W) of Islas Clavel):

NE of Islas Clavel, thence:

Chilean Notice 141/11/11(SDD 2011000 192402; 234905) [10/12]

Chile – Estrecho de Magallanes – Puerto Sara —General information; directions; leading lights

275-276

Paragraph 7.76 to 7.82 including headings Replace by:

Puerto Sara

Chilean Chart 11512 (WGS84)General information7.76

1 Position and function. Puerto Sara (52 37 50S70 11 80W), an oil terminal on the W shore of BahíaGregorio (7.84), comprises an offshore mooringterminal for use by tankers loading crude oil and oilproducts, and a jetty for loading and discharge ofclean oil products.Port Authority. Puerto Sara is a satellite port of

Punta Arenas, see 7.162.


1 Density of water is 1 025 g/cm3.Maximum size of vessel handled:

Offshore terminal; length 250 m, draught 14 9 m,75 000 dwt.

Clean oil quay; length 120m draught 7 0 m,6500 dwt.

2 Local weather. Winds from E create a swell whichaffects both the offshore terminal and the clean oilquay. The prevailing winds are from W and WNWwith the most frequent gales from NW and N; see7.12.

Arrival information7.78

1 Port operations. Berthing and unberthing from theoffshore terminal are undertaken in daylight only atHW slack which usually occurs about 33 minutesbefore HW Puerto Montt (41 28 91S 72 57 04W).Mariners are advised to anchor off the terminal about1 hour before the predicted time of slack water;observation of the small buoys marking the flexiblepipelines will give a good indication of the time ofcommencement of slack water, a time which may beadvanced or delayed by the prevailing wind.

2 Maximum permitted wind speed during berthing andunberthing operations is 10 m/second (19 kn); duringperiods of winds with an E component the maximumpermitted wind speed is reduced to 5 m/second(10 kn).

3 Berthing is undertaken with the assistance of twotugs which take ship’s lines to mooring buoys andprovide two wires, one on each quarter, laid frompermanent moorings. On close approach to the berththe port anchor is let go, good holding ground of mudand shell; the starboard anchor is then let go, overpoorer holding ground of rock and pebbles taking careto avoid dragging, and the stern is swung to starboardto make secure at the berth on a heading of 230 . Asprevailing winds are from W extra lines should bepassed to the appropriate buoys.

4 Berthing at San Gregorio Clean Oil Quay is carriedout during daylight at slack water; maximum permittedwind 10 m/second (19 kn), with an E component then5 m/second (10 kn). Departure undertaken day or nightat slack water; similar maximum permitted windspeeds. The exact time of slack water in the vicinityof San Gregorio Clean Oil Quay has not been fullyascertained and, given it is of short duration, then allmanoeuvres are undertaken when some stream isflowing, however there is no set on, or off, the quay.Vessels berth on heading 013 .

5 Notice of ETA required. See 7.171.Outer anchorage. Anchorage may be obtained, as

shown on the chart, about 3 miles NE of CaboGregorio in depths between 23 and 24 m.Pilotage is compulsory; if not embarked, pilot

boards in the pilot and waiting area 1½ miles ENE ofCabo Gregorio (52 39 05S 70 12 75 W) (7.92), asshown on the chart.Tugs are available.Quarantine. See 7.175.

Harbour7.79

1 General layout. The offshore oil terminal lies SE ofPuerto Sara Quay (52 37 57S 70 11 75W) (ruins2008) in depths between 25 and 28 m. San GregorioClean Oil Quay is situated close NNE of CaboGregorio.

NP6

2 - 12

Tidal streams set S with the in-going stream andN with the out-going; see Admiralty Tide TablesVolume 4.

Directions for entering harbour7.80

1 Offshore Oil Terminal Leading Light Beacons:Front light beacon (white triangle with orange bandson white post with red bands, 11 m in height)(52 37 39S 70 11 83W).

Rear light beacon (white metal framework tower, redbands, 5 m in height) (52 37 21S 70 11 98W).

2 From a position in the pilot and waiting area (7.78)the alignment (334 ) of these light beacons leadsNNW towards the offshore terminal berth.Anchor positioning beacons:

Beacon (52 38 17S 70 12 42W) (common).Beacon (52 38 18S 70 12 58W).

3 The alignment (265 5 ) of these beacons indicatethe position to drop the port anchor.

Beacon (52 38 17S 70 12 42W) (common).Beacon (52 38 19S 70 12 57W).

The alignment (256 ) of these beacons indicate theposition to drop the starboard anchor.

4 Useful marks:Oil storage tanks (52 37 28S 70 12 00W).Radio masts (52 38 25S 70 12 60W).

Berths7.81

1 Offshore terminal. The berth (52 38 07S70 11 43W) consists of a submarine pipeline laid fromshore to the vicinity of four mooring buoys and twopermanent ground moorings.San Gregorio Clean Oil Quay (52 38 90S

70 12 49W) is connected to the shore by afootbridge. The berth consists of a T-shaped headwith a berthing face of 30 m and two mooringdolphins. Vessels over 70 m in length must notexceed a forward draught of 6 0 m. The quay is fairlywell protected from the prevailing winds.

Port services7.82

1 Facilities. Dirty ballast accepted at Clean Oil Quay.Supplies. Fuel oil, diesel oil and fresh water

available from Clean Oil Quay.

Chilean Chart 11512; Chilean Notice to Mariners 65-2012(SDD 2012000 054222; 116984) [42/12]

NP7SouthAmericaPilot Volume3 (2009 Edition)

Aids to navigation —Automatic Identification System

4


...conditions. For details see The Mariner’s Handbook and

Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2. The...

UKHO(HH. 007/200/02) [12/10]

Pacific Ocean – Outlying dangers — Breakers

71

After Paragraph 2.5 6 line 8 Add:

Breakers(6 06 49N 82 06 88W)

Panamá to Papeete

72


Breakers (6 06 49N 82 06 88W) reported (2010).

SY Black Arrow(SDD 2010000 037291) [13/10]

South Pacific Ocean – Isla San Ambrosio —Off-lying shoal

77After Paragraph 2.49 Add:

Off-lying shoal2.49a

1 A shoal reported (2009) lies in position 26 28 S79 50 W.

US Notice 48/608/09(SDD 2009000 174333) [51/09]

Chile – Bahía de Quellón —Pilot boarding place

141


...vessels under 12 m in draught, 2¾ miles W of the light.These pilot boarding places are...

Chilean Notice 12/121/2009(SDD 2010000 006410) [05/10]

Chile – Bahía Ancud — Pilot boarding place

186

Paragraph 6.58 1 line 2 For 1½ miles Read 2¼ miles


Chile – Bahía Coronel — Arrival information;pilotage

205

Paragraph 6.270 1 line 3 For 1 mile ESE Read 1¼ miles S


Chile – Punta Peña Blanca to Punta Concón —Directions; buoy

223


3 Clear of an ODAS light buoy (special)(32 59 80S 71 49 20W), thence:

WNW of Punta Angeles (33 01 S 71 38 W), highand...


NP7

2 - 13

Chile – Valparaíso — Arrival information;anchorage

226


1 Anchorage may be obtained at 22 alphabeticallylisted anchor berths.


Chile – Quintero — Anchorages

233

Paragraph 7.42 2 and 3 Replace by:

Anchorage may be obtained at 17 alphabeticallylisted anchor berths.


Chile – Puerto Huasco — Directions; lights

248

Paragraph 7.205 including heading Replace by:

Spare7.205

249


...Península Guacolda, dark in colour.

250

Existing Section IV Notice Week 27/10 Paragraph 7.225 1

line 2 Replace by:

...Península Guacolda. See Admiralty List of Radio...



...thence N of Península Guacolda, to the pilot...

251


Spare7.246

Light List Vol. G 2009/10; Chilean Notice 9/115/2012(SDD 2012000 205489) [44/12]

Chile – Puerto Huasco —Pilotage; anchorages

250

Paragraph 7.223 Including heading Replace by:

Spare7.223


1 Compulsory. The pilot boards about 5½ cables NEof Península Guacolda Light. See Admiralty List ofRadio Signals Volume 6(7).


2 Anchorage may be obtained in an irregular shapedarea centred 4½ cables NW of Islote Cayo(28 27 39S 71 13 63W), in depths from 21 to 77 m.


Chile – Puerto Antofagasta — Wreck

270

Paragraph 8.67 2 line 6 Add: A dangerous wreck lies½ cable S of the root of Molo Este.

ENC CL5AN015(SDD 2009000 067167) [41/09]

Chile – Mejillones del Sur — Port limit; pilotage;anchorages; terminal

275


1 E from Punta Angamos Light (23 01 58S70 31 03W) to shore (23 01 58S 70 20 80W) onopposite side of Bahía Mejillones del Sur.

Paragraph 8.120 1 line 2 For Volume 6(5) ReadVolume 6(7)

276


...Terminals, 2½ miles ENE for Interacid Terminal and4¾ miles NNE for the LNG Terminal....

Paragraph 8.121 1 line 5 For Volume 6(5) ReadVolume 6(7)


E. 297 distant 1 5 miles, 1¼ miles WSW of PuertoAngamos pierhead.

GNL1. 014 distant 2 9 miles, 9½ cables N of MuelleGNL.

GNL2. 019 distant 3 6 miles, 1½ miles NNE ofMuelle GNL.


Muelle GNL (LNG Terminal) (5¼ miles ENE)consists of jetty extending 740 m NW from the shore,from which a light is exhibited.


NP7

2 - 14

Peru – Isla Asia to Isla San Lorenzo —Directions; wreck

315


WSW of a dangerous wreck (48 miles NW), thence:WSW of Isla Callao (Isla Frontón) (52½ miles NNW)(9.291), thence:

Peru 7/33/09(SDD 2009000 100991) [41/09]

Peru – Cerro Azul — Light

316Paragraph 9.246 2 line 4 Replace by:

...promontory from which a light (black GRP tower, whiteband, 11 m in height) is exhibited, lies...

Light List Volume G (2008/09) No 2044(SDD 2008000 085271) [41/09]

Peru – Punta Pacasmayo toIsla Lobos de Tierra — Directions; wreck

339


SW of Production platform SM-1 (48 miles NW). Adangerous wreck lies 7¼ miles NE. Thence:

ENC PE300124(SDD 2009000 052992) [41/09]

Peru – Paita to Punta Cabo Blanco — Directions;platform

346

Paragraph 10.265 1 line 4 For an obstruction Read aplatform (disused)

ENC PE300113(SDD 2009000 048914) [41/09]

Ecuador – Manta — Harbour regulation

373


Harbour regulation11.241a

1 No 1 Light Buoy (special) (0 55 97S 80 42 86W) isfor the exclusive use of submarines.

Ecuadorian Chart 10401(SDD 2011000 082131) [47/11]

Colombia – Buenaventura —Anchorages; light

385


No 3A 6½ miles NE Least charted depth 6 3 m

No 5 1½ miles ENE Least charted depth 8 9 m


Aguacate Light Beacon (green tower, red band)(3 53 7N 77 03 8W).


Colombian Chart 760(SDD 2009000 017369) [41/09]

Colombia – Bahía de Málaga —Directions; light buoy

388Paragraph 12.100 2 line 5 For starboard hand Read Wcardinal

Paragraph 12.104 3 line 2 For starboard hand Read Wcardinal

Colombian Chart 150(SDD 2009000 017480) [41/09]

NP7A South America Pilot Volume 4(2010 Edition)

Navigation and Regulations – Charts —Foreign charts

3


Paragraph 1.14 2 line 5 For 6058 Read 7376

Instructions nautiques H5(SDD 2010000 029291) [18/10]

Navigation and Regulations –Radio facilities — DGPS

4


Within the area covered by this volume DGPS datais broadcast from:

Cayenne (Montabo) (4 56 00N 52 18 00W).

UKHO(HH. 07A/200/02) [18/10]

Guyane Française – Îles du Salut toFleuve Maroni — Directions

73

Paragraph 2.67 3 line 6 For 5 43 62N 53 57 42W Read5 44 57N 53 57 09W

French Chart 7376(SDD 2010000 021155) [18/10]

NP7A

2 - 15

Guyane Française – Fleuve Mana —Charts; description; directions

73

Paragraph 2.69 Chart heading Replace by:

Chart 517 (datum undetermined)




French Chart 7376; Instructions nautiques H5(SDD 2010000 021155; 029291) [18/10]

Guyane Française – Fleuve Maroni —Charts; general information; depth; directions;

landmarks; useful marks; anchorage

73

Paragraph 2.70 Chart heading For French Charts 5883,6058 Read French Chart 7376

74


...entered between Pointe Française (5 44 57N53 57 09W) and Hoek Galibi (Pointe Hollandaise onFrench Chart 7376),...



Paragraph 2.70 5 line 9 For 2 m NE Read 3½ miles NNE


Paragraph 2.71 Replace by:

1 Landmark:Radio tower (5 44 74N 53 59 38W), situated onHoek Galibi (2.70).


Paragraph 2.72 2 lines 3-4 For 5 48 50N 53 56 30WRead 5 48 38N 53 55 98W


3 ESE of a stranded wreck (5 48 38N53 55 98W); a dangerous wreck lies 8 cablesWNW and Tijger Bank, which dries, lies9 cables farther WNW. Another strandedwreck (5 46 59N 53 57 92W) lies off the SEside of the bank. Thence:

WNW of a drying bank (5 45 66N 53 56 87W)extending NNE from Pointe Française, thence:

WNW of Pointe Française (5 44 57N 53 57 09W).

Paragraph 2.72 4 lines 2-3 For 5 42 83N 53 58 23WRead 5 43 02N 53 57 92W


5 Useful marks:House (5 44 75N 53 56 74W) standing in LesHattes.

Pylône (5 44 82N 53 59 09W) standing on HoekGalibi (2.70).

Radio mast (5 30 33N 54 01 69W).Light (5 30 41N 54 02 13W) exhibited from thewreck of the Edith Cavell, lying close NW ofSaint-Laurent du Maroni.


1 Good anchorage may be obtained in Fleuve Maroni4¾ cables N of Pointe Panato (5 43 02N 53 57 92W)in 7 m.

French Chart 7376; Instructions nautiques H5(SDD 2010000 021155; 029291) [18/10]

Guyane Française – Fleuve Maroni —General information; directions

74


...SL Light Buoy (5 51 80N 53 51 76W) where the pilot...


...Buoy (safe water) (5 51 80N 53 51 76W).


Replace by:

3 ESE of a stranded wreck (5 48 07N53 57 00W), position doubtful; a dangerouswreck, position approximate, lies 8 cablesWNW. Tijger Bank (Banc Hollandaise), whichdries, lies 1¾ miles WNW of the strandedwreck. Another stranded wreck (5 46 59N53 57 92W), lies off the SE side of the bank.Thence:

WNW of a drying bank (5 45 66N 53 56 87W),extending NNE from Pointe Française, thence:

WNW of Pointe Française (5 44 57N 53 57 09W).

Paragraph 2.72 4 line 3 For Arouba Read Arouaba

French Chart 7376(SDD 2010000 063631) [20/10]

Surinam – Fleuve Maroni to the approaches toSuriname Rivier — General information;

directions

75





...depth of 2 7 m. Kaaimanshoofd (Cape des Caïmans)(5 49 98N 54 01 65W), should be...

French Chart 7376(SDD 2010000 021155) [18/10]

NP7A

2 - 16

Surinam – Nickerie Rivier —Pilotage; directions; buoyage

80


...the vicinity of V-COR/N Light Buoy (6 02 06N57 00 52W). For further details see Admiralty List of...

81


...position is reached close to V-COR/N Light Buoy (safewater) (6 02 06N 57 00 52W).


...by a light buoy and light beacons (port hand). Tothe E of the...

Paragraph 2.134 2 line 8 For close SE Read 4 cables ENE

Paragraph 2.134 3 line 3 For Buoy Read Beacon

Netherlands Notice 36/440/10(SDD 2010000 146226) [40/10]

Guyana – Corentyn River —General information; directions

83


...the vicinity of V-COR/N Light Buoy (6 02 06N57 00 52W).


...V-COR/N Light Buoy (safe water) (6 02 06N57 00 52W).


Clear of V-COR/N Light Buoy (6 02 06N57 00 52W), thence:

SE of CM 1 Light Buoy (6 00 88N 57 02 20W),thence:

SE of CM 3 Light Buoy (5 59 00N 57 03 84W),thence:

Netherlands Notice 36/440/10(SDD 2010000 146226) [40/10]

Guyana – New Amsterdam to Georgetown —Directions; wreck

86


2 NE of a dangerous wreck (6 52 95N57 49 95W), position approximate. Anotherdangerous wreck, position approximate, lies5¼ miles W.

Maritime Administration Department, Guyana(SDD 2010000 021053) [18/10]

Trinidad – East coast — Directions; light

119


Galera Point Light (red lattice mast, white bands, onwhite round tower) (10 49 93N 60 54 66W).

Photograph (4.36) caption Replace by:

Klein Curaçao Light (7.35)(Original dated 2009)

MV UBC Sacramento(HH. 07A/200/02) [23/10]

Venezuela – Isla Coche — Major light

160


Isla Coche Light (10 47 30N 63 59 20W) (5.70).

162


1 Major lights:Punta Ballena Light (orange stone tower, 30 m inheight) (10 59 84N 63 46 66W).

Isla Coche Light (10 47 30N 63 59 20W) (5.70).

165


Major lights:PuntaBallena Light (10 59 84N 63 46 66W) (5.53).Isla Coche Light (orange truncated conical GRPtower, white band, 12 m in height) (10 47 30N63 59 20W).

167


Major light:Isla Coche Light (10 47 30N 63 59 20W) (5.70).

Venezuelan Notice 008/10(SDD 2010000 084237) [23/10]

Venezuela – Puerto La Cruz —Port authorities; anchorage; harbours; hazards;

directions; berths

173



A designated anchorage area for vessels bound forBahía Guanta and Bahía de Pertigalete has beenestablished 1 mile NE of Isla Redonda (10 15 41N64 35 55W), as shown on the chart.

174


3 Bahía de Pertigalete. Situated 1¾ miles E ofBahía Bergantín, this bay contains a cement terminalon its E side.

NP7A

2 - 17


Hazards5.149a

1 Ferry (see 5.159) passes N of the entrances toBahía Bergantín, Bahía de Guanta and Bahía dePertigalete.Small craft may be encountered in the approaches

to the harbours, as yacht harbours are situated inBahía de Guanta, Bahía de Pozuelos and Bahía deBarcelona.


...Borracha (10 17 82N 64 44 42W) the track leadsgenerally SSE for 11 miles to the pilot station in Bahía dePozuelos, passing:


WSWof an unnamed islet (10 16 98N 64 40 14W).3 The track then leads SE to the pilot boarding place

(5.146), 6¾ cables SW of Punta Baregán (10 15 34N64 38 47W) (5.133).

175


BA Chart 1498(HH. 07A/200/02) [23/10]

Venezuela – Puerto La Cruz —Pilot boarding position

173


...pilot boards in Bahía de Pozuelos in position 10 14 90N64 38 97W, 9½ cables W of Isla Burro (5.155). For...

UKHO(HH. 07A/200/02) [18/10]

Venezuela – Puerto Jose —Pilot boarding position

176


...speeds of less than force 7. Pilot boards in position10 08 80N 64 51 48W, 3¼ miles E of Isla Píritu AdentroLight (5.176).

178


UKHO(HH. 07A/200/02) [18/10]

Venezuela – Puerto La Guaira andCatia La Mar — Anchorages; pilotage

187


1 General anchorage. The main anchorage area offPuerto La Guaira is centred about 1½ miles NE of thehead of the North Mole (6.30), as shown on the chart.The...


Dangerous cargoes. Vessels carrying dangerouscargoes are required to anchor in an area, E and Nof the main anchorage, centred about 1¼ miles NNWof Punta Mulatos (6.29).

3 Quarantine anchorage l ies E of the mainanchorage, centred about 2 miles NNW of PuntaMulatos (6.29).


1 Pilotage is compulsory and available from 0600 to2400 local time. The pilot boards about 1 mile NW ofthe head (6.30) of North Mole, W of the mainanchorage.

190


1 Outer anchorage. Vessels awaiting a berth shouldanchor N of the outer mooring buoys in depths from13 to 18 m.Prohibited anchorages. Two areas have been

established (2010), centred 2 miles ENE and 5 cablesNW from Punta Arrecife (6.43).


Venezuela – Archipielago Las Aves —Directions; light

205



Aves de Sotavento Light (12 03 49N 67 40 64W).

209



Aves de Sotavento Light (12 03 49N 67 40 64W).


Aves de Sotavento Light (orange and white GRPtower, 12 m in height) (12 03 49N 67 40 64W).


Nederlandse Antillen –Klein Curaçao — Light

211

Paragraph 7.35 1 line 4 Replace by:Klein Curaçao Light (square brick building with whiteconcrete tower, 23 m in height) (11 59 39N68 38 58W).

NP7A

2 - 18

212


Galera Point Light (4.36)(Original dated 2009)

MV UBC Sacramento(HH. 07A/200/02) [23/10]

Aruba – South coast — Directions

228


2 S of the entrance (12 25 23N 69 54 08W) tothe SE part of Sint Nicolaasbaai, marked by alight buoy and light beacons (7.188), thence:

S of a light buoy (special, position approximate)(12 24 06N 69 54 90W), thence:

UKHO(HH. 07A/200/02) [18/10]

Aruba – Sint Nicolaas —Pilot boarding position

229


Reef berths. About 1½ miles WSW of the berths(7.189).

Paragraph 7.180 2 line 2 For WSW Read W

Paragraph 7.180 2 line 3 For 1½ miles SW Read 5 cablesWSW

Paragraph 7.186 1 line 6 For WSW Read W

230


...track leadsNNW to the pilot boarding position (7.180), onthe following leading line:

Valero Aruba Refinery & UKHO(SDD 2010000 017758) [18/10]

Colombia – Punta de la Garita –Directions — Light

280


Paragraph 9.147 1 line 7 For 9.144 Read red and whitetower

Colombian Notice 50/10(SDD 2010000 049964) [20/10]

Colombia – Bahía de Cartagena – Directions –Bocachica — Leading lights; useful mark

283

Paragraph 9.178 2 Delete


3 From the vicinity of the Fairway Light Buoy(10 18 98N 75 35 92W), the track leads E through achannel, marked by light buoys...

284


Useful mark:No 2 Light Beacon (red and white framework tower)(10 19 27N 75 30 53W).


Colombia – Bahía de Cartagena – Bocachica —Directions; deep-water channel

284



Colombia – Golfo de Urabá —Directions; buoy

292


1 From a position about 10 miles NE of Cabo Tiburón(9.232), from which a light (9.235) is exhibited, thetrack leads SE, passing:

SW of a wave recorder buoy (special) (8 49 98N77 11 04W), thence:


Colombia – Golfo de Urabá —General information; depths; directions;landmark; lights; description; anchorages;

pilotage; berths

292

Paragraph 9.245 Including heading Replace by:

Spare9.245

293


1 Landmark:Tank (8 05 72N 76 43 70W).

Major lights:


ENE of Isla Los Muertos Light (8 07 97N76 49 04W) (red tower, white bands), thence:

WSW of Punta Yarumal (Yarumul) (8 06 08N76 44 61W), from which a light (9.248) isexhibited 5¾ cables NNW, thence:

ENE of the shoal water extending 2½ miles SE ofBoca Coco Grande (Boco del Coco) (8 05 43N76 49 76W).

NP7A

2 - 19


3 The track then leads to a position 1½ miles W ofPunta Las Vacas (8 03 82N 76 44 58W), the Wentrance point...

Paragraph 9.249 3 line 4 For 1½ cables NW Read1¾ cables NNE


...deepest mouth, Bocas Roto (9.249), Boca Matuntugo,Boca Coco Grande (Boco del Coco) (9.249), Boca Urabá,Boca del Leoncito (8 01 38N 76 50 18W) and BocaPichindicito (8 01 23N 76 51 82W). These mouths,except the latter, are navigable by canoes and...

Paragraph 9.252 2 lines 1 and 3 For Cocogrande ReadCoco Grande

294


Paragraph 9.255 1 line 5 For 1½ Read 1

Paragraph 9.255 1 lines 7-8 For 3 miles SSE Read 2 milesSW

Paragraph 9.255 2 line 1 For 1¾ miles Read 1½ miles

Paragraph 9.257 1 line 1 For 1¾ miles Read 1½ miles


...(7 56 32N 76 44 98W) exhibited from the...


1 Río León Anchorage. This anchorage off themouth of Río León (7 56 30N 76 45 08W), in the SEcorner of Bahía Colombia, is used between May andDecember for loading bananas and lumber frombarges. The reported anchorage is, in a depth of18 m, about 2½ miles WNW of the river mouth.

2 Pichindi Anchorage, on the S side of the delta ofRío Atrato, lies between Boca del Leoncito (9.251)and Boc1a Pichindicito, 1 mile W. It is used betweenDecember and May, when the anchorage affordssome shelter from the prevailing N and NE winds;vessels load bananas and lumber as off Río León.

3 Anchorage may be obtained about 1 mile SSE of abuoy (special) (8 01 14N 76 51 22W), in a depth of22 m. By day, the light buoy is reported to be difficultto distinguish against the land, but the mooring buoysabout 2 and 4 cables E of the light buoy are moreeasily seen. The coastline in the vicinity of theanchorage does not show up well on radar; shoalinghas also been reported off Boca Pichindi.

4 Alongside berths. There are two berths at PuntaLas Vacas which are used by tankers, of 800 gt orless, to discharge refined petroleum products loadedat Bahía Cartagena (9.151); maximum allowed draught3 0 m. There are also several small wharfs situated inBahía Turbo used by local vessels.

BA Chart 2262(HH. 07A/200/02) [20/10]

NP8 Pacific Coasts of Central America andUnited States Pilot (2010 Edition)

Pacific Ocean – Guardian Bank north-westwards— Depths

83


In 2010, a vessel on passage between thesedepths and Guardian Bank reported soundingsbetween 20 5 m and 32 m between positions10 20 6N 088 19 0W and 10 18 3N 088 14 3W.

MV Apostolos 2(SDD 2010000 061387) [29/10]

Mexico – Golfo de California – Guaymas —Directions; lights

192Paragraph 6.59 including heading Replace by:

Spare6.59

193Paragraph 6.60 1 Replace by:

1 Leading lights:Front light (red diamond onwhite concrete rectangle,8 m in height), (27 54 79N 110 51 21W) on IslaMorrito (6.56).

Rear light (similar structure) (27 56 10N110 51 28W) on Isla Tío Ramón.


BA Chart 42 [23/11]

Mexico – Bahía de la Paz – Bahía Pichilingue andapproaches — Depth; leading lights

199

Paragraph 6.96 5 line 5 For 9 4 m (31 feet) Read 4 9 m(16 ft)

200


2 The alignment (339½ ) of Bahía Pichilingue leadinglights, standing on the E shore of Isla San JuanNepomuceno, leads to the charted anchorage positionabout 1 cable E of Muelle SCT (6.102):

Front Light (white concrete tubular tower, 7 m inheight) (24 16 1N 110 19 9W).

Rear Light (similar structure, 3 m in height) (about40 m from front light).

Mexican Cuaderno de Faros 2009; Mexican ENCMX503232(SDDs 2009000 124251; 2010000 101785) [37/10]

United States of America – California –Approaches to San Diego — Directions;

dangerous wreck250


Clear of a dangerous wreck (32 29 60N117 13 70W), thence:

260

Paragraph 8.39 3 line 6 For wreck Read wrecks

USNGA Notice 45/18740/11(SDD 2011000 206156) [47/11]

NP8

2 - 20

United States of America – California –Entrance to San Diego Bay —

Directions; rock

261


5 W of a DG platform, 2½ cables E of Ballast Point.A submerged jetty, marked by lights (white diamonds,orange border on piles), extends to the shore fromclose S of the platform.

United States Coast Pilot 7 2010 Edition Change 8(HA. 369/001/003/01) [29/10]

United States of America – California –San Clemente Island — Safety Zone

263


...including gunfire, rocket fire and bombing. A SafetyZone extends out to 3 miles around the island andSecurity Zones...

453After §165.1131 and detail Insert:

§165.1141 Safety Zone; San Clemente 3 NMSafety Zone, San Clemente Island, CA.(a) Location. The following area is a safety zone:

All waters of the Pacific Ocean surrounding SanClemente Island, from surface to bottom,extending from the high tide line on the islandseaward 3 NM. The zone consists of thefollowing sections (see Figure 1):

Comps Please Insert Part Pagediagram:NP8 Figure 1 San Clemente IslandSafety Zone Configuration

(1) Section ABeginning at33 02 03 0 N 118 35 51 0 W; thence to33 04 55 8 N 118 37 04 2 W; thence running parallel

to the shore at a distance of approximately 3 NMfrom the high tide line to

33 02 49 2 N 118 30 39 0 W; thence33 01 17 4 N 118 33 52 8 W; thence along the

shoreline returning to33 02 03 0 N 118 35 51 0 W.

(2) Section BBeginning at32 57 18 0 N 118 30 52 8 W; thence to32 59 36 0 N 118 28 19 8 W; thence running parallel


32 55 49 8 N 118 24 13 2 W; thence to32 53 31 8 N 118 26 31 2 W; thence along the


(3) Section CBeginning at32 53 31 8 N 118 26 31 2 W; thence to32 55 49 8 N 118 24 13 2 W; thence running parallel




(4) Section DBeginning at32 49 06 0 N 118 21 03 0 W; thence to32 47 16 2 N 118 18 13 8 W; thence running parallel




(5) Section EBeginning at32 50 42 0 N 118 29 22 2 W; thence to32 48 03 0 N 118 31 40 8 W; thence running parallel




(6) Section FBeginning at32 56 07 8 N 118 32 57 0 W; thence to32 53 37 2 N 118 35 55 8 W; thence running parallel




(7) Section GBeginning at33 01 04 8 N 118 36 19 8 W; thence to32 59 57 0 N 118 39 46 2 W; thence running parallel




Figure 1:San Clemente Island Safety Zone Confi guration

NP8

2 - 21

(8) Wilson CoveBeginning at33 01 16 8 N 118 33 52 8 W; thence to33 02 49 2 N 118 30 39 0 W; thence running

parallel to the shore at a distance ofapproximately 3 NM from the high tide line to



(b) Definitions. The following definition applies to thissection: designated representative, means anycommissioned, warrant and petty officers of theCoast Guard on board Coast Guard, CoastGuard Auxiliary, and local, state, and Federal lawenforcement vessels who have been authorizedto act on behalf of the Captain of the Port(COTP).

(c) Enforcement.(1) This regulation will be enforced at all times in

Section G and the Wilson Cove section of thesafety zone described in paragraph (a) of thissection. Mariners must obtain permission inaccordance with the procedure described inparagraph (d)(2) of this section before enteringeither of those sections (paragraphs (a)(7) and(8)).

(2) This regulation will be enforced in Sections Athrough F of the safety zone described inparagraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this sectionexcept when the Coast Guard notifies thepublic that enforcement of the zone inspecified sections is temporarily suspended. Atall other times, mariners must obtainpermission in accordance with the proceduredescribed in paragraph (d)(2) of this sectionbefore entering either of those sections.

(3) The COTP will provide notice of suspendedenforcement by means appropriate to affectthe widest publicity, including broadcast noticeto mariners, publication in local notice tomariners, and posting the schedule ofrestricted access periods by date, location andduration at: www.scisland.org

(d) Regulations.(1) The general regulations governing safety zones

found in 33CFR165.23 apply to the safetyzone described in paragraph (a) of thissection.

(2) Mariners requesting permission to transitthrough any section of the zone may requestauthorization to do so from Fleet Area Controland Surveillance Facility (FACSFAC) SanDiego by either calling 619-545-4742 orestablishing a VHF bridge to bridge radioconnection on Channel 16. Immediately uponcompleting transit, the vessel operator mustpromptly notify FACSFAC of safe passagethrough the safety zone. Failure toexpeditiously notify FACSFAC of passagethrough the safety zone will result in adetermination by the Navy that the vessel isstill in the safety zone, thereby restricting theuse of the area for naval operations. If theNavy determines that facilitating safe transitthrough the zone negatively impacts rangeoperations, the Navy will cease this practiceand enforce the safety zones in these twoareas without exception.

(3) All persons and vessels must comply with theinstructions of the U.S. Navy, Coast GuardCaptain of the Port or the designatedrepresentative.

(4) Upon being hailed by U.S. Navy or U.S. CoastGuard patrol personnel by siren, radio, flashinglight, or other means, the operator of thevessel must proceed as directed.

(5) The U.S. Coast Guard may be assisted in thepatrol and enforcement of the safety zonedescribed in paragraph (a) of this section bythe U.S. Navy and local law enforcementagencies.

United States Coast Pilot 7 2010 Edn Change 17(HA. 369/001/003-01) [39/10]

United States of America – Pacific coast –Begg Rock — Buoyage

266


4BR Light Buoy (starboard hand) is moored about2½ cables NNW of the rock.

US Notice 48/18020/11(SDD 2011000 215357) [49/11]

United States of America – California –Approaches to Long Beach and Los Angeles —

VTS; Precautionary area

275Paragraph 8.120 1 line 4 For excluding Read including

United States Coast Pilot 7 2011(SDD 2011000 003853) [30/11]

United States of America –San Pedro Bay and approaches —

Regulations concerning entry; tankers


1 State of California regulations have establishedescort regulations for tankers, carrying 5000 tonnes ormore of oil, underway in the Los Angeles/Long Beachharbours and approaches. Escort tugs should be inposition in the S boundary of the pilot boarding areaprior to an inbound vessel arriving within 2 miles ofthe breakwaters. Masters are to ensure anchors areready for letting go prior to entering pilot boardingareas. A pre-escort conference will:

2 1. Confirm the number and position of escorttugs.

2. Establish radio frequencies to be used.3. Confirm destination.4. Discuss any other pertinent information.

3 Adverse weather, unusual port/traffic congestion orother conditions/circumstances may require additionaltugs. Outbound laden tankers are not required to usetugs once they have cleared the breakwaters but alltankers shifting within the harbours must comply withthe escort requirements. Full details of the regulationscan be found at: www.dfg.ca.gov/Ospr/

US Coast Pilot 7 42nd Edition 2010(HH.008/200/003) [49/10]

http://www.scisland.org

http://www.dfg.ca.gov/Ospr/

NP8

2 - 22

United States of America – California –San Francisco Bay – Alcatraz Island —

Directions; fog signal

335

Paragraph 10.53 2 lines 8 and 9 Replace by:

...vicinity of the island.

USOCS 27/18650/10(SDD 2010000 103735) [29/10]

United States of America –Port of San Francisco –

San Francisco – Oakland Bay Bridge —Directions; passage

338Paragraph 10.70 2 lines 6-8 Delete


2 Under the San Francisco-Oakland Bay Bridge(10.70), thence:

Captain W. Lemke - San Francisco Bar Pilots(HH.008/200/03) [50/10]

United States of America – Pacific Coast –San Francisco — Limiting conditions; Verticalclearances; San Francisco - Oakland Bay Bridge

338


3 A second bridge, with a design clearance of 34 1 m(112 ft), is under construction (2010) E of YerbaBuena Island and to the N of the present bridge. TheCoast Guard requests mariners use the temporarymain channel between piers I and J on the existingbridge, and piers E-3 and E-4 on the bridge underconstruction, where the approximate mid-span verticalclearance is 34 1 m (112 ft).

Paragraph 10.70 4 lines 8-10 Delete Vessels to bridge.


Fixed red light from each side of the bridge at the footof towers of Piers I, J and K

Fixed red light from each corner of Pier C and redaxis lights along the channel axis on each side.

US Coast Pilot 7 Change 18; US Notice 49/18649/11(SDD 2011000 178551; 2011000 221205) [51/11]

United States of America – California –San Francisco Bay – Port of Richmond —

Project depth

348

Paragraph 10.160 1 line 3 For 10 7 m (35 ft) Read 11 6 m(38 ft)

United States Coast Pilot 7 2010 Edition Change 24(HA.369/001/003-01) [39/10]

United States of America – California –San Pablo Bay — Safety Zone

351Paragraph 10.186 1 line 3 Add:

...A safety zone is established in San Pablo Bay N of thePinole Shoal Channel (See Appendix V).

454After §165.1183 and detail Insert:

§165.1184 Safety Zone; Coast Guard Use ofForce Training Exercises, San Pablo Bay, CA.

United States Coast Pilot 7 2011 Edition Change 12(SDD 2011000 125910) [30/11]

United States of America – West coast –Reading Rock to Point St George —

Directions; Light

380-381


... is moored 1 mile W of NW Seal Rock, fromwhich a light is exhibited. There is a ...

US OCS Notice 41/18600/12(SDD 2012000 203035) [43/12]

United States of America Pacific Coast – Oregon– Chetco River — Entrance depths


1 Controlling depths. The project depth for theentrance channel and turning basin is 4 2 m (14 ft).

US Notice 27/18602/11(SDD 2011000 125920) [30/11]

United States of America Pacific Coast – Oregon– Yaquina Bay — Directions; depths


...depths of from 1 2 to 7 6 m (4 to 25 ft) extending12 miles...

401Paragraph 12.106 2 line 2 For charted depth of 1 5 m (5 ft)Read depth of 2 4 m (8 ft)


...Light Buoy (port hand). Between the jetties, numeroussubmerged rocks lie along the outside of the chartedentrance channel limits.


NP8

2 - 23

United States of America – West coast –Columbia River — Safety and Security Zone

Regulations

410


Security and Safety Zone regulations for largepassenger vessels may be in force in Columbia River.See Appendix V for further details.

455

After §165.1310 and detail Insert:

§165.1318 Security and Safety Zone Regulations,Large Passenger Vessel Protection, Captain of thePort Columbia River Zone.

United States Coast Pilot 7 2010 Edition Change 24(HA.369/001/003-01) [39/10]

United States of America – Willamette River –Portland — Traffic Regulation

418


Traffic regulation. Regulated Navigation Areas anda Safety Zone are established on parts of theWillamette River at Portland; see Appendix V.

458

After existing Section IV Notice 30/11 (§165.1335 anddetail) Insert:

§165.1338 Safety Zone; TriMet Bridge Project,Willamette River; Portland, OR.


The following notice is to be implemented at 0000UTC on 1st December 2012

United States of America – Pacific Coast —Traffic regulations

427


All vessels, including barges, that carry oil orhazardous materials in bulk as cargo or cargo residue,and all ships of 400 gt and over solely in transit,should avoid the area bounded by the...

IMO SN.1/Circ.309 [46/12]

United States of America – Oregon –Grays Harbor — Directions; breakers

431


In rough weather, hazardous breakers are found onNorth and South Jetties. Both should be given a wideberth.

United States Coast Pilot 7 2010 Edition Change 11(HA 369/001/003/01) [29/10]

United States of America – Pacific Coast —Navigation Safety Regulations; electronic

position fixing devices

449Paragraph §164.41 and detail Replace by:

§164.41 Electronic position fixing devices.(a) Each vessel calling at a port in the continental

United States, including Alaska south of CapePrince of Wales, except each vessel owned orbareboat chartered and operated by the UnitedStates, or by a state or its political subdivision,or by a foreign nation, and not engaged incommerce, must have a satellite navigationreceiver with:

(1) Automatic acquisition of satellite signals afterinitial operator settings have been entered;and

(2) Position updates derived from satell iteinformation during each usable satellite pass.

(b) A system that is found by the Commandant tomeet the intent of the statements of availability,coverage, and accuracy for the U.S. CoastalConfluence Zone (CCZ) contained in the U.S.“Federal Radionavigation Plan” (Report No.DOD–NO 4650.4–P, I or No.DOT–TSC–RSPA–80–16, I). A person desiring afinding by the Commandant under thissubparagraph must submit a written applicationdescribing the device to the Coast Guard DeputyCommander for Operations (CG–DCO), 21002nd St. SW., Stop 7471, Washington,DC 20593–7471. After reviewing the application,the Commandant may request additionalinformation to establish whether or not the devicemeets the intent of the Federal RadionavigationPlan.

Note: The Federal Radionavigation Plan is availablefrom the National Technical Information Service,Springfield, Va. 22161, with the followingGovernment Accession Numbers:

Vol 1, ADA 116468Vol 2, ADA 116469Vol 3, ADA 116470Vol 4, ADA 116471


NP8

2 - 24

United States of America – Pacific Coast —Regulated Navigation Areas; Security Zones

454

Paragraph §165.1154 lines 1-2 Replace by:

§165.1154 Security Zones; Moored Cruise Ships,San Pedro Bay, California.

US Coast Pilot 7 Change 4; US Notice 8/12(SDD 2012000 040193) [11/12]

United States of America – Oregon – ColumbiaRiver – Port of Portland — Regulated Navigation

Area

458

After §165.1325 (c) (5) line 2 Insert:

§165.1326 Regulated Navigation Area: Port ofPortland Terminal 4, Willamette River,Portland, Oregon.


United States of America Pacific Coast –Columbia River — Safety and Security Zone

Regulations

458After existing Section IV Notice 29/2010 (§165.1326 anddetail) Insert:

§165.1335 Security Zone; Vessels CarryingHazardous Cargo, Sector Columbia RiverCaptain of the Port Zone.


United States of America – Willamette River –Portland — Traffic Regulation

458

After existing Section IV Notice 30/11 (§165.1335 anddetail) Insert:

§165.1337 Regulated Navigation Area, ZidellWaterfront Property, Willamette River, OR.


United States of America – California –San Diego Bay — Naval Danger Zone

461

After §334.865 Insert:

§334.866 Pacific Ocean at Naval BaseCoronado, in the City of Coronado, SanDiego County, California; Naval Danger Zone.


United States of America – Pacific Coast —National Marine Sanctuary Program Regulations

480

Paragraph §922.72 (a)(7) lines 1-7 Replace by:

(7) Disturbing marine mammals or seabirds byflying motorized aircraft at less than 1,000feet over the waters within one nautical mileof any Island, except to engage in kelp bedsurveys or to transport persons or supplies toor from an Island. Failure to maintain aminimum altitude of 1,000 feet above groundlevel over such waters is presumed to disturbmarine mammals or seabirds.

482


(8) Disturbing marine mammals or seabirds byflying motorized aircraft at less than 1,000feet over the waters within one nautical mileof the Farallon Islands, Bolinas Lagoon, orany ASBS, except to transport persons orsupplies to or from the Islands or forenforcement purposes. Failure to maintain aminimum altitude of 1,000 feet above groundlevel over such waters is presumed to disturbmarine mammals or seabirds.

486


(6) Disturbing marine mammals or seabirds byflying motorized aircraft, except as necessaryfor valid law enforcement purposes, at lessthan 1,000 feet above any of the four zoneswithin the Sanctuary described in Appendix Bto this subpart. (Not included in this volume).Failure to maintain a minimum altitude of1,000 feet above ground level above anysuch zone is presumed to disturb marinemammals or seabirds.

NP8

2 - 25

488

Existing Section IV Notice Week 10/12 Paragraph§922.152 (a)(7) lines 1-10 Replace by:

(7) Disturbing marine mammals or seabirds byflying motorized aircraft at less than 2,000feet over the waters within one nautical mileof the Flattery Rocks, Quillayute Needles, orCopalis National Wildlife Refuges or withinone nautical mile seaward from the coastalboundary of the Sanctuary, except foractivities related to tribal timber operationsconducted on reservation lands, or totransport persons or supplies to or fromreservation lands as authorized by agoverning body of an Indian tribe. Failure tomaintain a minimum altitude of 2,000 feetabove ground level over any such waters ispresumed to disturb marine mammals orseabirds.

US Coast Pilot 7 Change 5; US Notice 8/12(SDD 2012000 040193) [11/12]

United States of America – Pacific Coast —Regulated Navigation Areas; Security Zones

487

Paragraph §922.150 Boundary. (a) lines 3-4 Replace by:

...2,408 square nautical miles (nmi) of coastal andocean waters, and...

US Coast Pilot 7 Change No. 2(SDD 2012000 030808) [46/12]

United States of America – Pacific Coast —National Marine Sanctuary Program Regulations

487-488

Paragraph §922.152 and detail Replace by:

§922.152 Prohibited or otherwise regulatedactivities.(a) Except as specified in paragraphs (b) through (g)

of this section, the following activities areprohibited and thus are unlawful for any personto conduct or to cause to be conducted:

(1) Exploring for, developing or producing oil, gasor minerals within the Sanctuary.

(2)(i) Discharging or depositing, from within or intothe Sanctuary, other than from a cruise ship,any material or other matter except:(A) Fish, fish parts, chumming materials or

bait used in or resulting from lawfulfishing operations in the Sanctuary;

(B) Biodegradable effluent incidental to vesseluse and generated by marine sanitationdevices approved in accordance withsection 312 of the Federal WaterPollution Control Act, as amended,(FWPCA), 33 U.S.C. 1322 et seq.;

(C) Water generated by routine vesseloperations (e.g., cooling water, deckwash down, and graywater as defined bysection 312 of the FWPCA) excludingoily wastes from bilge pumping;

(D) Engine exhaust; or(E) Dredge spoil in connection with beach

nourishment projects related to theQuillayute River Navigation Project.

(ii) Discharging or depositing, from beyond theboundary of the Sanctuary, any material orother matter, except those listed inparagraphs (a)(2)(i)(A) through (E) of thissection, that subsequently enters theSanctuary and injures a Sanctuary resourceor quality.

(3) Discharging or depositing, from within or into theSanctuary, any materials or other matter froma cruise ship except clean vessel enginecooling water, clean vessel generator coolingwater, clean bilge water, engine exhaust, oranchor wash.

(4) Moving, removing or injuring, or attempting tomove, remove or injure, a Sanctuary historicalresource. This prohibition does not apply tomoving, removing or injury resultingincidentally from lawful fishing operations.

(5) Drilling into, dredging or otherwise altering thesubmerged lands of the Sanctuary; orconstructing, placing or abandoning anystructure, material or other matter on thesubmerged lands of the Sanctuary, except asan incidental result of:

(i) Anchoring vessels;(ii) Lawful fishing operations;(iii) Installation of navigation aids;(iv) Harbor maintenance in the areas necessarily

associated with the Quillayute RiverNavigation Project, including dredging ofentrance channels and repair, replacementor rehabilitation of breakwaters and jetties,and related beach nourishment;

(v) Construction, repair, replacement orrehabilitation of boat launches, docks orpiers, and associated breakwaters andjetties; or

(vi) Beach nourishment projects related to harbormaintenance activities.

(6) Taking any marine mammal, sea turtle orseabird in or above the Sanctuary, except asauthorized by the Marine Mammal ProtectionAct, as amended, (MMPA), 16 U.S.C. 1361 etseq., the Endangered Species Act, asamended, (ESA), 16 U.S.C. 1531 et seq., andthe Migratory Bird Treaty Act, as amended,(MBTA), 16 U.S.C. 703 et seq., or pursuantto any Indian treaty with an Indian tribe towhich the United States is a party, providedthat the Indian treaty right is exercised inaccordance with the MMPA, ESA, and MBTA,to the extent that they apply.

NP8

2 - 26

(7) Flying motorized aircraft at less than 2,000 feetboth above the Sanctuary within one NM ofthe Flattery Rocks, Quillayute Needles, orCopalis National Wildlife Refuge, or withinone nmi seaward from the coastal boundaryof the Sanctuary, except for activities relatedto tribal timber operations conducted onreservation lands, or to transport persons orsupplies to or from reservation lands asauthorized by a governing body of an Indiantribe.

(8) Possessing within the Sanctuary (regardless ofwhere taken, moved or removed from) anyhistorical resource, or any marine mammal,sea turtle, or seabird taken in violation of theMMPA, ESA, or MBTA, to the extent thatthey apply.

(9) Interfering with, obstructing, delaying orpreventing an investigation, search, seizure ordisposition of seized property in connectionwith enforcement of the Act or any regulationor permit issued under the Act.

(b) The prohibitions in paragraph (a)(2) through (5),(7), and (8) of this section do not apply toactivities necessary to respond to emergenciesthreatening life, property, or the environment.

(c) The prohibitions in paragraphs (a)(2) through (5),(7), and (8) of this section do not apply toactivities necessary for valid law enforcementpurposes.

(d) (relates to Department of Defense activities -omitted from this volume).

(e) The prohibitions in paragraphs (a)(2) through (8) ofthis section do not apply to any activity executedin accordance with the scope, purpose, termsand conditions of a National Marine Sanctuarypermit issued pursuant to §§922.48 and 922.153or a Special Use permit issued pursuant tosection 310 of the Act.

(f) (relates to Indian tribe rights - omitted from thisvolume).

(g) The prohibitions in paragraphs (a)(2) through (8) ofthis section do not apply to any activityauthorized by any lease, permit, license, or otherauthorization issued after July 22, 1994, andissued by any Federal, State or local authority ofcompetent jurisdiction, provided that the applicantcomplies with §922.49, the Director notifies theapplicant and authorizing agency that he or shedoes not object to issuance of the authorization,and the applicant complies with any terms andconditions the Director deems necessary toprotect Sanctuary resources and qualities.Amendments, renewals and extensions ofauthorizations in existence on the effective dateof designation constitute authorizations issuedafter the effective date.

(h) Notwithstanding paragraphs (e) and (g) of thissection, in no event may the Director issue aNational Marine Sanctuary permit under §§922.48and 922.153 or a Special Use permit undersection 310 of the Act authorizing, or otherwiseapprove: The exploration for, development orproduction of oil, gas or minerals within theSanctuary; the discharge of primary-treatedsewage within the Sanctuary; the disposal ofdredged material within the Sanctuary other thanin connection with beach nourishment projectsrelated to the Quillayute River Navigation Project;or bombing activities within the Sanctuary. Anypurported authorizations issued by otherauthorities after July 22, 1994 for any of theseactivities within the Sanctuary shall be invalid.

488

Paragraph §922.153 and detail Replace by:

§922.153 Permit procedures and criteria.(a) A person may conduct an activity prohibited by

§922.152(a)(2) through (8) if conducted inaccordance with the scope, purpose, terms andconditions of a permit issued under this sectionand §922.48.

(b) Applications for such permits should be addressedto the Director, Office of National MarineSanctuaries; Attn: Superintendent, Olympic CoastNational Marine Sanctuary, 115 East RailroadAvenue, Suite 301, Port Angeles, WA98362–2925.

US Coast Pilot 7 Changes 2 and 3; US Notice 7/12(SDD 2012000 030808) [10/12]

NP9 Antarctic Pilot (2009 Edition)

South Georgia and Approaches –Cumberland Bay – King Edward Cove —

Directions; light beacons

169


1 Outer leading light beacons:Front beacon (orange triangular topmark, pointuppermost on white metal post with orangebands, 8.5m in height) (54 17 06S 36 30 44W).

Rear beacon (orange triangular topmark, pointuppermost on white metal post with orangebands, 12.5m in height) (54 17 04S36 30 59W).


Inner leading light beacons:Front beacon (orange triangular topmark, point downon white metal post with orange bands, 6m inheight) (54 16 86S 36 30 46W).


5 Rear beacon (orange triangular topmark, pointdown on white metal post) (54 16 81S36 30 57W).

The spire of Grytviken Church (elevation 27m) is inline with these light beacons .

ADLL G1365, G1365 1; G1367, G1367 1(SDD 2012000 022492) [10/12]

South Georgia – Ocean Harbour – Hound Bay —Directions; depth

172

Paragraph 3.86 5 line 4 For (54 22 5S 36 09 8W) Read(54 22 90S 36 09 90W)

173

Paragraph 3.94 For Chart 3588 Read Charts 3588, 3586plan of Ocean Harbour and Hound Bay

NP9

2 - 27

174


Charts 3597 (unknown datum), 3586 plan of OceanHarbour and Hound BayHound Bay3.95

1 General Information. Hound Bay is enteredbetween Tijuca Point (54 20 95S 36 12 60W) andCape Vakop (3.86).Directions. From a position NNW of Cape Vakop

(54 22 90S 36 09 90W), the track leads WSW intothe bay, passing:

SSEof islets and shoals (3.86) lying up to 2 cables offTijuca Point, thence:

NNW of Rolf Rock (54 22 50S 36 11 80W)comprising an islet 4½ mhigh and a drying rock. Areef with a least depth of 10 1 m extends 4 cablesNNW. Thence:

ESE of a shoal (54 21 75S 36 13 40W)with a leastdepth of 11 3 m, thence:

N of a rock (54 22 85N 36 13 20W) with a leastdepth of 9 9 m.

Thence the track continues a short distance WSWto the anchorage.

2 Anchorage. Sheltered anchorage may be obtainedin the bay, in depths from 18 to 27 m. At the SW endof the bay there are two small coves; the N-mostcove is a suitable anchorage for small vessels, notinga shoal (54 22 75S 36 14 75W) with a depth of2 9 m, lying close offshore near the head of the bay.

Chart 3586 [48/12]

South Georgia and Approaches –Cumberland Bay to Cape Charlotte –

Ocean Harbour — Directions

173

Paragraph 3.94 2 line 5 For E Read W

MV Pharos SG(SDD 2012000 022483) [10/12]

South Georgia – St Andrews Bay —Directions; depth

174-175


Charts 3597 (unknown datum), 3586 plan of St AndrewsBaySt Andrews Bay3.97

1 Description. St Andrews Bay (54 26 50S36 10 00W) is entered between Clark Point(54 26 00S 36 11 00W) 1¼ miles South of MountSkittle (3.96), and a point 1¾ miles SSE. Both thesepoints are foul and a number of dangerous rocks arereported within the bay.Cook Glacier lies on the W side of St Andrews

Bay. A beach lies close SW of Clark Point and is freefrom dangers.

Local Knowledge is required for the inneranchorage.Local Weather. Strong katabatic winds may occur

without warning within the bay.2 Directions. From a position SE of Cape Vakop

(54 22 90S 36 09 90W) the track towards the outeranchorage leads SW, passing SE of a dangerous rock(54 25 70S 36 09 03W) with a least known depth of4 4 m, lying about 1 mile ENE of the N entrance pointand close to the inner anchorage. Mariners shouldnote Ryan Reef (54 27 10S 36 08 25W) with a rockawash and a depth of 3 m lying 7 cables NE of the Sentrance point. A shoal (54 26 30 N 36 09 25 W) witha least charted depth of 7 m lies in the middle of thebay.

3 Anchorage may be obtained in the outer part ofthe bay, about 1¾ miles from the shoreline, in depthsof about 30 m. Anchorage may also be obtained,closer to the shoreline, about 5 cables from the N endof the bay, in depths of about 12 m.Landing on a beach S of Cook Glacier is often

impossible because of swell and surf. The far Ncorner of the bay, under Clarke Point (54 26 00S36 11 00W), is the most sheltered landing site.

Chart 3586 [48/12]

South Georgia – King Haakon Bay — Directions

181


Chart 3586 plan of King Haakon BayKing Haakon Bay3.134

1 Description. King Haakon Bay (54 09 50S37 17 00W), a fjord entered between Cape Rosa(54 11 10S 37 24 60W) and the E entrance point ofCheapman Bay (54 09 00S 37 31 70W), extends9½ miles E.Topography. McNish Island (54 08 95S

37 28 10W), McCarthy Island (54 10 10S 37 25 50W)and Vincent Islands (54 09 20S 37 16 37W) all liewithin King Hakkon Bay. Cheapman Bay (54 09 00S37 31 70W) lies 4 miles ENE of Samuel Islands(54 11 40S 37 36 70W) (3.123); kelp extends acrossthe entrance to the bay. Peters Glacier flows S intothe inner part of Cheapman Bay, and Price Glacierreaches the sea near the N entrance point of KingHaakon Bay.

2 Depths. Dangerous rocks lie between 2½ milesWNW and and 8½ cables W of Cape Rosa(54 11 10S 37 24 60W), and a large area of kelp liesbetween these and McNish Island. A dangerous rock(54 11 05S 37 26 15W) (reported 2004), lies 7 cablesW of the Cape.Caution. The least charted depths over the terminal

moraine are 7 8 m (54 10 00S 37 20 20W) and 8 0 m(54 09 75S 37 20 20W); these rocks are marked bykelp. The S shoreline is reported to be foul.Local knowledge is required for a safe passage

through the alternative S entrance channel.3 History. It was here that Sir Ernest Shackleton’s

James Caird, Endurance’s 6 m (20 ft) lifeboat, arrivedat the end of their 17 day, 670 mile, epic crossing ofthe Scotia Sea, from Elephant Island, in May 1916.

NP9

2 - 28

The party comprised of Shackleton, Worsley, McNish,McCarthy, Crean and Vincent. They beached on 10thMay 1916, in a small cove just E of Cape Rosa(54 11 10S 37 24 60W). On 15th May they moved upthe fjord to Peggotty Bluff (54 08 75S 37 17 10W)where they camped. On 19th May, Shackleton,Worseley and Crean started their remarkable crossingof South Georgia to arrive in Stromness Bay on 20thMay.

4 Directions. From a position 3½ miles ESE of theSamuel Islands (54 11 40S 37 36 70W) the trackleads NNW in deep water free from dangers towardsPrice Glacier front passing:

SE of Nilse Hullet (54 10 65S 37 35 00W), a cove2 miles NW.

ESE of the East entrance point of Cheapman Bay(54 09 00S 37 31 70W) remaining in deepwater1 mile from the coast and clear of severaldangerous rocks and rocks awash.

WNW of 2 dangerous rocks (54 10 15S37 29 00W); and a rock awash (54 10 20S37 28 70W) position doubtful.

When 8 cables from the North shore of the fjord thetrack leads E in the deep water channel, 5 cables Sof McNish Island passing:

S of dangerous rocks WSW of McNish Island inpositions (54 09 10S 37 29 15W) and(54 09 15S 37 28 40W).

N of a rock awash (54 09 78S 37 27 18W).N ofMcCarthy Island (54 10 10S37 25 50W) anda

reef that extends up to 1 mile W.5 The track then leads ESE to a position ENE of the

E point of McCarthy Island. From this vicinity the trackleads E, to pass about 6½ cables from the N shoreover the terminal moraine.On this track a least depth of 21 m was found

crossing the terminal moraine.The track continues to lead E towards the head of

the fjord, noting a dangerous rock that uncovers(54 09 28S 37 16 85W) marked by kelp, lying2½ cables WSW of the W extremity of VincentIslands.

6 Directions for Alternative passage. An alternativeapproach into King Haakon Bay leads through a deepchannel between between a group of islets(54 11 28S 37 25 30W) 4 cables WSW of CapeRosa (54 11 10S 37 24 60W) and a rock dangerousto surface navigation (54 11 05S 37 26 15W) positionapproximate (reported 2004) 8 cables W of CapeRosa. This channel should be navigated with extremecaution.

7 Anchorages. In 2003 MS Explorer, 2398 tonnes,5 m draught, obtained good anchorage in position54 09 10S 37 16 85W NW of Vincent Islands(54 09 20S 37 16 45W), in depths between30 and 40 m, muddy clay. The same vessel obtainedtemporary anchorage about 3 cables E of Cape Rosa(54 11 10S 37 24 60W) and about 1 cable from the Sshore of the fjord, in a depth of about 50 m.

8 Landings. Landing has been effected in the vicinityof Peggotty Bluff (54 08 75S 37 17 10W), on the Nshore of the bay 7 cables NW of Vincent Islands, theultimate site for Sir Ernest Shackleton’s James Cairdparty. Shackleton Gap (3.54) connects the head of thebay with Possession Bay (3.54). Landing has alsobeen effected in Cave Cove (54 10 94S 37 24 40W),the spectacular first landing site of the James Cairdparty.

Chart 3586 [48/12]

South Orkney Islands – Washington Strait —Directions; AIS

207


Other aid to navigation4.64a

1 AIS:An AIS transmitter has been established at theOrcadas Base in Wilton Bay on Laurie Island inposition 60 44 29S 44 44 25W.

Agentinian Notice 06/68/12(SDD 2012000 112915) [27/12]

South Orkney Islands – Laurie Island —Scotia Bay; directions; anchorages

208-209

Paragraphs 4.67 to 4.70 including headings Replace by:

Scotia BayInternational Chart 9142General Information4.67

1 Description. Scotia Bay (60 45 50S 44 41 75W) isentered between Point Rae (60 45 50S 44 38 00W)and Cape Murdoch, (60 46 80S 44 42 40W) (4.56).There are several islets and rocks, some of which areunderwater, off both sides of the bay. A number ofmonuments in Scotia Bay comprise an HistoricMonument Site. See Appendix IV.

2 History. The bay was roughly charted by Powelland Palmer in 1821 and further charted by Weddell in1822; re-charted by the Scottish National AntarcticExpedition in March 1903, and named after theexpedition ship Scotia, ex Hekla, Norwegian whaler,which wintered in the bay. The SNAE meteorologicalstation was sited at the head of the bay, which wasoperated from March to November 1903 and handedover to the Oficina Meteorológica Argentina inFebruary 1904, since when it has been continuouslymanned.

Directions(continued from 4.56)4.68

1 Caution. Vessels should navigate with extremecaution in the vicinity of Laurie Island; parts of theisland have not been adequately surveyed. See 4.4.Track. From a position SSE of Cape Murdoch

(60 46 80S 44 42 40W) (4.56), on the coastalpassage, the track into the bay leads NNW, passing:

WSWof AilsaCraig (60 46 80S 44 37 90W) (4.55),thence:

WSW of Florence Rock (60 46 10S 44 37 35W),thence:

2 ENE of Cape Murdoch (4.56) (60 46 80S44 42 40W), thence:

WSW of a shoal (60 46 29S 44 40 50W), positionapproximate, reported, in 1968, to have a depth of22 m, and:

ENE of a reef (60 46 50S 44 41 85W), comprisingof an islet and several dangerous rocks awash,thence:

NP9

2 - 29

WSW of SW extremity of a reef (60 45 20S44 41 25W), with a least depth of 0 3 m,extending 4 cables from the coast close E of PointDavis and WSW of a shoal 9 6m (60 45 30S44 41 40W) position approximate reported in1994, thence:

3 ENE of a shoal patch (60 45 82S 44 42 25W),with a least charted depth of 10 8 m, lying5 cables ENE of Point Martin, thence:

ENE of a dangerous rock (60 45 62S 44 42 28W)position approximate, thence:

ENE of a shoal area (60 45 55S 44 42 70W), with aleast depth of 8 2 m, thence:

WSW of a dangerous rock (60 45 05S 44 41 37W)position approximate, thence:

4 WSW of an islet (60 44 91S 44 41 10W), andtwo dangerous rocks, lying close SW of PointDavis, from where a light (red round GRPtower, white band, 4 m in height) is exhibited.

Thence as required for the inner anchorage, notinga dangerous rock (60 44 46S 44 43 21W) close S ofPoint Moreno (4.69).Useful marks:

Light (white roundGRP tower, red top, 3 m in height)(60 45 38S 44 43 94W).

Beacon (60 44 70S 44 44 10W), marked W,standing on a rock, close inshore, 7 cables N ofthe light.

Light (red round GRP tower, white band, 4 m inheight) (60 44 91S 44 41 10W) (4.25).

A Light (60 44 28S 44 44 27W) (lantern in radiomast) is exhibited from the NW side of the bay atthe Argentine station (4.26).

Anchorage4.69

1 Scotia Bay is not recommended as an anchorage,the outer harbour being exposed and the innerharbour very restricted, but anchorage may beobtained near the middle of the entrance to the cove,about 3 cables W of Point Moreno, (60 44 42S44 43 18W), from which a reef extends ½ cable S,and 2¾ cables from the beach at the head of thecove, in depths of about 17 m. The holding ground isgood, being better than that in Uruguay Cove (4.26).Scotia, the vessel of the Scottish National AntarcticExpedition, anchored and wintered here.

Anchorages and Harbours

Mill Cove4.70

1 Description. Mill Cove (60 45 30S 44 36 50W) isentered between Cape Anderson (60 45 48S44 36 30W), and Valette Island (60 45 50S44 37 30W). The E side of this cove comprises arocky cliff about 244 m (800 ft) high.Depths. There are general depths from 38 to 47 m

in the outer part of Mill Cove, except near its shores,but in the NW part of the cove, which is 3½ cablesacross, there are depths from 10 to 20 m; there is ashoal in the centre of the NE part.Caution. Vessels should navigate with caution in

the inner part of Mill Cove; it has not been fullysurveyed.

International Chart 9142(SDD 2012000 151616) [45/12]

Gerlache Strait – South Part – Port Lockroy —Directions; isolated Shoal

299


Clear of an isolated shoal 17 8m (64 49 50S63 32 50W), position approximate, thence:


James Ross Island Group – Cape Purvis toCape Longing through Prince Gustav Channel —

Route; directions

368

Paragraph 7.10 1 line 5 For SE Read SW

Paragraph 7.10 1 line 7 For SSE Read SSW

369


372



BA Chart 227 [04/12]

James Ross Island Group – Cape Purvis toCape Longing through Prince Gustav Channel —

Directions

372


(SDD 2009000 021841) [04/12]

NP10 Arctic Pilot Volume 1 (2010 Edition)

Russia – Laptev Sea –Reka Lena Delta — Wreck

463Paragraph 16.135 2 line 13 Replace by:Lena.Caution.Awreckwith a clearance depth of 14 m liesin position 73 01 53N 130 39 81E, 20 miles E of OstrovaGrigoriy. Thence:

Russian Notice 29/3547/2011(SDD 2011000 122708) [30/11]

NP11

2 - 30


Radio Navigational Warnings

4

Paragraph 1.18 1 line 3 After Service. Add: The service inNAVAREA XIX is currently on trial, and is scheduled tobecome fully operational on 1st June 2011.

United States of America Notice 24/10 Section III(SDD 2010000 092655) [41/10]

Iceland – West coast – Faxaflói — Racons

95


Grótta Light (64 10 N 22 01 W).

109


Grótta Light (64 10 N 22 01 W) (3.40).

112


114


Icelandic Notices 2/8/12; 2/9/12(SDD 2012000 112913) [27/12]

Iceland – Reykjavík – ViÉeyjarsund —Spoil ground

106


NE of an area of spoil ground with a least depth of4 1 mwhich extends 3½ cables E from the S tip ofEngey, thence:

Icelandic Notice 2/7/12(SDD 2012000 112913) [27/12]

Svalbard – Wedel Jarlsberg Land —Underwater rock

201After Paragraph 9.23 1 Line 6 Including existing Section IVWeek 39/10 Insert:An underwater rock with a depth of 3m has been

reported off Middagsskjæra in position 77 24 6N13 47 7E.

Norwegian notice 14/28198/10(SDD 2010000 123628) [48/10]

Svalbard – Billefjorden – Pyramiden —Leading lights

215

Paragraph 9.80 1 line 6 For lights Read beacons

Norwegian Notice 11/44102/12(SDD 2012000 117171) [27/12]

Svalbard – Hinlopenstretet — Anchorages

235

Paragraphs 10.53, 10.56 and 10.57 Including headingsReplace by:

Spare10.53

Spare10.56

Spare10.57

Norwegian Chart 537(SDD 2011000 162370) [43/11]

Svalbard – Freemansundet — Rock awash

251

Paragraph 11.39 2 line 5 After Freemanbreen. Add: A rockawash lies off the S coast of Barentsøya in position78 15 38N 21 41 59E.



Greenland – Nuup Kangerlua — Directions

132


1 Attention is drawn to the note on the chartregarding two-way routes in Nuup Kangerlua. Marinersshould note that the directions in this volume makethe assumption that electronic navigation aids may notbe available, and should be guided accordingly.A vessel making for Nuuk from seaward is

recommended to approach from 7 to 10 miles W ofKitsissut, steering for position 64 00 N 52 20 W.

Danish Chart 1331(SDD 2012000 097541) [36/12]

Greenland – Sisimiut — Approaches; wreck

151


A wreck, depth unknown, has been reported to liein approximate position 66 58 05N 53 47 95W, SSEof this inner route.

Danish Notice 1073/43/2012(SDD 2012000 216872) [47/12]

NP12

2 - 31

Coronation Gulf – Off-lying islands — Depth

431

Paragraph 14.180 1 line 9 Add:

A shoal, least depth 2 3 m lies in position67 58 27N 112 40 34W.

Canadian Notice(SDD 2010000 179285) [36/12]

Canada – Eureka Sound — Depth

491


The W part of Slidre Fiord appears to be deep; inthe E part the depths are irregular. A depth of 14 8 mlies about 3 miles SE of Eureka Station.

Canada East Notice 7920/05/12(SDD 2012000 103960) [36/12]

NP13 Australia Pilot Volume 1 (2011 Edition)

Navigation and Regulations – Traffic andOperations — Fishing; marine farms

2


Marine Farms1.8

1 Marine farms, which may be floating or fixedstructures, and their associated moorings should beavoided. The farms and beds are generally marked bybuoys or beacons, which may be lit. Their chartedpositions are approximate.

Australian Notice 24/1253/11 [01/12]

Northern Territory – Bowen Strait —Offshore dangers

130


4 Offshore dangers. A shoal (11 04 04S132 20 45E), with a depth of 7 4 m and CampbellReef (11 10 27S 132 23 84E).

131


A shoal (11 04 23S 132 11 93E), with a depth of9 9 m. A patch (11 04 62S 132 17 29E), with a depthof 7 7 m.


Western Australia – Ashmore Reef — Harbour

142


1 Landmarks: West Island has two prominent trees,visible from 5 miles and the remains of a weatherstation, charted as poles, visible from 3 miles (see1.21).Approach: A passage to the W lagoon lies 2 miles

NE of West Island (12 14 50S 122 58 00E) and leadsinto a lagoon where there are numerous detachedreefs and coral heads with depths of less than 2 m(charted as dangerous rocks) over them. A markedchannel leads to visitor moorings, however thechannel is not fully surveyed.


Securing to a mooring is recommended andpreferable to anchoring.

AA589034 [20/12]

Western Australia – Port Walcott —Controlling depths

231


Chart Aus 55 [09/12]

Western Australia – John’s Creek —Approach; buoy

234


A lit mooring buoy is moored at 20 38 36S117 12 40E.


Western Australia – Dampier —Directions; depths

235


Clear of a 12 4 m shoal (20 23 05S 117 04 60E),thence:


Western Australia –Barrow Island Oil Terminal —

Controlling depth

249


1 Controlling depth. 12 0 m in the berth andapproach channel.

AA561793 [48/11]

NP13

2 - 32

Western Australia – Griffin Marine Terminal —Operational status

251


1 Position and function. Griffin Marine Terminal(21 13 30S 114 38 73E) is the outlet for the GriffinOilfield. It is presently non operational, and is markedby a light buoy, surrounded by a safety zone (1.11).


Spare6.241


Spare6.242


Spare6.243

(AA558419) [44/11]

Western Australia – Saladin Marine Terminal —Under-keel clearance

256


...operator and shall be a minimum of 2 8 m dependent onthe swell conditions.

AA561794 [48/11]

Western Australia – Geraldton —Outer anchorages

280

Paragraph 7.191 1 line 1 For Ten Read Fourteen


Western Australia – Oyster Harbour —Directions

318


319-320


1 From the vicinity of the pilot boarding position(35 03 2S 117 58 4E), the initial approach to AtaturkEntrance leads NNW passing (with positions relativeto King Point Light (35 02 10S 117 55 10E)):

321


From a position about 2 miles SSE of Emu Point(34 59 91S 117 56 85E), the track leads NNWpassing (with positions relative to Emu Point):


ESE of Emu Point; an historic...

Paragraph 9.80 5 line 6 Delete Direction To Light


1 Useful marks. (Positions are relative to Emu Point(34 59 91S 117 56 85E)):


Western Australia – Esperance — Anchorages

331

Paragraph 9.142 1 line 1 For E Read H

AA579345 [08/12]

South Australia – Smoky Bay —Directions; marine farms

345


Caution. Marine farms may be encountered in thispassage (see 1.8).


South Australia – Warburton Channel —Directions; depth

346


Chart Aus 121 [09/12]

South Australia – Streaky Bay —Directions; depth

346


Chart Aus 121 [09/12]

South Australia – Spencer Gulf —Directions; caution

356


Caution. A number of marine farms lie in thevicinity of Buffalo Reef (34 43 11S 136 27 71E);see 1.8

AA573902 & AA573903 [04/12]

NP13

2 - 33

South Australia – Point Boston —Directions; marine farms

361


1 Caution. Marine farms may be encountered in thispassage (see 1.8).

From a position SE of Point Boston the track leads...


South Australia – Franklin Harbor — Directions

364


N of a beacon (port hand) (33 44 00S136 57 48E), thence:


South Australia – Point Turton —Directions; marine farms

367


2 A marine farm exists in the vicinity of 34 51 54S137 21 75E, (see 1.8).


South Australia – Port Augusta —Directions; marine farms

380


1 Caution. Marine farms may be encountered in thispassage (see 1.8).

From a position SE of Point Lowly (33 00 S...


South Australia – Port Augusta —Directions; buoy

381

Paragraph 11.229 6 line 2 For starboard hand Read Wcardinal


NP14 Australia Pilot Volume 2 (2010 Edition)

Navigation and Regulations – Traffic andOperations — Fishing; marine farms

2


Marine Farms1.5a

1 Marine farms, which may be floating or fixedstructures, and their associated moorings should beavoided. The farms and beds are generally marked bybuoys or beacons, which may be lit. Their chartedpositions are approximate.


Victoria – Port Phillip — Pilotage: depths

103Paragraph 4.4 1 lines 3-4 For 3 to 5 miles Read 5 miles

104Paragraph 4.12 1 lines 2-5 DeleteParagraph 4.12 2 line 2 Delete

Port of Melbourne Corporation(AA548331; AA550227) [35/11]

Victoria – Port Phillip – South Channel —Controlling Depths

104

After Paragraph 4.12 2 line 1 Including existing Section IVNotice Week 35/11 Insert:

South Channel E entrance maintained depth 16 0 mwithin deepwater channel and 13 1 m in the adjacentsecondary channel.

AA571850 [11/12]

Victoria – Port Phillip — transit restrictions

104


Transit restrictions4.14a

1 The transit of tankers of 11 6 m draught and moreis restricted through Port Phillip Heads when flood andebb tidal streams exceed 3 kn.For vessels, other than tankers, exceeding 12 1 m

draught: Inbound vessel transit is restricted when theflood and ebb are 5 kn and greater. Outbound vesseltransit is restricted when the flood is 5 kn and greater,or the ebb is 4 kn and greater.

Australian (Victorian) Notice 95/2011(AA545697) [35/11]

NP14

2 - 34

Victoria – Port Phillip Heads —Directions; sector light; depth

106Paragraph 4.26 3 line 8 For 324¾ Read 342¾


Aus Chart 144; ALL K2194 [43/11]

Victoria – Port Phillip – Swan Island docks —Directions

114

Paragraph 4.62 1 line 4 For 2 4 m Read less than 2 m

ENC AU439144 [43/11]

Victoria – Port Phillip – Approaches to Geelong— Directions; channel

115


1 On rounding Middle Ground Bank, vessels with adraught of greater than 11 6 m must use the defineddeep water channel (16 m); vessels with a draught ofless than 11.6 m may use the 400m wide secondarychannel as shown on chart AUS 158.Caution. The alignment (182 ), astern, of No 19

Light Beacon and Rosebud Jetty Light does not serveas a leading line for either the deep water channel orthe secondary channel.From a position close E of No.22 Light Buoy (port

hand) (38 19 64S 144 54 20E) the track leads NNW,passing (with positions from Hovell Pile Light):

Australian Notice 1/44/12(HH 014/200/02; AA571850) [11/12]

Victoria – Port Phillip – Approaches toMelbourne — Directions; channel

126


1 On rounding Middle Ground Bank, vessels with adraught of greater than 11 6 m must use the defineddeep water channel (16 m); vessels with a draught ofless than 11.6 m may use the 400m wide secondarychannel as shown on chart AUS 158.Caution. The alignment (182 ), astern, of No 19

Light Beacon and Rosebud Jetty Light does not serveas a leading line for either the deep water channel orthe secondary channel.From a position close E of No.22 Light Buoy (port

hand) (38 19 64S 144 54 20E) the track leads N intothe Shipping Fairway as shown on the chart, passing(with positions from Hovell Pile Light):

Australian Notice 1/44/12(HH 014/200/02; AA571850) [11/12]

Victoria – Port Phillip –Approaches to Melbourne –West Channel — Directions

126


Clear of unexploded ordnance (38 08 81S144 50 66E).


Victoria – Melbourne — Depths


Port of Melbourne Corporation(AA548331; AA550227) [35/11]

Victoria - Hastings — Arrival Information;regulations concerning entry

146


5 Regulations concerning entry. Harbour Masterapproval is required for vessels with a draught over13 0 m or a displacement over 100 000 tonnes.

AA566558; AA566557 [49/11]

Victoria – Lakes Entrance — Directions; buoy

175


SE of a light buoy (37 54 91S 147 57 94E)(special), thence:

Australian (Victoria) Notice 124/11 [03/12]

Tasmania – Robbins Passage —Directions; buoyage

189


W of a light buoy (port hand) (40 39 28S144 50 50E), thence:


Tasmania – Port Dalrymple —Pilotage; anchorages

203Paragraph 7.117 2 line 2 For 41 01 S Read 41 00 S

Paragraph 7.117 2 lines 4-5 For 41 00 7S 146 44 3ERead 40 59 75S 146 43 90E


1 Anchorage may be obtained in position 40 5 50S146 46 00E.

Australian Notice 25/1372/10(AA508139) [02/11]

NP14

2 - 35

Tasmania – Cape Sorell — Directions; rock

228


WSW of a rock (42 23 65S 145 12 80E) whichdries, thence:


Tasmania – Hobart — Directions

259


(AA552475) [43/11]

Tasmania – Spring Bay and approaches —Port limits


Australian Notice 16/806/2011(DHDB 1439923) [36/11]

New South Wales – Batemans Bay — Directions;fish aggregation device

293


...A fish aggregation device marked by a light buoy(special) (35 50 03S 150 22 65E) is seasonally deployedas charted.


New South Wales – Jervis Bay —Directions; buoy

301Paragraph 11.122 1 lines 5-7 Delete and To headland


New South Wales – Port Kembla — Anchorages


1 There are no recommended anchorages. Vesselshave reported the loss of anchors and cables whilstanchoring off Port Kembla and the adjacent coastline,particularly within the area bounded by the followingcoordinates:

34 22 00S 150 57 00E

34 22 00S 150 59 40E

34 25 70S 150 55 20E

34 25 70S 150 59 40E

Masters are advised to exercise extreme cautionwhen anchoring in these waters. However at theMaster’s discretion vessels may anchor more than3 miles off the coast, outside Port Kembla port limitsand not on or near entry leading lines.

Paragraph Paragraph 12.35 3 4 Replace by:...weigh anchor and proceed to sea without waiting toreceive instructions from Port Kembla Vessel TrafficInformation Centre.

Australian Notice 17/918(T)/2010(AA540714) [29/11]

New South Wales – Cape Banks —Fishing; fish aggregation devices

324


Fishing12.116a

1 Fish aggregation devices marked by light buoys(special), are deployed from September to June in thefollowing positions:

33 47 00S 151 22 70E

33 59 70S 151 26 70E

33 59 30S 151 20 90E


New South Wales – Sydney Harbour —Vertical clearance

327


(AA559932) [45/11]

New South Wales – Port Jackson — Anchorages

328


Merchant vessels. Designated anchorages arepositioned, as charted, at:

B1 33 50 81S 151 15 65E

B2 33 50 73S 151 15 57E

T1 33 50 66S 151 15 93E

W1 33 50 68S 151 16 47E


NP15 Australia Pilot Volume 3 (2012 Edition)Nil

NP18

2 - 36

NP18 Baltic Pilot Volume 1 (2009 Edition)

Denmark/Sweden – The Sound —SOUNDREP ship reporting system

3Paragraph 1.11 1-4 Replace by:

1 SOUNDREP. With the object of improving safetyand efficiency of navigation and to increase theprotection of the marine environment a mandatory shipreporting system (SOUNDREP) has been establishedin The Sound between Denmark and Sweden. Thesystem is operated by Sound VTS from Malmö,Sweden.All vessels of 300 gt or greater are required to

participate when navigating within the operational areaof SOUNDREP. The limits of the area, which areshown on the relevant charts, are as follows:

2 N limit.A line joining the following points:

56 06 58N 12 11 00E Rågeleje

56 14 00N 12 11 00E At sea N of Rågeleje

56 18 08N 12 17 39E At sea W of Kullen

56 18 08N 12 26 88E Kullen Lighthouse

S limit.A line joining the following points:

55 17 44N 12 27 28E Stevns Lighthouse

55 10 00N 12 27 28E At sea S of Stevns

55 10 00N 12 54 50E At sea S of Falsterbo

3 E limit.A line joining the following points:

55 10 00N 12 54 50E At sea S of Falsterbo

55 22 89N 13 01 93E Fredshög

W limit.A line joining the following points:

55 19 81N 12 27 30E Mandehoved

55 33 28N 12 35 53E Aflandshage

4 The SOUNDREP area is divided into two sectors atlatitude 55 50 00N; sector 1 lies to the N and sector2 lies to the S and each sector has been assigned aseparate VHF channel.Details of the reports required and the positions of

the reporting points are given in Admiralty List ofRadio Signals Volume 6(2).


For details of SOUNDREP, a mandatory shipreporting system for vessels navigating through TheSound, see 1.11 and Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(2).


Denmark – Kattegat – Directions — Routes

8


Paragraph 1.39 2 line 14 For (d) Read (c)

Paragraph 1.39 2 line 16 For (e) Read (d)

72


From E of Anholt, Route D leads SSE to a positionabout 13 miles W of Kullen (56 18 N 12 27 E) foronward passage to The Sound. Directions are givenat 4.23.


From the close vicinity of 56 51 N 10 48 E, Route Bcontinues SE and then S to join Route A at LightBuoy No 4 (56 23 8N 11 06 0E). Route A continues Sto join Route T at the N end of Samsø Bælt.Directions are given at 5.58 and 5.73.

74

Paragraph 2.30 1 line 2 For Route B Read Route D

127




...through the E side of Kattegat leads SSE to No 6 LightBuoy (56 45 N 11 53 E), and thence SSW to a position12 miles S of Anholt. It is marked on the centreline by lightbuoys (safe water).


128


Route A. From No 6 Light Buoy (56 45 N 11 53 E)at the junction with Routes T and D, the route leadsSW to a position 5 miles S of Anholt.


128-129

Paragraphs 4.20 to 4.26 Replace by:

4.201 Thence, the track continues SSE for a further

6 miles to No 6 Light Buoy (safe water), passing ENEof Fyrbanken (7 miles ENE of Anholt Light (56 44 N11 39 E)), a small bank lying close NE of AnholtØsterrev, a narrow spit of sand and large boulders,extending 4½ miles from the E end of the island,marked by a light buoy (E cardinal). The middle partof the spit is called Kobbergrund; the outer end iscalled Knoben. The N side and the E end aresteep-to.

NP18

2 - 37

4.211 From the vicinity of No 6 Light Buoy (safe water)

(56 45 N 11 53 E), the track leads SSW for 18 milesin clear water, between Routes A (4.22) and D (4.23)to a position 12 miles S of Anholt.

(Directions continue at 5.12)

Route A(continued from 4.20)4.22

1 From the vicinity of No 6 Light Buoy (safe water)(56 45 N 11 53 E), the track leads SW, passing SE ofAnholt Østerrev (5 miles W) (4.20) to a position5 miles S of Anholt.

Route D(continued from 4.20)4.23

1 From the vicinity of No 6 Light Buoy (safe water)(56 45 N 11 53 E), the track leads SSE for 28 miles,passing:

WSW of Rødebanke (56 42 N 12 06 E), a smallbank, reddish brown and yellow sand and coral,thence:

WSW of Store Middelgrund (56 33 N 12 05 E), abank consisting of rock, shingle, shell, and brownsand with several rocky patches in the S part; ingreater depths surrounding the bank, the bottomis mud. A mast (56 33 7N 12 06 3E), 120 m inheight, stands on the bank. The mast is equippedwith a racon and navigational light. An airobstruction light is located at the top of themast. Adangerous wreck of unknown depth (positionapproximate), lies 3 miles SSW and closer to thetrack.

2 In this vicinity, the centreline of Route D is markedby No 2 Light Buoy (safe water) (56 32 N 11 59 E),whence the track continues SSE as far as No 10 LightBuoy (safe water) (14 miles farther SSE) at thejunction with the routes from Halmstad (4.139) andSpodsbjerg (4.184). A wreck, with a depth of 23 3 m,lies 8 cables W of No 2 Light Buoy.

(Directions continue at 6.23and for Spodsbjerg at 4.184)

Other routes4.24

1 North-west of Anholt to south-west of LilleMiddelgrund (continued from 5.46a). From a position13 miles NW of Anholt, the track leads E for about20 miles, passing (positioned from Anholt Light(56 44 N 11 39 E) (4.17)):

N of a dangerous wreck of unknown depth(12½ miles WNW), thence:

N of Nordvestrev (5 miles WNW), a narrow reefstretching 4½ miles NW from the NW end of theisland, marked by a buoy (W cardinal) moored1½ miles NW of its NW extremity, thence:

2 N of Anholt Østerrev (4 miles E) (4.20), whenceit joins Route T SW of Lille Middelgrund.

4.251 Useful marks:

Nordbjerg (56 43 N 11 31 E), highest sandhill at NWextremity of Anholt.

Anholt Havn Light (56 43 N 11 30 E) (5.23).

4.261 South of Anholt to The Sound (continued from

5.63). From a position 12 miles S of Anholt, the trackleads SE for 19 miles, passing NE of Lysegrund(56 17 N 11 46 E), a sandy and rocky shoal markedat its NW and SW extremities by N and S cardinalbuoys, respectively. Lysegrund Light (black hut, redband, on concrete base, 9 m in height) stands on theN part of the shoal. The discolouration of the waterover the shoal can usually be seen at a shortdistance. The N and E sides of Lysegrund should notbe approached within a depth of 20 m, nor its S andW sides within a depth of 13 m.

2 The track continues as far as No 10 Light Buoy(safe water) (56 18 N 12 04 E) at the junction withRoute D (4.23) and the routes leading from Halmstad(4.139) and Spodsbjerg (4.184).

(Directions continue at 6.23and for Spodsbjerg at 4.184)

140


2 The route SW from Halmstad to No 10 LightBuoy (56 18 N 12 04 E) in the approach toThe Sound.

146


The route (4.26) from W side of Kattegat leading toThe Sound.

165


1 Offshore routes, as shown on the chart:Route T from 12 miles S of Anholt to Samsø Bælt.Route A from 5 miles S of Anholt to Fornæs.

2 Coastal routes, as shown on the chart:Route B from Læsø Rende to Fornæs.Route A from Fornæs to Samsø Bælt.

3 Other routes:Route from Ålborg Bugt to 12 miles S of Anholt.Route from Ålborg Bugt to Fornæs.Route from Ålborg Bugt to 13 miles NW of Anholt.



2 Route A. From a position about 5 miles S of Anholt(56 42 N 11 34 E), the route leads SW for 20 miles tojoin Route B.

166


1 From a position about 5 miles S of Anholt (56 42 N11 34 E), the track leads SW for about 20 miles, asfar as No 4 Light Buoy (safe water) (56 24 N 11 06 E),at the junction with Route B (5.58).

NP18

2 - 38


1 From a position approximately 13 miles NW ofAnholt, the track over the coastal bank, least depth4 3 m, leads SE for about 13 miles in the white sector(112 -130 ) of Anholt Havn Light (red round metaltower) (56 42 9N 11 30 5E), which...

167


1 An alternative channel, depth 3 2 m, leads NE tothe harbour entrance from a position approximately8 miles SW of Anholt, passing NW of Stensøre(56 41 N 11 31 E), a rock which lies on the coastalbank with irregular depths extending from the SW sideof the island, marked by a light buoy (S cardinal) atits SW extremity.


1 Route B. The W channel through Kattegat followsRoute B from Læsø Rende (3.381) to Ålborg Bugt,No 7 Light Buoy (56 51 N 10 48 E) and thence, toFornæs, No 4 Light Buoy (56 23 8N 11 06 0E).

2 Coastal route. A coastal route leads SSW fromÅlborg Bugt to the approaches to Mariager andRanders Fjords (5.59) and thence SE and SSE toFornæs No 4 Light Buoy.

3 From Fornæs, the route leads S for 20 miles to joinRoute T at the entrance to Samsø Bælt.

168

Paragraph 5.42 Title For Coastal route Read Route B


6 From No 6 Light Buoy, the track leads SSW for7½ miles as far as No 7 Light Buoy (safe water) atthe junction with the seaward end of the approachchannel to Limfjorden (5.94).Paragraph 5.43 1 line 4 Replace by:

(Directions continue at 5.58and for Limfjorden at 5.107)

169After Paragraph 5.46 Insert:

Other routes5.46a

1 Svitringen Rende to NW of Anholt. From No 7Light Buoy (56 50 9N 10 48 0E), the track leads E, inclear water, for 13 miles to a position 13 miles NW ofAnholt.

2 Useful marks:Anholt Light (56 44 N 11 39 E) (4.17).Anholt Havn Light (56 42 8N 11 30 5E) (5.23)



1 The principal route follows Route B (5.58). Thecoastal route leads SW to the approaches to Mariagerand Randers Fjords (5.59) and then SE to Fornæs.Alternative routes from Svitringen Rende lead E(5.46a) and SE (5.63) across Kattegat.

170

Paragraphs 5.58 to 5.63 including headings Replace by:

Route B(continued from 5.43)5.58

1 From No 7 Light Buoy (safe water) (56 50 9N10 48 0E), the route leads 10 miles SE to a positionapproximately 16 miles W of Anholt, and then 20 milesSSE to Fornæs and No 4 Light Buoy (56 24 N11 06 E), at the junction with Route A.

2 Useful marks:Gjerrild Light (56 31 7N 10 49 8E) (5.60).Hammelev Church (56 26 7N 10 53 7E).Bavnehøj Windmill (56 25 3N 10 51 9E), standing

on high ground.Grenaa Church (56 24 7N 10 52 5E).


Svitringen Rende to Mariager and Randers Fjordapproaches5.59

1 From a position about 6½ miles E of SvitringenRende S Lighthouse (56 51 0N 10 36 3E) at No 7Light Buoy (safe water), the track leads SSW in clearwater for 11 miles, to a position approximately 4 milesE of the approaches to Mariager Fjord (5.165) andRanders Fjord (5.203).

2 Useful marks:Als Odde Leading Lights (56 42 7N 10 20 8E)

(5.181).(Directions continue at 5.180 and 5.214)

Mariager and Randers Fjord approaches toFornæs5.60

1 From a position 4 miles E of the approaches toMariager and Randers Fjords, the track leads SE for13 miles, passing (positioned from Gjerrild Light (whitetower, 11 m in height) (56 31 7N 10 49 8E), onKnudshoved):

2 NE of a 4 3 m rocky patch (8½ miles NW), lyingabout 1½ miles NE of the W part of Tangen,a large shoal area subject to considerable andsudden changes, as shoals of mixed sandand weed may form and become almostawash. In 1985, Tangen was reported to beextending N. Thence:

3 Between a 4 m patch (5½ miles N), the N-mostof the numerous small shoals forming the Epart of Tangen, the majority of which lie SWof the track, and a wreck (3¾ miles N) with adepth of 5 1 m. Thence:

NE of a 5 m shoal (2¾ miles NNE) and an isolatedpatch of 5 3 m1 mile ESE lying closer to the track.

Clear of a 4 m shoal (3½ miles NE), and:4 NE of Gjerrild Flak (1½ miles E), extending

about 1 mile NE from the coast at GjerrildKlint (5.53), with irregular depths up to 2 milesESE of this shoal.

NP18

2 - 39

5.611 From a position about 4 miles E of Gjerrild Light,

the track leads SSE for 10 miles to seaward ofGjerrild Bugt, a bay with numerous wrecks, passingENE of Fornæs (6½ miles SE), the E extremity ofJylland, a wide projecting point, on which standsFornæs Lighthouse (5.57), as far as No 4 Light Buoy(safe water) at the junction with Route B (5.58) andRoute A (5.16).5.62

1 Useful marks:Mejlgård Manor House (spire) (56 30 2N10 39 5E), white, red roof.

Treå Windmill (56 31 8N 10 42 1E), without sails.Glesborg Church (56 28 6N 10 43 7E), white.

2 Rimsø Church (56 28 7N 10 47 7E), white.Sostrup Manor House (tower) (56 29 9N

10 49 4E), red building.Stensmark Manor House (56 26 7N 10 56 7E), red

building with tower, not charted.Hammelev Church (56 26 7N 10 53 7E), white.

3 Bavnehøj Windmill (56 25 3N 10 51 9E),standing on high ground.

Grenaa Church (56 24 7N 10 52 5E).(Directions continue at 5.73)

Other routes5.63

1 Svitringen Rende to South of Anholt. From No 7Light Buoy (56 50 9N 10 48 0E), the track leads SEin clear water for 35 miles, to a position, on Route T,12 miles S of Anholt.

2 Useful marks:Anholt Light (56 44 N 11 39 E) (4.17).Anholt Havn Light (56 42 8N 11 30 5E) (5.23).Sønderbjerg (56 41 5N 11 32 4E) (4.32).


186


1 From a position approximately 4 miles E of theapproaches to Mariager and Randers Fjords, the trackleads W for about 4 miles to Mariager Fjord LightBuoy (starboard hand), which marks the seaward endof the approach to the dredged channel.

192


2 North-east approaches. From a positionapproximately 3 miles N of Tangen (5.60), the trackleads W for 4 miles to the Mariager Fjord Light Buoy.


4 East approach. From a position approximately3 miles N of Tangen (5.60), the track leads SW for5 miles, passing NW of Tangen. The track then leadsW in the green sector (254 -276 ) of Udbyhøj Light(5.214) for about 2 miles, passing S of Boels Plade,and then WNW for Randers Fjord Light Buoy (safewater).

198



199


Danish Notices 29/742/10; 35/866/10(SDD 2010000 122790; 146026) [40/10]

Sweden – Kattegat – Northern part – Göteborgand approaches — Restricted area

11

Paragraph 1.67 including heading Delete

12

Paragraph 1.68 Delete

80


101


thence:


SE of a 1 8 m patch (2½ cables NE), thence:

103

Paragraph 3.239 1 lines 2-3 Delete It is to Area (3.24).

Swedish Notice 390/7682/2012(SDD 2012000 035205) [12/12]

Sweden – Kattegat – Northern part – Göteborgand approaches — Restricted area

11

Existing Section IV Notice Week 12/12 Paragraph 1.67including heading Replace by:

Spare1.67

12

Existing Section IV Notice Week 12/12 Paragraph 1.68Replace by:

1.681 Spare.


NP18

2 - 40

Denmark – Kattegat – Læsø SE – Groves Flak –Route T — Buoys and shoal

128


...depths of up to 95 m separates the two banks.An isolated 19 1 m shoal (57 06 4N 11 37 3E)lies near the E edge of Groves Flak; a 12 4 mshoal lies 2 miles farther SSW. And:

Danish Notice 4/171/2012; BA Chart 2107(SDDs 2012000 023743; 2009000 044316) [09/12]

Denmark – Kattegat E – Halmstad —Approach channel; depth; draught

141


...9 5 m.



Denmark – Kattegat S – Isefjord —General Information; pilot boarding;

controlling depths

147

Paragraph 4.191 1 lines 1–3 Replace by:

1 Pilots can be obtained from Hundested (4.210) inthe entrance to the fjord. Pilots board 1½ cables N ofthe light buoy (safe water) (55 59 65N 11 51 01E).For details...


...channel, 4 miles in length, is entered through a position7 cables NW of Spodsbjerg Light...


2 On the E side of the entrance are the two...


1 Main channel, N of Sætteriet has depth 8 2 m; Sover Lynæs Sand has depth 6 m, but is subject tosilting.

Danish Chart 117, Danish Notice 20/533/2012(SDD 2012000 099278) [25/12]

Denmark – Isefjord – Hundested Havn —Directions

148


...about 2½ miles, passing close to the light buoy (safewater) (1 mile N) (4.191), and then S for 6 cables as far...


...the W mole of Yderhavn (4.204), marked by a...


West mole head (55 57 91N 11 50 53E) (4.210),Yderhavn, Hundested Havn.

N entrance light (55 57 59N 11 50 47E) (4.211),Trafikhavn, Hundested Havn.


Denmark – Isefjord – Hundested Havn —Anchorages and harbours

149


...Isefjord, is a commercial port with ferries to Rørvig;RoRo, bulk and cruise ship berths and a fishing harbour.


2 Controlling depths: 8 2 m in the approach channel.5 5 m in the entrance to Yderhavn, the old harbour,subject to silting, particularly in the area SW and W ofthe W mole. From 8 2 m to 7 m in Trafikhavn.


Harbour. Yderhavn, the old harbour, protected bytwo moles,...

Paragraph 4.210 3 line 7–8 Replace by:

Trafikhavn, the commercial harbour is protected bya S mole with an entrance, 150 m in width, facingSW.


1 Directions for entering harbour. From a positionabout 5 cables SSW of Yderhavn, the approachchannel leads NNE, passing (positioned from the Wmole head light (55 57 91N 11 50 53E)):

2 WNW of the N end of the cruise pier (2 cablesS), thence:

ESE of a 5 m shoal (½ cable SW), thence:ESE of a spit (¼ cable SSW) (4.203), and:

3 Between the mole heads (1 cable S), eachmarked by a light (aluminium lantern and greypedestal, 2 m in height).

4 To enter Trafikhavn, the track leads NE betweenthe S mole head and the new berth, marked by lights:

New berth SW corner (grey pedestal, 2 m in height).South mole head (grey lantern on pile structure, 4 min height).


1 Alongside berths:Yderhavn, the old harbour, depths of 3 0 to 4 5 m.Trafikhavn, depth 8 2 m on the 300 m new berth;7 0 m on the 320 m RoRo general cargo berth.

Cruise pier, facing the entrance channel, 260 m witha depth 8 2 m.


NP18

2 - 41

Denmark – Kattegat South – Svitringen Rende toFornæs — General information; prohibited area

170


Prohibited area5.55a

1 An area to which entry is prohibited, marked bylighted buoys (special), is centred 13¼ miles NE ofFornæs Lighthouse. The area incorporates a windfarm under construction (2011). A lighted transformerplatform (56 35 75N 11 09 17E) marks the seawardend of a submarine cable to Grenaa.


after line 6 Add:

3 Anholt wind farm transformer platform(56 35 75N 11 09 17E).

Chart 2108; Danish Notice 23/608/2012(SDD 2012000 112393) [26/12]

Denmark – Kattegat west –Fornæs to Samsø Bælt —Directions; track; depth

172


W of a 17 3 m shoal (56 19 43N 11 06 38E),thence:

Danish chart 128(SDD 2011000 215075) [51/11]

Denmark – Kattegat South – Grenaa Havn —Approach channel; leading lights

173


Directions for entering harbour5.81

1 Grenaa leading line. From a position about2½ miles E of Fornæs Light (56 26 61N 10 57 44E)(5.57), on the alignment of Grenaa Havn LeadingLights (241 5 ) the main channel, 100 m wide anddredged to 12 m, leads 3½ miles WSW, passing (withpositions from Grenaa Front Leading Light (56 24 84N10 55 57E)):

2 NNW of a light buoy (port hand) (1½ mile ENE)marking the entrance to the dredged channel,thence:

SSE of a 4 2 mshoal (1½ mileNE)marked by a buoy(starboard hand), thence:

3 SSE of Lillerev (9 cables NNE), a shoalextending a short distance SE from thenarrow coastal bank, and between a pair oflight buoys (lateral), and:

NNW of Kalkgrund (7 cables E), a rocky shoal with aleast depth of 1 3 m at the E extremity, lying closeE of the E mole head. The shoal is marked by alight buoy (N cardinal) at its NEextremity, and by abuoy (S cardinal) at its SE extremity.

4 The track then leads, from a position within themole heads about 1 cable WNW of the E mole headlight, SW in the white sector (216 -219 ) of GrenaaHavn Directional light (grey framework tower, 18 m inheight) (56 24 53N 10 55 45E) to the ferry harbour.

Danish notice 26/687/2012(SDD 2012000 129311) [30/12]

Denmark – The Sound – Helsingborg toLous Flak — TSS; buoyage

210

Paragraph 6.90 1 line 5 For W5 Read W5A


... patch with a depth of 10 7 m lies 2 cables NNE ofW5A...

Paragraph 6.93 1 line 4 For W5 Read W5A

Paragraph 6.93 1 line 5 For W5A Read W5B

BA Chart 2594Danish Notice 7/247/2012(SDD 2012000 040115) [14/12]

Denmark – The Sound – Københavns Havn —Trekroner Light sector

210

Paragraph 6.95 1 line 4 For (207 -210 ) Read (207 -211 )

215

Paragraph 6.122 1 line 4For (207 -210 )Read (207 -211 )

220



Denmark – The Sound – Københavns Havn —Trekroner and Prøvesten Light sectors

215


220


221

Paragraph 6.155 3 line 3 For (178 -180½ )Read (178 2 -180 3 )


Danish Notice 45/1199-1200/11(SDD 2011000 211598) [49/11]

NP18

2 - 42

Denmark – The Sound – Københavns —Arrival information; restricted area

217


5 A restricted area for construction work, marked bybuoys, lies W and SW of a lighted buoy (spar,starboard) (55 43 35N 12 38 56E).


Denmark – The Sound – Københavns Havn —Trekroner Light sector

220

Paragraph 6.149 2-3 Including existing Section IV NoticeWeek 2/12 Delete

Danish Chart 134(SDD 2011000 238311) [06/12]

Denmark – The Sound – Københavns Havn —Kronløbet directional lights

220

Paragraph 6.150 1-2 Replace by:

1 Kronløbet Directional Lights. Two lights (latticebeacons, 146 m apart) are displayed from Frihavnen(6.165), between Nordbassinet and Mellembassinet.The white sectors of these lights (N light 243 -246 , Slight 240 -243 ) are visible together in a lane 60 mwidth on a line of bearing (242 8 ) leading through thecentre of Kronløbet. To the N of the track the N lightdisplays a green sector (241 -243 ), while S of thetrack a red sector (243 -245 ) is displayed from the Slight.

North light (framework tower, 23 m in height)(55 42 31N 12 36 01E).

South light (framework tower, 23 m in height) (146 mfarther SW).

2 The track leads from Renden, the N part ofKongedybet (6.155) which lies between Stubbenreclamation work and N end of Middelgrund, andthence into Kronløbet (6.119), least width 150 m,passing (positioned from Trekroner Light):


Denmark – København —Basins and berths; depths

223Paragraph 6.165 2 lines 2-3 For 9 5 to 10 m Read 8 5 m to9 5 mParagraph 6.165 3 line 5 For 8 5 m Read 7 5 m


Sweden – The Sound – Lundåkrabukten —Lous Flak to Malmö Redd

225


1 Passage east of Pinhättan. From a position9 cables W of Valgrundet Light Buoy (S cardinal)(55 49 14N 12 47 57E), marking a 2 2 m shoal at theSW extremity of Valgrundet (6.102), the track leadsSE in the deeper trench close SW of the chartedanchorages.

2 From a postion 1½ miles N of Pinhättan Light(55 45 25N 12 51 93E) (6.184) the track leads S intothe SW part of Lundåkrabukten (6.190) to pass E ofthe light buoy (starboard hand) (55 46 35N12 51 75E), N of Pinhättan Light.


Denmark – Storebælt — Directions; lights

254


2 Røsnæs Lighthouse (disused) (white squaretower, 15 m in height) (55 44 62N10 52 15E).


255


257


...2½ miles E of Røsnæs Lighthouse (disused) (7.12),consists of an...


259


260


286


...SSW of Røsnæs Puller Light (55 44 99N 10 50 60E)(7.17) and...

288



1 From a position about 3 miles SW of RøsnæsPuller Light (55 44 99N 10 50 60E) (7.17), the trackleads S for about 2½ miles, passing (positioned fromRøsnæs Puller Light):

Danish Notice 35/864/10(SDDs 2010000 146026; 166075) [43/10]

NP18

2 - 43

Denmark – Århus Bugt – Hov Havn — Lights

271


...protected by moles to the S and NE.

272


SSW for 4 miles,


Denmark – Odense Fjord — Directions;buoyage; beacons; dredged channel

277


1 Controlling depth. The natural winding channelthrough the fjord from the entrance to Lindøterminalenis maintained at a depth of 11 0 m. A number ofsections dredged to 7 0 m lie immediately adjacent tothe 11 0 m channel; their positions are shown on thechart. From Lindøterminalen to Odense at the head ofthe fjord, the channel is maintained at a depth of7 5 m, subject to silting, with a maximum permitteddraught of 7 m.

278


NW of a 3 1 m patch (5½ cables NE) lying on thenarrow coastal bank off Skoven and marked by abuoy (port hand), thence:

NW of No 2 Light Buoy (port hand) (2½ cables ENE)marking the NW extremity of the coastal bank.


4 From a position about 2 cables from the front light,the track leads S in the white sector (164 -173½ ) ofEnebærodde Light (55 31 0N 10 33 7E) (7.190) forabout 2½ cables, passing W of the W extremity of thecoastal bank off Skoven (2¾ cables ESE).

5 From a position about 2 cables N of EnebæroddeLight, the track leads SSE in the dredged channelthrough Gabet (7.186) passing between Nos 1 and4 Light Buoys (lateral). The E side of the channel isdredged to 7 0 m in this stretch and the boundarybetween it and the main channel, which is dredged to11 0 m, is marked by the alignment (152 ) of leadingbeacons (white with cross topmarks) (55 30 8N10 34 1E and 3 cables SSE).


1 From a position about 1 cable ESE of EnebæroddeLight, the track leads SSW for about 4 cables, passing(with positions from Enebærodde Light):

WNW of No 6 Light Buoy (port hand) (2 cables SE)marking the SE extremity of the 7 0 m dredgedchannel, thence:

WNW of a 3 7 m shoal (4 cables SSE) marked byNo 8 Light Buoy (port hand).

278-279


1 From a position about 2 cables NE of LammesøHage Front Leading Light (55 30 0N 10 32 3E)(7.204), the track trends SE for about 4 cables in thecentre of the channel to a position between No 14Light Beacon (port hand) and No 5B Light Buoy(starboard hand).

279


The SW side of the channel is dredged to 7 0 malong this stretch and its SW extremity is marked byNos 5B and 7 Light Buoys (starboard hand).

Paragraph 7.205 5 line 6 For 2 cables NRead 2 cables NE


The SE side of the channel is dredged to 7 0 malong this stretch and its SE extremity is marked byNos 20 and 22 Light Buoys (starboard hand).

Danish Notice 42/1144/11 and BA chart 931(SDD 2011000 196669) [46/11]

Denmark – Storebælt Link – West section —Vertical and horizontal clearances

287

Paragraph 8.19 1 line 4 For 18 m Read 16 9 m

Paragraph 8.19 1 line 8 For 104 m Read 70 m

Danish ENC DK4STOBS(SDD 2009000 160145) [06/10]

Denmark – Storebælt Link; —Vertical clearance

287Existing Section IV Notice Week 06/10 Paragraph 8.19 1

line 4 For 16 9 m Read 18 m

Danish Chart 141(SDD 2010000 052332) [22/10]

Denmark – Storebælt – Østerrenden N —Light replaced by buoy

288


Østerrenden N Light Buoy (55 21 81N 11 01 35E).


289


...Light Buoy (starboard hand) (55 21 81N 11 01 35E).The light buoy, which marks the N end of the...


1 From a position NE of Østerrenden N Light Buoy(8.29)...

NP18

2 - 44


...from Østerrenden N Light Buoy):


Germany – Flensburg – Outer Approaches —Directions; anchorage

424


NNW of the Geltinger Bucht container ship lay-upanchorage (1¾ miles SW) (12.252), and:

427


Geltinger Bucht anchorage has been designated(2009) as a container ship lay-up anchorage untilfurther notice and is marked by buoys (special).

German Notice 47(16)26(T)/09(SDDs 2009000 172794; 177707) [02/10]

Germany – Travemünde —Directions; route; leading lights

442

Paragraph 13.67 2 line 4 For (13.69) Read (13.96a)


...Wismarbucht (13.27), the track leads SW for15 miles following the Lübeck-Gedser Route toTravemünde Light Buoy (safe water), passing SE of...


Spare13.69

445

Paragraph 13.85 1 line 5 For 10 56 3E Read 10 56 8E


1 From a position in the vicinity of Travemünde LightBuoy (safe water), moored 3 miles NE of thebreakwater, the track leads SW for 1½ miles to thedredged channel. The track passes SE of a rock,least...

After Paragraph 13.96 1 Add:

13.96a1 Priwall Leading Lights:

Front light (white triangle, red border, point up onwhite mast, 13 m in height) (53 57 5N10 53 0E).

Rear light (white triangle, red border, point down, onwhite framework tower, 21 m in height) (380 mfarther SW).

2 The alignment (216 ) of these synchronised lightsleads SW for 1 mile through the dredged channel(100 m in width), marked by two pairs of light buoys(lateral).

German Notice 47/(16)37/09(SDD 2009000 172798) [02/10]


Sweden – East coast — Restricted Areas

15



113


114



2 Restricted area. The entrance to Slite Hamn lieswithin a Restricted...

115


Paragraph 2.219 1 lines 5-6 Delete It lies within toRestricted Area.


145


235



268


269


NP19

2 - 45

272


Depths7.32a

1 The greater part of the waters lying NW ofMysingen, as shown on the chart, are incompletelysurveyed. Uncharted dangers may exist. Similar areasexist W of Nåttarö and between Råno and Alö.


276

Paragraph 7.68 1 lines 1-2 Delete The port to See 7.17.

278


284


307


Swedish Notice 390/7686; 391/7684 and 7687;392/7689/2012(SDD 2012000 035205; 040056; 045644) [12/12]

Sweden – East coast — Restricted areas

15


Spare1.89


Spare1.90

113


Spare2.201

115


Spare2.223

145


Spare3.197

268


7.81 Spare.

269


Spare7.17

272


Spare7.38

284


7.1281 Spare.

307


Spare7.280

Swedish Notice 390/7686; 391/7684 and 7687;392/7689/2012(SDD 2012000 035205; 040056; 045644) [13/12]

Sweden – SE Baltic – Södra Midsjöbanken —Directions; light platform

86


...of 11 to 18 m. A lighted platform (2.18) has beenestablished at the N end of the bank. A wreck with a depthof 15 m lies...


Södra Midsjöbanken, lighted platform (55 43 20N17 19 98E) (2.18).


2 AIS:Södra Midsjöbanken platform (55 43 20N17 19 98E).

For information, see The Mariner’s Handbook andAdmiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.

NP19

2 - 46

87


Södra Midsjöbanken, lighted meteorologicalplatform (mast on yellow platform, 100 m inheight) (55 43 20N 17 19 98E).


Södra Midsjöbanken platform (55 43 20N17 19 98E).

For information, see The Mariner’s Handbook andAdmiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.


NNW of Södra Midsjöbanken platform (30 milesSSE) (2.18); thence:


Sweden – Karlskrona approaches —Directions; buoyage

121

Paragraph 3.7 3 lines 5-6 For near Karlskrona AngöringLight Buoy (56 03 2N 15 33 4E) Read in position56 02 8N 15 33 3E.

141

Paragraph 3.168 1 lines 3-4 For the vicinity of KarlskronaAngöring light buoy (56 03 2N 15 33 4E) ReadKarlskrona pilot boarding position (56 02 8N 15 33 3E)

145

Paragraph 3.193 1 lines 3-4 For close to KarlskronaAngöring Light Buoy (56 03 2N 15 33 3E). Read inposition 56 02 8N 15 33 3E.

146


5 Thence the track leads 6 miles WNW, clear of anycharted dangers, to a position 4 miles SSW of VästraFörsänkningen Light (56 06 5N 15 34 5E).

Paragraph 3.209 2-4 & 5 lines 1-2 Replace by:

2 From a position SSW of Västra FörsänkningenLight, the alignment (012 5 ) of these lights leads4 miles NNE to the entrance, through a channelmarked by light buoys (lateral) and in the white sector(001 7 –014 1 ) of Västra Försänkningen Light,passing (with positions from the light):

3 E of Farstugrund (2½ miles SSW), thence:WNW of Esten (2¼ miles S), thence:ESE of Saltknölen (1¾ miles SSW), thence:WNW of Sundsbåden (1½ miles S), thence:ESE ofÄllebåden (1 mile SSW), thence:W of Yttre Hjortgrundet (1 mile S).


1 Alternative channel. From a position close E ofAnchor Berth A (3.213) the ....

147


1 Anchorage may be obtained at Anchor Berth A(56 03 5N 15 31 5E).


Southern Baltic - Sweden - Åhus — Draughts

127


128



2 The dredged outer harbour is about 70 m wide witha turning basin at each end. The outer turning basinis for vessels of length up to 120 m with a maximumrecommended draught of 5 9 m. The inner turningbasin is for vessels of length up to 110 m with amaximum recommended draught of 6 3 m.


Sweden – Västervik approaches —Directions; tracks; lights; buoyage; depth

196


2 From a position close N of Västerviks AngöringLight Buoy (N cardinal) (57 44 9N 16 55 0E), thetrack leads 5½ miles W through the fairway, markedby buoys and light buoys (lateral), in the white sector(268 –269½ ) of Västerbådan Light (red tower, blackbase, 15 m in height, floodlit) (57 44 84N 16 44 50E),to a position 1½ cables E of the light, passing (withpositions from Västerbådan Light):


4 N of Norra Per-Mattsbåden (1 mile ESE), thence:N of a 4 8 m shoal (7 cables ESE), marked by No 4Light Buoy (port hand) which also marks thejunction where the inshore channel briefly joinsthe main channel to lead E for 6 cables.

Tallskärshålet Leading Lights:Front light (green tower, white band) (57 43 5N16 43 5E).

Rear light (similar structure) (5¾ cables SSWof frontlight).

5 From a position 1½ cables E of Västerbådan Lightthe alignment (207 ) of the above lights leads1¼ miles SSW through Tallskärshålet, a narrow,straight channel marked by light buoys (lateral),between Lilla Tallskär on the W side and Stångskär,on which stands a beacon (white cairn, red band, 4 min height) (57 44 0N 16 44 3E), on the E side.

6 Useful mark:Light (yellow post) (57 44 1N 16 43 3E) standing

close off the SE point of Gränsö.

NP19

2 - 47

197


2 From a position close NE of Marsholmen(57 43 6N 16 43 2E) the alignment (279 ) of theselights leads 1 mile W to a position 2½ cables from thefront light, passing (with positions from the front light):

S of a rocky shelf which extends 1½ cables ESE fromthe SE extremity of Gränsö, and is marked by alight buoy (starboard hand), thence:

3 S of an islet (3¾ cables E) which is marked bya beacon on its S side and a light buoy(starboard hand) close off its W extremity,thence:

N of Borgö Light (3 cables ESE) (white lantern)displayed from the NW side of Borgö.

4 Thence the track leads 1½ miles NNW through thefairway, marked by buoys and light buoys (lateral),initially in the white sector (154 –158 ), astern, ofBorgö Light to a position E of Källarmästaren Beacon(57 44 6N 16 40 5E), and thence in the white sector(347 -350 ) of Vitudden Light (white lantern)(57 45 7N 16 40 5E) to Djuphamnen.

5 From a position S of Ekholmsgrundet Beacon(57 45 4N 16 40 6E) the channel leads 2 cables NWto Blockholmssundet entrance, in the white sector(301 –307 ) of No 1 Light (green tower, grey base,6 m in height), exhibited on the N side of the channel.


Alternative channel5.79a

1 From a position N of Borgö Light an alternativechannel leads 1 mile N through Lusärnafjärden in thewhite sector (176 -182 ), astern, of Borgö Light to aposition between Tärnskär (57 45 0N 16 41 8E) andTärnskärgrund, 2 cables WSW, both of which aremarked by light buoys (lateral). Thence the channelleads 6 cables NW in the white sector (301 –307 ) ofNo 1 Light (5.78) to rejoin the main channel S ofEkholmsgrundet Beacon, passing N of Lil laLusärnagrund (57 45 1N 16 41 0E), marked on its Nside by a light buoy (port hand).

197-198


2 From a position in the main channel 4½ cables E ofBorgö Light (57 43 8N 16 41 6E) the track leads5 cables NNW into Lusärnafjärden through either oftwo channels marked by buoys (lateral and isolateddanger) and a beacon standing on a rock in thecentre of the fairway. Thence the track continuesNNW to join the alternative channel (5.79a) andthence the main channel S of EkholmsgrundetBeacon.

3 A branch channel continues NNW to pass N ofStora Ringholm and enter the inner harbour close Wof the inner end of Blockholmssundet.Useful mark:

Watch tower (57 45 9N 16 38 7E).


Sweden – Norrköping – Pampushamnen —Directions; lights; buoys; dredged channel;

depths

215

Paragraph 5.198 8 line 5 For (251 -254 )Read (251 1 -253 3 )

221-222


1 Lindökanalen Leading Lights:Front light (58 37 0N 16 14 9E).Rear light (4¼ cables WSW of front light).

From a position NE of Stora Juten Light (58 38 1N16 19 7E) the track leads 2½ miles WSW toPampushamnen entrance passing NNW of Stora Jutento join the alignment (247 ) of the above lights whichlead in a 100 m wide channel, dredged to 14 9 m(2011) and marked by light buoys (lateral). At nightthe channel leads in the white sector (066 8 -067 5 ),astern, of Stora Juten Västra Light (58 38 1N16 19 7E).

2 The Pampushamnen turning basin, with a diameterof about 400 m, and the dredged area are marked attheir limits by buoys and light buoys (lateral). Thecentre of the short channel through Pampushamnen isindicated by the alignment (295 ) of PampushamnenLeading Lights:

Front light (red triangle on red post) (58 37 7N16 14 3E), displayed from the NE corner ofHändelön.

Rear light (similar structure) (80 m NW of front light).3 Caution. In winter an ice-bridge, crossing the

entrance channels, is established from Getå (58 40 N16 18 E), on the N side, to Marby, 4 miles S andclose E of Lindöhamnen.

222


1 Lindökanalen is entered from Pampushamnenturning basin from the alignment of LindökanalenLeading Lights (5.251).


1 Pampushamnen. The oil harbour has three berthswith depths of 9 0 m, 11 9 m and 14 2 m. Themulti-purpose terminal has a total length of 610 m witha dredged depth of 14 2 m; the NW end of the quayis a RoRo berth with a dredged depth of 10 4 m. Asecond RoRo berth, 80 m in length, lies close S ofthe main quay and has a depth of 8 8 m.


NP20

2 - 48


Navigation and regulations – Traffic andoperations – Traffic — Recommended tracks

10


...measured. In 2011 the Finnish authoritiespromulgated procedures revising its channel depthpractice. The channel depth is referred to as theauthorised draught. The authorised draught of achannel refers to the maximum design draught atwhich a ship can use the channel. The user of thechannel may, on a case by case basis and aftercareful consideration of all relevant factors, exercisediscretion to exceed the authorised draught. On...


3 The channels affected by the channel depthpractice are distinguished by grey shading on nationalcharts and are announced in the Finnish Notice toMariners. Details of ‘The channel depth practice inFinland - principles and implementation’ (FTAInstruction 4955/1021/2011) may be obtained from theFinnish Transport Agency website www.fta.fi

Finnish Notice 33/633/2011(SDD 2011000 221059) [51/11]

Sweden – Gulf of Bothnia — Special regulations;restricted area

19


360

Paragraph 9.37 1-4 Delete

417


418


422


450


489


Swedish Notice 391/7690-7691-7692; 392/7689/2012(SDD 2012000 040056; 045644) [12/12]

The following notice is to be implemented at0000 UTC on 1st September 2012

Gulf of Finland – Russia – Off Rodsher and OffHogland TSS — Deep-water route discontinued

89

Paragraph 2.34 5 line 1-3 Delete

91


2.431 Spare.

Russian Notice 8/1043(P)/12(SDD 2012000 035349) [34/12]

The following notice is to be implemented at0000 UTC on 1st December 2010

Gulf of Finland – Porkkala to Kalbådagrund —Directions; traffic separation schemes

90

Paragraph 2.39 1 line 1 After route Insert (via thePrecautionary Area)

Paragraph 2.41 1 lines 6-7 Replace by:NNW of Keri saar Lighthouse (59 42 0N 25 01 3E)

(3.92) and through the E section of the OffPorkkala Lighthouse TSS, thence:

Paragraph 2.41 2 line 4 For the E end Read the W end

Paragraph 2.42 1 line 2 For the E end Read the W end

IMO COLREG.2/Circ 61; Finnish Notice 17/263/2010(SDD 2010000 101433) [43/10]

Russia – Luzhskaya Guba — Directions


4 SSW of Banka Ryabinina (14¾ miles NW) andthe deeper shoals surrounding it; and throughan area 13 miles ESE of Ostrov Sommers,declared by the Russian authorities as aPrecautionary Area, at the junction with thefairway leading to Luzhskaya Guiba (3.156).Thence:


1 From a position 2 miles E of the Off OstrovSommers TSS No 5 Light Buoy (safe water)(60 09 56N 28 01 17E), within the area declared bythe Russian authorities as a Precautionary Area, thetrack, marked by light buoys (safe water) leads SSEfor 12 miles to a position E of Rif Ostrovnoy Light(59 56 43N 27 58 76E) (3.133). The track then leadsa further 17 miles SSE to Reka Luga, passing (withpositions from Gorki Light (59 47 99N 28 29 79E)):


1 Three anchorage areas are established in theLuzhskaya Guba region, as follows:

Area 10A. NE of Mys Kolganpya (3.157).

Russian Notices 49/6372/2010; 49/6373/2010(SDD 2010000 195559) [06/11]

http://www.fta.fi

NP20

2 - 49

Gulf of Finland – Estonia – Muuga sadam andapproaches - Approach east of Aksi —

Recommended track

109


1 Recommended track. From a position W ofRammu saar, the recommended track leads W in thewhite sector (257 5 -262 5 ) of Muuga (Karbimadal)Light (white round metal tower, red base, with2 balconies, 15 m in height) (59 33 00N 24 58 36E),towards the entrance leading lights (3.97), passing(with positions from Aksi Light (59 35 74N 25 05 90E)(3.92)):

Estonian Notice 2/12/2012(SDD 2012000 026191) [08/12]

Gulf of Finland – Russia – Luzhskaya Guba —Directions

117



1 From a position in the vicinity of No 5 Light Buoy(safe water) (60 09 10N 28 05 14E), in the Off OstrovSommers TSS, within the area declared by...


Finland – Koppnäs — Directions; Lights

142Paragraph 4.30 1 lines 5-7 Replace by:...by buoys (cardinal), and leads ESE in the whitesector (099 3 -101 2 ) of Koppnäs Light (59 51 0N22 58 0E) ahead, to the harbour.


Finland – Helsinki approaches – Björköfjärden —Directions; leading beacons; authorised draught


1 From a position NW of Kytö (60 04 N 24 43 E) onthe Gåsgrundet leading line (4.183), the track leads1¾ miles NNW in a channel, authorised for a draughtof 4 3 m, towards the entrance to Björköfjärden.Thence the track passes between Storaisarn(60 06 1N 24 41 4E) and Torraisarn, 1½ cables SW,and continues NNW, the track being marked by buoys(cardinal). It passes between Pentala (60 06 N24 40 E) and the mainland; thence, marked by buoys(lateral), 3½ miles NW to Kivenlahti (60 09 N 24 38 E).A bridge crosses the inlet ½ mile above Kivenlahti.


Finland – Helsinki — Directions;authorised draught

167




Finland – Helsinki — Directions;authorised draught

169



Gulf of Finland – North shore – Orrengrund toKotka channel — Directions

188


192


193


194


195



5.711 From a position E of Tiiskeri (60 09 75N

26 15 52E) the entrance, marked by light buoys andbuoys, and authorised for a draught of 10 0 m, initiallyuses the alignment (023 1 ) of Orrengrund LeadingLights, as described at 5.46, to a position 2¼ milesSSW of the front leading light.

2 From this position, 4¾ miles SW of Lålätta Light(60 17 20N 26 33 07E), the recommended track leads049 6 keeping within the white sector (052 -062 5 ) ofLålätta Light, passing:

NWof Helsinggrund shoal, marked by light buoys (Wand N cardinal), thence:

3 SE of Orrengrund (60 16 40N 26 26 17E) (5.47)and Båksören, an islet lying on the foulground extending 5 cables SE fromOrrengrund, thence:

NW of an area of rocks and shoals, of which theclosest to the track are Nygrund (60 15 05N26 28 50E) andKorjusgrund (1 mile NE),markedby a light buoy (N cardinal).

NP20

2 - 50

4 From a position 1¾ miles WSW of Lålätta Light therecommended track leads 044 2 keeping within thewhite sector (044 -045 ) of Klubbholm Light(60 22 95N 26 42 86E) (5.131), passing:

SE of Ljusasten shoal marked by a light buoy (Ecardinal, thence:

NWof Lålätta Light and shoal, theN endmarked by alight buoy (N cardinal), thence:

5 Between Lålätta Mutka Light Beacon (S cardinal)(60 18 15N 26 33 12E), standing 6 cables SSE ofVinbergshäll and a 6 2 m patch, marked by a lightbuoy (N cardinal) (60 17 91N 26 33 51E).

196


1 From a position 1¼ miles NNE of Lålätta, theWinter Channel, mostly marked by light buoys andbuoys, and authorised throughout this section for adraught of 10 0 m continues on a recommended trackof 044 2 within the white sector (044 -045 ) ofKlubbholm Light (5.131), passing:

1 NW of Pitkäviiri, an island on whose SW pointstands a fishing light (red hut, occasional)(60 17 32N 26 37 94E). Viragrund is theclosest of several shoals extending NW, towithin 7 cables of the track, from Pitkäviiri,thence:

SE of Bisagrund Beacon Light (white metal post, redband) (60 19 14N 26 34 77E).


...Österhällen, on the recommended track leading 044 2within the Klubbholm Light white sector (044 -045 ) (5.72).

204

Paragraph 5.131 1 line 2 to 6 Replace by:

Front light (red rectangle, yellow stripe) (60 22 95N26 42 86E) and is the same structure for thesector light (5.71 and 5.72).

Rear light (similar structure) (1 mile W of front light)stands on a rock.

Finnish Notice 15/138(P)/2012(SDD 2012000 111999) [30/12]

Gulf of Finland – Porvoo to Loviisa —Leading lights

189

Paragraph 5.20 4 line 7 For leading light-structure Readlight



2 Thence the track leads...


Finland – Approaches to Hamina — Directions;routes; buoys, lights; depths; anchorages


E of Ristisaari (5 miles SW), an islet with foul groundextending 1 mile SSE; a beacon stands onKakonelli, a rock 3 cables SSE.

(Directions continue for Hamina at 5.128a)Thence the track continues N, passing:


1 From a position in Mussalo Channel N ofHaapasaari (5.90), the line of bearing 139¼ , astern,of Kivikari Light (60 17 5N 27 12 5E) (5.78) leads2¾ miles NW, in a channel authorised for a draught of8 0 m to Merikari, passing NE of Katajakari (60 18 4N27 10 2E), SW of Hangonmatala, 6 cables NE, a rockawash, and between Länsi Hallinkari, 1 mile farther N,an islet on which stands a beacon, and Piritova, ashoal 8 cables farther W. This section is covered bythe white sector (135 –143 ) of Kivikari Light; buoysand light buoys mark the hazards nearest the track.

2 Thence the route leads 2¼ miles WNW in the whitesector (290 –295 ) of Rankki Light (5.131), passingbetween Merikari Light (60 21 1N 27 05 6E) (5.131)and Vahakari (5.128c), 1¾ miles SSW.The route then leads about 1¾ miles WNW to a

position SSW of Retonpaasi Light (5.131).An alternative route is obtained by keeping within

the white sector of Rankki Light until the white sector(331 –336 ) of Lelleri Light (yellow round tower, blacktop) (60 24 0N 26 58 5E) is entered; this also leadsSSW of Retonpaasi.

3 Useful marks:Keskihallinkari Light (60 19 9N 27 11 3E) (5.131).Rankin Kivikari Light (60 21 2N 26 57 2E)(5.128c).


1 The deepest route, authorised for a draught of12 0 m, leads E from NE of Ristisaari (60 18 7N26 48 7E) to briefly join the South Finland WinterChannel SE of Kirkonmaa (60 23 N 27 03 E) until SWof Vatinki (60 24 4N 27 18 4E). It then leads Nbetween Saukko (5.128e) and Rakin Kotka and thenceNW to Hamina.The W approach to Hamina (60 34 N 27 12 E) is

the continuation of the South Finland Winter Channelfrom Kaunissaari (5.72), with an authorised draught of10 0 m. It leads S of Kirkonmaa, then passes E ofVieskeri (9 miles ENE) before joining the 12 0 m routeSE of Uolio (5.128f).


Directions for approach from Ristisaari(continued from 5.67)

Principal mark5.128a

1 Major light:Ostrov Gogland Light (60 05 6N 26 57 0E) (2.36).

NP20

2 - 51

Other aids to navigation5.128b

1 Racons:Rankin Kivikari Light (60 21 2N 26 57 2E).Veitkari Light (60 16 0N 27 14 4E).

For details see Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 2.

Ristisaari to Vatinki5.128c

1 From a position NE of Ristisaari (60 18 7N26 48 7E) the track leads 7 miles E in a two-wayroute, authorised for a draught of 12 0 m and markedby buoys and light buoys (cardinal), to a position SSEof Ahvenkari, passing (with positions from Vahakari(60 19 4N 27 04 3E)):

S of Patricia (5 miles WNW) (5.68), thence:2 S of Rankin Kivikari (3¾ miles WNW), a shoal

with above-water rocks, from which isexhibited a light (white metal post, red band)(8 cables SW), thence:

N of a 4 8 m patch (5½ cables NW) lying near theextremity of shoal ground extending NW fromVahakari, thence:

3 S of a 4 1 m patch (1½ miles NNE) lying at theextremity of shoal ground extending S fromMerikari (5.131) and marked by H5 Light Buoy(S cardinal), thence:

S of Ahvenkari (2½ miles NE) (5.132).5.128d

1 Vatinki Leading Lights:Front light (red rectangle, yellow stripe) (60 24 4N

27 18 4E).Rear light (similar structure) (7½ cables from frontlight, on Aarholma).

From a position SSE of Ahvenkari the alignment(052 ) of these lights leads 4½ miles NE to a position1¾ miles SW of the front light, passing:

2 NW of a 5 1 m patch (2¾ miles E), thence:NW of an 8 8 m patch (3¼ miles ENE), thence:SE of a 10 9 m patch (4¾ miles NE), thence:NW of at 11 8 m patch (5¼ miles ENE) marked byH8 Buoy (N cardinal), thence:

3 SW of a 9 9 m patch (5½ miles NE), theSE-most of a series of shoals with depth lessthan 10 m extending 8 cables farther NNW.

Vatinki to Hamina entrance5.128e

1 From a position 1¾ miles SW of Vatinki FrontLeading Light the route leads 5 miles N in a two-wayroute marked by light buoys (lateral), passing (withpositions from Saukko (60 27 2N 27 16 3E)):

E of an 11 2 m patch (1¾ miles SSW), thence:W of a 6 3 m patch (1¾ miles S).

2 The route then enters a short section dredged to13 8 m between Jallunmatala (8 cables S), a shoalwith a least depth of 0 4 m, and a 3 7 m patch,3 cables farther E, thence:

W of a rock awash (6 cables SSE) lying on shoalground extending 7 cables W from Kaiji, an islet.

3 The route then enters a 5½ cables long sectiondredged to 13 5 m, through shoal ground lyingbetween Saukko and the W extremity of Rakin Kotka(5 cables SE), thence:

W of an 8 3 m patch (2½ cables ENE).

5.128f1 Ravaholma Leading Lights:

Front light (red rectangle, yellow stripe on metalmast) (60 30 3N 27 11 0E) exhibited from theNE point of the islet.

Rear light (similar structure) (3 cables NW of frontlight, on Pieni-Musta).

From a position NNE of Saukko the alignment(308½ ) of these lights leads 2 miles NW in a channelmarked by light buoys (lateral) to a position 1½ milesSE of the front light, passing:

2 Through a 4 cables long section dredged to13 5 m (8 cables N), thence:

SW of an 8 6 m patch (1½ miles NNW); an 8 9 mpatch lies 1¾ cables farther SE.

The route then enters an 8 cables long sectiondredged to 13 5 m between Uolio (1½ miles NNW)and Uoliomatala, a shoal on which stands an islet,5 cables farther NNE.

3 Uolio Leading Lights:Front light (red rectangles, yellow stripe on metalmast) (60 28 7N 27 14 3E).

Rear light (similar structure) (1 cable SEof front light;both lights on Uolio).

From a position 1½ miles SE of Ravaholma FrontLeading Light, the alignment (145 ), astern, of theabove lights leads 2 miles NW in the channel markedby light buoys (lateral) to a position in the harbourentrance NE of Pieni Musta.


204Paragraph 5.131 2-3 Replace by:

2 From a position N of Kaunissaari (60 22 N26 46 E), the South Finland Winter Channel leads6 miles ESE in a two-way route on the alignment(281½ ), astern, of Klubbholm Leading Lights. Thetrack, marked by light buoys and buoys (cardinal) andauthorised for a draught of 10 0 m, passes N ofPatricia (5.68). Thence it leads between Rankki Light(black round concrete tower, 6 m in height) (60 21 9N26 58 3E) exhibited from Rankinmatala, the buoyedshoal area extending up to 4 cables S and SW ofRankki islet, and Rankin Kivikari, 8 cables SW(5.128c).

3 The fairway continues 4½ miles ESE to a position7 cables SSE of Merikari Light (red mast) (60 21 1N27 05 6E), within the white sector (101 -105 ) ofKeskihallinkari Light (white metal tower, red band)(60 19 9N 27 11 3E), exhibited from the SE end ofthe shoal. The track passes SSW of Retonpaasi(60 21 9N 27 01 1E), a rock from which is exhibiteda light (grey round tower), Pauhakari (8 cables ESE) ashoal, on which there are rocks awash and marked bya buoy (S cardinal), and Merikari (1½ miles fartherESE), the islet from which is exhibited Merikari Light,and NNE of Vahakari (60 19 4N 27 04 3E) (5.128c).


1 The track then joins the 12 0 m route and leads1 mile E to a position SSE of Ahvenkari (5.128c)whence it turns NE onto the alignment (052 ) ofVatinki Leading Lights (5.128d), and leads for3¼ miles to a position 3 miles SW of the front light,passing NW of 8 8 m and 8 0 m patches (5.128d).

NP20

2 - 52

2 Tammio Leading Lights:Front light (red rectangle, yellow stripe) (60 24 3N

27 24 0E) on S part of Västäri.Rear light (similar structure) (3 cables ENE of frontlight, in W part of Tammio).

3 The track then leaves the 12 0 m route and followsthe alignment (070¾ ) of these lights which leads3¼ miles ENE, passing NNW of Velperkari (60 22 3N27 16 7E), an islet from which is exhibited a light(white lantern, concrete base), and a 4 2 m shoal,marked by a light buoy (N cardinal), 4 cables NNE, toa position ESE of Enskeri Light Beacon (port hand,metal structure) (60 23 6N 27 19 2E).

4 Useful mark:Länsi Hallinkari Beacon (60 19 6N 27 10 1E).


From a position NNE of Saukko the route thenre-joins the 12 0 m route for the final approach toHamina entrance.

204-205


Spare5.135


1 12 0 m channel north of Kiviletto. From a positionin Mussalo Channel SE of Kaakkoniemi Light Beacon(60 16 6N 26 52 3E) (5.67) an alternative route,marked by light buoys (cardinal) and authorised for adraught of 12 0 m, leads 2½ miles NE to a positionNNW of Kiviletto, and thence 3½ miles NE to join themain 12 0 m route NNW of Vahakari.10 0 m channel south of Rankin Kivikari. From a

position 1 mile E of Kaunissaari (60 22 N 26 46 E), analternative route, authorised for a draught of 10 0 m,leads 3¾ miles SE to join the main 12 0 m route SWof Patricia (5.68).



3 Anchorage may be obtained in two areas, markedby light buoys (cardinal and lateral), adjacent to the12 0 m route. The first area, swept to 13 8 m, iscentred 1½ miles S of Saukko (5.128e), and thesecond area, swept to 13 5 m, is centred 3 cables NEof Uolio (5.128f).

After Paragraph 5.154 continuity legend For 5.135 Read5.128f


1 From a position NE of Pieni-Musta (60 30 5N27 10 7E) the recommended track, authorised for adraught of 12 0 m, leads 6 cables WNW in a channelswept to 13 2 m, passing NNE of Kaurakari, fromwhich is exhibited a light (white post) (60 30 8N27 10 5E), to the alignment (344 ) of PalokangasHarbour Leading Lights (red triangles on white squareboards), which lead into the harbour.

2 From a position on the above track N ofPieni-Musta a branch, authorised for a draught of12 0 m, leads 5 cables W, and thence NW, to No 3berth of the oil port (5.158), in a channel swept to13 2 m. The W part of this track can be continuedfurther W into an area swept to 10 0 m to access theLPG jetty in the W part of the oil port. The limits ofthe swept areas are marked by buoys (cardinal andlateral).


1 Situated in the S part of Hillonniemi, the oil port(60 31 N 27 10 E) is operated by several oilcompanies and consists of an LPG jetty, 170 m inlength with a swept depth of 10 0 m, and three oilberths, with the largest, No 3, having a swept depth of13 2 m and handling ships with maximum length250 m. Swept depths at berths No 1 and 2 are 10 0 mand 11 2 m, respectively.


1 Situated NNE of the oil port, Palokangas has, onthe W side of the basin, three berths each 200 m inlength; the inner berth has a RoRo ramp. The E sidefronts a container terminal and has four berths with acombined length of 630 m; the inner berth has aRoRo ramp. The head of the basin provides a fourthberth for the terminal.

2 The swept depths in Palokangas are 13 2 m in theouter part, 12 7 m in the mid part and 11 2 m at itshead. The outer two berths on the W side are sweptto the lesser depth of 12 3 m for a distance of about7 m from the quay.

Finnish Notices 17/351, 352/2011(SDD 2011000 113474) [29/11]

Gulf of Finland – Finland – Northern Shore –Hamina bypass channel — Directions

204


lines 1–2 Replace by:

3 The track then leaves the 12 0 m route and followsthe Hamina bypass channel, maximum authoriseddraught 7 3 m. The alignment (070 7 ) of theselights....


Finland – Hamina to Vyborg —Directions; leading lights

210


1 From a position close SE of Mustamaa (60 26 0N27 32 7E), the track, marked by buoys (cardinal),leads 2½ miles NE in the white sector (031 5 -035 5 )of Siikasaari Light (white rectangle) (60 28 1N27 37 0E) and passes NW of Länsikivi Beacon(60 27 0N 27 36 3E).

NP20

2 - 53


2 The track leads to the following alignment:

Finnish Notices 9-10/118/2010(SDD 2010000 058600) [24/10]

Russian Federation – Vyborg and approaches –Gavan Vysotsk — Directions; depths; lights;

beacons; buoys


2 The NE-most part of Fairway No 6 leading toVnutrenniy Vysotskiy Reyd is dredged to 8 0 m (2010).An alternative deep-water route passing N of Hallikivi(5.205) is dredged to 12 7 m (2010) as is VnutrenniyVysotskiy Reyd. The channel from Vysotsk to Vyborgis dredged to various depths as shown on the chart.


1 From Banka Yalkamatala, the line of bearing244 9 , astern, of Igrivyy E Light (white rectangle, redstripe, on red 4-sided framework tower, 10 m inheight) (60 35 4N 28 27 7E) leads 1 mile ENE to thevicinity of the harbour entrance, passing SSE ofBanka Hallikivi and the light buoy (port hand) markingits SSE extent, and NNW of the shoal water, markedby two light buoys (starboard hand), extending5 cables NW towards the fairway from OstrovVysotskiy (60 36 N 28 35 E).

2 By night, the track leads in the white sector(060 -070 ) of Pikhtovyy Light (white truncated conicalstructure, red stripe, on white round tower, 16 m inheight) (60 37 0N 28 34 4E).

Thence the route, dredged to a depth of 12 7 m(2010), leads ENE through the entrance marked bylights and light buoys (lateral).

215Paragraph 5.204 Delete


1 From a position 1¼ miles SW of Hallikivi FrontLeading Light (60 36 5N 28 31 6E), the deep-waterroute, dredged to 12 7 m (2010) and marked by lightbuoys (lateral), leads 1 mile NNE, passing WNW ofBanka Syvämatala; thence 6 cables ENE, passingNNW of Hallikivi Front Leading Light and BankaKarniemen (1¾ cables farther NE), marked by a lightbuoy (starboard hand); thence 5 cables ESE to thevicinity of the harbour entrance.


...of Vnutrenniy Vysotskiy Reyd, dredged to 12 7 m(2010).


Berths. The oil pier has two main berths, dredgedto 14 5 m (2004).


Russian Notice 26/10 and 19/11(SDD 2010000 103553; 2011000 073882) [24/11]

Gulf of Finland – Russia – Approaches toVysotsk — Leading Lights

214


1 Vysotskiy Vkhodnoy Leading LightsFront light (white panel with red stripe, fixed to tower,15 m in height) (60 36 92N 28 33 93E) on theWshore of Ostrov Vysotskiy.

Rear light (white panel with red stripe, fixed to tower,17 m in height) (2 cables ENE of front light).

2 From Banka Yalkamatala, the alignment (062 2 ) ofthese lights leads 1 25 miles ENE, to a position4 cables WSW of the front light, passing SSE ofBanka Hallikivi, and the light buoy marking its SSEextent, and NNW of the shoal water, marked by twolight buoys, extending 5 cables NW towards thefairway from Ostrov Vysotskiy (60 36 N 28 35 E). Theoutbound track is indicated by Igrivyy E Light (whiterectangle, red stripe, on red framework tower, 10 m inheight) (60 35 40N 28 27 66E), a directional lightstanding on the E side of Ostrov Igrivyy, bearing244 9 .

3 Thence the route, dredged to a depth of 12 7 m(2010), leads ENE through the entrance marked bylights and light buoys (lateral).

Russian NM 1983/14/2012(SDD 2012000 065379) [17/12]

Finland – Förby — Directions; Lights

233Paragraph 6.57 8 lines 3-6 Replace by:This alignment leads 1 mile NE, and thence

1¾ miles NNE in the white sector (216 5 -218 5 ) ofVästergrundet Light (60 04 6N 22 49 0E) astern,through a fairway marked by buoys, to Karaholm atFörby (6.62).


Finland – Utö to Hanko channel —Directions; Lights

235Paragraph 6.71 14 line 3 Delete Turmharu/

Paragraph 6.71 15 lines 1-6 Replace by:15 Korpskär leading line. The alignment (081½ ),

astern of Korpskär Leading Lights, and the narrowwhite sector (261 -262½ ) ahead, of Turmharu Light(red rectangle, yellow stripe, on metal frameworktower) (59 50 5N 21 22 4E), leads 6 miles W to aposition ESE of Bokullankivi Light. The track thenleads WSW, in the white sector (247 -252 ) ofEglonskär Light (6.112), for 1 mile to the Stenharunleading line (6.112).


Finnish Notice 35-36/579/2010(SDD 2010000214628) [02/11]

NP20

2 - 54

Finland – Naantali — Directions;lights; depths

235


238




239Paragraph 6.99 4 line 6 For 13 m Read 15 3 m

240


After Paragraph 6.104 2 line 4 Heading Replace by:

Directions for the 15 3 m route

244




After Paragraph 6.123 3 line 4 Heading Replace by:

Directions for the 15 3 m route

245





246




248



253


254



255




256


260


261



264


265



1 With positions from Tupavuori Front Light(60 26 5N 22 04 4E):

From the N extremity of the Viheriäinen leading line(2½ cables ESE) the 15 3 m fairway leads 7 cablesNNW to a position 1½ cables S of the Oil Harbour.From this position, the fairway, now authorised for a

draught of 9 0 m, leads to a position S of the grainberth, thence 8 0 m to the head of the harbour.

2 A second fairway, authorised for a draught of 7 7 mand marked by light buoys and buoys, leads 7 cablesW to a shipyard.




1 Anchorage may be obtained off Tupavuori OilHarbour in an area centred about 6 cables WSW ofViheriäinen Front Light (60 27 0N 22 04 9E) (6.257).

Finnish Notices 6-7/76/2010; 6-7/77/2010; 9-10/120/2010(SDDs 2010000 040998; 040999; 058600) [24/10]

Finland – Rauma and approaches —Directions: leading beacons

290


1 From a position 6 cables W of Saukko (61 08 4N21 26 0E), a short branch channel, authorised...

291


1 From a position 6 cables W of Saukko FrontBeacon (61 08 4N 21 25 9E), a short branch channel,authorised for a draught of 5 5 m, leads WSW fromthe Valkeakari 7 5 m channel (7.87) for about 1 mile,marked in turn by the following leading marks:

NP20

2 - 55

2 Kuuskajaskari Leading Beacons (white triangles,yellow stripe) (61 08 3N 21 22 2E) in linebearing 265½ .

3 Rounakari Leading Beacons (red rectangles,white stripe), in line bearing 241 ; the frontbeacon is on the N extremity of Rounakariislet whilst the rear is on a rock 3 cables SW.

4 These leading marks lead to a position close SSEof an L-shaped jetty on the S point of Kuuskajaskari.A landing jetty on the E side of Kuuskajaskari is

approached from the SE via a 1 8 m channel markedby leading lights (white triangles, red stripe), in linebearing 307½ , with the front beacon common toKuuskajaskari Leading Beacons.

Finnish Notices 9-10/122/2010; 12/171/2010Finnish ENC FI59S41A(SDDs 2010000 058600; 070288) [24/10]

Finland – Gulf of Bothnia –North-west approaches to Vaasa —Other aids to navigation; Track guide

314



315



316



Finnish Notice 29-30/586/2011(SDD 2011000 200888) [47/11]

Finland – North-west approaches to Vaasa —Directions; beacons; buoys

314

Paragraph 7.248 2 line 2 For (S cardinal) Read (port hand)

Paragraph 7.248 3 lines 3-4 For (N cardinal)Read (starboard hand) (4¼ miles SE)

Paragraph 7.248 3 line 6 For (N cardinal) Read (starboardhand)

Paragraph 7.248 5 line 4 For (N and S cardinal) Read(starboard and port hand)

315

Paragraph 7.249 3 line 6 For (E cardinal) Read (starboardhand)


Paragraph 7.249 4 line 9 For (W cardinal)Read (port hand)







316


Paragraph 7.254 5 lines 5-6 For (N cardinal) Read(starboard hand)


Finnish notice 28/563/2011(SDD 2011000 184683) [43/11]

Finland – Raahe — Approach; limitingconditions; turning basin; directions

336



Paragraph 8.75 1 lines 4-5Delete ...Between the two areasis a turning basin, 300 m in diameter.


2 The berths are protected by a large area ofreclaimed land close W of the quays.


Heikinkari Rear Leading Light (red rectangle, yellowstripe) (64 39 2N 24 24 0E) standing on IsoElkko, an area of reclaimed land.

337


Main channel8.79

1 From a position about 3½ miles N of NahkiainenLighthouse (64 36 7N 23 53 8E) (8.52) the approachleads ESE to a position 1½ miles WSW of RaaheLighthouse (64 39 1N 24 13 4E) (8.77), passing NNEof the detached shoal patches (8.54), marked bybuoys (cardinal), to the NW and NE of NahkiainenLighthouse.

NP20

2 - 56

Thence the recommended track leads through achannel marked by light buoys, beacons, and in turnby the following leading lights:

2 Heikinkari Leading Lights:Front light (red rectangle with yellow stripe on whitetower) (64 39 2N 24 20 9E).

Rear light (1½ miles E of front light) (8.77).The alignment (085½ ) of these lights leads

2¾ miles E through a buoyed channel, to theVirpiperä leading line.

3 Virpiperä Leading Lights:Front light (red rectangle, yellow stripe, on metalframework tower) (64 40 0N 24 24 6E),standing on the foreshore close N of Helmi Pier(8.80).

Rear light (red rectangle, yellow stripe) (4 cablesENE of front light).

Thence the alignment (062¼ ) of these lights leads1 mile ENE through a buoyed channel, to a position5 cables W of the entrance to the commercial harbour.

4 The track then leads 7 cables E, in the narrowwhite sector (085 -086 ) of Odotuslaituri Light (greytower, 25 m high) (64 39 6N 24 24 3E) through abuoyed channel to the turning area. The track thenleads SSE to the main berthing area.

8 m channel8.79a

1 From a position on the 10 m track 5 cables W ofthe commercial harbour entrance, an alternative track,authorised for a maximum draught of 8 0 m, leads afurther 5 cables ENE on the alignment (062¼ ) ofVirpiperä Leading Lights to a position 5 cables SW ofthe front leading light. The track, marked by buoys(cardinal), then trends E and SE to the RojuniemiLeading Line.

2 Rojuniemi Leading Lights:Front light (yellow mast) (64 39 4N 24 25 0E).Rear light (red rectangle, yellow stripe) (1½ cablesSE of front light).

Thence the alignment (126¼ ) of these lights leadsSE to the berths at the Oil and Export Quays.


Sweden – Gulf of Bothnia – Western Shore –Vässarön to Öregrund — Directions; buoy

362


5 Between Fåröhällan (3 miles NW), on whichstands Fåröhällan Light (white lantern on hut),and a 6 8 m shoal, marked by a buoy (porthand), 1½ cables WSW of the light, thence:


Sweden – Skutskär-Harnäs —Directions; depths


Paragraph 9.183 3 line 2 Replace by:...with a least depth of 7 7 m, continues on the

alignment of...Paragraph 9.183 4 including existing Section IV NoticeWeek 26/10 Replace by:

4 To reach the berths at Harnäshamnen, the trackleads SW through an area with a least depth of 5 8 m,marked by buoys and light buoys, passing NW ofSjukantsgrundet.

Paragraph 9.184 2 Replace by:2 Massakajen (Pulp Quay), is a concrete pier on

the S side of Harnäshamnen with a leastdepth of 5 7 m. The W side is 245 m long andthe E side is 90 m long. The maximumauthorised draught for Massakajen is 5 2 m.


...of 7 6 m. The maximum authorised draught forthese berths is 7 1 m.


Sweden – Sea of Bothnia – Gävle –Fredrikskanhamnen — Controlling depths

379

Paragraph 9.194 1 and 2 including heading Replace by:

Controlling depths9.194

1 Channels. The main N entrance ofHolmuddsrännan has a least depth of 10 6 m (2010).The least depths (2010) for the channels to the

areas of the port listed below are as follows:2 Fredriksskanshamnen new oil quay and

Granudden terminal 10 8 m.Granudden terminal RoRo 9 3 m.Container terminal basin 10 5 m.Basin off berths 12-14, 8 9 m.Basin off berths 4-8, 9 3 m.Fredriksskanshamnen to Gavleån 4 2 m (2011),maintenance dredging no longer takes placeW ofFredriksskans.

381


1 New oil quay, berth 21, (60 41 56N 17 13 73E) atthe entrance to Fredriksskanshamnen is 200 m longwith a least depth of 10 8 m (2010).

2 East basin (60 41 55N 17 13 25E) has ten berths.Berths 17-19 on the E side of the basin form thecontainer terminal and have a least depth of 10 5 m(2010). Berths 11-16, with a least depth of 8 9 m(2010) lie in the NW corner of the basin. Berths 9-12lie on the W side of the basin with a least depth of10 5 m (2010).

3 South and south-west quays (60 41 37N17 12 90E) have berths totalling 465 m in length,berths 4-8 have a least depth of 9 3 m (2010). At theW end of the SW quay, berth 3, the fixed RoRo ramp,with a 20 m width, has a least depth of 7 5 m (2010).

4 Old oil quay, berth 1, (60 41 33N 17 12 74E) is190m long with a least depth of 9 3 m (2010).

NP20

2 - 57


There are two berths; the W berth has a least depth of9 3 m (2010) and the E berth 10 9 m (2010).

Swedish Notices 348/6823 and 383/7515/11(SDDs 2011000 061658; 234536) [02/12]

Sweden – Gulf of Bothnia – Stocka —Directions; buoyage; lights

406


1 From a position about 3 miles ESE of Britas Klack(61 53 5N 17 28 0E) head WNW for 5 miles, passingclose S of Britas Klack and Södra Gullgrund, bothmarked by buoys (S cardinal). When 1 mile fromIngaskär the track leads W on the following alignment.

2 Stocka Inlopp Beacons (61 53 6N 17 21 0E). Thealignment (270 ) of these beacons (red triangles)leads through a channel, passing S of Ingaskärsrev,partly awash, which lies 3 cables E of Ingaskär and Nof the foul ground which extends NNE fromSkrakharet, an islet close inshore lying 4 cables S ofthe entrance. Pass between the shoal extending Sfrom Ingaskär marked by a spar buoy (starboardhand) and the bank extending from the S shore.

3 The track then alters NW to pass through a narrowchannel, into the harbour. The sides of the channelare indicated by two pairs of beacons (white circleswith black stripes) bearing 324 .

4 Caution. The water immediately NE of thealignment of the E pair of beacons is very shallow.Useful mark:

Strömsbruk Chimney (61 52 4N 17 19 3E) (10.16).Fourwind turbines (red obstruction lights) centred onposition 61 52 6N 17 20 9E.

Radio mast (red obstruction light) (61 52 9N17 20 9E).


Gulf of Bothnia – Sweden – Örnsköldsvik andApproaches — Directions; light

435


NE of Bonässund Beacon (3¾ milesWNW), thence:



Sweden – Efesgrundet to Väktaren —Directions; light

442



Sweden – Hörnefors — Authorised draught

442



Sweden – Skelleftehamn —Authorised draught

463


3 The approach from SE, for vessels drawing notmore than 5 0 m, passes between the...


Sweden – Kågehamn — Authorised draught

468



Sweden – Törehamn — Authorised draught

489


2 The channel, which is well marked and buoyed, isauthorised for a draught of 8 0 m to the anchorage(11.246) in Storöfjärden; 5 6 m from Storöfjärden toLägenön (11.240); and 3 0 m from Lägenön toTörehamn.


Sweden – Törehamn — Directions; lights

489

Paragraph 11.240 8 line 2 For Light Read Beacon


490





Paragraph 11.241 2 line 3 For light-structure Read beacon




Paragraph 11.241 4 line 1 For Lights Read Beacons

Paragraph 11.241 4 line 2 For light Read beacon

NP20

2 - 58




Paragraph 11.241 5 line 1 For Lights Read Beacons














Paragraph 11.241 9 line 3 For lights in line Read beacons



NP21 Bay of Bengal Pilot (2010 Edition)

India – Chennai to Kºkinºda Bay —Kattupalli Port

91


Kattupalli Port

Chart 317, Indian Chart 3039 (see 1.16)General information2.115a

1 Position and function. Kattupalli Port (13 18 50N80 21 20E) is located 3½ miles N of Ennore Port; ithandles container, lighter and general cargo traffic inaddition to being a major shipbuilding and ship repaircentre.The port has been developed by Larsen and

Toubro (L and T) Shipbuilding Limited (LTSB), a jointventure between L and T and the Tamilnadu IndustrialDevelopment Corporation (TIDCO).

2 Port Authority. LTSB has been licensed by theTamilnadu Maritime Board to operate the port.

LTSB - Port Division, Kattupalli Village, PonneriTaluk, Tiruvallur District, Tamilnadu 600 120,India.

Tamilnadu Maritime Board, 22 Sir ThyagarayaRoad, T. Nagar, Chennai 600 017, India.


1 Controlling depth. The approach channel isreported (2012) to be dredged to 14 m althoughcharted depths are less. The Port Authority should becontacted for the most up to date information.Tidal levels. Tides are semi-diurnal and similar in

character to those at Ennore. The mean spring rangeis 1 2 m with a mean neap range of 0 2 m.For further information, see Admiralty Tide Tables

Volume 3.


1 Outer anchorages. There are two anchorageareas, shown on the chart, located N of the pilotboarding position. The N anchorage is for dangerouscargo, the S anchorage is unrestricted. A dumpingground (13 19 80N 80 24 35E) is located NE of theanchorage areas.

2 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels above 100 gt.The pilot boarding position (13 18 33N 80 23 41E) islocated between the outer anchorages and the fairwaylight buoy (safe water) moored in the E approaches tothe buoyed channel.For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio

Signals Volume 6.

Harbour2.115d

1 General layout. The harbour is entered through a180 m wide dredged channel marked by light buoys.There are two 1 mile long breakwaters protecting theinner harbour. Inside the breakwaters, there is aturning circle, 570 m in diameter, and the mainberthing area.

2 The container berths are located in the N half ofthe harbour, with a finger jetty and a ship lift facility tothe S. In the S half of the harbour, there is a seawater intake for the Chennai Petroleum CorporationLimited (CPCL), extending 500 m NE from a seaisland, which is linked to the shore by a 500 m longcauseway. A jetty serving L and T’s offshore platformand floating production unit modular fabrication facility(MFF) is located just N of the root of the Sbreakwater.

3 Development is continuing at the port, with theerection of transits and further navigation marksplanned. A new sea water intake for CPCL is beingconstructed to the S of the S breakwater. The existingCPCL intake will be decommissioned once the newintake is operational.Natural conditions. The weather and sea state are

driven by the monsoons. During the NE monsoon(November to January), wind speeds of 20-25 kn anda S setting current, at a rate of ½ kn at the harbourentrance, may be expected. For climate informationsee 1.157.

Directions2.115e

1 Landmark:Radio Tower (13 18 61N 80 20 24E) (50 m in

height).

NP21

2 - 59

Approach. From a position E of the port, in deepwater and seaward of the 200 m depth contour, thetrack to the fairway light buoy (safe water) (13 17 82N80 23 41E) moored in the approaches to the port isstraightforward and the chart is the best guide.

2 Entry. From the fairway light buoy, the track leadsWNW to the first pair of light buoys (port andstarboard hand) marking the dredged channel, thencethrough the buoyed channel, passing:

N of the extremity of the S breakwater (13 18 17N80 21 55E), from which a light is exhibited,thence:

S of the SW extremity of a 4 2 m shoal bank(13 18 38N 80 21 68E), marked by a light buoy(S cardinal), thence:

SSW of the extremity of the N breakwater(13 18 45N 80 21 55E), from which a light isexhibited.

3 Once inside the harbour, courses may be directedas required to make an approach to the allocatedberth. The limits of the dredged area are marked bylight buoys.Useful marks:

Port control building and signal station (13 18 92N80 20 77E) (30 m in height), located near the rootof the N breakwater.

Radar tower (13 18 45N 80 21 55E) (red and whitebands, 20 m in height), located at the S extremityof the N breakwater.

Berths2.115f

1 Container berths. There are 2 berths located inthe NW corner of the harbour. Container Berth 1(13 18 70N 80 20 85E) is 350 m long with a charteddepth alongside of 14 0 m. Container Berth 2(13 18 82N 80 20 93E) is 360 m in length with acharted depth alongside of 14 0 m.Vessels of up to 300 m LOA and 13 5 m draught

can be handled at the container berths.2 Shipyard. There are two 260 m long berths either

side of the shipyard’s shiplift (13 18 40N 80 20 90E).Both berths are 25 m wide and have a charted depthof 10 0 m alongside. There is also a Finger Jetty(13 18 55N 80 20 90E) situated N of the shipyardshiplift. It is 200 m long and 20 m wide and has 2berths with a charted depth of 10 0 m alongside.

3 Other berth. There is an additional berth(13 17 80N 80 20 85E) which serves the MFF in theSW corner of the harbour. The MFF Jetty is 100 mlong with depths alongside of 6 0 m.

Port services2.115g

1 Repairs. As a major shipbuilding and ship repairport, Kattupalli is set up to handle most hull,machinery and underwater repairs. There is a ship liftwhich can accommodate vessels up to 18 500 tonsand 210 m LOA.

2 Other facilities. Garbage and oily waste disposalare available. There are basic medical facilities at theport with major hospitals located in Chennai.

Supplies. Food supplies and fresh water areavailable. Agents can arrange the supply of fuel bybunker through the official supplier.

Indian Chart 3039; L & T Shipbuilding(SDD 2012000 159513) [49/12]

India – Kºkinºda Bay to Vamsadhºra River —Gangavaram Port


GANGAVARAM PORT

General InformationChart 234Position2.164a

1 Gangavaram Port (17 37 60N 83 14 80E), in thestate of Andhra Pradesh, lies 4½ miles SSW ofVishºkhapatnam.

Function2.164b

1 Gangavaram Port has been developed as an allweather deep water multi-purpose port. The porthandles a variety of bulk cargoes including coal, ironore, fertiliser, limestone, food grains, steel productsand petrochemicals.

Port Limits2.164c

1 The port limits are shown on the chart.

Approach and entry2.164d

1 Gangavaram Port is approached from the E andentered through the dredged channel leading betweenthe N and S breakwaters.

Traffic2.164e

1 Approximately 8 000 000 tonnes of cargo handledannually.

Port Authority2.164f

1 Gangavaram Port Limited., Hyderadad 500 033,Andhra Pradesh.Internet. www.gangavaram.come-mail. [email protected]

Limiting conditionsControlling depths2.164g

1 The following depths are maintained by dredging:Outer channel, 20 2 mInner harbour and turning circle, 19 5 m.

2 Due to siltation and strong currents, the depths inthe outer channel are liable to change.The mariner should contact the port authorities for

depths maintained in the channel and inner harbour.

Deepest and longest berth2.164h

1 Deepest, Iron ore berth 4 and Coal berth 5.Longest, Iron ore berth 4.

http://www.gangavaram.com


NP21

2 - 60

Tidal levels2.164i

1 Mean spring range about 1 4 m, mean neap rangeabout 0 6 m. For further information see Admiralty TideTables Volume 3.

Maximum size of vessel handled2.164j

1 A Capesize bulk coal vessel of 180 199 dwt wasdischarged in 2011. The port is capable of handlingvessels up to 200 000 dwt.

Local weather and sea state2.164k

1 Wind. From March to May the wind shifts SW andis the precursor to the SW Monsoon, which normallylasts from mid May until mid October. The SWMonsoon is usually accompanied by cloudy weatherand includes the wet season. The wind and weatherbecome more variable after the SW Monsoon but NEwinds prevail between October and December. A NWwind is usually fresh during the day but at nightbecome light and W. In October and Novembersqualls and rain are common. The greatest rainfalloccurs between June and November.

2 Cyclonic storms in the Bay of Bengal normallyoccur 4 to 5 times a year. They are most likely inNovember but can also occur in May.Fog. There is a small likelihood of fog between

December and May.Sea state. There is always a considerable swell

here. The highest sea state is normally between Apriland September.

Arrival information

Port operations2.164l

1 The port operates 24 hours a day.

Port radio2.164m

1 There is a port radio station, see Admiralty List ofRadio Signals Volume 6(4).

Notice of ETA required2.164n

1 Notice of ETA required at least 48 hrs in advance.

Outer Anchorages2.164o

1 Within the port limits there are 10 designatedanchorages marked on the charts. Each anchorage isabout 1¼ miles in diameter. There is also anexamination anchorage.

Spoil ground2.164p

1 A spoil ground (17 36 20N 83 16 80E), within theouter anchorage, is charted 1 mile SW of the pilotboarding position.

Pilotage2.164q

1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels. The pilotboards in position 17 37 08N 83 17 53E. In badweather the pilot will guide the vessel until boardingbecomes possible.

Tugs1 Tugs are available.

HarbourGeneral layout2.164r

1 The main harbour area is enclosed by twobreakwaters to the N and S of the dredged entrancechannel. Berths 1, 2 and 3, W and SW of the turningcircle, are for general and dry cargo; berths 4 and 5to the S are for bulk iron ore and coal.

Development2.164s

1 Further development within the breakwatersproposes an additional 9 berths. Additional plans arefor ship building with repair facilities and a marine oilterminal with SPM and an onshore tank farm.

Currents2.164t

1 Currents of monsoonal origin exist, tending to followthe coast line. From September to December, SWcurrent setting with rates from 0 5 to 2 kts areexperienced, maximum being September. During therest of the year, NE current with rates from 0 5 to1 5 kts are experienced with maximum being in May.

Directions for entering harbourPrincipal marks2.164u

1 Landmarks:Gangavaram Signal station (17 37 05N83 13 93E).

Pigeon Island (17 37 19N 83 14 42E).Water tower (17 37 52N 83 13 61E).

Approaches2.164v

1 From a position SE of Dolphin’s Nose Light(17 40 59N 83 17 57E) the track leads WNW into theroadstead toward the pilot boarding position and ontothe alignment of Gangavaram Port Leading Lights.

Entrance channel to turning circle2.164w

1 Gangavaram Leading Lights:Front transit mark (white 4-sided framework tower,red bands, 14 m in height) (17 37 48N83 13 76E).

Rear transit mark (white 4-sided framework tower,red bands, 29 m in height) (500 m from frontmark).

2 From a position 1¼ miles W of the breakwaterentrance the track, on the alignment (265 ), leadsthrough the buoyed entrance channel to the turningcircle.

Basin and berthsBasin2.164x

1 The inner harbour enclosed by N and Sbreakwaters consists of a turning circle and 5 berths.

Alongside berths2.164y

1 There are 5 alongside berths; the largest berth, theiron ore berth, has a length of 340 m and a depth of19 5 m.

NP21

2 - 61

Port services

Repairs2.164z

1 Local workshops can carry out hull and machineryrepairs. Divers are available.

Other facilities2.164aa

1 Medical facitities are available in Vishºkhapatnam.Garbage and waste oil disposal can be arranged.Compass adjustment can be arranged through the

ship agent.

Supplies2.164ab

1 Marine diesel and fuel oil is available by roadtanker or fuel barge.Fresh water, provisions and stores are available.

Communications2.164ac

1 The nearest airport is at Vishºkhapatnam, 13 km Nof the port.

BA Chart 234; INP2 Bay of Bengal Pilot (Edition 1 2007)Amendment 06/2010(SDD 2010000 045338) [21/11]

India – East Coast – Gopºlpur Port to Puri —Directions; light

109


Proyºgi Light (white circular tower, 32 m in height)(19 28 00N 85 10 00E).

2 Major light:Proyºgi Light (above) (19 28 00N 85 10 00E).


...extremity of hills surrounding Ganjºm; ProyºgiLight (3.18) (19 28 00N 85 10 00E) lies2½ miles ENE. Thence:

Indian Notice 14/176/12(SDD 2012000 145256) [37/12]

India – East Coast — Dhºmra Port

117


Dhºmra Port

Chart 814, Indian Chart 3037General information3.72a

1 Position and function. The Port of Dhºmra(20 49 15N 86 58 21E) is a joint venture betweenL&T and Tata Steel. It is located 3 miles N of themouth of the Dhºmra River and W of Kanika SandIsland. It is one of the deepest ports in India anddeals with the import and export of coal, iron ore andlimestone.

2 Port authority. Harbour Master, Dhºmra PortCompany Ltd, Dosinga, Dhºmra, Bansada, Bhadrak756171, Orissa, India.

Website: www.dhamraport.com

Arrival information3.72b

1 Port operations. The port operates 24 hours aday.Anchorage may be obtained 2 to 3 miles NE of the

Fairway Light Buoy (safe water) (20 55 46N87 07 12E) in depths no less than 18 m with goodholding ground.Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels above 200 gt.

The pilot boards 1 mile E of the Fairway Light Buoy.

Harbour3.72c

1 General layout. The berths are approachedthrough a 9¾ mile long buoyed channel leading to anL-shaped jetty lying in a NNE/SSW orientation. A600 m wide turning circle with a minimum depth of17 m lies at the S end of the jetty. The limits of theturning circle are marked by Light Buoys No 23 (Wcardinal) and 24 (N cardinal).

2 Tidal levels. The mean spring range is 4 0 m. Forfurther details see Admiralty Tide Tables.

Directions3.72d

1 Other aid to navigation.Racon:

Fairway Light Buoy (20 55 46N 87 07 12E) (3.72b)2 Approach and entry. From S. After passing E of

Palmyras Shoals (3.72) and remaining outside the30 m contour, the approach can be made from the E,passing close N of the Fairway Light Buoy (safewater) then proceeding via the buoyed channelmarked by paired light buoys (port and starboardlaterals) numbered 1 to 20. The channel’s depth ismaintained by dredging as indicated on the chart; it isbetween 170 and 240 m wide.

Berths3.72e

1 There are two 350 m long berths with depthsalongside of 19 m which can handle vessels up to290 m LOA.

Port services3.72f

1 Repairs. Minor.Other facilities. Medical facilities are available.Supplies. Fuel, fresh water and provisions are

available.


Spare3.73

Dhºmra Port Company Limited(HH. 021/200/01) [10/12]

Burma – Yangon River and approaches —Directions; light float

173


...until SE of the N part of the shoal. From Krishna Shoal,the track remains in charted depths from 10 to 18 m untilthe approach to Yangon River is made.

http://www.dhamraport.com

NP21

2 - 62



SE and E of the dangerous wreck (15 59 78N96 14 51E) of an earlier light vessel.


3 From a position approximately 4¾ miles E of thedangerous wreck (15 59 78N 96 14 51E), the trackleads N, passing:

175


...should not attempt to enter the Western Channel unlessthey are confident of their position.

179


1 This offshore route leads, from a position in the Sapproaches to Yangon River, 70 miles E across the...



...passage from the S approaches to Yangon River to W ofKyun Nyi...


Bay of Bengal – south-eastern part –Taung Kyun Su — Depths


Depths7.46a

1 An uncharted 5 m shoal has been reported (2011)in position 9 56 77N 97 51 77E. Mariners are advisedto exercise caution when navigating in this area.

MY Andiamo(SDD 2011000 019782) [09/11]

NP22 Bay of Biscay Pilot (2010 Edition)

France – West Coast – Benodet —Directions; light



France – La Loire Approaches —Prohibited area

132


Prohibited area6.14a

1 A prohibited area, marked by light buoys (special),exists 3 miles WSW of Ouest Basse Capella LightBuoy (W cardinal) (47 15 66N 2 42 79W). Anchoring,navigating and fishing are prohibited.


France – West Coast – La Seudre — Light

190



Spain – North coast – Aviles — Directions; light

280


1 Entering Canal de Pedro Menéndez (43 34 62N5 55 28W) the white sector (174 9 -175 1 ) of thedirection light (43 33 51N 5 55 15W) on Muelle Surleads through the channel, marked by light buoys(lateral) and a light beacon (red round tower, 3 m inheight) (43 34 29N 5 55 19W) to Dársena de SanAgustín.

Spanish Notice 2/7/12(SDD 2012000 016511) [06/12]

NP23 Bering Sea and Strait Pilot(2009 Edition)

Maritime safety information

7-8Paragraph 1.38 Replace by:

World-Wide Navigational Warning Service1.38

1 West side of Bering Strait and W part of BeringSea are within NAVAREAS XIII and XXI of theWorld-Wide Navigational Warning Service. Coastalnavigational warnings and meteorological warningsand forecasts are available via the internationalNAVTEX service from Petropavlovsk-KamchatskiyCoast Radio Station.

2 East side of Bering Strait and E part of BeringSea are within NAVAREAs XII and XVII of theWorld-Wide Navigational Warning Service. Localnavigational warnings for the coasts and harbours ofAlaska are broadcast by NAVTEX and the appropriateUS Coast Guard radio station.

3 NAVAREA and METAREA warnings for NAVAREAsand METAREAs XII, XIII, XVII and XXI are alsoavailable via the international SafetyNET service. Theservice is currently on trial in NAVAREAs XVII andXXI, and is scheduled to become fully operational on1st June 2011.

NP23

2 - 63

See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3(parts 1 and 2) and Volume 5, and The Mariner’sHandbook for details.

Paragraphs 1.39-1.43 Replace by:

Spare1.39 - 1.43


United States of America – Krenitzin Islands –Akutan Harbor — Berth

196


...use, at the former whaling station.

US Notice 25/16531/12(SDD 2012000 117897) [27/12]

United States of America – Unalaska Island –Dutch Harbor — Anchorage

207


In severe weather, restrictions apply to anchoring inIliuliuk Bay and vessels are recommended to contactthe Port Authority and consult the United States CoastGuard Severe Weather Guidelines which may befound at: www.homeport.uscg.mil/anchorage

US Coast Pilot No 9 2009 Edition Change 5(HH. 078/557/12) [18/10]

United States of America – Attu Island —Loran tower


US Notice 45/16431/10(SDD 2010000 183675) [49/10]

United States of America – Alaska –Port Clarence — Loran tower

312


2 Useful mark:Point Spencer Light (framework tower, red andwhitechequered diamond daymark) (65 16 6N166 50 9W), seasonal. On the spit S of the light isa US Coast Guard airstrip. Some green fuel tankson the spit are only visible from E.

United States Coast Guard(HH. 023/200/01) [20/10]

United States of America – Bering Strait toCape Krusenstern – Kotzebue — Light

318


Landmark:Dish aerial (66 50 97N 162 36 44W).

3 Anchorage. Sea-going vessels anchor as closeas...

US Notice 18/16005/12(SDD 2012000 084967) [20/12]

United States of America – Alaska –Red Dog — Directions; racon

321Paragraph 9.125 1 lines 1 to 4 Replace by:

1 Approach. The loading anchorage should beapproached...

US Notice 27/16005/09(SDD 2009000 055196) [33/09]

Russia – Pacific coast –Port Beringovskiy — Anchorage

390Paragraph 12.43 1 line 8 For 10 Read 7


NP24 Black Sea and Sea of Azov Pilot(2010 Edition)

Turkey – ™zmit Körfezi —Traffic separation scheme

100


1 The Turkish government has advised that ™zmitTraffic Separation Scheme, consisting of four TSSs,two precautionary areas, two two-way routes andinshore traffic zones, leads into ™zmit Körfezi from thevicinity of 40 44 N 29 22 E to the head of the gulf,26 miles E.



1 A VTS is established for the regulation of trafficwithin the boundaries of the traffic separation scheme.


1 Pilotage in ™zmit Körfezi is compulsory for allTurkish vessels over 1000 gt, and all foreign vesselsover 500 gt. Pilots board 2 miles S of YelkenkayaBurnu Light (40 45 N 29 21 E) (2.267).

http://homeport.uscg.mil/anchorage

NP24

2 - 64


Inshore traffic zones are established for vesselsthat are not required to take a pilot.

IMO Sub-Committee on Safety of Navigation,57th session, Agenda item 3, 8th April 2011(Turkish ENC TR400291) [01/12]

Turkey – North approaches to ™stanbul BoÔazÝ —Anchorages

117

Paragraph 2.417, including heading Replace by:

Spare2.417

Turkish Notice 66/12/2012(SDD 2012000 065447) [17/12]

Turkey – Kerpe LimanÝ — Anchorage

123

Paragraph 3.28 1 lines 3-5 Delete Anchorage, to (3.23).


Turkey – EreÔli — Anchorages

124


1 Anchorage Areas No 1 and 2 are centred 1½ and2¾ miles SSW of the head of Kuzey Mendirekbreakwater; Area No 3 lies 3 miles SW. Area No 1 isfor cargo vessels of 1600 gt and over, Area No 2 isfor vessels carrying dangerous goods and vessels inquarantine, Area No 3 is for military vessels.

2 Within the harbour, Area No 4 has been establishedfor vessels under 1600 gt; E from the head of thesteel works mole in the E basin, NW to the head ofKuzey Mendirek, then 6 cables NE to the shore.Caution. A dangerous wreck lies 2¼ miles SSW of

Kuzey Mendirek breakwater, between anchorageAreas Nos 1 and 2.

Turkish Notices 2/5/12 and 8/43/12(SDD 2012000 013065; 046599) [17/12]

Turkey – Trabzon — Pipeline


A submarine pipeline extends 4 cables N into theanchorage area, from a position on the shore8¼ cables W of Güzelhisar Burnu Light.


Turkey – Kizkalesi to ÇamlÝ Burnu –Pazar — Marine farm

144


Caution. A marine farm is located in the centre ofthe anchorage area.

Turkish Notice 27.163.10(SDD 2010000 111084) [30/10]

Bulgaria – Varna — Wreck

161


Caution. A wreck lies in the central part of thearea, 2¼ miles SSE of Nos Galata. Regulated AreaNo 324 of radius 1 cable surrounds the wreck;anchoring, fishing and trawling, dredging andunderwater operations are prohibited.

Bulgarian Notice(SDD 2012000 056891) [15/12]

Ukraine – Dnistrovs’kyi Lyman —Approach and entry


After Paragraph 6.23 3 line 5 Insert:Owing to shoaling, the approach to

Dnestrovsko-Tsaregradskoye Hyrlo has been alteredto the N of the leading lights, via two pairs of lightbuoys and an unlit buoy; least depth in the fairway is2 6 m (2010).

Ukrainian Notice 374.48.10(SDD 2011000 002623) [04/11]

Ukraine – Bilhorod-Dnistrovs’kyi — Wreck

192


Caution. A wreck, depth of 9 7 m, lies in the NEcorner of the anchorage area.

Ukrainian Notice(SDD 2011000 207077) [47/11]

Ukraine – Illichivs’k — Obstruction


Caution. An obstruction lies 5¼ miles SSE of theTraffic Control post (6.47), in the S central area of theanchorage.


NP24

2 - 65

Ukraine – Illichivs’k —Directions; shoal patch

195Paragraph 6.56 1 line 5 Add:Caution. A shoal patch with a depth of 12 4 m lies

1 cable ENE of the pilot boarding position.


Russia – Novorossiysk — Outer anchorages

249

Paragraph 7.127 after table Insert:

2 Caution. An explosive dumping ground areaconsisting of a mine (not charted), centred on position44 36 30N 37 55 35E (WGS84) with radius 2 cables,lies in the NE section of anchorage area No 416.Three charted foul areas, consisting of the remains ofwrecks, lie to the S and SW of the explosive dumpingground area.

Chart 3316 and Russian ENC RU4MDLMO [21/12]

Russia – Sochi — Obstruction

255Paragraph 7.191 2 line 4 Add:...An obstruction lies in the SE corner of the anchoragearea, 3½ cables SW of Severnyy (North) Mole head.

Russian Notice 233.3.11(SDD 2011000 00089) [04/11]

Russia – North-east part of the Black Sea –Sochi to Mys Pitsunda — Imeretinskiy Port

257


SW of ImeretinskiyPort (4 miles WNW) (7.207),thence:


Imeretinskiy Port


1 Position. Imeretinskiy Port (43 24 6N 39 55 9E) issituated 1 mile SE of Adler (7.211). The port is asubsidiary of Sochi (7.182).

2 Function. The port has been constructed to servethe logistics requirements for the 2014 Sochi WinterOlympic Games. The port will deliver cargo andconstruction materials to the Imeretinskaya Valley,where the main construction site for the games isbased. After the games, part of the port area will bechanged into a yacht marina.


1 Maximum size of vessel. Vessels up to10 000 tonnes dwt can be accommodated.


1 Outer anchorage. Adler Roads anchorage iscentred 8 cables W of Adler. Cautions. Submarinecables extend through the centre and to the SE of theanchorage area. A submarine pipeline extending2½ cables SW, with an obstruction at its seaward end,lies in the NE part of the anchorage area.

2 Pilots. Pilots board in position 43 23 9N 39 54 3E,1½ miles SSW of Adler.

Harbour7.206d

1 The NW part of the harbour is protected by a shortbreakwater extending 240 m SE. The SE part of theharbour consists of a short breakwater extending130 m SW and an angled breakwater extending 530 mNW, the two breakwaters are connected by a roadbridge 210 m long. The entrance which opens SW is135 m wide.

Berths7.206e

1 1300 m of quay space consisting of eight berthswith depths alongside of 9 2 m. Bulk cargoes, cement,containers and general cargoes.

258


Lloyds List July 2012 [31/12]

Sea of Azov – Passage across Sea of Azov —Wreck

275


...36 40 E, thence:E of a dangerous wreck with a depth of 9 1 m(66 miles S).

Ukraine Notice 37.247.12(SDD 2012000 209658) [45/12]

Sea of Azov – East part – Mys Kamennyy toMys Achuyevskiy — Directions;

area to be avoided

284


Clear of an area to be avoided (4¾ miles E),2 7 cables radius, centred on 45 20 50N37 20 45E, thence:

Russian NM 3343/22/2012(SDD 2012000 104253) [25/12]

NP25

2 - 66

NP25 British Columbia Pilot Volume 1(2010 Edition)

United States of America – Puget Sound –Ports and Inlets West of Puget Sound —

Restricted areas; hazard lights

93


...122 37 20W), to Brownsville (47 39 20N122 37 00W). Flashing red lights on Navy range vesselsand on buildings at Keyport indicate that torpedo firings,tests or other operations hazardous to mariners are inprogress.

US Notice 05/18446/12(SDD 2012000 022303) [08/12]

Canada – Hood Canal – Hood Canal Bridge —Vertical clearance

119


US Notice 15/18477/12(SDD 2012000 071214) [18/12]

United States of America –Rosario Strait – Belle Rock — Light

131


5 E of Belle Rock (48 29 58N 122 45 16W),marked by BR Light Buoy (isolated danger).Bird...

US NGA Notice 47/18429/11(SDD 2011000 214049) [49/11]

Canada – Vancouver – Burrard Inlet —Directions; lights

208


2 N of Second Narrows Directional Light (whitesquare framework tower on 3-pile dolphin)(49 17 62N 123 02 76W), principally intendedfor outbound traffic. The line of bearing (266 ),astern, of this light leads through SecondNarrows. Thence:

Under Second Narrows Highway Bridge (6.164). Alight is exhibited from the bridge over the centreline of themain shipping channel. Four other lightsare sitedN andS of the centre line light, two on theW side and two on the E side. Thence:

3 Under Second Narrows Railway Bridge (6.164),close E of the highway bridge. Lights on thepiers supporting the lift span mark the limitsof the channel. A directional light in the centreof the bridge, with a line of bearing (266 ), isintended for traffic leaving Port Moody. Lightsfacing E and W indicate if the bridge is open(green), opening (isophase green), closing(isophase red) or closed (red). Thence:

S of two lights (white tower, green band at top, ondolphin) 2 and 5 cables E of the railway bridge,marking the limits of a dredged holding area, andS of a further light beacon (multi-pile dolphin)(49 17 94N 122 59 80W), marking the S edge ofan extensive drying sandbank. Thence:

BA Chart 4964 [12/12]

Canada – Port Moody —Directions; leading lights

209


Front light (white trapezium, red stripe, on whitemast) (49 17 73N 122 53 94W).

Rear light (similar structure) (218 m E of the frontlight).

The alignment (277 ), astern, of these lights leadsthrough the deep-water channel to a position N ofPacific Coast Bulk Terminals (6.175), passing:

Canadian Western Notice 05/3311/2011(SDD 2011000 100863) [40/11]

NP26 British Columbia Pilot Volume 2(2011 Edition)

Gardner Canal — Directions; Kitlope Anchorage

95


...128 48 97W) the route leads generally SE to thehead of the canal, passing:

96


Through to the head of the canal.


Spare3.142

Canadian West Notice 3948/09/2012(SDD 2012000 196081) [42/12]

NP27

2 - 67

NP27 Channel Pilot (2011 Edition)

France – Off Ushant TSS —Directions; buoyage; AIS

64




Virtual (safe water) (48 30 00N 5 45 00W).Virtual (safe water) (48 59 50N 5 24 00W).


1 North-east going traffic lane. From the vicinity of48 36 00N 5 45 00W at the entrance to theNE-bound traffic lane, the route leads 12 miles NNE,thence 7 miles ENE, to the vicinity of 48 50 50N5 26 80W at the exit from the lane.


1 From the vicinity of 48 50 50N 5 26 80W at theexit from the NE-bound traffic lane of Off Ushant TSS,the direction of traffic flow leads generally ENE forabout 117 miles to a position SSE of Channel LightFloat (49 54 47N 2 53 74W) (2.38), moored at the Wend of Off Casquets TSS.



England – Lizard Point to Falmouth —Fishing pots

90


Fishing pots4.16a

1 An unusually dense concentration of crab potsextends up to 6 miles off the coast between LizardPoint and Nare Point, 9 miles NNE. Much of this gearis unmarked and creates a risk of fouling to vesselsanchoring, particularly in the deeper water offshore.

Maritime and Coastguard Agency(SDD 2012000 208018) [47/12]

England – Plymouth — Pilot boarding position

111-112


5 Boarding position. Pilots board in the vicinity of50 18 50N 4 10 50W having first established directcommunication with the vessel requiring pilotage.

Cattewater Harbour Commissioners(SDD 2012000 060493) [17/12]

England – Brixham Harbour —Directions; direction light

145


1 Main Fairway is approached from a position NW ofVictoria Breakwater head. It leads SSE through OuterHarbour and is marked by numbered light buoys(lateral).

Tor Bay Harbour Authority Notice 14/12(SDD 2012000 111695) [26/12]

England – Poole Harbour — Bridges;navigable width; traffic signals

174


Navigable width6.102a

1 Poole Bridge: 18 4 m.Twin Sails Bridge: 19 0m.

176


Spare6.112


Bridges6.115

1 Two bascule bridges, Poole Bridge (50 42 76N1 59 56W) and Twin Sails Bridge (50 42 92N1 59 59W), cross Backwater Channel (6.131) betweenOld Town and Lower Hamworthy. Both bridges areequipped with traffic signal lights (Diagram 6.115) andLED screens indicating the vertical distance betweenthe water level and the underside of the lifting spans.These lights and screens are displayed on either sideof the channel at both bridges and are visible bothupstream and downstream.

2 To minimise disruption to mariners while keepingone bridge available to road traffic, the two bridgesare opened sequentially at specified times between0530 and 2345. Temporary berths are available on theHamworthy side of the channel for vessels awaitingthe opening of the second bridge. Full details of thesummer and winter schedules of opening times areavailable on the Port Authority website (6.101) and atwww.boroughofpoole.com. Poole Harbour Control andPoole Bridge may be directly contacted by VHF.

177

Paragraph 6.117 5 line 2 For the bridgeRead Poole Bridge

178

Paragraph 6.122 2 lines 6-7 For the bridge Read PooleBridge

Poole Harbour Commissioners(SDDs 2012000 043365; 050763) [17/12]

http://www.boroughofpoole.com

NP27

2 - 68

France – L’Élorn – Saint-Nicolas —Prohibited areas

267


Anchoring is prohibited within 50 m above andbelow the bridges, as shown on the chart.Anchoring, stopping, fishing and diving are

prohibited in a ½ mile stretch of the river in the vicinityof the pyrotechnical works at Saint-Nicolas. Inaddition, unauthorised vessels are prohibited fromentering an area which extends up to 1 cable from theberth.


France – Dives-Sur-Mer — Directions;light; buoyage

416


5 E limit, the meridian passing throughDives-sur-Mer Lighthouse (disused)0 05 22W.

420


1 From a position WSW of DI Light Buoy (safe water)(49 19 17N 0 05 84W) the bearing 159½ ofDives-sur-Mer Lighthouse (disused) (red hut, 5 m inheight) (49 17 80N 0 05 22W) leads in the entrancechannel passing between No 1 Light Buoy (starboardhand) (49 18 49N 0 05 67W) and No 2 Light Buoy(port hand) (49 18 50N 0 05 56W). The channel ismarked by buoys and beacons, some of which are lit.The channel frequently alters and the bearing of thelighthouse and the channel markings are adjustedaccordingly.


NP28 Dover Strait Pilot (2011 Edition)


Belgium – Westhinder and approaches toWesterschelde — Directions; TSS; precautionary

areas; ATBA; DW route; anchorages

57


1 At West Hinder TSS to Wandelaar Pilot Station(51 22 20N 2 42 92E) (7.14). From its junction withthe TSS in Dover Strait NE of Sandettié Bank(51 14 00N 1 58 00E), the route leads 21 miles ENEto the pilot station at Wandelaar. See 2.51.

60

Paragraph2.36 1 line 7ForWestHinder TSSReadAtWestHinder TSS

62

Paragraph 2.43 3 lines 2-3 For West Hinder TSS Read AtWest Hinder TSS

Paragraph2.43 4 line 3ForWestHinder TSSReadAtWestHinder TSS

Paragraph 2.45 1 and heading Replace by:

AT WEST HINDER TSS TO WANDELAARPILOT STATION

General information

Charts 323, 1873Route2.45

1 From a position S of Hinder 1 Light Buoy (isolateddanger) (51 20 79N 2 10 94E) the route leads21 miles in a generally ENE direction through At WestHinder TSS and West Hinder Precautionary Area toWandelaar Pilot Station.

Paragraph 2.48 1 line 1 For West Hinder TSS ReadAt West Hinder TSS


Precautionary Area2.48a

1 West Hinder Precautionary Area (51 22 50N2 40 00E) lies between the E end of At West HinderTSS and the routes into Westerschelde. The area hasrecommended directions of traffic flow and enablesdeeper draught vessels to navigate clear of theshallower parts. Wandelaar Pilot Station is situated inthe E part of the area.

Area To Be Avoided2.48b

1 An ATBA (51 23 90N 2 38 70E) lies between theN boundary of West Hinder Precautionary Area andthe S side of the E part of Westhinder Anchorage andextends about 2 miles W/E and 5 cables N/S. It mayonly be entered in an emergency, to avoid immediatecollision, or for safety of life at sea, and is designedto ensure vessels approach Wanderlaar Pilot Stationfrom either a N’ly or W’ly direction.

62-63

Paragraph 2.51 1-5 and heading Including existing SectionIV Notices Weeks 38/12 and 40/12 Replace by:

At West Hinder TSS to Wandelaar Pilot Station2.51

1 At West Hinder TSS is only 2 miles wide for thegreater part of its length and contains two traffic lanesseparated by a narrow separation zone. From its Wend, S of Hinder 1 Light Buoy (isolated danger)(51 20 79N 2 10 94E), the TSS leads 14 miles ENEto West Hinder Precautionary Area (2.48a), passing:

NP28

2 - 69

2 SSE of Fairy Bank (51 24 00N 2 20 00E) (7.5),marked at its S extremity by Fairy S LightBuoy (S cardinal) (51 21 20N 2 17 35E),thence:

NNW of Bergues Bank (51 17 00N 2 21 50E)(6.65), marked on its NW side by Bergues LightBuoy (starboard hand) (51 17 16N 2 18 62E)and Bergues N Light Buoy (N cardinal)(51 19 95N 2 24 52E), thence:

3 SSE of Westhinder Light (51 23 31N 2 26 27E)(2.49), standing at the S end of Westhinder(7.6). WH S Light Buoy (S cardinal)(51 22 78N 2 26 25E) is moored S of thelight structure on the N boundary of the TSS.Thence:

NNW of Oostdyck (51 16 00N 2 26 00E) (6.65),marked at its N end by Oost-Dyck Light Buoy (Ncardinal) (51 21 38N 2 31 12E) and OD1 LightBuoy (N cardinal) close WNW.

4 The route then leads 7 miles E through WestHinder Precautionary Area to Wandelaar Pilot Station(51 22 20N 2 42 92E), passing:

S of an ATBA (2.48b) marked at its SW extremity byAN Light Buoy (port hand) (51 23 45N2 36 92E), and:

N of AZ Light Buoy (starboard hand) (51 21 15N2 36 92E) moored on the S boundary of theprecautionary area, thence:

5 N of Kwintebank (51 15 60N 2 37 60E), markedat its N end by KB Light Buoy (N cardinal)(51 21 03N 2 42 83E) and KB2 Light Buoy(N cardinal) moored close W near the Sboundary of the precautionary area.

Caution. WH S Light Buoy should be given a wideberth due to strong tidal streams in its vicinity.

63

Paragraph 2.52 1 and heading Replace by:

Anchorages

Westhinder2.52

1 Westhinder Anchorage (51 25 00N 2 37 00E) lies5 cables N of the W part of West HinderPrecautionary Area; its E part borders the N side ofan ATBA (2.48b).

Oostdyck2.52a

1 Oostdyck Anchorage (51 20 00N 2 34 00E) liesabout 1 mile S of the W part of West HinderPrecautionary Area.

161


1 Fairy Bank (51 24 00N 2 20 00E) as defined bythe 20 m depth contour extends 9 miles NNE. Fairy SLight Buoy (2.51) is moored at the S end of the bankon the boundary of At West Hinder TSS.

Paragraph 7.6 1 lines 6-7 Including existing Section IVNotice Week 38/12 For the West Hinder TSS. Read AtWest Hinder TSS.

162

Paragraph 7.11 1 line 2 For SWA Read Akkaert-SW

Paragraph 7.11 1 line 4 For SWA Read Akkaert-SW


Precautionary Area7.12a

1 Due to the construction of wind farms aprecautionary area has been established in the vicinityof Bligh Bank (7.8) and Thornton Bank (7.9). Thearea, centred on 51 37 00N 2 54 00E, extends18 miles NW/SE and is approximately 5 miles wide.

165


1 From Wandelaar Pilot Station (51 22 20N2 42 92E), located in the West Hinder PrecautionaryArea (2.48a), two routes lead to Scheur, which is theprincipal fairway into the Westerschelde. AnIMO-adopted deep-water route, known as Vaargeul 1,is for vessels with a draught of more than 13 1 m andpasses N of Akkaert Bank (51 23 00N 2 50 00E); theother route, via A-1 Light Buoy (51 22 37N 2 53 34E),passes S of the bank. The distance from WandelaarPilot Station to Rede van Vlissingen is approximately33 miles.

167

Paragraph 7.42 heading Replace by:

Wandelaar Pilot Station to Scheur, deep-water routepassing north of Akkaert Bank

168


Between Akkaert-SW Light Buoy (W cardinal)(51 22 28N 2 46 34E), marking the SW end ofAkkaert Bank (7.11), and MBN Light Buoy (Ncardinal) (50 20 82N 2 46 29E), marking the SEcorner of West Hinder Precautionary Area,thence:

Paragraph 7.43 2 line 1 For A1 Read A-1

169


Between Akkaert-SW Light Buoy (W cardinal)(51 22 28N 2 46 34E) and MBN Light Buoy (Ncardinal) (50 20 82N 2 46 29E) (7.43), thence:

Paragraph 7.47 2 line 4 For A1 Read A-1


1 Westhinder Anchorage. See 2.52.Oostdyck Anchorage. See 2.52a.

NP28

2 - 70

177

Paragraph 7.109 1 line 7 For Vaargeul 1 Read thedeep-water route Vaargeul 1

BA Chart 1873; International Maritime Organisation;Belgian Notice 21/308/12(SDDs 2012000 139389; 207980) [44/12]

England – Littlehampton to Shoreham —Directions; meteorological mast

73


Clear of a meteorological mast (50 41 29N0 20 59W), thence:

Fugro Seacore(SDD 2012000 098547) [22/12]

England – Dover Harbour — Tidal stream

94


4 Caution. It has been reported (2012) that theE-going tidal stream sets across the harbour at ratesgreater than those depicted in the tidal streamdiagrams on chart 1698. The effect is likely to bestrongest in the vicinity of the W berths of EasternDocks between -0240 and -0110 HW Dover.

Dover Harbour Board Notice 34/12(SDD 2012000 238088) [50/12]

Belgium – Westhinder and West ApproachesTo Westerschelde — Buoys

63

Paragraph 2.51 3 line 3 For WH Zuid Read WH S

161

Paragraph 7.6 1 lines 7-8Delete Track Ferry To the N end.

168

Paragraph 7.42 3 line 7 For VG7 Read SVG

169

Paragraph 7.47 3 line 1 For SWW Read AW2

Paragraph 7.47 3 line 3 For WBN Read AW1

Paragraph 7.47 4 line 8 For A2 Read AW

Belgian Notices Weeks 16 and 17/2012(SDD 2012000 156593 and 166151) [38/12]

England – Pegwell Bay — Directions; landmarks

100


3 For marks at Ramsgate see 4.98.

102


4.821 Spare.

103


(SDD 2012000 053405) [16/12]

Belgium – Westerschelde and Approaches —Pilotage

162



Belgian Notice 14/214/12(SDD 2012000 134902) [31/12]


England – Approaches to Thames Estuary —Traffic separation scheme; buoyage

252


3 Sunk TSS East comprises ENE-going andWSW-going lanes, each about 11 miles in length and1 mile wide, with a 3 cable wide central separationzone. A separation zone 8½ cables wide extendsalong the N side of the TSS separating it from theOuter Gabbard and Inner Gabbard, and the N part ofGreater Gabbard Offshore Wind Farm (10.34).A light buoy (safe water) is moored at either end of

the central separation zone and S Inner Gabbard LightBuoy (S cardinal) (51 49 93N 1 51 89E) is moored atthe exit point of the WSW-going lane. N GalloperLight Buoy (N cardinal) (51 49 84N 1 59 99E) marksthe limit of the TSS in the vicinity of the N extremityof The Galloper (10.38).

International Maritime Organisation and Trinity House(SDD 2012000 123998; 202221) [44/12]

United Kingdom – Thames estuary – Margate toThe Nore — Directions; depths; buoyage;

channels

267


NP28

2 - 71


1 Depths vary in the channels. There is a least depthof 4 1m at the W end of South Channel and a leastdepth in Copperas Channel of 0 9 m in position51 23 75N 1 12 97E. Near the E end of OverlandPassage there is a least depth of 0 9 m in position51 25 23N 1 06 03E over the submarine cablebetween Kentish Flats Wind Farm (10.88) and HerneBay.


268


3 Through Gore Channel (51 23 80N 1 15 00E)which lies between Margate Hook, a dryingshoal (51 24 24N 1 15 02E) and the shoalsbordering the coast. A stranded wreck(51 22 88N 1 15 63E), marked by PlumPudding Buoy (port hand) (51 22 97N1 15 62E), lies to the S of the channel on thedrying line of the coastal shoals. There arealso drying patches close N and E of thebuoy. Margate Hook, on the N side of thechannel, dries and is marked on its S side byMargate Hook Beacon (S cardinal)(51 24 18N 1 14 28E). Thence:

4 Through Copperas Channel (51 23 75N1 11 80E) which lies between the W end ofMargate Hook, marked by Copperas LightBuoy (starboard hand) (51 23 81N 1 11 18E),and Reculver Sand (51 23 30N 1 12 00E),marked by Reculver Light Buoy (port hand)(51 23 63N 1 12 56E). There are rockyledges on Reculver Sand including BlackRock (51 23 20N 1 11 20E) and a dryingpatch 1 mile WNW of The Reculvers. Thence:

Through Horse Channel (51 24 50N 1 10 50E),which is unmarked and the continuation W ofCopperas Channel, thence:

5 To a position at the W end of Overland Passage(51 25 40N 1 04 00E) to the N of Whitstable(11.33). Overland Passage is unmarked andruns 6 miles WNW from Horse Channel toFour Fathoms Channel (11.44). Pudding Pan(51 25 60N 1 07 20E) lies on the N side ofOverland Passage and Studhill (51 23 90N1 06 00E) and Clite Hole Bank (51 23 60N1 03 60E) to the S. Concrete boulders lie onthe bottom of these patches. An outfall,marked at its seaward end by a buoy(special) (51 23 08N 1 04 57E) extends1 mile NNE from the coast. East Spaniard(51 26 58N 1 03 40E), a small shoal N ofOverland Passage, is marked on its SE sideby Spaniard Light Buoy (E cardinal)(51 26 24N 1 04 00E).

Caution. There are no good leading marks on thisroute.

271


1 From a position N of Whitstable (51 21 85N1 01 50E) (11.33) the route initially leads 3 miles Wthrough Four Fathoms Channel (51 26 20N 0 57 20E)passing:

S ofMiddle Sand (51 26 80N1 01 00E)which driesand extends E into East Middle Sand, which alsodries. Middle Sand Beacon (safe water)(51 26 98N 1 00 03E) lies to the N of MiddleSand. Several charted wrecks and obstructionslie off the S side of Middle Sand. Thence:

2 S of Spile (51 26 55N 0 57 20E), a drying patchlying on the S side of the W end of RedSand (51 27 00N 0 59 00E). Spile Light Buoy(starboard hand) (51 26 40N 0 55 70E) ismoored 9 cables W of Spile.

3 From the W end of Four Fathoms Channel theroute leads 3½ miles NW across The Cant(51 27 80N 0 51 00E), passing:

SW of East Cant (51 28 00N 0 56 00E), on whichstands the ruin of Cant Beacon (51 27 77N0 55 36E), thence:

Trinity House(SDDs 2011000 240248; 2012000 030216) [14/12]

England – Thames Estuary – Overland Passage— Buoy

268



...1 mile NNE from the coast. East Spaniard (51 26 58N1 03 40E), a small shoal, lies N of Overland Passage.

Trinity House(SDD 2012000 183274) [39/12]

England – East coast – Harwich Haven —Pilotage draught limit

283

Paragraph 12.58 4 line 5 Delete or under 8 m draught

Harwich Haven Authority(SDD 2012000 084978) [21/12]

United Kingdom – Harwich Haven approaches —Directions; buoyage

283

Paragraph 12.62 1 line 4 For port hand Read W cardinal

285

Paragraph 12.74 4 line 3 For port hand Read W cardinal

Paragraph 12.74 5 line 4 For W cardinal Read special

Trinity House Notice 13/12(SDD 2012000 030438) [13/12]

NP30

2 - 72

NP30 China Sea Pilot Volume 1 (2010 Edition)

China – South coast – Chang Jiang –Zhanjiang — Vertical clearance

247


Chinese Chart 15732/10(SDD 2010000103814) [27/12]

Zhuhai Gang — Pilotage

252

Paragraph 7.225 1 line 3 to 6 Replace by:

No 1 (21 50 48N 113 13 43E), vessels more than6 m draught.

No 2 (21 53 48N 113 12 53E), vessels less than6 m draught.

Chinese Chart 15449, Chart 1557(SDD 2010000172125) [48/12]

China – South Coast – Zhujiang Kou –Macao outer anchorage — Wreck

266


A dangerous wreck lies close S of this anchorage,marked by a buoy (isolated danger).

Chinese Notice 33/1196/11(SDD 2012000 151046) [27/12]

Hong Kong – Tathong Channel —Directions; dangers; depths

293

Paragraph 9.58 1 line 6 Delete The to dangers.


The scheme is entered at TCS1 Light Buoy (safewater) (22 13 16N 114 20 18E). TCS2, TCS3 andTCS4 Light Buoys (safe water) moored in theseparation zone mark the turning points. Attention isdrawn to an obstruction (22 15 34N 114 16 21E), witha depth of 13 0 m in the inbound lane and a leastdepth of 12 9 m in the outbound lane.

Hong Kong NM 20/37/10, Chart 4127(SDD 2010000166350) [48/12]


South China Sea - Dangerous Ground -South West Part — Major Light

62


SinCowe Island Light (yellow square tower on yellowand red building, 23 m in height) (9 52 43N114 19 17E).

63


Sin Cowe Island Light (9 52 43N 114 19 17E).

Paragraph 2.90 2 line 3 Add: From where a light (2.85) isexhibited.

Vietnam Notice to Mariners 132/2012(SDD 2012000 208149) [49/12]

Philippines – Luzon – Mariveles —Total Bataan Terminal

185


Total Bataan Terminal8.120a

1 General Information. Total Bataan Terminal(14 25 60N 120 33 80E), part of the port of Mariveles(8.95), is located at Alasasin Point and consists of aT-head jetty 530 m in length leading SSE from theshore.

2 Berth. The berth at the head of the jetty has twoberthing and four mooring dolphins and canaccommodate vessels up to 50 000 dwt at a depth of9 5 m.

Bataan Terminal Marine Handbook(SDD 2012000 128445) [30/12]


Taiwan – Taiwan Strait — Direct Cross-straitShipping Links

65

Paragraph 2.7 Including Section IV Notice Week 50/11Replace by:

1 Regulations for foreign vessels in Taiwanese watersare at Appendix II.Direct Cross-strait Shipping Links. Vessels

navigating between mainland China and ports inTaiwan should use the charted fairways. The fairwaysshould be entered via the appropriate pass point.Details of these routes are shown on chart 1760.

2 Mini Three Links System for vessels tradingbetween Taiwan, the offshore islands and themainland see 2.121.

117

Paragraph 3.74 Including Section IV Notice Week 50/11Replace by:

1 Regulations for foreign vessels in Taiwanese watersare at Appendix II.

NP32

2 - 73

Direct Cross-strait Shipping Links. Vesselsnavigating between mainland China and ports inTaiwan should use the charted fairways. The fairwaysshould be entered via the appropriate pass point.Details of these routes are shown on chart 3236.

Chinese Hydrographic Office(SDD 2012000 211863) [48/12]

Philippines – North coast of Luzon – Aparri —Dangerous wreck

107


A dangerous wreck, with about 2 m of water over it,lies N of the port entrance in position 18 23 35N121 38 19E.

Philippine Notice 086/05/12(SDD 2012000 112353) [27/12]

Taiwan – Luzon Strait — Directions; dangers

111


3 8 m (20 37 80N 118 40 80E).

Taiwanese Chart 0328B(SDD 2011000 162684) [50/12]

Taiwan – East coast – Su-ao Kang — Anchorage

125


...a foul area lies 2 cables N. A second anchorage area liesbetween co-ordinates:

24 34 38N 121 53 33E24 34 37N 121 53 62E24 34 10N 121 53 62E24 34 10N 121 53 35E

The recognised quarantine anchorage is within theouter harbour, clear of the main fairway, in 19 to21 m, sand.

Taiwainese Notice 208/2011(SDD 2011000 240184) [03/12]

China – East Coast – Xiamen Gang —Approach and entry

146


2 Extensive changes to fairways, buoyage, depths,anchorage areas, wrecks, piers and AIS are currentlytaking place in Xiamen Gang. Details are promulgatedin Admiralty Notice to Mariners 5167(P)/11.

(NM 5167(P)/11) [48/11]

China – East coast – Tiaozhou Men —Vertical clearances

235



ZoumatangDao (29 44 30N 122 13 70E) to ChangShan, two cables, least safe vertical clearance19 m.

Chinese Chart 13521(SDD 2012000 186047) [51/12]

China – Shanghai approaches –Nancao Hangdao — Pilot boarding positions

279


No 3(N) (31 03 40N 122 12 20E)No 3(S) (31 02 48N 122 12 20E)

Chinese chart 13178(SDD 2012000 190915) [49/12]

China – Shanghai – Hengsha Tongdao —Directions; TSS

284


...The S entrance is marked by light buoys (lateral),but the main part of the strait is mainly unmarked.


The track then leads generally NNW, joining a TSS,through a short entrance channel, marked by lightbuoys (lateral), thence:

N and NNW, following the TSS, through HengshaTongdao, thence:

Paragraph 7.47 5 line 1 For (E cardinal) (31 23 14N121 46 95E) Read (lateral) (31 23 09N 121 46 79E)

Chinese chart 13181(SDD 2012000 184747) [49/12]

China – Yellow Sea – Lianyungang —Directions; buoyage

311


Lianyunganggangkoumen Light Buoy (superbuoy)(34 55 58N 119 57 53E).



NP32

2 - 74

313






Clear of Lianyunganggangkoumen Light Buoy(superbuoy) (34 55 58N 119 57 53E), thence:


The track then continues WSW to the vicinity ofNo 11 Light Buoy (34 52 26N 119 49 34E);anchorages (8.32) may be approached directly, orfrom the buoyed entrance channel (below).

315





317






China - Yellow Sea - Lianyungang —Charts; directions; berths

311

Paragraph 8.23 Charts heading For Charts 1253, 878Read Charts 1253, 723, 738, 739

312

Paragraph 8.32 3 lines 14-15 For DangerousGoods ReadExplosives

Paragraph 8.34 3 line 3 For areas: Read area:


313


Between the breakwaters (under construction 2012)in the vicinity of No 37 and No 38 Light Buoys(34 44 77N 119 31 49E and 34 44 46N119 31 34E respectively).

314


NNE of a large area being reclaimed (2010)extending ESE from the Ore Terminal (8.48).


1 Ore Terminal with a depth of 15 m. A turning arealies NNE of the terminal.Fertilizer Wharf under construction (2012).Mayao Working Area has three piers with

14 berths for vessels of up to 25 000 dwt. There is acoal pier for vessels of 10 000 dwt WNW of Pier No 3.A turning area lies NE of Pier No 3.

2 Miaoling Working Area consists of MiaolingContainer Wharf with 4 berths with depths of 14 m.There are two basins further W with 12 berths forvessels of up to 35 000 dwt. There are three turningareas with an unspecified obstruction, positionapproximate, in the E most one.Xugou Working Area has four turning areas,

12 berths for vessels up to 25 000 dwt and a RoRoTerminal.

Charts 723, 738 & 739 [40/12]

China – Yellow Sea – Rizhao Gang — Anchorage

318


7 Tanker 35 08 60N P2 Light Buoy (special)

119 49 40E marks NW corner and P1

Light Buoy (special)

marks NE corner.


NP32

2 - 75

China – Bo Hai – Yantai — Pilotage

344


No 2 Pilot and


1 Pilots board in the following positions:No 1 Pilot boarding position (37 43 60N121 30 50E).

No 2 Pilot boarding position (37 38 51N121 29 03E).

For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals 6(6).

Chinese Chart 11940(SDD 2012000 184261) [47/12]

China – Yellow Sea – Penglai — Anchorages

350


Paragraph 9.129 2 Including existing Section IV NoticeWeek 48/11 Replace by:

2 Outer anchorages:A quarantine anchorage lies N of Penglai, depth 15

to 17 m, bounded by the following coordinates:37 57 00N 120 53 00E37 56 45N 120 56 83E37 54 47N 120 56 83E37 52 87N 120 53 00E.

No 5 quarantine anchorage, depth 17 to 19 m,bounded by the following coordinates:

37 51 00N 121 20 00E37 48 00N 121 20 00E37 48 00N 121 15 00E37 51 00N 121 15 00E.

No 6 quarantine and dangerous goods anchorage,depth 18 m, bounded by the following coordinates:

37 51 00N 121 09 20E37 49 50N 121 09 20E37 49 50N 121 06 00E37 51 00N 121 06 00E.

Paragraph 9.129 5 line 3 For anchorage Read anchorages


China – Bo Hai – Huanghua Gang — Directions

381


2 Approach and entry. The port is approached fromHuanghua Gang in the W of Bohai Wan through twobuoyed channels and the harbour entered between aseries of groynes.The outer anchorages may be approached directly

from the E or NE; but keeping clear of a dangerouswreck (38 28 07N 118 21 79E), marked by a lightbuoy (isolated danger).


4 Controlling depths. Both channels are dredged;the least charted depth in the North Channel is 12 5 mand in the South Channel 12 6 m.

382


No 235 Buoy (lateral) (38 25 44N 118 00 59E).



3 South Channel Dakoue Leading Lights:

Paragraph 10.87 4 line 1 For (239½ ) Read (240 )

Paragraph10.87 4 line 7Forbreakwater headReadgroyne

Paragraph 10.87 4 line 12 For breakwater Read groyne


5 South Channel Dakoue Inner Leading Lights:


6 North Channel Leading Lights:Front light (black diamond on white metal frameworktower, 45 m in height) (38 20 80N 117 60 50E).

Rear light (black diamond on white metal frameworktower, 67 m in height) (1 3 miles from front).

7 Entry. The alignment (240 ) of the lights passesclose SE of Zonghegangqu Light Buoy (safe water)and follows the buoyed channel, thence:

The track then continues on the alignment through achannel marked by light buoys, passing S of agroyne marked at its outer end by a light beacon(special) (38 25 32N 117 59 83E). An identicallight beacon (38 24 85N 118 00 17E) SW of thechannel marks the NW extremity of a submergedgroyne.

8 The track continues on the 240 alignment,passing NE of extensive construction works(2010) until the vicinity of No 249 Light Buoy(38 21 92N 117 52 77E). The channel thenleads SW to the jetty.

9 Berths. The South Channel leads to three berths,largest 280 m in length and a depth of 14 0 m. Thehead of the coal pier (38 19 4N 117 52 9E) ismarked by a light (green and white GRP pile).The North Channel leads to a 2000 m pier with a

general depths of 6 3 m to 14 m. The NE end of thepier is marked by a light (white concrete column withred bands, 12 m in height) (38 21 06N 117 52 28E).

10 Xincun is approached via Dakouhe Hekou, ashallow channel, marked by light buoys (lateral) andleading lights, to the SE of Huanghua Gang SGroyne, and across a bar which dries, and enteredvia a river. Two dangerous wrecks, marked by lightbuoys (isolated danger), lie on the approach SE of theouter part of the breakwater.

11 Useful mark:Operating Vessel Pier Light (white metal pile, redbands, 9 m in height) (38 19 34N 117 53 27E).

(BA Chart 2650) [15/12]

NP32

2 - 76

China – Bohai – Tianjin Gang –Dagukou South Anchorage — Dangerous wreck

384


Name Position Designation Remarks2 Dagukou

NorthAnchorage

38 57 43N118 02 22E

All vessels(exceptthose below)with draughtless than10 5 m,quarantineanchorage.

Depths6 to 14 m.

DagukouSouthAnchorage

38 54 01N118 03 55E

Vessels withdangerouscargo,draught over8 m; othervessels over10 mdraught,quarantineanchorage.

Entry isprohibited toan areawithin theanchoragecontaining adangerouswreckmarked to Nby lightbuoy(isolateddanger). Afurtherdangerouswreck lies inposition38 53 53N118 02 86E


China – Bohai – Jingtang —Directions; racon

391


JingtangNo 2 Light Buoy (39 05 25N119 09 27E).

Paragraph 10.143 5 line 6 For (39 08 53N 119 04 95E)Read (39 05 25N 119 09 27E).

Chinese Notices 43/1567-1569/11(SDD 2011000 199946) [51/11]

China – Boi Hai – Jinzhou Gang — Directions

404


3 Tankers of 50 000 dwt or less should follow thetemporary tanker channel (10.233) from the vicinity ofNo 3 Anchorage (40 14 96N 121 22 04E) (10.227),passing SW of the oilfields (40 30 00N 121 21 00E),and E of Dajiulou Jiao (40 43 10N 121 02 00E)(10.193).

4 Leading Lights:Front light (white diamond on white metal frameworktowerwith red stripes, 33 m in height) (40 44 30N121 03 06E).

Rear light (white diamond on white metal frameworktower with red stripes, 55 m in height) (9¾ cablesfrom front).

5 From a position E of Juhua Dao (40 29 41N120 49 24E) the alignment (352 ) of these lights leadsto a position between Jinzhougang Nos 1 and 2 LightBuoys (lateral) (40 43 54N 121 03 20E).

6 Other vessels continue N passing:E of a platform (lit) (40 22 62N 121 23 76E); a well,

depth 12 m, lies about 1½ miles N, marked by alight buoy (special), thence:

E of the oilfields with lit production platforms andsubmerged wells, least depth 4 8 m, (40 30 31N121 23 35E).

The track the continues N to the vicinity ofNo 2 Anchorage (40 32 96N 121 26 59N) (10.231).

7 The track then leads WNW through the fairway ofthe preferred channel to either anchorage No 1(10.227) or a position about 5 miles E of HuludaoGaojiao Light (40 42 87N 121 01 32E) (10.190).The track then continues WNW to Jinzhougang

Nos 1 and 2 Light Buoys (lateral).8 Jinzhou Gang Leading Lights:

Front light (circle on white pile) (40 48 73N121 03 88E),

Rear light (similar construction) 9¾ cables fromfront.

9 From a position between Jinzhougang Nos 1 and 2Light Buoys (lateral) (40 43 54N 121 03 20E), thealignment (005¾ ) of these lights leads throughJinzhougang Hangdao, a channel marked by lightbuoys and light beacons (lateral) towards the harbourand into the basins, Nos 1 and 2 Basins beingapproached directly from the channel.

10 Tanker Jetty Leading Lights:Front light (white diamond on white metal frameworktowerwith red stripes, 32 m in height) (40 48 64N121 02 27E).

Rear light (white diamond on white metal frameworktower with red stripes, 42 m in height) (2¾ cablesfrom front).

11 From a position about 2½ cables NNE of No 7 LightBeacon (40 46 37N 121 03 46E), the alingnment(335 ) of these lights leads NNW for about 1 mile to atanker jetty marked at S end and N end, by lights (redand white GRP towers, 10 m in height).

12 No 5 Basin:From a position about 1½ cables SSE of No 9 Light

Beacon (port hand) (40 47 66N 121 03 65E), thealignment (060 ) of leading lights leads about 7 cablesinto the basin:

Front light (white metal pipe) (40 47 92N121 04 65E).

Rear light (similar structure) (½ cable from front).13 A new buoyed channel has been established from

the vicinity of Jinzhougang Nos 1 and 2 Light Buoys(lateral) (40 43 54N 121 03 20E), leading generallyNW to a position N of the construction work offHuludao.

Chinese Notices 52/1966-1967/11; ALLFS F3965.61,F3965.601, F3965.668, F3965.6681(SDD 2011000 240256) [06/12]

NP32

2 - 77

China – Bo Hai – Yingkou —Vertical clearance; racon

405


Vertical clearance10.245a

1 The Liao He Ultra Large Bridge (40 41 66N122 10 91E) crosses the river between Yinkou andLiaobin. Vertical clearance is unkown.

407


Liao He Ultra Large Bridge (40 41 66N122 10 91E).

Chinese Notices 33/1180-1182/11(SDD 2011000 151046) [48/11]

Korea – West coast – Taesan Hang — Light

427


435


436


S of Oedaldo, a hilly island covered in pine trees. Alight beacon (W cardinal) (34 46 68N126 17 33E) stands off theSWpoint of the island.

Korean Notice 691/12(SDD 2012000 216234) [49/12]

Korea – West coast – Mokp’o Hang —Berths; inner anchorages; depths

438



BA Chart 1558 [29/12]

Korea – West coast – Taesan — Anchorages

457


2 A14Anchorage

37 03 70N126 19 55E

Depth about 30 m;outside harbourlimits

A13Anchorage

37 04 00N126 20 75E

Depth about 13 m;outside harbourlimits

A12Anchorage

36 59 02N126 15 31E

Depth about 30 m;vessels over65 000 dwt;outside harbourlimits

A11Anchorage

36 59 55N126 16 01E

Depths about 28 to35 m; vessels over65 000 dwt;outside harbourlimits

A10Anchorage

37 00 34N126 16 87E

Depth about 31 m;vessels under65 000 dwt

3 Quarantineand A9Anchorage

37 00 78N126 17 49E

Depths 24 to 35 m;vessels under65 000 dwt

A8Anchorage

37 01 13N126 18 10E


A7Anchorage

37 01 42N126 18 68E

Depth about 33 m;vessels under6000 dwt

A6Anchorage

37 01 63N126 19 14E

Depth about 35m;vessels under6000 dwt

4 A5Anchorage

37 02 59N126 21 88E


A4Anchorage

37 02 80N126 22 45E


A3Anchorage

37 02 94N126 23 64E


A2Anchorage

37 02 58N126 24 06E


A1Anchorage

37 02 26N126 24 36E


Korean Notice 732/12(SDD 2012000 216234) [49/12]

Korea - West coast - Inch’än —Directions; anchorages; berths

463


The pilot boarding point for the Container Terminal(12.160) is in position 37 30 57N 126 35 88E, W ofYulto.

468


Anchorages W16 and W17 lie W of the buoyedchannel off Yulto (12.160).

NP32

2 - 78

470


6 Container Terminal (37 33 65N 126 35 87E), N ofYulto.


3 Navigational aids. A buoyed channel, with aminimum depth of 5 6 m, extends from Yulto to theContainer Terminal (12.160) NE of the YängjongdoBridge. The channel in Yäm Ha is marked by buoysand beacons from March to November, but they areliable to drag or be destroyed by floods or othercauses.

Korean Notice 25/347/12(SDD 2012000 123633) [36/12]

NP33 Philippine Islands Pilot (2011 Edition)

Philippines – Sibutu Passage —Reporting system

127


Reporting system5.14a

1 A reporting system is in operation for the SibutuPassage area and applies to all vessels in transit. Fordetails see Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(4).

MV British Trader(SDD 2012000 151563) [35/12]

Malaysia – Sungai Merotai Kecil — Directions

145

Paragraph 5.153 2 lines 1 to 10 Delete

BA Chart 2099(SDD 2011000 105818) [18/12]

Philippines – Panay – Juraojurao Island —Directions

269


Clear of a 34 m shoal (10 22 90N 121 58 06E),thence:

Philippine Chart 4706(SDD 2012000 039810) [20/12]

Luzon — Pagbilao Power Station

285


Pagbilao Power Station9.18a

1 Description. Pagbilao Power Station (13 53 47N121 44 63E) lies on the SW coast of Pagbilao GrandeIsland. Anchorage may be obtained at the pilot station1 mile S of Pagbilao Grande Island.

2 Berth, aligned NNW/SSE, comprises two coalunloading gantries and is suitable for vessels of 300 min length, draught 13 75 m. A conspicuous chimneylies close E of the berth.

Southwest Ships Agencies Inc(SDD 2011000 220765) [51/11]

Philippine Islands – Negros – Siquijor Island —Light

367


Minarcahan Point Light (GRP tower, 4 6 m in height)(9 18 08N 123 37 25E).

373


Minarcahan Point Light (GRP tower, 4 6 m in height)(9 18 08N 123 37 25E).

381


Minarcahan Point Light (9 18 08N 123 37 25E)(10.173).

Philippine Notice 06/104/12(SDD 2012000 135323) [33/12]

Philippine Islands – Mindanao —Container Terminal

398


Mindanao Container Terminal10.403a

1 Mindanao Container Terminal (8 31 20N124 45 00E) has a 300 m berth face on a NW/SEaxis, 13 m alongside depth and two gantry cranes.Port Authority. Mindanao International Container

Terminal Services Inc, Phivdec Industrial Estate,Tagaloan 9001, Misamis Oriental.

Website: www.ictsi.com/operations

Mindanao International Container Terminal Services(HH. 033/200/02) [03/12]

Philippines – Luzon – Port Alabat — Light

418

Paragraph11.75 2 line 11Add:A light (white steel pipe, 4 min height) is exhibited from the rock.

http://www.ictsi.com/content.php?id=293&ct=2

NP33

2 - 79


Useful mark:Light (white steel pipe, 4 m in height) (14 05 99N122 00 38E) exhibited from the causeway head.

Philippines Notice 8/167/12(SDD 2012000 182432) [43/12]

Philippines – Leyte – Abuyog — Major Light

457


2 Major Light:Abuyog Light (white metal tower, 20 m in height)(10 44 62N 125 00 89E).

Philippines Chart 1518(SDD 2012000 040106) [21/12]

NP34 Indonesia Pilot Volume 2 (2009 Edition)

Indonesia – South coast of Jawa –Tanjung Intan — Limiting conditions

61


2 Less water than charted has been reported (2010)to E and N of No 1 Light Buoy (starboard hand)(7 45 2S 109 03 3E).

Fleet Management Ltd, Hong Kong(SDD 2010000 102609) [34/10]

Jawa – South Coast –Semenanjung Blambangan –

Tanjung Slokah — Directions; light

65


...weather. A stranded wreck may be visible atTanjung Slokah from which a light (white beacon,30 m in height) (8 43 00S 114 36 32E) isexhibited.

102


Tanjung Slokah Light (white beacon, 30 m in height)(8 43 00S 114 36 32E).

103


...114 36 E) from which a light (5.16) is exhibited, onaccount of a fringing reef and heavy...

Indonesian Notice 25/211/12(SDD 2012000 134846) [33/12]

Indonesia – North coast of Jawa –Pulau Bawean — Directions; major light


3 Major lights. Tanjung Mantegi Light (whitebeacon) (5 43 1S 112 41 1E).

Sangkapura Light (white metal framework tower,20 m in height) (5 51 3S 112 39 2E).

Paragraph 4.16 2 line 5 For (white metal framework tower,20 m in height) Read (4.14)

Dishidros(SDD 2010000 018377) [17/10]

Java Sea – Pulau-pulau Kangean –Pagerungan Terminal — FPSO; lights

75


1 Position and function. Pagerungan Terminal(6 58 32S 115 57 37E) consists of an SPM 1 mile Eof Pulau Pagerungan Besar. It is used for the exportof condensates from the Pagerungan Gasfield 1 mileN.Further development of the oilfield is taking place to

the N; FPSO Pagerungan Utara (6 49 74S115 56 36E), an additional SPM, and wellheadsmarked by lights (white pipe beacons) are located8 miles N of the SPM as seen on the chart.


Java Sea East-West through routes –Pulau Bawean to Gosong Sakunci —Directions; moored storage tanker

76


Clear of the FPSO Joko Tole (7 15 13S114 55 07E), moored at the S extremity of themain channel, 11½ miles SE of Pulau Kamudi.For further details on restrictions see 1.21.Thence:

77


Clear of the FPSO Joko Tole (7 15 13S114 55 07E) (4.40) 11½ miles SE of PulauKamudi. For further details on restrictions see1.21.


Indonesia – North Coast of Jawa –Selat Surabaya and approaches — Depths

81


United Kingdom Hydrographic Office(HH. 034/200/01) [05/12]

NP34

2 - 80

Indonesia – North Coast of Jawa –Selat Surabaya – Gresik – Poleng Oilfield —

Submarine gas pipeline

81After Paragraph 4.86 1 Insert:

2 A submarine gas pipeline links Gresik (4.103) withPoleng Oilfield (4.156). The pipeline crosses to E sideof the N entrance channel at Gresik and then followsclose W to the recommended track between No 6 andNo 7 Light Buoys (lateral) then passing S and E of Nentrance outer anchorage (4.84).

Rubicon Maverick(SDD 2009000 137629) [47/09]

Indonesia – North coast of Jawa –Selat Surabaya and approaches — Directions;

vertical clearance; buoyage

81


Vertical clearance4.87a

4 A fixed bridge, with a vertical clearance of 34 m,spans the SE entrance between Sekarbungu, 1 mile Eof Kesek (4.87), and Tambakwedi 2¾ miles S.

84

Paragraph 4 101 4 lines 1-5 Replace by:

4 From No 8 Buoy (port hand) (7 12 S 112 48 E) thetrack leads W to Tanjungperak, through a buoyedchannel, under the bridge (4.87a). A dangerous wreck(7 11 3S 112 46 0E), lies 1 cable S of a buoy(starboard hand).Caution. The direction of buoyage changes

5 cables W of the bridge.

Indonesian ENCs ID400096; ID500084(SDDs 2010000 013826; 030044) [16/10]

Indonesia – North Coast of Jawa –Selat Surabaya – Gresik — Berths


4 Siam Maspion Terminal, (7 06 69S 112 39 15E),with platform and dolphins, lies 2 miles N ofPetrochemical Wharf. A causeway and trestleextend 1 9 miles from the shore. Vessels ofup to 100 000 dwt, maximum length of 240 mand maximum draught alongside of 10 5 mcan be accommodated. Lights are exhibitedfrom beacons (special) at the head of theterminal.

PT Siam Maspion Terminal(SDD 2009000 146783) [47/09]

Indonesia – North Coast of Jawa –Selat Surabaya – Port of Tanjungperak — Wreck

87After Paragraph 4.136 1 Insert:

2 A stranded wreck, marked by a light buoy(starboard hand), lies 1½ cables ENE of the ContainerTerminal elbow.

Indonesian Notices 34/297/09; 34/298/09(SDD 2009000 122716) [47/09]

Indonesia – North coast of Madura —Directions; major light

88Paragraph 4 151 3 lines 7-8 Replace by:

4 Major lights:Pulau Karangjamuang Light (6 56 S 112 44 E)(4.92).

Batuputih Light (white metal framework tower, 40 min height) (6 52 2S 113 56 3E).

89Paragraph 4 154 1 lines 4-5 Delete

Dishidros(SDD 2010000 018377) [17/10]

Jawa – Selat Madura – Approaches toProbolinggo – Pulau Ketapang and

Karang Katon — Directions;light beacon; light buoy

91


N of Pulau Ketapang; a light (white post, 10 m inheight) (7 40 50S 113 15 70E) is exhibited fromthe E of the island. Thence:

92


... to the anchorage, is reef-fringed. A light (7 40 50S113 15 70E) (4.177) is exhibited from the E extremity ofthe island.


...shells and stones marked by a light buoy (isolateddanger) (7 41 50S 113 12 70E), thence to the anchorage(4.190) N of the...


Pulau Ketapang Light (7 40 45S 113 15 70E)(4.177).

DG Sea Comm(SDD 2012000 134194) [33/12]

Indonesia – Nusa Tenggara – Lombok –Teluk Ayang Southwards — Rock


Indonesian Chart 291(SDD 2009000 019005) [47/09]

NP34

2 - 81

Indonesia – Pulau Sumba – South-east coast —Directions; major light

167Paragraph 7 46 2 lines 1-2 Replace by:

2 Major lights:Tanjung Ngaru Mangigit Light (white beacon)(10 14 9S 120 39 6E).

Tanjung Undu Light (10 05 3S 120 50 7E) (7 13).

Dishidros(SDD 2010000 018377) [17/10]

Indonesia – Selat Flores — Directions; lights

192


Pulau Serbete lighthouse (8 09 0S 123 01 1E)(White metal framework tower, 15 m in height).

193

Paragraph 8.34 1 line 5 For (8 19 1S 123 01 1E) (8.37)Read (8 19 2S 123 00 7E) (white metal frameworkstructure, 30 m in height).


...light (8.29) is exhibited from the islet. Thechannel...


Tanjung Serbete Light (8.34).

United Kingdom Hydrographic Office(HH. 034/200/01) [04/10]

Kalimantab – Sangai Burito — Directions

220


Other aid to navigation9.76a

1 Racon:Tanjung Pedadatua (3 29 96S 114 27 95E).

See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.


...position, S of the Fairway Light Buoy (safe water)(3 40 80S 114 28 40E) (9.90), initially leads E thenNE keeping in depths of not less than 11 m, passing:

221


1 Approach and entry. Sungai Barito may beapproached from S and entered through a dredgedchannel marked by light buoys.

Paragraph 9.86 1 line 4For www.banjarmasin.pp3.co.idRead http://www.banjarmasinport.co.id/


1 Outer Anchorage. Temporary anchorage may beobtained S or SW of the Fairway Light Buoy(3 40 80S 114 28 40E) (9.95) in depths between 10and 20 m, mud and sand.


1 Pilotage is compulsory for Sungai Barito andSungai Martapura for all vessels over 150 gt. The pilotboards S of the Fairway Light Buoy (3 40 80S114 28 40E) (9.95). A pilot look-out station standsclose NE of Tanjung Pedadatua, at the W entrancepoint to Sungai Barito.

2 Requests for pilotage should be given to localagents at least 12 hours before arrival and 6 hoursbefore departure. See Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(4).Tugs. Several tugs are available at Trisakti Wharf.

222


1 From the vicinity of the Fairway Light Buoy(3 40 80S 114 28 40E), the track leads N through thedredged channel, marked by light buoys (lateral),passing:

W of Tanjung Burung Light Beacon (3 32 19S114 29 67E), thence:

E of Tanjung Pedadatua (3 30 32S 114 28 87E)(9.76).

BA Chart 3015 Edition 3(SDD 2011000 171464) [49/11]

Indonesia – East Coast of Kalimantan –Teluk Balikpapan — Private Terminal

245


Palm oil, chemical Terminal10.162a

1 Wilmar Private Terminal (1 08 10S 116 46 10E),which lies 5 miles NNW of Tanjung Makasar, consistsof a two berth T-head jetty. The outer berth, Alpha,can accommodate vessels up to 50 000 dwt with amaximum permitted draught of 11 5 m. There is aminimum alongside depth of 13 5 m. The inner berth,Bravo, has a minimum depth alongside of 10 0 m.Terminal operator: Mekar Bumi Andalas (MBA)

Wilmar Private Terminal.

MSI Ship Management Pte Ltd(SDD 2011000 138082) [33/11]

Approaches to Makassar – North-west ApproachChannel — Shoal

268


Cautions. In September 2010 a vessel with adraught of 9 7 m reported grounding close S of therecommended track, 2¼ miles SW of PulauKapoposang Light, in approximate position 4 43 40S118 55 20E.This channel is rarely navigated at night.

Hudson Shipping Lines(SDD 2011000 171563) [41/11]

http://www.banjarmasinport.co.id/

NP34

2 - 82

Sulawesi – Head of Teluk Bone —Directions; light

331


...a depth of less than 3 m, from which a light(black beacon, white bands) is exhibited, situated8½ miles W of...


Sulawesi – Kepulauan Banggai –Karang Vesuvius — Directions; light

350


...a light (white metal framework tower 10 m inheight) is exhibited (2 09 67S 122 56 00E) fromthe SW side of the SE reef. A conspicuous hut lies8 cables N of the light. All three reefs are markedby discoloration when covered. Thence:

UKHO(SDD 2012000 45408) [20/12]

Indonesia – Sulawesi – Selat Bangka –Pulau Talisei – Tanjung Arus — Racon


Spare16.180



Indonesia – East Coast of Halmahera –Teluk Buli – Directions; shoal; lights

188

After Paragraph 6.250 3 line 5 Insert:ENE of a shoal (0 44 03N 128 23 54E) (6.247),thence;

Paragraph 6.250 3 lines 9-10 Replace by:ENEof PulauGee (Gei) (0 49 80N128 19 25E), an

islet, from where a light beacon (0 50 71N128 19 09E) is exhibited, 2 miles NNW of PulauPakal.

Paragraph 6.251 1 Replace by:1 From E, the track leads W passing:

N of Pulau Leleve (0 43 87N 128 33 21E), areef-fringed islet, from where a light (6.249) isexhibited. Thence:

S of Pulau Parapara (Para Para) from where a lightbeacon (0 47 94N 128 30 46E) is exhibited,thence;

N of a dangerous rock lying 6 cables E of Pulau Sain,an islet from where a light beacon (0 45 68N128 30 02E) is exhibited, thence N of this islet.

The track then passes S of Karang Bulat (RondeReef) from where a light beacon (0 47 70N128 25 74E) is exhibited, thence NW direct to theroadstead passing between Pulau Gee (6.250) andKarang Litin (6.252).

189Paragraph 6.252 2 lines 9-12 Replace by:The track then leads WSW as required to pass S

of Karang Litin, a drying reef, from where a lightbeacon (0 51 84N 128 22 32E) is exhibited, thenceW to the roadstead. A 2 m (6 ft) shoal patch lies2½ miles ESE of Karang Litin.

Indonesian Notices 20/182/11; 20/183/11; 20/184/11;21/189/11; 21/194/11(SDD 2011000 117572; 117577) [32/11]


Indonesia – Sumatera – Selat Sunda —Directions; wreck

71


Clear of a wreck (5 52 12S 105 50 12E), thence:

DG SeaComm(SDD 2012000 221808) [51/12]

NP37 West Coasts of England and Wales Pilot(2011 Edition)

England – West Coast – Bristol Channel — Light

65

Paragraph 2.1 1 line 4 For (51 01 30N 4 31 55W) Read(51 01 33N 4 31 53W)

66



67


Paragraph 2.26 3 lines 5-6 For (51 01 30N 4 31 55W)Read (51 01 33N 4 31 53W)

76

Paragraph 2.67 2 line 10For (51 01 30N 4 31 55W)Read(51 01 33N 4 31 53W)

79


NP37

2 - 83


Hartland Point (51 01 33N 4 31 53W), with alighted beacon (1 5 m in height) and disusedlighthouse (white round tower, 18 m in height), ...

80


Hartland Point Light — as above.


83


84




Hartland Point (51 01 33N 4 31 53W), with alighted beacon and disused lighthouse (2.84).



87


93


Trinity House(SDD 2012000 004546; 029723) [08/12]

England – Isles of Scilly — Directions; racon

66


67



England – South–west coast – Offshore routes— Directions; light buoys

67


2 Automatic Identification System:Wave Hub NW Light Buoy (50 23 06N 5 38 24W).

For details see The Mariner’s Handbook andAdmiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.


1 NW of Renewable Energy Development Area(50 21 84N 5 36 71W) marked by Wave HubNW Light Buoy (N cardinal) (50 23 06N5 38 24W), Wave Hub SE Light Buoy (Scardinal) (50 20 64N 5 35 01W), a waverecorder light buoy and six light buoys(special), thence:

Wave Hub, Hayle(SDD 2012000 076096) [21/12]

England – South–west coast – St Ives Bay —Directions; light

68


2 Godrevy Island disused lighthouse (white octagonaltower, 26 m height) (50 14 55N 5 24 03W), whichstands in the centre of the island, with a light (2.38)close NE.

69

Paragraph 2.38 5 line 5 For NW of Godrevy Island LightRead NW of Godrevy Island


Useful mark:Godrevy Island Light (metal framework structure 4 min height, atop a rock pinnacle) (50 14 56N5 24 01W).


England south–west coast – Hayle —Directions; buoys

71

Paragraph 2.43 3 line 5For light buoys (lateral)Read a lightbuoy (N cardinal)

Hayle Harbour Authority Ltd(SDD 2012000 189116 and 170011) [40/12]

NP37

2 - 84

Wales – South–east coast – River Usk — Berths

132


1 General information. Birdport (51 33 70N2 58 09W) is situated on the E side of the river4 cables N of Saint Julian’s Pill. It is equipped tohandle processed steel, metals, timber and loose bulkcargoes using a gantry crane (vertical clearance21 5 m) spanning the dock.The dock is 225 m long, 19 8 m wide with depths of

8 5 m at MHWS, 5 2 m at MHWN and is enteredbetween two short jetties. Formerly a dry dock, it hasa flat concrete bottom with a covering of silt. Half-tidegates at the dock entrance are normally kept closedand depths up to 6 2 m can be maintained. Vesselsup to 8000 dwt and capable of taking the ground canbe accommodated.


1 MIR Steel Wharf, with a jetty close N lies on the Eside of the river about 3 cables SSE of Birdport. Theberth, which dries at low water, can accommodatevessels capable of taking the ground up to 150 mLOA and 26 m maximum beam. Vessels of 150 m to155 m LOA are only accepted after consultation withthe Harbour Master.

Cargo Services (UK) Limited; ABP South Wales(SDD 2012000 135037); (SDD 2012000 129749) [30/12]

Wales – South-west coast – Turbot Bank —Directions; buoy

162



Wales – Milford Haven — Depths

163


Depth in West Channel is 16 3 m and MainChannel 16 5 m (2012).

Milford Haven Port Authority(SDD 2011000 223683; 2012000 037766) [14/12]

Wales – West coast – Fishguard — Depth

188


Harbourmaster, Stena Ports Limited(SDD 2012000 085588) [20/12]

Wales – West coast – Barmouth Bay — Beacon

203

Paragraph 6.82 2 lines 7-8 For (red tripod tower) Read (Scardinal)

Harbwr Feistr Abermaw Harbourmaster(SDD 2012000 079668) [19/12]

Wales – North-west coast – Anglesey —Penrhyn Mawr

218



BA Chart 1413 [06/12]

Wales – West Coast – Menai Strait — Directions

235

Paragraph 7.158 1 line 2 For S Read SSW


Either side of Caernarfon Bar Fairway Light Buoy(safe water), thence:

237

Paragraph 7.163 3 line 1 For S Read SSW


Caernarfon Harbour Trust(SDD 2011000 149390, 155116) [39/11]

England – Liverpool Bay — Directions; buoy

245


...5 cables and 1¼ cables W of Bar Light Float.

Cefas(SDD 2012000 000206) [04/12]

Wales – River Dee Estuary — Directions

248


leads ESE for about 5 miles, thence SE and ESE for afurther 4½ miles to the outer end of South Hoyle Channelleading into Welsh Channel, passing:

NP37

2 - 85

249


6 The line of bearing 090 , in the white sector(089 5 - 090 5 ), of West Hoyle Spit (Earwig) OuterDirectional Light (perch pile) (53 21 21N 3 24 07W)which leads into South Hoyle Channel close S ofSouth Hoyle Outer Light Buoy (port hand) (53 21 26N3 26 94W). The channel is marked by light buoys(lateral), has a least depth 3 1 m (2011) and leads Eand ENE into Welsh Channel.

Paragraph 8.36 1 lines 3-7 Delete from The dredgedchannel to Point of Ayr.

251


...buoyed channel and leads close E of M1 Light Buoy.

BA Chart 1953(SDD 2012000 041035) [15/12]

Wales – River Dee Estuary — Directions

249


SW of Dee Light Buoy (S cardinal) (53 21 95N3 18 36W), into Wild Road (8.49) and Mostyninner pilot boarding position.

250


251



Mostyn Harbour Master(SDD 2012000 054544) [14/12]

Wales – River Dee Estuary — Berths

251-252


Berths 1, 2 and 3 are 100 m sections of the riverwharf piled quay starting from upriver. Berth 1dredged to 6 0 m (2010).

Berth 4 is the Dee River Craft berth.Berth 5 is the RoRo terminal.

Mostyn Harbour Master(SDD 2012000 036212) [11/12]

England – River Mersey — Arrival information;Vessel traffic service

255


...Marine Operations Control Centre, call sign: MERSEYVTS, preferably when rounding The Skerries (53 25 27N4 36 50W) and not later than the vicinity of Bar Light Floatinward-bound or before sailing. A continuous listeningwatch must be maintained when under way or at anchorwithin the port.

Mersey Docks and Harbour Company(SDD 2011000 231833) [04/12]

England – West Coast – Directions — Buoy

279

Paragraph 9.19 3 line 2 For 3 24 10W Read 3 22 00W

282




296


297



298



North-west coast of England –Fleetwood — Anchorage; depth

282


1 Vessels can find open anchorage 2¾ cables NW ofNo 2 Light Buoy (53 58 56N 3 01 84W) in about18 m, clear of submarine cables. An area of foulground lies 1 mile NW of Wyre Lighthouse (disused)(53 57 16N 3 01 79W) (9.48).


1 Controlling depths. The controlling depth is 1 2 m(2012) in the channel and is to be found close N ofNo 7 Light Buoy. The turning area off the...

Associated British Ports Fleetwood and Navigation SafetyBranch MCGA(SDD 2012000 064689 and 067028) [17/12]

NP37

2 - 86

Morecambe Bay – River Lune — Buoy

287


...position close S of Lune No 1 Light Buoy (W cardinal)(53 58 66N 3 00 00W).

289


...and Lune No 1 Light Buoy (W cardinal)(53 58 66N 3 00 00W), 1 mile E,...

Chief Executive, Lancaster Port Commission(SDD 2012000 060654; 231678) [49/12]

England – West coast – Heysham — Buoy

289


4 SE of No 6 Light Buoy (port hand) (54 00 63N2 58 18W) which marks the edge of shoalwater with depths of less than 5 m and rockarmour protecting submarine cables, thence:

Heysham Port Limited(SDD 2012000 030391) [09/12]

England – North–west coast –Barrow–in–Furness — Port radio

290

Paragraph 9.70 2 line 7 For Control Read Radio

Paragraph 9.71 1 line 5 and line 8 For Control Read Radio

292

Paragraph 9.73 1 line 8 and line 12 ForControlReadRadio

Paragraph 9.74 1 line 7 and line 10 ForControlReadRadio

Associated British Ports, Barrow(SDD 2012000 105671) [25/12]

England – North–west coast –Barrow-in-Furness — Traffic signals

292


1 Spare.

Harbour Master ABP Barrow & Fleetwood Notice 17/12(SDD 2012000 154359) [34/12]

England – Solway Firth – Silloth Harbour —Maximum draught

313



...of 7 4 m at MHWS and 5 1 m at MHWN. A figure of 1 0 mshould be subtracted from the height of HW (above the sill)to obtain the maximum permissible draught. The quayheight is approximately 9 9 m above sill level.

Associated British Ports Silloth(SDD 2012000 054775) [14/12]

England – Solway Firth – Silloth approach —Buoys

313




Associated British Ports Silloth(SDD 2012000 134511 & 135340) [30/12]

NP38 West Coast of India Pilot (2010 Edition)

Sri Lanka East Coast – Trincomalee toPulmoddai Roads — Directions; wreck

141


...headland fringed by a reef with a dangerouswreck...

Harbour Master, SLPA(SDD 2011000 192205) [44/11]

Sri Lanka – West coast – Colombo harbour —Limiting conditions; arrival information;

directions; berths

161


1 South Asia Gateway Terminal (4.102).

NP38

2 - 87

162

Paragraph 4.86 3 lines 5-8 Delete.

163


164


1 South Asia Gateway Terminal (SAGT) occupies940 m of the SW jetty in the Harbour Basin. It hasthree berths with depths of 15 m alongside and isused by container vessels. The S part of the jetty,about 200 m in length, is used by passenger andgeneral cargo vessels.

Harbour Master, Sri Lanka Ports Authority(SDD 2010000 079813) [25/10]

India – West coast – Quilon –Port authority; pilotage

185


Port Authority. Port Officer, Neendkara, Asramam,Kollam, Kerala-02.E-mail: [email protected]


Pilotage5.38a

1 Pilotage is compulsory and is provided by PortOfficer, Neendkara. Pilot boards 5 cables SE of themain breakwater head.

Indian Notice 7/10(SDD 2010000 056540) [25/10]

India – West coast – Quilon to Kochi —Directions; obstruction


2 WSW of an obstruction in a depth of 14 5 m(14½ miles S), lying in the approaches to NØndakara(5.52). Thence:


India – Kochi — Arrival information;anchorages; pilotage

190Paragraph 5.80 Replace by:5.80

1 Anchorage is available as follows;(a) For vessels with a draught over 12 m, in an areabounded by:9 56 60N 76 03 50E

9 56 60N 76 05 10E

9 54 10N 76 05 10E

9 54 10N 76 03 50E(b) For vessels with a draught below 12 m, in an areabounded by:9 56 60N 76 06 80E

9 56 60N 76 10 60E

9 54 10N 76 10 60E

9 54 10N 76 06 80ETankers waiting to discharge at the SPM should

anchor 2½ miles S of the SPM.2 Lightering area. An area where STS operations

are carried out, radius 5 cables, lies centred on10 03 50N 76 04 50E.



1 Restricted area. The SPM (5.100) lies in arestricted area with a radius of 7 cables.Prohibited anchorage. Anchoring is prohibited, in

an area bounded by:9 58 60N 76 03 50E

9 58 60N 76 05 50E

9 56 60N 76 05 50E

9 56 60N 76 03 50E

191Paragraph 5.82 Replace by:5.82

1 Pilotage is compulsory for all merchant vesselsexceeding 100 gt, is advisable for smaller vessels, andavailable 24 hours. Pilots board vessels bound for theport in the following positions:

Boarding ground Position

North 9 58 30N 76 08 70E

South 9 57 30N 76 08 70E

West 9 57 50N 76 05 50E2 Pilot for the SPM boards from a tug about 2½ miles

from the SPM, between 0600 and 1600 local time, tocomplete mooring during daylight. Boarding positionshould be confirmed with port control over VHF radioprior to arrival. Tankers may depart from SPM at anytime.For details see Admiralty List of Signals

Volume 6(4).3 Tugs are available; generally two tugs are used for

each shipping movement. At the SPM a tug remainssecured to the offloading tanker for pull backoperations.

Port of Kochi; Indian Notice VI/15/12(SDD 2012000 151521; 156592) [37/12]


NP38

2 - 88

India – West coast – Kochi Harbour —Spoil ground

191


Spoil ground5.87a

1 Two spoil grounds, circular in area, each with aradius of 1500 m, have been established in theapproaches to Kochi as follows:

North Spoil Ground centred on 10 00 0N 76 05 0E;South Spoil Ground centred on 9 55 0N 76 06 0E.


India – Kochi — Cochin Oil Terminal

194


Depths less than charted were reported (July 2012)alongside the terminal; the Port Authority should beconsulted for the latest depths.

MV Challenge Polaris(SDD 2012000 144593) [37/12]

India – Kochi to Beypore — Directions; wreck

196


Clear of a dangerous wreck marked by a light buoy(isolated danger) (10 08 11N 76 02 95E),position approximate, thence:

Indian Notice 15/188/12(SDD 2012000 144669; 156592) [37/12]

India – Badagara to Mount Dilli —Azhikkal; storm signals; useful marks

203



Useful marks. Two breakwaters mark the entranceto Valapattanam River.

Indian Notice VI/15/12(SDD 2012000 156592) [37/12]

India – New Mangalore —Arrival information; SPM

209


Submarine pipeline6.49a

1 A submarine pipeline is laid between 12 54 56N74 48 60E and the SPM (6.59a).



1 Restricted area. The SPM (6.59a) and oil pipelinelie within restricted areas.Prohibited anchorage. Anchoring is prohibited

within 500 m of the SPM and 250 m either side of thecharted pipeline.

210


Single Point Mooring

SPM6.59a

1 A SPM (lit) is moored in position 12 54 00N74 39 00E, in a depth of about 31 m.

Indian Notice VI/14/12(SDD 2012000 144669) [37/12]

India – West coast – Kºrwºr toMormugao Head — Directions;

dangerous wreck

223


A dangerous wreck lies about 11½ miles W ofMormugao Head.


India – West coast – Mandºvi River — Pilotage

228


Pilotage is compulsory in the river; a local pilotmay be engaged by contacting the Captain of thePort, Panaji. See Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(4) for further details.

Deputy Captain of the Port, Panaji(SDD 2010000 067680) [25/10]

NP38

2 - 89

India – Murud – Janjira Harbour;General information; anchorages; berths

248

Paragraphs 7.154 to 7.158 including heading Replace by:

Dighi Harbour (Murud – Janjira)

Charts 1508, 1487

General information7.154

1 Position and function. Dighi Harbour (Murud –JanjØra) (18 16 70N 72 58 63E) lies at the entrance toRºjpuri Creek. The port being developed on bothbanks of the creek entrance, will, when completed, beable to handle a wide variety of cargoes. The harbouralso affords good shelter to vessels of moderate sizefrom all winds except those from W to NW, duringwhich small craft may shelter in Rºjpuri Creek. Fishingis a major activity of the port.

2 Topography. Murud, a town lying on the N shoreof Rºjpuri Creek, 2½ miles NNE of Nºnwell PointLighthouse (18 16 84N 72 56 17E), is surrounded bya large grove of palm trees. Dighi, a village 2 milesESE of the same lighthouse, situated on the S shoreof Rºjpuri Creek, has a bight SE of it which is fringedwith mangroves; a drying mud-flat fills the bight.Traffic. Local vessels use the harbour daily.Port authority. Head of Marine/Operations, AT and

P.O: Dighi, Teh: Srivardhan, District: Raigad,Maharashtra - 402 402.Internet: www.dighiport.in


1 Controlling depths. The port authority should becontacted for the latest information on depths in thechannel and alongside berths.Tidal levels. Maximum range about 4 1 m;

minimum range about 0 8 m. See information inAdmiralty Tide Tables Volume 3.

Arrival information7.156

1 Notice of ETA required. At least 24 hours prior toarrival.Outer anchorages. There are two designated

anchorages as follows:

Anchorage Limits

Alpha 18 18 30N 72 48 90E18 18 30N 72 50 90E18 19 30N 72 50 90E18 19 30N 72 48 90E

Bravo 18 18 60N 72 47 25E18 18 60N 72 48 25E18 19 60N 72 48 25E18 19 60N 72 47 25E

2 Smaller vessels may also obtain anchorage about5 miles W of JanjØra Fort, in depths of 10 m, mud, asshown on the chart.Pilotage and tugs. Pilotage is mandatory for all

vessels. Pilot boards in position 18 17 40N72 49 00E, close W of the fairway light buoy. Twotugs are available.

Harbour7.157

1 General layout. The harbour comprises a quay,650 m in length, on the S bank 2 miles E of NºnwellPoint. There is a jetty situated 2 cables SE of Dighi;this jetty is surrounded by drying mud at LW. Thereare three jetties on the N shore of Rºjpuri Creek. Onelies close SE of Bandar Hill, another on the point S ofthe village of Rºjpuri, 1 mile SE of Bandar Hill and athird jetty lies close E of Sandy Point (18 16 41N72 59 61E).

A ferry plies between these jetties during the fineweather season.

2 Development. Under Phase 1 of the developmentplan, three berths, totalling 1100 m in length, areunder construction on the N bank with completionexpected in 2013. These berths are to be used forhandling containers and other clean cargo.Storm signals are displayed from Nºnwell Point

Lighthouse, the brief system is used. See 1.54.Tidal streams have a rate from 1 to 1½ kn during

flood and ½ to 1 kn during ebb.

Directions7.158

1 Major light:Nºnwell Point Light (white 8-sided masonry tower,

red bands, 19 m in height) (18 16 84N72 56 17E).

Caution. Fishing stakes may be encountered withinthe harbour. These usually consist of large poles orstripped palm trees, however, they generally show wellabove HW.Approach. Vessels approaching the harbour from S

should keep in depths of more than 15 m until JanjØraFort (7.149) standing 2 miles NE of Nºnwell PointLight is identified.

2 Entry. From a position about 7 miles W of NºnwellPoint Light the track leads generally E and SE forabout 9½ miles through a buoyed channel marked by10 pairs of light buoys (lateral) to a turning circlesituated between the N and S berths, noting that thelimits of the dredged area are marked by light buoys(special).Useful marks:

Sandy Point (18 16 41N 72 59 61E).Dighi Hill (251 m high) (18 16 03N 72 57 35E), thehighest point on the peninsula.

Conical Hill (232 m high) (18 15 13N 72 57 25E),bare.

Berths7.158a

1 Two multi-purpose berths, each 325 m in length, lieon the S bank; cargoes handled include containers,bulk, break-bulk, liquid and LNG.

Port services7.158b

1 Other facilities. Medical; garbage collection; wasteoil reception.Supplies. Fuel; fresh water; provisions.

Indian Notice VI/14/12; www.dighiport.in(SDD 2012000 144669) [37/12]

http://www.dighiport.in

http://www.dighiport.in

NP38

2 - 90

Approaches to Mumbai and Jawaharlal NehruPort – Bravo (West) anchorage — Wreck

252

Paragraph 7.186 1 including existing Section IV NoticeWeek 38/10 Replace by:

1 An anchorage area centred on 19 06 N 72 32 E lies21 miles NW of Prongs Reef Light, its limits areshown on the chart.

Bravo (West) anchorage, centred on 18 45 N72 29 E, lies between the safety fairways and NeelamHeera and Ratna Oilfield. Large vessels may anchorin depths commensurate with draught keeping clear ofthe charted disused cables and foul ground.A dangerous wreck (18 46 22N 72 29 15E) with

exposed masts, lies in the N part of this anchorage. Itis marked by a light buoy (isolated danger) mooredabout 7½ cables N.Bravo (East) anchorage, for use by smaller vessels,

centred on 18 46 N 72 37 E, lies 12 miles WSW ofProngs Reef Light; its limits are shown on the chart.

Indian Notices 15/202/10, 17/208/11(SDD 2010000 124269, 2011000 163685) [40/11]

India – Gulf of Khambhºt — VTS

261



1 A vessel traffic service (VTS) for the control ofshipping is in operation in Gulf of Khambhºt.Participation is mandatory for all vessels navigating inor intending to enter Gulf of Khambhºt. For furtherdetails see Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(4).

Indian Notice VIII/14/12(SDD 2012000 144669) [37/12]

South approach to Gulf of Khambhºt –Hºzira (Sørat) Port — Pilotage

268


Pilotage. Pilot boards LNG vessels in position20 54 00N 72 35 00E, close S of Magdalla Port Limit.For further details see...

Capt. Ankur Basu, Pilot and Berthing Master, Hazira PortPvt. Ltd.(SDD 2011000 210624) [49/11]

PØpºvºv Port – Approach and entry; pilotage;directions; recommended track

276


Approach and entry. The port is approached fromS on the charted recommended track which passes Eof the Fairway Light Buoy (20 53 13N 71 29 74E)(safe water), and entered through the buoyed WestChannel, dredged (2009) to 14 5 m.


...board in position 20 52 60N 71 30 11E, on theinbound recommended track. Vessels with LOA under100 m and draught under...

Paragraph 8.106 2 line 18 For UCL Read Ultra Tech


Paragraphs 8.108 1 line 9 For UCL Read Ultra Tech

Paragraph 8.108 1 lines 12-18 Delete fromThe Fairway Light...to...GPPL Jetty.

Paragraphs 8.108 2 and 3 Replace by:2 Caution — arrival. Due to the current setting

strongly across the channel entrance and to facilitatesafe navigation between inbound and outboundvessels in the vicinity of the pilot boarding ground, theport authority have established two one-wayrecommended tracks.Inbound vessels are advised to proceed along the

charted track to embark their pilot. The approachspeed over ground should be restricted to about 4 knat the charted pilot embarkation position to allowvessels to abort the approach by taking all way offand/or turn about using bold engines and helm if thepilot is delayed in boarding and reaching the conningposition. If aborting the approach by turning about, itis recommended that vessels entering on the floodturn to port and vessels entering on the ebb turn tostarboard.

3 To make good the recommended track, vesselsmay have to steer up to 40 across the currentdepending on the strength of the stream and enginespeed of the vessel. Vessels should closely monitortheir course and speed over ground so as to proceedalong the recommended track.Inbound vessels shall allow outbound vessels to

pass well clear of the Fairway Light Buoy prior toclosing in on the pilot boarding position.Departure. Outbound vessels should follow the

charted recommended track after passing close E ofthe Fairway Light Buoy.



Indian Notices 150/9/11, 157/10/11 and SDO 10/11(SDD 2011000 082409;093386) [30/11]

NP38

2 - 91

India – West coast – Dahej — Port authority;pilotage; tidal stream; berths

281


Petronet LNG Jetty;Internet: www.petronetlng.com

Paragraph 8.137 3 line 6 Replace by:...pilot for GCPTCL jetty boards 1 mile W of the jetty.Pilotage for Petronet LNG Jetty is compulsory;vessel’s speed to be less than 5 kts when embarkingpilot. Berthing during daylight slack water. See...


Direction of the stream in the vicinity of PetronetLNG Jetty is 160 -340 .


The jetty can accept vessels up to 220 000 m3

(Q-Flex) with a maximum draught of 12 7 m.


Gulf of Khambhºt – Dahej —Arrival information; berth

281

Paragraph 8.137 3 line 6, including existing Section IVNotice Week 25/10 Replace by:

...pilots for GCPTCL and APPPL jetties board1 mile W of the respective jetties. Pilotage for PetronetLNG Jetty is compulsory; vessel’s speed to be lessthan 5 kn when embarking pilot. Berthing duringdaylight slack water. See...


APPPL (Adani Petronet Port Private Limited) jetty isa T-headed jetty, consisting of a North Berth with alength of 206 m and a South Berth with a length of221 m. The berths can accommodate dry/break bulkcargo vessels with a maximum LOA of 260 m anddraught of 14 5 m.

Mahesh Pillai, Marine(SDD 2011000 189472) [49/11]

India – West coast – Verºval to Porbandar —Directions; wreck

289

Paragraph 8.200 2 line 4 For 33½ miles Read 32½ miles


India – West coast – Porbandar toKachchigadh — Directions;safety fairways; wrecks

290


Safety Fairways8.213a

1 Three safety fairways converge at a point 11 milesW of Kachchigarh Light (8.217), as shown on thechart. They are mandatory for Indian registeredvessels and recommended for all other vessels. Onefairway leads NNW for 42 miles from a position34 miles W of Porbandar Light (8.197). The other twofairways lead ENE and ESE from seaward.

2 To minimise risk of head-on encounters, marinersare advised to keep their vessels as near to the outerlimit of the fairway which lies on their starboard sideas is safe and practicable, while approaching orleaving the area, consistent with InternationalRegulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972).

291


Clear of two dangerous wrecks (19 miles WNW and21 miles NW), thence:

Indian Notice 09/10(SDDs 2010000 065010; 075927) [25/10]

Porbandar to Kachchigadh –Ghughadwa Creek — SPM

291


Ghughadwa Creek8.221a

1 Ghughadwa Creek lies 3 miles NW of NºvadraLight (8.217).A SPM (lit) moored in position 21 55 94N

69 09 91E, is connected to the shore by a submergedoil pipeline which leads NE to land about 2½ milesSW of the village of Bhogºt (21 59 50N 69 14 44E).Anchoring is prohibited within 1000 m of the SPM andwithin 500 m of the pipeline.

Indian Notice 187 (14/11)(SDD 2011000 137740) [37/11]

India – Gulf of Kachchh — VTS

293



1 A vessel traffic service (VTS) for the control ofshipping is in operation in Gulf of Kachchh.Participation is mandatory for all vessels navigating inor intending to enter Gulf of Kachchh. For furtherdetails see Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(4).

Indian Notice VIII/14/12(SDD 2012000 144669) [37/12]

http://www.petronetlng.com

NP38

2 - 92

West part of Gulf of Kachchh — Major Light

295


Bhadreswar Light (22 54 49N 69 54 84E) (9.75).

304


Bhadreswar Light (white masonry tower, 60 m inheight) (22 54 49N 69 54 84E).

306


Bhadreswar Light (22 54 49N 69 54 84E) (9.75).


West part of Gulf of Kachchh –Salºya Harbour — Anchorages

302


Outer anchorage. The designated anchorage,2 miles square, lies centred on 22 31 00N 69 33 00E,with depths ranging from 18 m to 42 m, mud.

303


1 Anchorages. A large vessel may anchor in SalºyaHarbour about 1½ miles WSW or 2 miles S ofKºlubhºr Tºpu Lighthouse in a depth of 14 m, mud.

Indian Notice 188 (14/11)(SDD 2011000 137740) [37/11]

India – West coast – Karod Nadi toNavØnºl Point — Directions; buoyage

304


...on its S side, andSSWof Sonar Light Buoy (porthand) moored about 1½ miles S of this danger.Thence:


India – Mundra — Port information

305


...consists of two container terminals and amulti-purpose jetty on Nav Ønº l Island, themulti-purpose T-headed jetty extending 7 cables SSWfrom the coast and a SPM.

Paragraph 9.85 1 line 9 For 6 miles W Read 10 miles W


Port Authority. Mundra Port and Special EconomicZone Ltd, Post Bag No 1, Mundra, Kachchh, Gujarat370 421.


Pilot for the SPM boards 1¾ miles S of the SPM.

Paragraph 9.89 1 line 1 Replace By:

3 Major light:Mundra Marine Control Tower Light (22 43 8N69 42 4E) (9.75).

Other aid to navigation - racons:Mundra Marine Control Tower Light (22 43 8N69 42 4E).

Mundra SPM (22 40 7N 69 39 3E).For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals

Volume 2.Approaches. The anchorage or pilot station (9.87)

may...


Entry to basin SW of Multi-purpose Terminal 2.Leading Lights:Front light (height 12 0 m) (22 44 4N 69 42 9E),Rear light (height 15 5 m) (50 m from front light).

The alignment of the above lights leads to the SWberths of Multi-purpose Terminal 2.


4 Container Terminals 1 and 2 lie, along a singlewharf 1264 m in length, close N of NavØnºl Point(22 44 2N 62 42 7E). Both terminals are allocatedtwo berths, each 316 m in length.Multi - purpose Terminal 2, consists of a 575 m

long jetty extension of the container terminals. TheSW face of the jetty lies alongside a basin with amaintained depth of 14 5 m. The terminal has 4 berths,two on each side of the jetty, with facilities to acceptvessels upto 300 m in length and draught rangingfrom 10 5 to 15 5 m.

Mundra Port(SDDs 2010000 134005; 134665) [38/10]

India – West coast –VºdØnºr Offshore Oil Terminal —

Function; maximum size

308


Function. Consisting of SBMs I and II owned byIndian Oil Corporation and SBM III owned by ESSAR,the terminal imports crude oil for refining at theirrespective facilities ashore.

Paragraph 9.106 1 Replace by:1 The SBMs can accommodate crude oil tankers from

87 000 to 325 000 dwt.


NP38

2 - 93

India – West coast – Essar VºdØnºr Terminal —Port authority; limiting conditions; berths

309


2 Terminal authority:Head MarineVadinar Oil Terminal LtdEssar Refinery Site, VadinarJamnagar, Gujarat-361010

Website: www.essar.com

Limiting conditions9.113a

1 Density of water: 1 025 g/cm3.Maximum size of vessel handled. LOA 245 m,

draught 13 5 m (reported December 2009),100 000 dwt.


1 There are two berths each of length 309 5 m with adepth of 20 m alongside. Each berth has eightmooring dolphins with quick release hooks andcapstan.


India – West coast – Kandla – Harbour andapproaches — Pilotage; spoil grounds; berths

314


...1 mile WSW of Outer Tuna Buoy and...


1 Two spoil grounds, radius 1000 m, have beenestablished centred on 22 54 0N 70 09 0E and22 51 0N 70 10 0E. An alternative spoil ground,marked by a light buoy (special), is established invicinity of 20 56 7N 70 15 0E.


1 Cargo Jetty, 2533 m in length, is located about2 miles within the creek on the W side, and hastwelve berths. Two berths are reserved for container...

Paragraph 9.176 2 Replace by:2 Passenger Jetties No 1 and No 2 are T-shaped

and lie close N of Cargo Jetty. Flotilla Jetty, 130 m inlength and aligned 356 /176 has been constructed Nof Passenger Jetty No 1.Tanker berths. There are six oil jetties on the W

bank, which can accommodate vessels between40 000 to 56 000 dwt. Oil Jetty No 1, also known asNehru Jetty, lies 12 cables N from N end of CargoJetty, and the remaining jetties are within about11 cables N from it.


Spare9.177

Indian Notices 07/10 and 09/10(SDDs 2010000 056540; 065010; 075927) [25/10]

Pakistan – Sonmiani Bay — SPM

337


Single Point Mooring10.143a

1 A SPM buoy (lit) is moored in position 24 56 91N66 34 89E, about 3 miles NNW of Churna Island. It isconnected to the shore by a submarine pipeline whichlands about 8 cables S of Khalifa Point (10.141).

Pakistan Notice 65/23/12(SDD 2012000 117449) [37/12]

NP39 South Indian Ocean Pilot (2011 Edition)Nil

NP40 Irish Coast Pilot (2010 Edition)

Ireland – South coast – Cork Harbour to TuskarRock — Directions: light buoy

58


Commissioners of Irish Lights(SDD 2012000 046487) [12/12]

Ireland – South-west coast – Bantry Bay —Directions

70

Paragraph 3.24 3 line 5 For (51 39 16N 9 44 88W)Read (51 39 18N 9 44 84W)

78



Roancarrigmore Light (stainless steel tower, 7 m inheight) (51 39 18N 9 44 84W) and a disusedlighthouse (white round tower, black band, 18 m inelevation) stand on Roancarrigmore. Thelighthousebuildings andboth towers areenclosedby a white wall.

80

Paragraph 3.95 1 line 2 For depth of 3 7 m Read dredgeddepth of 6 0 m (2012)


Commissioners of Irish Lights(SDD 2012000 039993; 040194; 040935) [11/12]

http://www.essar.com

NP40

2 - 94

South–west coast of Ireland – Bantry Bay –Castletownbere — Arrival information;

directions

76

After Paragraph 3.74 and beneath Arrival informationInsert:

Port operations3.74a

1 See 3.95 for details of broadcast requirements.

80

Paragraph 3.95 1 including existing Section IV NoticeWeek 11/12 Replace by:

1 The principal entrance channel to Castletownbereleads W of Dinish Island. It is narrow with a width of35 m, and a dredged depth of 6 0 m (2012) on theleading line (3.96).There is also a small channel N of Dinish Island

suitable only for boats; it is spanned by a bridge witha vertical clearance of 7 2 m.

2 Vessels restricted in their ability to manoeuvrewithin the principal entrance channel should broadcasttheir intention to transit the channel on VHF Channel16 when:

Inbound from SW, on passing Colt Rock LightBeacon (51 38 07N 9 55 10W) (3.85).

Inbound from E, in position 1 mile E of Walter ScottRock (51 38 57N 9 54 26W) (3.96).

Outbound, preparing to depart the harbour.

Harbour Master Castletownbere Fishery Harbour Centreand BA Chart 1840(SDD 2012000 198266) [43/12]

South coast – Castletownbere – Directions —Leading lights

77Paragraph 3.84 1 lines 3-8 Replace by:Directional light. A directional light beacon (white

hut, red stripe, 6 m in height) (51 38 78N 7 54 32W)stands on the SW end of Dinish Island. The light isexhibited by day and night with the white sector(024 -024½ ) leading through West Entrance.


Castletownbere Harbour Master(SDD 2010000 109939; 194625; 205498) [01/11]

South–west coast – Castletown Bearhaven —Directional light

77Paragraph 3.84 1 line 7 Including existing section IV NoticeWeek 01/11 For (024 -024½ ) Read (023 -023½ )


South-west coast – Dunmanus Bay — Directions

82Paragraph 3.106 3 line 1For (51 33 00N 9 43 00W)Read(51 28 28N 9 49 37W)


Paragraph 3.116 2 line 3 For Lord Bandon’s Tower ReadBandon’s Tower

84Paragraph 3.121 2 line 5Delete noting themarine farmNofFurze Island,

85Paragraph 3.125 2 line 5 For 6 7 mpatchRead 5 9 m shoalbank

BA Chart 2552 [29/11]

South coast – Cork — Submarine cables

116


...Another submarine power cable area runs across themain channel, from close S of Corkbeg Island (51 49 69N8 15 00W) to close S of Paddy’s Point (51 50 12N8 17 92W), passing between No 5 and 8 Light Buoys.

Port of Cork Company(SDD 2011000 154128) [42/11]

South coast – Cork — Pilot boarding

116


Pilot boarding. Pilots are available throughout24 hours, and should be ordered through PortOperations (3.347) when reporting ETA. There arethree numbered pilot boarding areas:

No 1 (51 43 50N 8 15 00W), 4 miles S of RochesPoint, for all tankers loaded with crude oil.

No 2 (51 45 10N 8 15 17W), 2½ miles S of RochesPoint, for all vessels over 130 m LOA, excludingtankers loaded with crude oil.

No 3 (51 50 83N8 17 29W), BuoyNo 20, Cobh, forvessels less than 130 m LOA.

Cork Harbour Master(SDD 2012000 015823) [06/12]

South coast – Cork Harbour —Directions; buoy


E of a wave monitoring light buoy (special)(51 46 50N 8 15 80W), thence:

Cork Harbour Master(SDD 2010000 195727; 204375) [01/11]

NP40

2 - 95

West coast – Approaches to Rosslare Europort –South Shear — Buoyage


2 These bearings lead into the channel, passing:SSW of South Long Light Buoy (starboard hand)(52 14 74N 6 15 80W), thence:

NNE of Splaugh Light Buoy (port hand) (52 14 36N6 16 77W).

The lights on the buoys are synchronized.

MRCC Dublin(SDD 2011000 033654) [12/11]

Ireland – East Coast – Codling Bank —Directions; buoy

161



East coast – Glassgorman Banks —Directions; buoyage


...(52 37 69N 6 07 46W) which is moored on theSE...


Commissioners of Irish Lights(SDD 2011000 027766; 029773; 029774) [12/11]

East coast — Directions; buoyage

167Paragraph 5.144 2 line 2-3 Replace by:...(52 56 84N 5 58 47W) which is moored 1¼ milesoffshore marking the E side of Horseshoe, a bank...

Commissioners of Irish Lights(SDD 2011000 086426; 082354) [22/11]

Ireland – East Coast – Dublin —Vessel traffic service

171


1 VTS Dublin is in operation for the control ofshipping. Situated at the head of Eastern Breakwater(53 20 69N 6 12 19W) it maintains a 24-hour watchon VHF. All traffic is monitored by radar. Positions ofreporting points are shown on the chart. SeeAdmiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(1) for furtherdetails.

176


...the allocation of berths are controlled through VTSDublin (5.186). The...


1 VTS Dublin: see 5.186

177


Spare5.230

Paragraph 5.232 1 line 8 For the Port Radio Read VTSDublin


3 A vessel intending to navigate stern foremost withinthe port should indicate such intention on VHFChannel 12, through VTS Dublin (5.186). When it ispracticable to do so, radio contact should beestablished with any other vessel known to benavigating in the vicinity.

178

Paragraph 5.239 3 line 3 For Dublin Port Radio Read VTSDublin

Dublin Port Company(SDD 2012000 017254) [07/12]

Ireland – East Coast – Dublin; buoys

180




Dublin Port Company(SDD 2012000 197417) [46/12]

East coast – Dundalk — Directions;principal marks



197Paragraph 6.77 3 line 1 For (6.79) Read (6.80)


NP40

2 - 96


5 The channel is marked by Pile Light (white houseon green piles, 10 m in height) (53 58 56N 6 17 71W)and No 2 Light Beacon (port hand), thereafter by lightbeacons and light buoys.

MRCC Dublin(SDD 2011000 121834) [30/11]

East coast – Carlingford Lough —Haulbowline Light

186


196


199

Paragraph 6.93 1 line 4 For lights Read light


200

Photograph Haulbowline Light (6.93) For (6.93) Read(6.97)


On passing Haulbowline Light (grey granite tower,34 m in height) (54 01 20N 6 04 74W) standing onthe E rock of Haulbowline Rocks, the track turnsWNW and leads into the lough, passing:

201

Paragraph 6.98 4 line 3 For NE Read E

205




Strangford Lough — Directions; light beacons

214

Paragraph 6.191 4 lines 1-2 For (white masonry column)Read (E cardinal)

215

Paragraph 6.197 2 line 1 For the light beacon Read SwanIsland Light Beacon (E cardinal)


SSE of South Pladdy Light Beacon (S cardinal)(54 22 33N 5 33 23W) which stands on a dryingrock.

Commissioners of Irish Lights and Ferry ServiceManager/Harbour Master Strangford Ferry Terminal(SDD 2012000 151220; 217526) [46/12]

Northern Ireland – Strangford Lough —Directions

217


WNW of Craigyouran Light Beacon (W cardinal)marking the SW end of Craigyouran, thence:

ESE of Long Sheelah Light Beacon (E cardinal)marking the E side of Long Sheelah.

When past Long Sheelah Light Beacon the routeturns to NNW on to Track H, or NE on to Track G.


1 From a position 2¾ cables ENE of Long SheelahLight Beacon (54 26 93N 5 35 34W), the line ofbearing 339 of Mahee Point Light Beacon(54 30 41N 5 37 09W) leads NNW on Track H,passing:

WSW of Tip Reef Light Buoy (S cardinal)(54 27 45N 5 34 50W) whichmarks the S end ofTip Reef, and:

ENE of Hadd (54 27 39N 5 35 81W), thence:2 WSW of Slave Rock (54 27 82N 5 34 81W),

which is marked by a pole, thence:Between Drummond Island (54 28 37N 5 36 46W)and Bird Island (54 28 77N 5 34 79W), thence:

Between Dead Man’s Rock on which stands a lightbeacon (E cardinal) (54 28 80N 5 36 41W) andMichaels Rock (54 28 96N 5 35 46W), which ismarked by a perch.

(Directions for the anchorage in Mahee Roadsare given at 6.218)


3 Killyleagh Reefs (5 cables E of Town Rock LightBeacon) (54 23 61N 5 38 47W). Therecommended berth, in 7 to 10 m, mud, iswith Town Rock Light Beacon bearing 264and the perch on Barrel Rock (54 23 93N5 37 65W) bearing 002 .


...3 cables S of Town Rock Light Beacon (54 23 61N5 38 47W), is navigable as far as the tidal barrier at HareIsland...Paragraph 6.220 2 line 3 For Town Rock BeaconRead Town Rock Light Beacon

218Paragraph 6.220 4 line 1 For Town Rock BeaconRead Town Rock Light Beacon


2 Caution. When entering Kircubbin Bay, care mustbe taken to avoid foul ground extending 2 cables Nfrom Monaghan Bank, which forms the S side of thebay.

NP40

2 - 97

Directions. From a position in the fairway of thelough, 3 cables E of Long Sheelah Light Beacon(54 26 93N 5 35 34W), the channel to KircubbinRoads leads NE along Track G between GranshaPoint (54 27 51N 5 33 39W) on the E side, andSlave Rock Pladdies, on the W, passing:

SE of Tip Reef (54 27 62N 5 34 62W) which ismarked on the S end by Tip Reef Light Buoy (Scardinal), thence:

3 SE of a depth of 0 3 m (54 27 80N 5 33 94W),thence:

NW of Hoskyns Shoal (54 27 75N 5 33 56W),marked on the NW side by Hoskyns Shoal LightBuoy (starboard hand), thence:

SE of Sand Rock Pladdy (54 28 06N 5 33 52W),marked on theSE side by SandRock Pladdy LightBuoy (port hand).

The route turns N round Sand Rock Pladdy onTrack G, whence the line of bearing 185 , astern, ofthe trigonometrical station on Gransha Point leads fora distance of 1½ miles to the anchorage in KircubbinRoads, passing:

Between Kircubbin Roads Light Buoys (lateral),thence:


East coast of Ireland – Belfast Lough —Buoys; AIS; traffic management

226



Mew Island Lighthouse (54 41 92N 5 30 82W)(7.36).

Belfast Fairway Light Buoy (54 42 32N 5 42 30W).

229


Paragraph 7.56 1 line 3 For the Fairway Light Buoy(54 41 71N 5 46 23W) Read No 1 Light Buoy(54 41 71N 5 46 37W)


230

Paragraph 7.65 1 line 4 For Fairway Light Buoy(54 41 71N 5 46 23W) Read Belfast Fairway Light Buoy(54 42 32N 5 42 30W).


2 AIS:Mew Island Lighthouse (54 41 92N 5 30 82W)(7.36).

Belfast Fairway Light Buoy (54 42 32N 5 42 30W)(7.37).

For information see The Mariner’s Handbook andAdmiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.


Vessels bound for Belfast Docks should make forthe appropriate one of the three pilot boardingpositions described at 7.100.

2 Inbound vessels should pass N of Belfast FairwayLight Buoy (54 42 32N 5 42 30W) and S of KilrootLight Buoy (54 42 56N 5 43 28W); outbound vesselsshould pass N of Helens Bay Light Buoy (port hand)(54 41 86N 5 42 90W) and S of Belfast Fairway LightBuoy.


1 Approach from E; from a position N of Mew IslandLight (54 41 92N 5 30 82W) (7.36), the route leads9½ miles WSW, passing:

NNW of Briggs Light Buoy (port hand) (54 41 18N5 35 73W) which marks South Briggs Rocks,thence:

NNW of a shoal (54 42 53N 5 39 49W), depth9 0 m, thence:

NNW of Belfast Fairway Light Buoy (safe water)(54 42 32N 5 42 30W), thence:

ESE of Kilroot Light Buoy (starboard hand)(54 42 56N 5 43 28W), thence:

To the entrance to Victoria Channel (7.106),between No 1 Light Buoy (starboard hand)(54 41 71N 5 46 37W) and No 2 Light Buoy.

231


NNW of Belfast Fairway Light Buoy (safe water)(54 42 32N 5 42 30W), and:

SSE of Kilroot Light Buoy (starboard hand)(54 42 56N 5 43 28W), thence:

The route leads 2 miles WSW to the entrance toVictoria Channel (7.106), between No 1 LightBuoy (starboard hand) (54 41 71N 5 46 37W)and No 2 Light Buoy.

233


No 1 Light Buoy to East Twin Island Light Beacon(54 37 35N 5 53 56W): 9 3 m.

East Twin Island Light Beacon to S end of StormontWharf: 8 7 m.

S end Stormont Wharf to Barnett Dock: 6 4 m.Albert Quay ramp to the S limit of the port: 5 5 m.

234–235


line 4 For 54 42 90N 5 41 40W Read 54 43 70N5 40 50W


line 5 For off Read about 1 mile E of


line 11 For white Read black


line 13 Delete

NP40

2 - 98

235


Victoria Channel, leading from between No 1 LightBuoy (starboard hand) (54 41 71N 5 46 37W) andNo 2 Light Buoy...


...No 1 Light Buoy to the East Twin Island Light Beacon (onthe SE side of the entrance to the docks), is dredged to adepth of 9 3 m...


Between No 1 Light Buoy (starboard hand)(54 41 71N 5 46 37W) and No 2 Light Buoy (porthand), thence:

237


West Twin Wharf and Stormont Wharf: 670 m inlength; depth 10 2 m.

Stormont Wharf S End 245 m in length; depth11 0 m.

Albert Quay RoRo berth: depth 6 0 m.

Commissioners of Irish Lights and Belfast Harbour Master(SDD 2012000 130782; 151236; 197908) [42/12]

Northern Ireland – East Coast –Donaghadee Sound — Directions; buoy

227


SSW of the light buoy (starboard hand) marking theN limit of navigable water in the sound and a stonybank with a depth of 2 7 m (54 40 00N5 32 26W).


Northern Ireland – North–east coast –Bangor Bay — Directions

231

Paragraph 7.72 1 line 1 For North Breakwater ReadEisenhower (North) Pier

232


2 Caution. Vessels exceeding 2 0 metres draught areadvised to keep a safe distance, over 45 metres, fromEisenhower (North) Pier Light Beacon to avoid rockarmour extending from the pier head.Vessels constrained by their draught should contact

Bangor Harbour in advance.

Paragraph 7.74 1 line 3 For North Breakwater: ReadEisenhower (North) Pier:

Assistant Harbour Manager, Bangor(SDD 2012000 102148) [23/12]

Port of Belfast – Pilotage

234


Vessels over 75 m but less than 100 m in length,from a position close W of No 3 and No 4 LightBuoys.

Belfast Harbour Notice 17/12(SDD 2012000 150383) [33/12]

East coast of Ireland – Belfast Lough — Pilotage

234-235

Existing Section IV Notices Weeks 34/12 and 42/12,Paragraph 7.100 2 lines 1-13 Replace by:

2 Pilot station and boarding. The pilots arestationed at Belfast and board vessels at one of threepositions, lettered A to C:

A. For vessels with a draught greater than 10 2 m(deep-draught) in position 54 43 70N 5 40 50Wabout 1¼ miles SE of Cloghan Jetty (54 44 18N5 42 35W).

B. For vessels of over 100 m LOA in position54 42 10N 5 44 40Wabout 1¼ miles ENE of theentrance to Victoria Channel.

C. For vessels over 75 m but less than 100 m inlength in position 54 40 90N 5 48 50W close Wof No 4 Light Buoy.

Pilot launches are painted black with orangesuperstructure and the word PILOT in black letters oneach side.

Belfast Harbour Master(SDD 2012000 206953) [43/12]

Northern Ireland – Approaches to Larne Lough— Directions

239

Paragraph 7.127 2 line 2 Delete Rock

241




West coast – Valentia Harbour —Directions; directional light

265


1 Directional light (white conical tower, red stripe) issituated on the N side of Valentia Island, 7½ cablesSE of Fort Point.The light is shown throughout 24 hours and the

white sector (140 -142 ) leads through the entrance,passing:

Paragraph 8.114 4 line 1 For line Read route

NP40

2 - 99

Paragraph 8.114 5 line 1 For line Read route


2 In the W part of the harbour in position 51 55 70N10 18 68W, in 12 m, sand and shingle.

Commissioners of Irish Lights(SDD 2011000 039470; 2010000 186778) [12/11]

West coast – Valentia River —Directions; leading lights

267Paragraph 8.127 1 line 2 Delete indicated by pairs ofleading lights and


Ireland – West coast – Dingle Harbour —Directions; light beacon

268


Dingle Entrance Light Beacon (white metal tower)(52 07 24N 10 15 71W).


1 Entrance. The narrow channel through the entranceleads NW for a distance of about 5 cables. The routepasses between the Light Tower (52 07 31N10 15 50W) which stands on the NE side and DingleEntrance Light Beacon (52 07 24N 10 15 71W) onthe SW side.


West coast – Kilcredaun Head —Principal mark

272Paragraph 9.8 3 line 5-6 Delete

282Paragraph 9.62 2 line 4 For light Read disused lighthouse



284Paragraph 9.81 2 line 1 For Light Read disused lighthouse


Ireland – South-west coast – River Shannon —Pilot boarding positions; anchorages

278

Paragraph 9.48 2 line 5 For positions: Read areas:

Paragraph 9.48 2 line 6 For 4 Read 3¾

Paragraph 9.48 2 line 8 For 1½ miles SSW Read 2 milesSW

Paragraph 9.48 3 line 2 For E Read ESE

284

Paragraph 9.81 including heading and existing Section IVNotice Week 14/11 Replace by:

Spare9.81


Anchorages A to L9.82

1 Eleven designated anchorages lettered A to L(excluding I) with depths of 23 m to 5 m lie E of a linefrom Corlis Point (52 37 09N 9 36 36W) to Beal Point(52 34 83N 9 37 10W), and W of Scattery Island.Anchorage H is for tankers.Clearing marks:

2 The line of bearing 246 of Kilcredaun Headdisused lighthouse (52 34 80N 9 42 61W)(9.62) just open SW of the battery onKilcredaun Point (5½ cables ENE), passes Sof Five Fathom Rock (1½ miles N of BealPoint) and of Doonaha Shoal (1 mile W of therock).

Caution. A foul anchorage lies between anchoragesB, C and D.


Scattery Roads - Anchorages M to R9.83

1 Scattery Roads, E of Scattery Island (52 36 76N9 31 18W), are sheltered from the prevailing W windsand afford excellent anchorage with good holding ofblue mud with a thin covering of sand. Fivedesignated anchorages lettered M to R (excluding O)with depths of 6 to 17 m lie between Scattery Islandand Moyne Point (52 36 75N 9 27 80W).Anchorage P is for tankers.

Shannon Foynes Port Company(SDD 2011000 216202) [05/12]

West coast – River Shannon —Directions; buoyage

283

Paragraph 9.74 2 line 1-2 For preferred channel tostarboard Read port handParagraph 9.74 2 line 3 For W cardinal Read starboardhandParagraph 9.74 2 line 9 For W cardinal Read starboardhand


NP40

2 - 100

Ireland – South-west coast – Shannon Estuary —Directions; buoyage

283


NW of Beal Bar Light Buoy (starboard hand)(51 35 18N 9 39 05W) marking the outer edgeof Beal Bar which is steep-to, thence course isaltered to pass:

S of Doonaha Light Buoy (port hand) (51 35 55N9 39 01W) which marks a shoal depth of 14 9 mand the S edge of Doonaha Shoal.


Ireland – South-west coast – River Shannon —Anchorages

284


lines 7-8 Delete

Shannon Foynes Port Company(SDD 2012000 046551) [14/12]

Ireland – West coast – Inishmore —Directions; buoy

318


SE of Killeany Light Buoy (starboard hand)(53 07 33N 09 38 37W).


West coast – Kiggaul Bay — Approach; light

319Paragraph 10.115 2 line 1 For metal column on stonebeaconReadwhite concrete blockhouse on concrete base



Ireland – West coast – Inishbofin —Bofin Harbour

337


2 Line of bearing. By day the line of bearing 021and by night the white sector (020 7 - 021 2 ) ofInishbofin Directional Light (53 36 78N 10 13 16W) onthe N side of the harbour,...

Commissioners of Irish Lights(SDD 2012000 128796 and 135611) [31/12]

West coast – Sligo Harbour —Directions; beacon


SW of Yacht Club No2 Light Buoy (port hand)(54 18 29N 8 34 58W)


West coast – Donegal Bay — Directions

372Paragraph 12.93 Including heading Replace by:

Spare12.93

UKHOBA Chart 2702 [35/11]

West coast – Ballyshannon – Entrance —Leading lights

382


2 Entrance to the river Erne. The entrance isconfined to a narrow passage between North Rock(54 30 90N 8 15 95W), composed of a heap ofstones, and South Rock (54 30 81N 8 15 95W), asimilar heap of stones which dries.The alignment of leading lights (092½ ) leads over

the bar and between North and South Rock:Front light (red rectangle, yellow stripe, on pole)(54 30 85N 8 15 27W).

Rear light (red rectangle, yellow stripe, on pole)(42 m from front light).

Passage over the bar, depth 0 2 m, between thetwo rocks, is dangerous to small craft, and thechannel, which is liable to frequent changes and isonly partially marked, meanders between the wideexpanse of Tullan Strand (off Finner Point) andWardtown Strand on the N side inside the entrance.


West coast – Inver Bay — Useful marks

382Paragraph 12.173 1 line 3 Delete are conspicuousParagraph 12.173 1 lines 6-8 Delete

UKHOBA Chart 2702 [35/11]

West coast – Bunbeg —Directions; aids to navigation


The channel is marked by light beacons and lightbuoys. The positions of these aids to navigation canbest be seen on the chart.


NP40

2 - 101

West coast – Sheep Haven –Breaghy Head — Light

402


Useful mark:Breaghy Head Light (white beacon) (55 11 47N7 54 81W).


Northern Ireland – North coast – River Foyle —General information; vertical clearance

420


2 Peace Bridge (54 59 88N 7 18 97W), verticalclearance 3 7 m, crosses the river 1 cable S ofQueen’s Quay.

427


Peace Bridge (13.82) crosses the river 1 cable S ofQueen’s Quay.

Londonderry Port and Harbour Commissioners(SDD 2011000 120886) [05/12]

Northern Ireland – North coast – River Foyle —Directions

422

Paragraph 13.100 10 line 1 For Bay Light Read Point

425


SE of Black Point Light Beacon (starboard hand)(55 08 85N 7 07 29W) which lies close SSE of adrying bank.


Londonderry Port and Harbour Commissioners(SDD 2012000 011131) [05/12]

Northern Ireland – North coast – River Foyle —Leading lights

426


Leading lights:Front. Rosses Bay Light Beacon (topmark whitetriangle apex up) (55 00 72N 7 17 50W).

Rear. Gransha Light Beacon (topmark white triangleapex down) (55 00 73N 7 17 41W).

The alignment (085 astern) of the above lightsindicates the centre of the maintained channel S ofMadams Bank, passing:



Northern Ireland – North coast –The Skerries — Directions

428


Other aids to navigation13.127a

1 Automatic Identification System:Skerries Light Buoy (55 13 90N 6 36 90W).


N of The Skerries (13.139) marked close NE bySkerries Light Buoy (port hand) (55 13 90N6 36 90W), thence:

431


SE of Skerries Light Buoy (port hand) (55 13 90N6 36 90W), and:


NP41 Japan Pilot Volume 1 (2012 Edition)

SEVERO-KURIL’SK climate station diagram

63Diagram 1.181 Replace by:

Diagram 1.181 which is printed at Annex A(see page 4 - 9).

UKHO [33/12]

NP42A Japan Pilot Volume 2 (2011 Edition)Nil

NP42B Japan Pilot Volume 3 (2011 Edition)

Seto Naikai – Aki Nada – Kudako Suido toKure Ko – East Part — Directions

185


7.1681 From a position NW of Uta Saki (34 01 08N

132 38 72E) the track leads N, passing:E of Suzuki Iwa (34 02 23N 132 36 43E), adetached rocky shoal close E of Ko-TachibaShima (34 02 19N 132 36 03E), a small islandjoined by a shallow bank to O-Tachiba Shima(7.224), 3 cables SW, thence:

2 W of Ai Shima (34 04 25N 132 42 44E). ItsukiDashi (34 04 07N 132 41 90E), a rockyshoal, lies close off the W side of Ai Shima.Ai Shima Light (7.167) is exhibited from theSE part of the island. A light buoy (safewater), marking the recommended trackthrough the N part of Aki Nada, is moored1 mile NW of Ai Shima. Thence:

NP42B

2 - 102

3 E of Sengai Iwai (34 04 35N 132 33 77E), twodrying rocks lying 2 cables E of the Eextremity of Karoto Shima (7.71); a lightbeacon (E cardinal, 12 m in height) stands onthe W rock. Hiyama Dashi (7.71) lies 6 cablesS. Thence:

E of Kame-ga-Kubi (34 06 89N 132 35 58E), apoint at the NE end of a small but prominentpeninsula forming the E extremity of KurahashiShima (7.66), thence:

4 W of Shimo-Guro Shima (34 09 17N132 39 26E); Kami-Guro Shima (34 09 29N132 40 24E), a similar islet, lies close E.Depths in the vicinity of theses islets areuneven and they should be avoided. Thence:

E of Nasake Shima (34 09 65N 132 34 41E),thence:

5 W of the SW extremity of Shimo-KamagariShima (34 10 27N 132 38 67E), an islandwhich forms the S side of Naka Seto (7.195);a light buoy (starboard hand) is moored closeoff the point. Thence:

E of the shoal area (34 10 89N 132 36 26E), withdepths of less than 10 m, extending E fromOndo-no-Seto (7.169).

The track then continues a short distance N to aposition SW of Shimoneko Saki (34 12 13N132 38 13E).

6 Useful marks:Shira Ishi Light (34 10 65N 132 20 86E) (7.64).Manaita Iwai Light (34 02 35N 132 31 98E) (7.64).


UKHO(HH. 42B/200/01) [26/12]

NP42C Japan Pilot Volume 4 (2011 Edition)Nil

NP43 South and East Coasts of Korea, EastCoast of Siberia and Sea of Okhotsk Pilot(2011 Edition)

Cheju Do – North Coast – Aewologot toCheju Hang — Cheju Hang; Pilot Station

81

Paragraph 2.32 3 line 3 For 33 31 95N 126 32 55E Read33 33 50N 126 33 00E

South Korean Notice 51/875/11(SDD 2011000 239652) [03/12]

South Korea - South coast - Cheju Do –Cheju Hang — Harbour; development

81


Major work on a new international passengerterminal has been completed east of the E breakwater(33 31 62N 126 32 65E). See Admiralty Notice5366(P)/11 for details.

82


Passenger terminal SE breakwater light (17 m inheight) (33 31 77N 126 33 39E).


South Coast – Offshore Route – Ch’uja Hang —Position and function; directions

89

Paragraph 2.81 1 line 5 For ½ Read ¾ to 1

Paragraph 2.81 3 line 2 For (33 57 68N 126 18 35E)Read (33 57 64N 126 18 37E)


South Korea – South Coast – Inshore Route -Haenamgak to Somodo — Directions; wreck

99


S of a dangerous wreck (34 16 01N 126 41 09E),thence;


South Korea – South Coast – Inshore route –P’yãng-ilto to Chima Do — Directions;

light beacon

104


S of a small above-water rock (34 18 29N127 04 97E), lying on a bank with a depth of7 1 m, marked by a light buoy (34 18 23N127 04 92E) (isolated danger), thence:

SKN 45/727/12(SDD 2012000 225247) [50/12]

Korea – South coast – Inshore route —Directions; depth; obstruction; wreck

104



NWof a shoal (34 16 54N127 09 08E)with adepthof 7 5 m, thence:


NW of an obstruction (34 18 21N 127 11 14E) witha depth of 15 4 m, thence:


NW of a wreck (34 18 86N 127 13 11E) with adepth of 15 2 m, thence:


NP43

2 - 103

South Korea - South coast – Chungdo Sudo –East entrance — Light beacon

106


4 East entrance. Yeotdoam (34 21 94N 127 04 70E)a rocky patch, marked by a light beacon (isolateddanger).


Korea – South coast – inshore route –T÷ngnyang Man — Directions; light beacon;

submarine cable

108


...A light beacon (34 43 69N 127 16 85E) (isolateddanger) lies close NE of the anchorage.


2 Caution. A submarine cable lies across theanchorage orientated NNE to SSW.

Korean ENC KR4F4H10; Korean Notice 38/598/12(SDD 2012000 192275) [42/12]

Inshore Route - Chima Do to Sori Do -Approaches to Yãja Man and Kamak Yang —

Directions; depth

109

Paragraph 2.222 3 line 2 For 6.4 Read 5.7

South Korean Chart 240 [06/12]

Outer Approaches to Yãsu Hang andKwangyang Hang – Yokchi Do and

Chwasari Chedo — Vertical clearance

120

Paragraph 3.28 5 line 2 For 35m Read 26m


South Korea – Approaches to Yãsu Hang andKwangyang Hang — Directions; depths

122

Paragraph 3.43 2 line 7 For 17 1 Read 16 6


BA Chart 3391; Korean Notice 18/251/12(SDD 2012000 00089546) [23/12]

South Korea – Yãsu Hang —Limiting Conditions; bridge

124


Bridges. The SW end of Yãsu Haehyãp, at itsnarrowest point, is spanned by a bridge with a verticalclearance of 20 m. The bridge links the NW end ofDolsando with the city of Yeosu.The E end of Yãsu Haehyãp, is spanned by a

bridge with a vertical clearance of 22 m betweenpositions 34 44 16N 127 44 95E and 34 44 02N127 44 91E.

125



South Korea – Yãsu Hang – Sin Hang —Directions; lights

125


BA Chart 3391; Korean Notice 18/251/12(SDD 2012000 00089546) [23/12]

Korea – South coast – Kwangyang Hang —Bridges

127


2 See also 3.91.


2 A large suspension bridge, vertical clearanceunknown, is underconstruction (2012) orientatednorth/south between 34 54 03N 127 42 27E north ofMyodo (34 52 12N 127 43 11E) and 34 54 62N127 42 27E south of Administration Wharf (34 54 82N127 42 47E) at the west end of POSCO steel works.A bridge, vertical clearance unknown, is underconstruction (2012) between the S extremity of Myodo(34 52 12N 127 43 11E) and the N coast of YosuPando 5 cables farther S.

South Korea Notice 32/471/12(SDD 2012000 160793) [42/12]

NP43

2 - 104

South Korea – Kwangyang Hang — Anchorages

129


3 North-west of Myodo. Anchorage may be obtainedwithin the following areas:

34 53 63 N 127 41 80 E

34 53 25 N 127 41 18 E

34 53 57 N 127 40 65 E

34 53 97 N 127 40 65 E

34 53 88 N 127 42 18 E

34 53 63 N 127 41 80 E

34 53 97 N 127 41 50 E

34 54 17 N 127 41 87 E


Inshore Route – Paek Sã to Tumi Do – Mijo Hang— Vertical clearance

131




Chinju Man and approaches —Vertical clearances

134


Channel NWof N÷kto.A power cable with a verticalclearance of 18m spans the channel between theNW of N÷kto and NE of Sindo (34 55 70N128 01 80E).


South Korea – South Coast – Inshore Route –Paek Sã to Tumi Do – Nungyang Hang —

Directions; depth

137


SKN 43/685/12(SDD 2012000 216234) [50/12]

Samch’ãnp’o Hang to Nam Man – Kosãng Man— Vertical clearance

138



Inshore Route – Tumi Do to Pbujido –Offshore Islands – Yãnhwa Yãlto —

Vertical clearance

140


Vertical Clearance. A power cable with a verticalclearance of 20m spans the channel between the S ofU do and the N of Yãnhwa Do.


Tongyãng Haeman and Kyãnnaeryang andHaehyãp — Vertical clearance

140



South coast of Korea – Okpo Hang —Directions; lights

147


2 Okpo Hang N Breakwater Light (red roundconcrete tower, 11 m in height) (34 53 82N128 43 05E).

Okpo Hang S Breakwater Light (white roundconcrete structure, 13 m in height) (34 53 69N128 43 17E).

149


Okpo Hang N Breakwater Light (red round concretetower, 11 m in height) (34 53 82N 128 43 05E).

Okpo Hang S Breakwater Light (white roundconcrete structure, 13 m in height) (34 53 69N128 43 17E).

Paragraph 3.228 2 line 4 and 3.228 3 lines 1-6 Delete

South Korean Notice 30/426/12(SDD2012000 150499) [34/12]

South Korea - South Coast - Chinhae Man —Vertical clearance

159


A bridge with a vertical clearance of 20m spans,Kajodo Sudo (34 55 52N 128 31 63E) between the Sof Kajodo and Kãje Do.


NP43

2 - 105

South Korea – Pusan Hang — Directions; light

169


Yongdu San Light (on top of Pusan Tower)(35 06 07N 129 01 94E).


S Korea – East Coast – Mip’o Hang —Anchorage areas

184


Outer Anchorages. The following designatedanchorage areas are situated E of Mip’o Hang:

T-1 (35 30 62N 129 27 30E), radius 300m forvessels less than 5000gt.



Pilotage is compulsory and available from UlsanHang. For details of Ulsan Hang pilotage see 4.44and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(6).


Chumunjin Dan to Pisãn Jang —Directions; light

204


Daepo Hang Light (white round concrete tower, 18min height) (38 10 20N 128 36 70E).


Sokch’o Hang — Directions for enteringharbour; light

205


Major lights:Sokch’o Light (38 12 82N 128 36 01E) (4.204).Daepo Hang Light (38 10 20N 128 36 70E)

(4.204).


Pisãn Jang to Suwãn Dan — Directions; light

206


DaepoHang Light (38 10 20N 128 36 70E) (4.204)


Russian Federation – Sea of Okhotsk –East coast Ostrov Sakhalin —

Directions; platform

354


ENE of BERKUT production platform (52 27 89N143 39 05E), thence:


BERKUT production platform light (52 27 89N143 39 05E).


NP44Malacca Strait andWest coast of SumateraPilot (2011 Edition)

Pelabuhan Klang and Approaches —Outer anchorages; pilotage

189


Lay-up anchorages (centred on 2 49 00N101 16 50E) lie E of South Fairway Light Buoy.


Southern approach – 1½ miles NE of South FairwayLight Buoy (2 49 00N 101 14 80E) (6.177).

192

Paragraph 6.177 3 line 2 For (2 50 34N 101 14 97E)Read (2 49 00N 101 14 80E)

Malaysian Notice 117/12(SDD 2012000 144050) [48/12]

Malaysia – Pelabuhan Sungai Udang —Controlling depth

202


...15 0 m (2012).

Malaysian Notice 9/148/12 & ENC MY4C5217(SDD 2012000 221832) [51/12]

NP44

2 - 106

Singapore Strait – Karang Singa (Carter Shoal)— Directions

227


...marked by a light buoy (isolated danger), thence:


Malaysia – Johor – Pelabuhan Calder —Directions; depth

300


Wof awreck (1 21 60N104 04 99E)with a depth of13 8m, thence:

Malaysian Notice 9/154/12(SDD 2012000 221832) [50/12]

NP45 Mediterranean Pilot Volume 1(2011 Edition)

Spain – Isla de Formentera – Cala Pujols — Light

198

Paragraph 4.73 3 line 1 For (214½ -216½ ) Read(208 5 -210 5 )

Spanish Notice SD 24.12(SDD 2012000 129294) [29/12]

Algeria – Port of Arzew – Arzew-el Djédid —Directions; berths

266


...A detached breakwater, aligned approximately E/W and4 cables long, is centred 5 cables ESE of the E end of thedetached mole.


1 From the vicinity of the pilot boarding ground(35 49 85N 0 13 65W) (6.87), the track leadsgenerally SW for about 8 cables, passing:


2 Between the E end of the detached mole(35 49 43N 0 15 00W), and the W end of thedetached breakwater.


MV British Osprey(SDD 2012000 129321) [29/12]

Tunisia - Bancs Kerkenah — Wreck

326


E of a wreck (39½ miles SE), with a depth of 18 m. Adangerous wreck lies 12 miles farther NE.Thence:

Tunisian Notice 398/18/12(SDD 2012000 208594) [45/12]

Sicilia - Porto di Pozzallo —Traffic Separation Scheme

398


399


Approach and entry. The port is approachedthrough a traffic separation scheme and entered E ofthe head of Molo di Sopraflutto.

400


Traffic Separation Scheme. A TSS has beenestablished in the approaches to the port. It comprisesinward and outward traffic lanes and a semi-circularprecautionary area, radius 1 2 miles, centred on36 43 47N 14 50 63E.

Restricted areas. Two restricted areas, whereanchoring is prohibited, surround submarine pipelineswhich extend 1½ miles and 2¼ miles SSW, frompositions on the shore 1 mile WNW and 3¼ milesENE of the head of Molo di Sopraflutto, respectively.Light buoys (special) are located at the seaward endsof the pipelines.


1 From a position 1 3 miles SSE of the head of Molodi Sopraflutto, the track leads 1 4 miles NNE in theinbound lane of the TSS, to the pilot boardingposition.

Italian Notice 1.16.12(SDD 2012000 022399) [08/12]

Sicily – Porto di Messina — Outer anchorage

459


Spare12.56

Italian Notice 16.33/12(SDD 2012000 166566) [36/12]

NP46

2 - 107


France – Le Barcarès, Port-Saint-Ange —Obstruction

71After Paragraph 2.35 2 line 12 Insert:An obstruction exists, at an unknown depth, on the

10 m contour, approximately 4 cables offshore inposition 42 48 52N 3 03 01E.


France – Port de Fos — Depths; dredged areas

85



... occupies the SW part of the basin. The basin depths areno longer maintained by dredging and the Port Authorityshould be consulted. A ...


France – Port de Méjean – Entrance —Underwater rock

96After Paragraph 2.258 1 line 8 Insert:An underwater rock, depth unknown, lies in position

43 19 70N 5 13 09E, approximately 1 cable west ofCape Méjean.


France – Marseille-Nord – Anchorage —Obstruction

97After Paragraph 2.275 2 line 7 Insert:An obstruction exists at a depth of 25 5 m in the

SW corner of the Marseille-Nord anchorage, 1 cable Sof Niolon, in position 43 20 17N 5 15 39E.


France – South coast – Port de Cavalaire —Anchorage

119


3 Anchorage for vessels less than 24 m in lengthcan be obtained within Baie de Cavalaire in a depthsof 15 to 20 m, sand; the usual anchorages are3 cables NW of Port de Cavalaire and Jovaanchorage, 3 cables NE of Point du Brouis. Anchoringis prohibited N of a line joining Cap Cavalaire andCap Lardier, 2½ miles E, for cruise ships in depths ofless than 40 m and for ships over 24 m in length indepths of less than 30 m. The bay is sheltered fromthe Mistral but untenable in winds from E through S toSW. Holding ...


France – South coast – Saint-Raphaël — Light

125


...½ cable S from the coast. TheW-facing entrance is 60 mwide and...


France – Cannes – Golfe Juan —Beacon tower

129

Paragraph 3.102 3 lines 5-6 For light (green truncatedtower, Read light beacon (black truncated conical tower,red bands,

ALLFS E0806 [35/11]

Italy – North-west Coast –San Remo — Wreck



Italy – West coast – Savona —Anchor berths; legends

156Paragraph 4.87 2 line 4 For Anchorage Area No 2 ReadAnchorage Area AParagraph 4.87 3 line 3 For Anchorage Area No 2 ReadAnchorage Area AParagraph 4.87 4 lines 1-2 For Two deep-water anchorageberths Read Deep-water anchorage berths C, D and E

UKHO; IT500053 [31/11]

NP46

2 - 108

Italy – Genova – Outer anchorages — Caution

161After Paragraph 4.117 2 line 6 Insert:Caution. A submarine pipeline extends 3 cables

SSW from the E section of Diga di Cornigliano(4.123). The pipeline extends 1¼ cables into theanchorage area and the seaward end is marked by alight buoy (special). A restricted area surrounds thepipeline to a distance of 100 m.


Italy – W coast – Livorno — Anchorage



Italy – Sardegna – Golfo di Palmas —Anchorages

281


...di Palmas:S2 39 01 79N 8 28 34ES3 38 59 54N 8 29 38ES4 38 59 54N 8 30 58ES5 38 59 34N 8 32 18ES6 38 58 14N 8 28 94E


Italy – Sardegna – La Maddelena —Prohibited areas

298

Paragraph 10.7 1 line 3 Replace by:... is prohibited. The transit of merchant vessels

over 500 t, used to transport goods and passengers,is prohibited within 2 miles of the boundaries of theseprotected areas; the areas are shown on the chart.

Italian Notice 14/2/12(SDD 2012000 144271) [33/12]

Italy – Sardegna – Punta Marmorata — Beacons

300


... the N islet and are marked by a light beacon (Ncardinal). A dangerous wreck with a...

Paragraph 10.15 3 line 6 For buoy (spar) Read beacontower (N cardinal)


Italy – Sardegna – Isola Caprera – Cala Garibaldi— Anchorage

304


...resort.

Italian Notice 13/16/12(SDD 2012000 139453) [33/12]

Italy – Sardegna –Approaches to Porto di Olbia — Pilotage

310

Paragraph 10.84 3 line 3 For about 1 mile Read 3 miles


Italy – Sardegna –Approaches to Porto di Olbia — Racon

311



Italy – Sardegna – Capo Sferracavallo —Prohibited area

319


Restricted areas10.146

1 Entry is prohibited 3½ miles E Capo Sferracavallowithin a radius of 600 m centred on 39 42 50N9 45 40E. The area contains unexploded ordnance.

2 Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in an areaenclosing Isola di Quirra (39 31 50N 9 39 50E) whichextends SE and up to 5 miles offshore. The areacontains unexploded ordnance.


Italy – Sardegna – Capo San Lorenzo —Prohibited area

320


1 Entry is prohibited 6¼ miles NE Capo San Lorenzowithin a radius of 400 m centred on 39 33 78N9 44 50E. The area contains unexploded ordnance.

2 Vessels are prohibited from entering an areaextending 100 m from the shore of Costa suFranzesu, in the vicinity of the mouth of FiumeFlumendosa (36 25 7N 9 37 7E), within thejurisdiction of the town of Villaputzu, 2½ miles WNWof the river mouth, because of the danger of rockfalls.


NP46

2 - 109

Italy – South-east of Capo d’Anzio –Torre Astura — Obstruction


SSW of an obstruction (8¼ miles ESE), thence:


Italy – West coast – Bagnoli –Isolotto di Nisida —

Explosive dumping ground

368After Paragraph 12.164 2 line 3 Insert:In position 40 47 71N 14 09 33E, 2 cables W of

Isolotto di Nisida, lies suspected unexploded ordnanceat a depth of approximately 28 m.


Italy – West coast – Torre del Greco —Obstruction

369


3 Obstruction. An unmarked obstruction reducingdepth to 10 m exists ...


Italy – W coast – Agropoli — Anchorage area

388

Paragraph 13.58 3 line 2 For 6 cables Read 8 cables



Western Greek Islands – Nisída Kastós —shoal depth

104


20 54 E), steep to, noting a rock awash in position38 32 32N 20 53 50E, thence:

105


E of Ákra Pothóni (7 miles SSW), noting a rockawash in position 38 32 32N 20 53 50E, thence:

Greek NM 9/174/11(SDD 2011000 195657) [46/11]

Greece – Pelopónnisos – Pátrai —New harbour

126


1 The harbours are approached directly fromPatraïkós Kólpos and entered N or S of theirrespective detached breakwaters.


1 Old harbourNorth entrance (4.59) about 11 m.South entrance (4.60) about 7 m.

2 New harbourNorth and South entrances limited by depths atberths of 9 3 to 10 0 m.


...of the N head of the old harbour breakwater.

127

Paragraph 4.56 heading For Harbour Read Harbours

Paragraph 4.56 1 line 1 For The harbour Read The oldharbour



4 The new harbour (2011), 1 mile SSW of the oldharbour S entrance, also has a detached breakwater,approximately 1220 m long, and orientated NNE/SSW.Lights are exhibited at the ends (metal frameworktowers with a green band at the N head and a redband at the S head). There are bollards on thebreakwater and depths along the inner side ofbetween approximately 9 5 to 10 8 m.

5 A wreck with a clearance depth of 11 8 m liesapproximately 270 m S of the N head of thebreakwater, and close to the inward side.

Paragraph 4.59 heading For North entrance Read Oldharbour North entrance

Paragraph 4.60 heading For South entrance Read Oldharbour South entrance


New harbour4.60a

1 The N and S sections of the breakwater and theshore opposite form two entrances to the new port ofPátrai. The N entrance is 360 m wide and the Sentrance is 450 m wide.

Paragraph 4.62 heading For Basins Read Old harbour

NP47

2 - 110


4.62a1 New harbour. The shore inside the breakwater is

quayed in steps in four sections running almost dueN/S. The first section facing the N entrance isapproximately 170 m long and has two ramps. Depthsalongside range from 9 5 to 9 7 m. The quay thenruns west for 30 m with one ramp and depthsalongside of 9 5 to 9 9 m.The second section is 190 m long, including three

ramps and depths alongside of 9 6 to 9 8 m. It thenruns west for 40 m, with one ramp and depthsalongside of 9 6 to 9 8 m.

2 The third section is 220 m long and has threeramps and depths alongside of 9 6 to 9 8 m. It thenruns west for 40 m with one ramp and depthsalongside of 9 6 to 9 8 m.The fourth and final section facing the S entrance

is 220 m long and has three ramps and depthsalongside of 9 6 to 10 0 m. It then runs west for 40 mwith one ramp and depths alongside of 9 5 to 10 0 m.

Greek NMs 134 and 141/7/11(SDD 2011000 150452) [46/11]

Montenegro – Budva — Directions; light

189


... Nikola Light (6.130), the track into Budva leads NNE,passing:

Croatian Notice 6/2/2009(SDD 2009000 076831) [42/12]

Croatia – Zadarski Kanal – Luka Zadar —Pilot boarding place

357

Paragraph 8.603 1 line 3 For 6 cables S Read 1¼ milesWSW

Croatian Notice 1/2/12(SDD 2012000 046600) [17/12]

Italy – Trieste approaches — Racon

472


Spare10.172


Italy – Brindisi approaches — Shoal depths

487


1 Shoal depths and numerous wrecks exist in theapproaches to Brindisi and within the harbour. OffCapo di Torre Cavallo several shoal depths and rocksawash exist close inshore within the 10 metre contour.A stranded wreck is situated 1 cable N in position40 38 64N 18 01 28E. A dangerous wreck exists1¼ miles NE of the cape and 6 cables N of the NWcorner of waiting area BR1.

Italian NMs 11.11/10, 14.9/11 and 16.15/11(SDDs 2010000 094665,2011000 148570 & 171794) [46/11]

Italy – Porto di Vasto — Anchorage

513

Paragraph 11.284 1 lines 5-6 For (1¾ miles E) Read(2¾ miles NE)

Italian NM 4.28/12(SDD 2012000 049910) [14/12]

Italy - Adriatic Sea - Pescara — Depths

516


1 Depths. As a result of the gradual and irregularsilting of Porto Canale (2012) the depths on the chartsmay not reflect the actual situation. Mariners are tocontact the Maritime Authorities before entering theport.


Italy – Ancona – Falconara Marittima — Wreck

523


A prohibited area is centred on a dangerous wreckin position 43 40 41N 13 21 50E, radius 1 mile.

Italian NM 14.12/11(SDD 2011000 148570) [46/11]

Italy – Rimini — Wreck

538


...A wreck, depth unknown but considered potentiallydangerous to surface navigation, lies 1 cable N of the outerbreakwater light in position 44 05 00N 12 34 60E.


NP48

2 - 111


Turkey - AliaÔa — Pilotage

440


1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels. The pilotboarding place is 6 cables NE of TaîlÝ Burnu.

Turkish ENC TR402147(SDD 2012000 217853) [49/12]

NP49 Mediterranean Pilot Volume 5(2011 Edition)Nil

NP50 Newfoundland and Labrador Pilot(2011 Edition)

Newfoundland – Stevensons Islets — Light

272


3 The track then leads to a position about 5 cablesSE of Stevensons Islets (2 miles WSW). From thisposition the track then leads N, passing (with positionsrelative to Cabot Island Light):

Canada Eastern Notice 4857/03/2012(SDD 2012000 060469) [15/12]

Newfoundland – Sops Arm — Rock

346


...A dangerous rock is reported (2011) in position49 46 17N 56 52 33W.


NP51 New Zealand Pilot (2010 Edition)

Queen Charlotte Sound – Tory Channel —Directions; pilot boarding positions

114


Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels of more than500 gt within the entire Queen Charlotte Sound,subject to exemption by law. Pilot normally boards atAlpha pilot boarding position (41 04 62S 174 18 92E),but in heavy weather pilot boards at Bravo pilotboarding position (41 03 65S 174 19 85E).

115


Thence to a position 2 miles NE of Motuara IslandLight (white metal framework tower, 5 m in height)(41 06 0S 174 16 6E), in the vicinity of Alpha pilotboarding position (41 04 62S 174 18 92E).


Thence the track continues SW to Alpha pilotboarding position (41 04 62S 174 18 92E) 2 miles NEof Motuara Island. A dangerous rock marked by abeacon (N cardinal) lies about ½ mile N of the island.


From the vicinity of Alpha pilot boarding position(41 04 62S 174 18 92E), the track...

116


2 Pilot boarding place. By special arrangement withthe Harbour Authority pilots board in position41 15 26S 174 22 16E. In view of the heavy ferrytraffic...

New Zealand Notice 17/145/12(SDD 2012000 165047) [36/12]

South Island – Queen Charlotte Sound –Directions; light

115


SE of Farnham Point (41 10 35S 174 12 02E) fromwhere a light (white metal tower, 6m in height) isexhibited, thence:


South Island – North Coast –Queen Charlotte Sound —

Directions; light buoy

119


2 SSE of Perano Shoal (2¾ miles ENE), marked by alight buoy (isolated danger), thence:


New Zealand – North Island –Doubtful Sound — Directions; buoyage

147

Paragraph 5.158 2 line 2 Replace by:NE of Tarapunga Rock (1 mile ESE), marked by a

light buoy (isolated danger), whence the...

New Zealand Notice 21/181(P)/10(SDD 2010000 170547) [51/10]

NP51

2 - 112

New Zealand – North Island –Breaksea Sound — Directions; buoyage


2 SW of a rock (3¾ cables SSE) with a depth of5 1 m, marked by Rocky Point Buoy (isolated danger),thence:


New Zealand – North Island – Dusky Sound —Directions; beacon

151Paragraph 5.181 3 lines 7-8 Replace by:...WSW of East Point; a rock, drying 0 7 m and marked byPaget Passage Beacon (W cardinal), 3¼ cables ENE ofthe same point.


New Zealand – North Island –Cascade Cove — Beacon

152Paragraph 5.191 1 lines 9-11 Replace by:...9 3 m bank on which is a rock drying 1 5 m marked byCascade Cove Beacon (isolated danger); shallow patchesextend ½ cable, both NE and SSE, from Heron Island.


Islands South of South Island –Snares Islands — Anchorage


Caution. It is reported (2010) that anchors havebeen lost or become fast on obstructions whenanchoring off Seal Point and Ho Ho Bay.

MV Orion(SDD 2010000 217996) [03/11]

Paterson Inlet and approaches —Directions; depths

180Paragraph 6.144 1 line 6 For 7 5 m Read 7 1 mParagraph 6.144 2 line 3 For 9 4 m Read 8 9 mParagraph 6.144 2 line 5 For 8 5 m Read 7 9 mParagraph 6.151 1 line 5 For 8 0 m Read 6 5 mParagraph 6.151 1 line 6 For 5 2 m Read 5 4 mParagraph 6.151 2 line 2 For SSE of a breakwater ReadSSE of the ruins of a breakwater

181Paragraph 6.152 2 line 2 For 6 4 m Read 3 4Paragraph 6.152 3 line 3 Replace by:

...andnotinga4 4 mshoal¾ cableWNW, thence:

NZ 6825 [23/11]

North Island – North Cape to Hauraki Gulf —Reporting

183


Reporting7.5a

1 Any vessel over 100 gt should contact the RegionalHarbour Master before anchoring on the coast orentering any harbours.

Regional Harbour Master, Northland Regional Council(SDD 2012000 118506) [27/12]

North Island – North Cape to Cape Brett –Doubtless Bay — Anchorage

186



North Island – North Cape to Cape Brett –Whangaroa Harbour — Restrictions; anchorages

189


Regulations concerning entry. WhangaroaHarbour is limited to vessels under 100 m LOA, andall vessels over 100 gt must file a passage plan withthe Regional Harbour Master (7.124).


In summer Pekapeka Bay is frequented by yachts,so larger vessels are recommended to anchor 3 2cables SSE of Puketamoi Point in position 35 01 80S173 45 00E.


New Zealand – North Island – East Coast –Kerikeri Inlet — Directions; buoy

193Paragraph 7.64 3 lines 9-13 Replace by:...which breaks occasionally. Vessels passing S shouldremain clear of the shallow spit, marked by a light buoy(starboard hand), extending SW from The Brothers.Thence:

New Zealand Notice 25/211/10(SDD2010000 208217) [01/11]

North Island – Bay of Islands – Kent Passage —Vertical clearance

193

Paragraph 7.65 2 lines 3-4 Delete where To 23 m,


NP51

2 - 113

Cape Brett to Tutukaka Harbour —Directions; depth

199

Paragraph 7.96 4 line 3 For 4 3m Read 1 5m


North Island – Tutukaka Head to Bream Tail –Hen and Chicken Islands — Depths

201




New Zealand – North Island –Whangarei Harbour — Anchorages


1 Outer anchorage. The following anchorages havebeen esablished:

Anchorage area Position

Area A

35 52 40S 174 34 50E

35 52 40S 174 36 10E

35 53 40S 174 36 10E

35 53 40S 174 34 50E

Area B

35 55 80S 174 32 30E

35 55 80S 174 33 90E

35 57 80S 174 33 90E


Great Barrier Island – East coast —Directions; beacons

212


ENE of Rakitu Island (Arid Island) (36 07 S175 30 E), thence:

ENE of Whakatautuna Point (36 11 S 175 30 E),which is surrounded by cliffs and rises toWhakatautuna, a hill, thence (with positions fromWhakatautuna Point):


ENE of Oruawharo, a hill, thence:


New Zealand – Great Barrier Island – Approachto Man of War Passage — Directions; depth

219Paragraph 8.47 3 line 8 For buoy Read light beaconParagraph 8.47 3 line 9 For 8 2 m Read 5 m

Chart NZ 5223(SDD2010000 209052) [01/11]

North Island – East Coast – Hauraki Gulf –Mairangi Bay — Prohibited anchorage

220


7 Within an area bounded by the followingcoordinates:36 43 72S 174 47 10E.36 43 82S 174 47 15E.36 43 93S 174 46 81E.36 43 83S 174 46 76E.


Auckland — Vertical clearance

226


1 Auckland Harbour Bridge is a fixed road bridgeconsisting of seven spans on six concrete piersnumbered 1 to 6 from Stokes Point. The Bridge has avertical clearance of 39m. A daymark (green triangle,white border) is painted on the E and W faces of No1 Pier. No craft should pass between No 1 Pier andStokes Point.


East Coast of North Island – Tauranga —Prohibited Anchorages

255


A prohibited anchorage exists within 50 metres ofthe commerical wharves. The channels leading fromthe harbour entrance to Tauranga and off the berthsare restricted anchorages, except in emergency.

Harbour Master, Western Bay of Plenty(SDD 2012000 026524) [08/12]

East Coast of North Island – Tauranga —Pilotage

256


Paragraph 9.62 1 line 5 For 100gt Read 250gt


There are two pilot launches. One is 16.3m long,painted yellow and named Arataki. The other is 12.6mlong and painted orange, with the words Survey/Piloton its side.


NP51

2 - 114

East Coast of North Island –Tauranga to East Cape — Route

262


1 The coastal route between Tauranga HarbourEntrance (37 38 S 176 10 E) and East Cape (37 41 S178 33 E), about 114 miles E, passes about 3 miles Nof Astrolabe Reef (37 32 5S 176 25 5E), at least 5miles N of Volkner Rocks (37 28 6S 177 07 8E) andat least 5 miles N of Cape Runaway (37 32 S177 59 E); see 9.3. Thence the coastal route leads Eto Matakaoa Point (37 34 S 178 19 E) and thenceESE, passing seaward of numerous charted dangersoff East Cape.


Tauranga to East Cape —Directions; coastal routes

263-264

Paragraph 9.95 1-2 including heading Replace by:

Coastal routes9.95

1 Main shipping route. From a position ENE of ALight Beacon (E cardinal) (37 36 07S 176 10 71E), atthe seaward end of No 1 Reach to Tauranga Harbour,the track leads initially ENE passing clear of PudneyRock (37 31 24S 176 19 05E), depending on draught,and NW of Astrolabe Reef (37 32 50S 176 25 50E).The track continues ENE to pass N of Volkner Rocks(37 28 60S 177 07 80E). The track then leads Epassing N of Cape Runaway (37 32 32S177 59 10E), to a position N of Matakaoa Point(37 33 41S 178 18 82E). The track then leads ESE,passing NNE of Horoera Point, to a position betweenEast Island (37 41 5S 178 34 5E) and Ranfurly Bank(37 36 50S 178 52 00E).

2 Small vessels. From a position NW of AstrolabeReef, a track, which is not recommended by NZAuthorities, but is suitable for small vessels leads Epassing (with positions from Motiti Island Light (whitemetal column 4 m in height) (37 36 43S176 25 13E)):

North of Astrolabe Reef (above), which breaks in allswell conditions and in fair weather appears like aboat, thence:


South Island – Haumuri Bluffs toLyttelton Harbour — Directions; Light

289


Spare10.31

290


..., from where a light (10.31) is exhibited

293


296



NP52 North Coast of Scotland Pilot(2012 Edition)

Scotland – North coast – Scrabster —Basins and berths; depths

69

Paragraph 3.87 2 to 4 Replace by:

2 Fish Dock. The NW part of the dock has depths of7 5 m and the SE half has a dredged depth of 5 0 m(2012). On the NW side is Southern Quay, with alength of 120 m. New Fish Market Quay, length 123 mand depth alongside 4 5 m, forms the SW side,adjacent to the fish market. The SE side consists ofSouth Breakwater, and Fuel Quay which extends Nfrom it; it has an overall length of 150 m.

3 Outer and Inner Basins lie NW of Fish Dock andare separated from it by a broad quay on the end ofwhich is a tanker berth, length 71 m, depth 7 5 m. Onthe NW face of the broad quay lies Inner Basin Quay,length 131 m, depth 4 5 m; Inner Basin also haspontoons for leisure craft. The entrance to the basinsis between the broad quay and Ice Quay, and ismarked by lights at their outer ends.Maximum size of vessel handled. A cruise ship,

length 183 m, has berthed in the port.

Scrabster Harbour Master(SDD 2012000 189099; 201555) [44/12]

Scotland - Shetland Islands - Sumburgh Head toHelliness — Directions; light

224

Paragraph 6.146 4 line 1 For Lights: Read Light:


226


Disused lighthouse (white tower 16 m in height, andbuildings) (60 07 20N 1 07 30W) on KirkabisterNess.

227


NP52

2 - 115

230


Disused lighthouse (60 07 20N 1 07 30W) (6.162)on Kirkabister Ness.


Paragraph 6.186 1 lines 2-3 For 1 07 30W) (6.162) isexhibited, Read 1 07 31W) is exhibited from a whitebuilding with a radar scanner,

Northern Lighthouse Board NM 18/12(SDD 2012000 188853) [40/12]

Faroe Islands – LeirvíksfjørÉur —Vertical clearance; overhead cables

296


In the S part, 1¾ miles SSEofGalvur in the vicinity of62 12 30N 6 37 56W, vertical clearancereported (2012) as 45 m. A reduction in thevertical clearancemay occur andmariners shouldapproach these cables with caution.

Danish Notice 1005(T)/12(SDD 2012000 203235) [44/12]

NP54 North Sea (West) Pilot (2009 Edition)

Scotland – East Coast – Peterhead — Anchorage

59


Vessels are advised not to anchor in the areacentred 1 mile E of Keith Inch (57 30 15N 1 46 20W)due to the risk of a fouled anchor from discardedwires on the seabed.

Peterhead Harbour Master(SDD 2011000 162692) [38/11]

Scotland – East Coast –Approaches to Isle of May — Directions

83


Caution. Extensive static creel pot fishing isundertaken to the N and W of Isle of May betweenFife Ness and Pittenweem. Mariners navigating in thisarea should avoid fouling the pots, which are markedby unlit orange floats.

Forth Ports Ltd(SDD 2011000 196226) [45/11]

Scotland – East Coast – Methil — Landmark


91Paragraph 4.34 1 lines 4-6 Replace by:...population about 8000, can be identified by tall chimneysand three church spires.Paragraph 4.34 2 lines 5-7 Replace by:...on both sides. A beacon marking a cooling water intakestands in position 56 11 25N 2 59 71W. Within the barthere is a depth of 1 5 m in the...


Scotland – East Coast – Rosyth —Controlling depth

105


BA Chart 728 [36/12]

Scotland – East Coast – Firth of Forth —Directions; light

106


108


...is marked by light beacons (white metal posts)on its E and W sides, and:

Forth Ports PLC(SDD 2011000 202136) [47/11]

Scotland – East Coast – Firth of Forth —Development

107


Development4.174a

1 A new bridge, The Forth Replacement Crossing, isbeing constructed (2011). The construction, includingpreparatory work and surveys, will take five years.The bridge is being built west of the Forth Road

Bridge from position 56 00 75N 3 24 45W to55 59 60N 3 25 17W along a bearing of 019 /199through Beamer Rock.Exclusion zones marked by light buoys (special) will

be placed at the foot of each column prior tocommencement of construction. Additional exclusionzones will be in place throughout the constructionperiod.Forth Navigation Service will broadcast information

regarding any special river operation, but all riverusers should maintain a close listening watch on VHFChannel 71 and navigate with caution within the area.


NP54

2 - 116

England – East coast – Blyth — Pilotage

136


1 Pilotage iscompulsory for vessels over 50 m inlength, and for vessels towing other vessels or objectswhen the combined length of tow exceeds 50 m. Forfurther details see Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(1).

Harbour Master, Port of Blyth(SDD 2010000 034195) [12/10]

England – East Coast – Blyth —Directions; buoy

136Paragraph 5.142 2 line 5 Delete (with positions from theentrance)Paragraph 5.142 2 lines 6-7 Delete

Port of Blyth Notice 2/2011(SDD 2011000 099374) [24/11]

England – East coast – River Tyne —Millenium Bridge

141


...and when open a vertical clearance of 24 m. Atall times the following lights are shown from thebridge:An occulting white light is shown from the centreline.

A flashing green light is exhibited from theN side.A flashing red light is exhibited from the S side.

A flashing white light is exhibited from the supportspan when the bridge is open to indicate thecentre of the bridge and the best point of passage.

Harbour Master, Port of Tyne(SDD 2012000 020795) [07/12]

England – East coast – River Tees —Breakwaters

154


South Gare Breakwater North Gare Breakwater

Entrance to River Tees from NE (6.93)(Original dated 2000)

(Photograph - Air Images)

MV Oriana(SDD 2010 000092633) [25/10]

England – East coast – Teesport —Outer anchorage; pipelines

155


1 Vessels may anchor to E or SE of Tees FairwayLight Buoy (54 40 9N 1 06 5W). Vessels are likely todrag anchor in wind speeds above Force 8 from anydirection, in wind speeds above Force 6 from NNWthrough N to SE, and where the swell exceeds 4 m.In such conditions vessels are advised not to anchor.If conditions dictate, Masters of anchored vessels willbe advised to weigh by Tees VTS or HM Coastguardif serious risk of damage to submarine pipelinesexists.

Teesport Harbour Master(SDD 2010000 045051) [15/10]

England – East coast – Humber Approaches —Pilotage; anchorages

169


...bulk when proceeding to and from the inner anchorages(7.10a, 7.66 and 7.109) for the purpose of anchoring.Vessels which are exempt from compulsory pilotage,...

170


Inner anchorages7.10a


1 Bull Anchorage. 1½ miles SW of Spurn Head(53 34 N...


2 Haile Anchorage, inset within the SW limit of Bull...


3 Hawke Anchorage, 3 miles WNW of Spurn Head isa...

Harbour Master, Humber(SDD 2009000 190382) [12/10]

England – East coast – Approaches toRiver Humber — Outer Rosse Reach Light Buoy

171

Paragraph 7.15 4 line 6 For (54 30 N 0 21 E) Read(53 29 89N 0 20 79E)

196

Paragraph 8.20 1 line 2 For (52 29 9N 0 20 8E) Read(53 29 89N 0 20 79E)

BA Chart 109 [07/12]

NP54

2 - 117

River Humber – Grimsby — Development

174


Development7.46a

1 Grimsby Riverside Terminal is under construction(2012) NE of West Jetty (53 35 16N 0 04 13W). Theconstruction area is centred on 53 35 16N 0 04 00W.Mariners should navigate with caution in the vicinity ofthe works.

ABP Humber Harbour Master(SDD 2012000 088487) [21/12]

England – East coast — Wind farms;firing practice area

193


1 Inner Dowsing Offshore Wind Farm, comprising27 wind turbines, is centred on 53 11 5N 0 26 8Ewithin a submarine cable area that extends about3 miles N/S and 1½ miles E/W. Seven wind turbinesmarking the outer limits of the wind farm are lit, asshown on the chart.

2 Sites under development. Several offshore windfarms are being developed in the approaches to TheWash. These include:

Wind farm Meteorological mast site

Lynn 53 08 1N 0 27 0E

Race Bank 53 18 8N 0 44 9E

Docking Shoal 53 09 5N 0 38 9E

Wind farm Centred on

SheringhamShoal

53 08 1N 1 08 7E

3 Lynn Offshore Wind Farm. An area marked bylight buoys (cardinal and special) is centred on53 08 2N 0 27 6E and extends about 2 miles N/Sand 2¾ miles E/W.Sheringham Shoal Offshore Wind Farm. A

development area marked by light buoys (cardinal andspecial) is centred on 53 08 1N 1 08 7E and extendsabout 3¼ miles N/S and 3½ miles E/W.

4 While these wind farms are being constructed,partially built structures may exist within the areamarked by light buoys. The structures may besubmerged or partially submerged and will not beindividually marked.

194


...extremity of the shoal, thence:ENE of Sheringham Shoal Offshore Wind Farm(53 08 1N 1 08 7E) (8.8).

199




1 Holbeach Firing Practice Area fronts the SWcoast...

MT Højgaard a/s; WAF-OC; Centrica(SDDs 2009000 154764; 2010000 026348; 029077)

[12/10]

England – East Coast — Wind farms

193Paragraph 8.8 including existing Section IV Notice Week12/10 Replace by:

1 Wind farms exist and are being developed in theapproaches to the Wash.Inner Dowsing Offshore Wind Farm comprising

27 wind turbines is centred on 53 11 5N 0 26 8Ewithin a submarine cable area that extends about3 miles N/S and 1½ miles E/W. Seven wind turbinesmarking the outer limits of the wind farm are lit, asshown on the chart. This area lies within the LincsOffshore Windfarm development site.Lynn Offshore Wind Farm. An area marked by

light buoys (cardinal and special) is centred on53 08 2N 0 27 6E and extends about 2 miles N/Sand 2¾ miles E/W. This area lies within the LincsOffshore Windfarm development site.

2 Sites under development:

Wind farm Meteorological mast site

Lynn 53 08 1N 0 27 0E

Race Bank 53 18 8N 0 44 9E

Docking Shoal 53 09 5N 0 38 9E

Wind farm Centred on

Lincs Offshore 53 11 0N 0 28 5E

SheringhamShoal

53 08 1N 1 08 7E

3 Lincs Offshore Wind farm is being developed in anarea centred on 53 11 0N 0 28 5E. This areaincludes the already constructed Inner Dowsing andLynn Offshore Wind Farms. The limits of the area aremarked by light buoys (cardinal and special).Sheringham Shoal Offshore Wind Farm. A

development area marked by light buoys (cardinal andspecial) is centred on 53 08 1N 1 08 7E and extendsabout 3¼ miles N/S and 3½ miles E/W.

4 Caution. While these wind farms are beingconstructed, partially built structures may exist withinthe area marked by light buoys. The structures maybe submerged or partially submerged and will not beindividually marked.

Centrica Energy, Trinity House(SDD 2011000 017580; 024908) [09/11]

England – East Coast — Aids to navigation




NP54

2 - 118


Spare9.115


Spare9.132



England – East Coast – The Wash – Boston —Anchorage; directions; buoy

201


A triangular anchorage area centred on 52 58 10N0 18 00E, as shown on the chart.

202

Paragraph 8.70 2 lines 2-3 For Boston No 1 Light BuoyRead No 1 Light Buoy

Port of Boston Ltd(SDD 2011000 162294, 180987) [42/11]

England – East coast – Wisbech — Pilotage

204


1 Pilotage is compulsory for all commercial vessels.The pilot boards in position 52 54 43N 0 14 79E; inbad weather, the pilot boards S of Holbeach RAFNo 4 Light Buoy (52 52 58N 0 13 08E). See AdmiraltyList of Radio Signals Volume 6(1).

Port of Wisbech Authority(SDD 2012000 012068) [06/12]

England – East coast – Winterton-on-Sea —Racon




Trinity House Notice 28/10(SDD 2010000 139300) [39/10]

England – East Coast – Approaches toGreat Yarmouth — Directions; buoyage

216


1 W of the W extremity of Corton Sand.

218

Paragraph 9.47 8 line 6 For Corton Read Holm Approach


1 Depths are subject to change and the PortAuthority should be consulted for the latestinformation.

219


1 From the vicinity of Holm Approach Light Buoy (Ecardinal) (52 30 9N 1 50 2E), the route leads4¾ miles NW through...

Trinity House Notice 30/10(SDDs 2010000 150483; 171440) [44/10]

England – East coast – Great Yarmouth –Outer Harbour — Directions

220

Paragraph 9.74 1 lines 1-6 Including heading Replace by:

Spare9.74

221


Outer Harbour9.82a

1 The Outer Harbour (9.78) is entered between twobreakwaters with lights at the breakwater heads. Thechart is sufficient guide.

Great Yarmouth Harbour Master(SDDs 2010000 028917; 030682) [11/10]

England – East coast – Great Yarmouth —Traffic signals

221


1 Outer Harbour. Signals Nos 1, 2 and 5 of theInternational Port Traffic Signals are exhibited from theroot of the north breakwater.River Port. Signals Nos 1, 2, 3 and 5 of the

International Port Traffic Signals are exhibited from theE end of Gorleston Pier. Signals Nos 1, 2, 3 and 5are also exhibited on the S side of Brush Bend forvessels proceeding down river. When signal No 2 isexhibited vessels should not approach Brush Bend.For further details see The Mariners’ Handbook.

Great Yarmouth Port Company Ltd(SDD 2010000 139267) [38/10]

NP54

2 - 119

England – East coast – Great Yarmouth —Traffic signals

221Existing Section IV Notice Week 38/10 Paragraph 9.79 1

line 6 ForGorleston Pier Read the North Wall (52 34 38N1 44 35E)

Great Yarmouth Port Company Ltd(SDD 2010000 209988) [01/11]

England – East Coast – Lowestoft — Bridge

223


Caution. The bascule bridge structure imposesrestraints upon vessels transiting the Bridge Channel.In the fully raised position parts of the bridge structureare within a few centimetres horizontally of the copingedge. Contact with the bridge leaves could damage avessel, the bridge structure or its control systems. If itis not certain whether a risk exists the Harbour Mastershould be consulted.

Harbour Master Lowestoft(SDD 2011000 142241) [34/11]

England – East coast – Lowestoft — Pilotage

224


1 Pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels:All vessels or tows of 60 m LOA or over.All vessels or tows over 20 m LOA carryingdangerous or noxious liquid substances in bulk.

All vessels or tows over 20 m LOA carryingexplosives.

All vessels or tows over 30 m LOA carrying morethan 12 passengers.

All vessels of less than 60 m in length, deemed to bea potential hazard to navigation.

ABP Harbour Master Lowestoft(SDD 2012000 014080) [06/12]

England – East coast – Lowestoft —Directions; Kirkley Light


....the line of bearing (227 ) of Kirkley Light(column, 4 m in height) (52 27 7N 1 44 5E), or atnight the narrow white sector (225 - 229 ) of the light,leads to a position....

ABP Lowestoft Local Notice 16/2009(SDDs 2009000 040439; 155106) [01/10]

NP55 North Sea (East) Pilot (2012 Edition)Nil

NP56 Norway Pilot Volume 1 (2012 Edition)

Sweden – Älgöfjorden — Restricted area

16-17


Spare1.105

278


Customs9.148

1 Vessels arriving from abroad are boarded byCustoms officers at Hättan (57 55 80N 11 39 37E).The customs house is in Uddevalla.


Norway – South-west coast –Hellvik i Marrenbukta — Leading lights

67


Front light (58 28 53N 5 51 35E).Rear light (109 m from front light).

Paragraph 2.17 4 line 1 For (013 ) Read (016 5 )


Norway – Kristiansand – Kongsgårdbukta —Berths

118


Kongsgårdbukta (58 09 44N 8 02 20E), on the Wside of Topdalsfjorden, 7 cables WSW of theVarodden Bridges (3.120), has two berths with lengthsof 140 m and 160 m. For depths alongside consult theharbour authorities.


Norway – Brevikfjorden – Brevikstrømmen —Directions; lights

151


...from which Omborg Leading Lights are exhibited.


The alignment (148 6 ) (astern) of these lights thenleads NW for 7 cables to a position in the vicinity of59 03 84N 9 38 98E at the S end of Frierfjorden.


NP56

2 - 120

Norway – Sandefjordsfjorden – Sandefjord Havn— Directions; depth; buoy

165


...NNW, passing:2 ENE of a 5 7 m patch (59 06 12N 10 13 84E),

marked at its NE extent by a spar buoy (Ncardinal), thence:

WSW of Langestrandsbåen (59 06 70N10 13 76E) which, with a depth of 6 6 m, extendsup to 1 cable from the E side of the fjord to aposition near the centre line.


Norway – Oslofjorden – Drøbaksundet —Prohibited activities

194



Norway – Drammensfjorden –Dramstadbukta — Anchorages

213



Sweden – Askeröfjorden – Stenungsund —Swept depth

285



NP57A Norway Pilot Volume 2A(2011 Edition)

Norway – South-west coast — Lindesnes toJærens Rev including Farsund and Egersund

i

Title page lines 5-6 Replace by:

West coast of Norwayfrom Jærens Rev to Stadlandet

xvii

Book Limit diagram Replace by:

Book Limit diagram which is printed at Annex B(see page 4 - 11).

xviii

Chapter Index diagram Replace by:

Chapter Index diagram which is printed at Annex C(see page 4 - 13).

1

Paragraph 1.1 1 line 3 For Lindesnes (57 58 83N7 03 22E) Read Jærens Rev (58 45 15N 5 29 40E)


2 From Jærens Rev: 58 45 15 5 29 40

Thence WSW to theUnited Kingdom/NorwayContinental ShelfBoundary:

57 37 00 2 06 00

76 – 113

Chapter 3 and diagrams Replace by:

CHAPTER 3

Delete entire chapter.

Note: The information formerly containedin this chapter is now published as

Chapter 2 of NP56 Norway Pilot Volume 1,Fifteenth Edition (2012).

Transfer of Chapter 3 from NP57A to Chapter 2 of NP5615th Edition - May 2012(HH. 056/200/01) [21/12]

Norway – Færøysundet and Prestøysundet —Anchorages

86


Spare3.57



Norway – Farsund and approaches —Anchorages

88 - 89


Norwegian 15/37615/11(SDD 2011000 149308) [35/11]

Stavanger – Dusavika — Light; depths

128

Paragraph 4.82 1 lines 3-4 For (59 00 0N 5 40 9E) Read(58 59 98N 5 40 79E)

NP57A

2 - 121

136


...3¾ cables W of Dusavika Light (58 59 98N 5 40 79E),being the deepest and longest; length 188 m with depthsfrom 8 6 to 9 8 m alongside.

Norwegian Notice 01/41495/12 and ENC NO5G071(SDD 2012000 011429) [05/12]

Gandsfjorden – Sandnes — Depths

147


Chart 3003

148


1 The main berthing areas are as follows:Lurahammaren (58 52 64N 5 44 78E) with two

concrete quays operated by Statoil AS; the largestis theNE-most quaywith a berthing length of 26 mand depths from 11 6 to 13 1 m alongside.

2 Somanset public industrial quay (58 52 25N5 44 80E). Consists of a main quay 265 m long withtwo dolphins 50 and 100 m S of the quay. There aredepths from 8 0 to 10 0 m alongside the main quay.The quay and dolphins form a line giving a totalberthing length of 375 m for large vessels and otherfloating structures.

3 Rappaneset (58 51 64N 5 44 85E). There arethree quays in the vicinity of Rappaneset; the deepestand longest is the S-most with an E face 64 m longand depths from 5 0 to 7 8 m alongside.

4 Public quays (58 51 30N 5 44 63E) are situated onthe W side of Vågen, this berthing area consists of apier, at its N end, and two concrete quays. The SEside of the pier is 148 m long, with depths from 6 0 to6 8 m alongside. South of the pier the largest quay is314 m long, with depths from 5 9 to 8 0 m alongside.

149

Delete (Sandnes 4.210) port plan

Norwegian Notice 10/35679/11 and ENC NO6D0711(SDD 2011000 101160) [06/12]

Finnøyfjorden – Fjellberg — Overhead cable

170



Karmsundet – Austdjupet — Light

193

Paragraph 6.36 title For Austdupet Read Austdjupet


...5 21 7E) (6.22). Thence the track leads N, and atnight in the white sector (009 -016 ) ofAustdjupholmane Light (metal column, 11 5 m inheight, floodlit) (59 16 30N 5 23 06E), passing (withpositions relative to Boknahovud Light):


...off the E side of Sauøy.The track then continues N, passing:

Between Guleskjeret (1½ miles NNW) andAustdjupholmane; the light is exhibited from theSW extremity of the NW islet. A light (post, 8 m inheight, floodlit) is exhibited from Dyna, a rock1 cable NNW of Guleskjeret.


5 Once N of Austdjupholmane, the track continues N,at night in the white sector (183 -186 ), astern, ofAustdjupholmane Light, passing (with positions relativeto Boknahovud Light):

Between the W side of Høvring (1¾ miles N) and...

Norwegian Notice 20/39574/11(SDDs 2011000 201126, 205199) [47/11]

Karmsundet – Storasundflu — Light

210


6 The track then leads to a position close SW ofVestre Storasundflu (7 cables NW).

Norwegian Notice 09/43929/12(SDD 2012000095033) [23/12]

Bømlafjorden – Auklandshamn; Vestvikvågen —Anchorages

219


1 Description. Auklandshamn (59 38 3N 5 22 3E) issituated 1 mile ESE of Nappholmen. The bay isentered between Litle Bleikja, an above-water rocklying close SW of the S end of Storøy andStorableikja, 1½ cables farther SW.


221


3 The anchorage at Liereid (7.33) is approachedwithin the white sector (231¾ -234½ ), astern, ofFørdespollen Light.


Spare7.34


NP57A

2 - 122

Husnesfjorden – Laukhammarsundet — Lights

239


Between the N end of Huglo (1¼ miles NNW),marked by Seldalsneset Light (floodlit)(59 52 22N 5 36 41E) and LaukhammarsundetVestre Light (floodlit) (59 52 57N 5 35 72E), andthe SW side of Skorpo. Thence:


4 SW of Paddeborgsneset Light (floodlit) (2 milesNW), thence:

NE of Store Storsøya (2¼ miles NW), with LitleStorsøya close NW.

Norwegian Notices 22/40176/11; 22/40194/11:22/40214/11(SDD 2011000 221029) [51/11]

Stokksundet – Koløyosen — Anchorage

282


...inlet with Koløystø at its head, lies E of Koløy. Areef, on the W end of which...


Lysefjorden – Eidsvågen — Anchorage

312


1 Description. Eidsvågen...


Raunefjorden to Hjelteneset – Vatlestraumen —Directions; light

326


NE of Revskoltgrunnen Light Buoy (port hand)(5½ cables NW), marking the edge of the 10 0 mdepth contour. Thence:


Bergen – Skoltegrunnskaien — Light

329


...Light towards Bergen Havn.

333


335


...the largest of which are as follows:

Paragraph 9.202 1 line 5 For (close ESE) Read(60 24 09N 5 18 70E)

Paragraph 9.202 2 line 1 For (2 cables SE) Read(60 23 95N 5 19 00E)

Paragraph 9.202 3 line 1 For (1½ cables SSE) Read(60 23 99N 5 18 68E)

336

Diagram Bergen Plan B Replace by:

Diagram Bergen Plan B which is printed at Annex D(see page 4 - 15).


Fedjeosen – Hernar – Hernesundet —Overhead cable

348


Vertical clearance. An overhead cable with avertical clearance of 14 m spans Hernesundet S ofHernar village.


Hauglandsosen – Horsøy — Lights

353




Masfjorden – Duesundet — Vertical clearance

402

Paragraph 10.414 1 line 7 For 21 m. Read 19 m.


Matresfjorden – Tersundet — Vertical clearance

403

Paragraph 10.418 2 line 3 For 87 m. Read 60 m.


NP57A

2 - 123

Brandangersundet – Slovågen — Depths

415

Paragraph 11.68 2 line 6 For 4 9 to 5 7 Read 2 7 to 5 5


...with a depth of 6 1 m alongside.


Askrova – Valvikevågen — Light

489


Nesodden...


Svanøya – Stavfjorden — Depth

493



Skorpa – Vassøya — Depth

521



Frøya – Oldersundet — Depth

537


W of a rock (61 46 23N 4 54 03E), with a depth of4 2 m, thence;


Norway – Måløy — Lights; directions

545


...(004 -062½ ) of Måløysundet W passage SW Light(floodlit) (61 55 66N 5 07 22E) (13.270).

546


...also into the white sector (004 -062½ ) of MåløysundetW passage SW Light (floodlit) (61 55 66N 5 07 22E).

561


1 Måløystraumen (13.254) is divided into twopassages by a small islet on which stands the centralpillar of a bridge. In the W passage, there is a leastdepth of 10 0 m; the E passage has a least depth of12 0 m.


2 Prohibited anchorage. Vessels are not allowed toanchor in the fairway E of a line drawn betweenMåløysundet W passage NW Light (floodlit)(61 55 79N 5 07 26E) and the light exhibited from theE point of Goteberghammaren (61 56 55N 5 07 69E).The fairway must be open to coastal through-traffic.Anchorage is also prohibited near the quays.

Paragraph 13.270 Heading Replace by:

Directions for east passage


1 From the vicinity of 61 54 81N 5 06 65E the trackleads initially NNE for 8 cables and at night within thewhite sector (004 -062½ ) of Måløysundet W passageSW Light (61 55 66N 5 07 22E), passing:

561-562


2 ESE of Måløysundet W passage SW Light(61 55 66N 5 07 22E), thence:

From the vicinity of 61 55 57N 5 07 31E the trackcontinues NNE for 2 cables through the E passage ofMåløystraumen, the sides of which are marked bylights (lateral), thence:

562


3 Under the bridge (61 55 75N 5 07 31E)(13.259), from which lights are exhibited toindicate the centre. Thence:

From the vicinity of 61 55 78N 5 07 47E the trackthen leads N for 3 cables to the vicinity of 61 56 10N5 07 47E, in the middle of the port of Måløy, fromwhich the harbour berths can be directly accessed.Lights are exhibited from some of the corners of theberths on the Vågsøy side of the harbour.


Directions for west passage13.270a

1 From the vicinity of 61 56 10N 5 07 47E the trackleads SSW for 3 cables through the W passage ofMåløystraumen, the sides of which are marked bylights (lateral), thence:

2 From the vicinity of 61 55 80N 5 07 35E the trackleads S for 2 cables under the bridge (61 55 75N5 07 39E) (13.259), from which lights are exhibited toindicate the centre, thence:

3 From the vicinity of 61 55 57N 5 07 31E the trackleads SSW for 8 cables and at night within the whitesector (004 -062½ ), astern of Måløysundet Wpassage SW Light (61 55 66N 5 07 22E), passing:

NP57A

2 - 124

ESE of Måløysundet W passage SW Light(61 55 66N 5 07 22E), thence:

WNW of Kariskjeret Light (61 55 21N 5 07 24E)(13.171), thence:

4 To a position in the vicinity of 61 54 81N 5 06 65Ewhere the directions for Vågsfjorden (13.168) can bereversed.


...4¼ cables N and 4½ cables NNE of Måløysundet Wpassage NW Light (61 55 79N 5 07 26E), and to asubmarine...

562-563


1 From the vicinity of 61 56 10N 5 07 47E, in themiddle of the port of Måløy, the route leads generallyNNE for about 3½ miles through Ulvesundet(61 57 40N 5 08 90E), the channel between Vågsøyand the mainland, to a position about 2 cables NNWof Ulvesundet Front Leading Light (61 59 10N5 10 12E). The channel has few dangers.

563

Diagram 13.272 Replace by:

Diagram 13.272a which is printed at Annex E(see page 4 - 17).

After diagram 13.272a Insert:

Diagram 13.272b which was printed with theaccompanying chart correcting block. (This diagram isnot included in this publication as it has been replacedby a new diagram at Annex F see page 4 - 19).

563-564


1 From the vicinity of 61 56 10N 5 07 47E, the trackleads NNE, passing:

Clear of, depending on draught, a shoal (61 56 60N5 08 24E) which has been dredged to a leastdepth of 12 m, thence:

564


1 At night the track leads NE, from the N end ofMåløystraumen (13.254), passing close NW ofHavnevesnet ISPS Terminal (61 56 23N 5 08 06E)and Trollebø Industriområde.

Norwegian Notices 14/ 37115, 37134, 37135, 37136,37194, 37195, 37196, 37197 & 37198 /11, NorwegianHydrographic Office e-mail(SDD 2011000 142009, 155970) [38/11]

Nordfjord – Bryggja — Anchorage

547



Måloy – Måloystraumen — Lights; directions

561


1 The port is approached from the S throughMåløystraumen (61 55 73N 5 07 36E), the stretch ofwater 1¼ cables wide which lies between the E sideof Måløyna (61 55 73N 5 07 10E) and the Kulenpeninsula on the mainland; a causeway joins Måløynato Sæterneset (61 55 65N 5 06 69E), the SE point ofVågsøy.

2 An islet lies in the centre of Måløystraumen,dividing the fairway into an E and a W passage, anda bridge (13.259 and 13.260) spans the fairway, thecentral pillar of which stands on this islet. Both E andW passages are well marked by lights and leadinglines (see diagram 13.272b).

3 From the N the port is approached and enteredthrough Ulvesundet (61 57 40N 5 08 90E).

Existing Section IVNoticeWeek 38/11Paragraph 13.257 1

Replace by:

1 In the W passage (13.254), there is a least depthof 10 5 m; the E passage has a least depth of 7 0 m.

561-562

Paragraph 13.270 and 13.270a Including all ExistingSection IV Notices Week 38/11 replace by:

Directions(continued from 13.171 and 13.172)

East passage13.270

1 From the vicinity of 61 54 81N 5 06 65E the trackleads NNE for 8 cables and at night initially within thewhite sector (004 -062½ ) of Måløysundet W passageSW Light (61 55 66N 5 07 22E), passing:

WNW of Kariskjeret Light (61 55 21N 5 07 24E)(13.171), thence:

ESE of Måløysundet W passage SW Light, thence:2 To the vicinity of 61 55 57N 5 07 37E, 1¾ cables

S of the bridge (13.259 and 13.260).Leading lights. From the vicinity of 61 55 57N

5 07 37E, the alignment of leading lights (010¾ )leads through the centre of E passage, with lightbeacons marking the edges of the channel, and underthe centre of the E span of the bridge.

Front light: Måloysundet East passage No 1(61 55 738N 5 07 439E) U+E067.

Rear light: Måloysundet East passage No 2(61 55 748N 5 07 443E) U+E068.

3 Once clear of the bridge, in the vicinity of61 55 78N 5 07 47E, the track continues N into thecentre of the port of Måløy, from where the harbourberths can be approached directly. Lights areexhibited from the corners of some of the berths onthe W side of the harbour.

(Directions continue for Ulvesundet at 13.280)

NP57A

2 - 125

West passage13.270a

1 From a position in the centre of Måløy harbour, inthe vicinity of 61 56 10N 5 07 44E, the track leadsSSW for 3 cables to the entrance to W passage.Leading lights. The alignment of leading lights

(190 ) leads through the centre of W passage, withlight beacons marking the edges of the channel, andunder the centre of the W span of the bridge (13.259and 13.260).

2 Front light: Måloysundet West passage No 1(61 55 756N 5 07 309E) U+E066.

Rear Light: Måloysundet West passage No 2(61 55 747N 5 07 306E) U+E065.

Once clear of the bridge, the track leads SSW for8 cables, and at night within the white sector(004 -062½ ), astern, of Måløysundet W passage SWLight (61 55 66N 5 07 22E), passing:

ESE of Måløysundet W passage SW Light(61 55 66N 5 07 22E), thence:

3 WNW of Kariskjeret Light (61 55 21N 5 07 24E)(13.171), thence:

To a position in the vicinity of 61 54 81N5 06 65E.

(Directions continue for Vågsfjorden at 13.168)

Existing Section IV Notice Week 38/11 Diagram 13.272bReplace by:

New diagram 13.272b which is printed at Annex F(see page 4 - 19).

Norwegian Chart 490; Norwegian Notices 21/39856/11;21/39915/11(SDDs 2008000 006311; 2011 211403) [51/11]

Sildegapet – Vågsøy — Directions; depth

565



Furenes to Stadtlandet – Fureneset —Directions; depth

571



NP57B Norway Pilot Volume 2B (2012 Edition)

Haugsfjorden – Åramsundet — Route; depths;directions

74



1 Haugsfjorden is deep, but Åramsundet has a leastdepth of 11 2 m in the fairway.


2 The track then leads NNE, at night through an areacovered by a white sector (211½ -344½ ) ofTerneskjerflu Light (62 10 74N 5 24 03E) (3.32),passing:

NNW of a rock (62 11 65N 5 27 27E) with a depthof 7 7 m close W of an iron perch markingYtstefluda, both of which are covered by a greensector (047 -060 ) of Åramsund Light (post 5 m inheight) (62 12 17N 5 29 05E).

3 The track then leads NE passing:Clear of a rock (62 12 28N 5 28 11E) with a depth

of 11 3 m.The track then continues NE to a position S of

Kyrholmskjeret Light (lantern) (62 12 51N 5 28 18E).Clearing marks:

The alignment (053 ) of the gap between the twoLangholmane (62 12 60N 5 29 30E) islets withHollenupen 1¾ miles ENE, passes NNW ofYtstefluda;Hollenupenhas a steep dropon itsNWside.

Paragraphs 3.59 and 3.60, including headings, Replaceby:

Spare3.59

Spare3.60

Paragraph 3.61, including heading, Replace by:

Åramsundet3.61

1 From a position S of Kyrholmskjeret Light(62 12 51N 5 28 18E) the track leads ESE throughÅramsundet, passing:

Clear of a rock (62 12 36N 5 29 19E) with a depthof 11 2 m, thence:

SSW of foul ground (62 12 40N 5 29 43E) frontingLangholmane, thence:

2 NNE of a rock (62 12 18N 5 29 40E) with adepth of 5 9 m, marked on its E side by alight buoy (N cardinal), and:

SSW of Rædene (62 12 40N 5 29 80E), a foularea, where theW-most part is marked by an ironperch.

The track then leads E into the open waters ofHallefjorden.

(Directions continue for Hallefjorden at 3.83)


Spare3.62

75


Spare3.63

Paragraph 3.69 1 lines 4-5 For ...Stabbane Light(62 12 24N 5 29 78E)... Read ...Åramsund Light(62 12 17N 5 29 05E)...

NP57B

2 - 126


...position E of Åramsund Light (62 12 17N5 29 05E) (3.58).

(Directions continue for Hallefjorden at 3.83)

77



Paragraph 3.83 2 lines 1-2 Delete...at night in a white sector (293 - 313 ), astern, ofStabbane Light...

Paragraph 3.83 2 lines 8-10 Delete...which lies closewithin thewhite sector of StabbaneLight


107

Norddalsfjorden - Linge – Anchorage

Paragraph 3.332, including heading, Replace by:

Spare3.332


Lepsøyrevet – Depths; directions

140

Paragraph 4.130 1 line 8 For buoyed Read dredged


1 A channel through Lepsøyrevet has a dredgeddepth of 11 m (2012) over a width of about ½ cable.

Paragraph 4.135 1 line 8 and 9 Replace by:

...(62 35 4N 6 15 8E), to a position about 7 cablesSW of Søre Kverna Light at the entrance to adredged channel.

140-141

Paragraph 4.136 1 2 and 3 Replace by:

1 From a position about 7 cables SW of Søre KvernaLight (62 35 4N 6 14 7E) the track leads NE througha dredged channel (4.131) marked by light beacons(lateral) to a position about 6 cables NE of SøreKverna Light.Thence the track continues NE, at night in a white

sector (203 -237 ), astern of Søre Kverna Light to aposition ENE of Hestøya (62 36 5N 6 15 1E).Useful mark:

Lepsøyrevet Light (62 36 4N 6 15 8E) (4.135).


141

Paragraph 4.138 2 line 4 and 5 Replace by:

Thence the track continues NNE to a position about7 cables SW of Søre Kverna Light at the entrance toa dredged channel.

Norwegion Notice 17/44949/12 and ENC NO5E1512(SDD 2012000 188478) [43/12]

Sveggesundet – Depths; directions

188

Paragraph 5.77 1 line 4 For 4.0 m Read 2.3 m

189


...Sveggøya, noting a rock with a depth of 2.3 mclose E of the light.


Langøysundet to Raudholmen — Directions

189

Paragraph 5.85 4 line 5 For NW Read NE

UKHO [51/12]

261-262

Trondheimsleia – Slåttavika — Anchorage


Spare6.192


266

Trondheimsleia – Nordleksa – Heradsvika —Anchorage


Spare6.235

Trondheimsleia – Kongsvoll — Anchorage


3 Anchorage.At the head of Innervågen, close S of the isthmus, indepths of 13 m, sand and shell; mooring rings areavailable.

Berths:Ytterhamna, concrete quay; length 16 m, depthsfrom 2 8 to 4 8 m.

Innervågen. Outside a breakwater, within which liesa marina; a bunkering pontoon, length 40 m,depths from 4 9 to 9 1 m.

Norwegian Notices 3/41937/12; 3/41941/12(SDD 2012000 032731) [22/12]

NP57B

2 - 127

310

Frøya – Inntian — Anchorage

Paragraph 7.178 1 line 5 For is clear Read is encumberedby a large marine farm;


Lina — Directions; lights

324

Paragraph 7.282 1 line 3 For (64 02 8N 9 55 4E) Read(64 02 93N 9 55 38E)

Paragraph 7.282 1 line 7 For (320 -333½ ) Read(325½ -334½ )


2 ENE of Bruskjæret (1¼ miles SSE).Thence the track continues NNW in a channel

marked by iron perches and light beacons, passing:WSW of Torsholmbåen Light (tripod, 9 m in height)(3¾ cables SE), thence:

ENE of Linasundet Light (1 cable S), thence:Under a bridge (7.280) where Lina Light is exhibited.

Thence the track continues NNW, at night in awhite sector (151½ -156½ ), astern, of Lina Light,passing:

3 ENE of a rock (2¼ cables NW), with a depth of5 m, thence:

WSW of Langtaren Light (tripod), (4 cables NNW),thence:

ENEof a rock (5½ cablesNW), with a depth of 7 7 m.Thence the track continues NNW to a position in

Flesafjorden WNW of Naustskjæret (9 cables N),marked by an iron perch. Flesafjorden forms part ofAsenleia.

(Directions for Asenleia are given at 7.228)

Norwegian Notices 21/45392/12, 21/45400/12(SDD 2012000 231194) [51/12]

336

Hopsfjorden — Depths

Paragraph 8.57 1 line 5 For controlling depth of 12.5 mRead least depth 11.5 m

Paragraph 8.58 2 line 1 For 4.0 m Read 3.0 m


NP58A Norway Pilot Volume 3A (2010 Edition)

NOR VTS

9


1 The area covered by this volume lies within theNOR VTS area of operation, which comprises thewaters of the Norwegian EEZ. All tankers, vesselsover 5000 gt and ocean towages in transit arerequested to report. For details see Admiralty List ofRadio Signals Volume 6(2).

Kystverket Norway(SDD 2010000 036503) [16/10]

Radio navigational warnings

9


1 Coastal navigational warnings and meteorologicalwarnings and forecasts for the area covered by thisvolume are available via the international NAVTEXservice from Bodø and Vardø Coast Radio Stations.NAVAREA warnings and METAREA warnings forNAVAREA/METAREA XIX are also available via theinternational SafetyNET service. The service iscurrently on trial, and is scheduled to become fullyoperational on 1st June 2011.See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3(1)

and Volume 5, and the Mariner’s Handbook fordetails.


Kvingra – Svinstein — wreck

77


NW of a wreck (1¼ cables WSW), thence:

Norwegian Notice 23/40994(SDD 2011000 240191) [04/12]

Torgværet – north-east of Tverrtaren — Depth

110



Ranfjorden – Finneidfjorden, Forneset andSkjånes — Anchorages

184


4 Anchorage may be obtained S of Kalabukta(66 12 54N 13 46 74E) and at the head of the fjord,WSW of Neset (66 11 80N 13 46 98E), in depthsfrom 30 to 45 m, as shown on the chart. Care isneeded to avoid the submarine cable laid across thefjord from Granmoen and another submarine cablelaid along the E side of the fjord in the vicinity ofNeset.

NP58A

2 - 128



Spare4.408


Lovundvika – Lovund — anchorages

193




Tomma – Finnvika — anchorage

194-195

Paragraph 4.484 including headings Replace by:

Spare4.484

Norwegian Notice 17/38380/11(SDD 2011000 171248 ) [40/11]

Nesøya – Jovika — Directions; leading lights

210

Paragraph 5 40 2 line 1 to 3 line 7 Replace by:

2 Directions. From a position about 3 cables S ofLille Svenningen Light (66 34 2N 12 35 7E), the trackleads ENE into Jovika, passing (with positions relativeto Lille Svenningen Light):

SSE of a rock (2 cables SE) with a depth of 4 0 m,thence:

3 SSE of a rock (2½ cables ESE) with a depth of4 9 m, thence:

Between the shore of Nesøya, to the S, marked byJovikgrunnen Light (floodlit) (3¾ cables ESE),and a line of rocks and drying patches (2¾ cablesE to 6¼ cables ENE), to the N, marked by lightsand iron perches.


Stigfjorden – Innerkvarøya Harbour —Anchorage

217



Meløyfjorden – Kjerkholmen — Light

235


...from which a light is exhibited, lying W ofLaksbuneset, thence:


Meløyvær – Kubakkflua — Light

238

Paragraph 5.211 2 lines 1-2 Replace by:2 W of Kubakkflua (2 miles SSE), marked by an

iron perch and from which a light (S cardinal)is exhibited. Kubakkflua is the SW-mostdanger of several lying off...


Eiet and Mesøyfjorden — Lights

240

Paragraph 5.224 3 lines 1-6 Replace by:3 E of a point (1¼ miles N) on the E side of

Mesøya, fronted by a rock awash.Raudsetodden Light is exhibited from the rockand there are depths of 10 m, 1 cable SE and2 cables NNE of the point. And:

WofSkjåholmen (1½ milesNNE), an islet lying closeoff the mainland coast, from theW side of which alight is exhibited. A rock with a depth of 3 7 m,fronts the NW side of Skjåholmen. Thence:

Norwegian Notices 21/31294/10, 20/30779/10(SDD 2010000189948 and 2010000179949) [50/10]

Paragraph 5.225 2 lines 1-2 Replace by:2 SE of Grytøya (1½ miles NE) and Risøya

(2 miles NE). A light is exhibited from the Epoint of Risøya. Thence:


NP58A

2 - 129

Bodø approaches – Nyholmsundet —Controlling depths

279


1 Entrance channel depths are as follows:


2 Hjartøysundet (67 17 5N 14 20 4E). There aredepths of more than 20 0 m in this channel.

Nyholmsundet. Least charted depth of 16 5 m,2 cables NNE of Nyholmen Light (67 17 2N14 21 9E).


Ofotfjorden – Barøya — Barøya Light

325


1 Major light:Tranøy Light (68 11 0N 15 35 9E) (6.13).


...Barøya Light (white round metal tower, red top, 7 m inheight) (3 miles E).

Paragraph 9.12 5 line 3 For (046 -056 ) Read(046½ -055½ )

328


Principal mark9.35

1 Major light:Tranøy Light (68 11 0N 15 35 9E) (6.13).

330


Paragraph 9.47 3 line 7 For (160 -174 ) Read(160½ -174 )

344



...of Barøya Light (9.12), the track continues to lead ENEwithin the white sector (241½ -248½ ), astern, of BarøyaLight...


Kanstadfjorden – Straumen — Vertical clearance

328



Kanstadfjorden – Neshamn — Anchorage

329


1 Description. Neshamn (68 24 0N 15 52 3E), asmall cove, is situated on the E side of the S part ofKanstadfjorden. A submarine cable lands on its Eshore, making the cove unsuitable as an anchorage.


Tysfjorden – Skrovkjosen –Skarberget — Buoyage

334

Paragraph 9.64 2 lines 4-8 Replace by:ESE of Skarberget Indre Light (starboard hand,floodlit) (½ cable N).


Tysfjorden – Haukøygrunnen and Storlysbotn —Buoyage

336

Paragraph 9.73 1 Replace by:General remarks. There are no specific directions

for Haukøyfjorden, the chart being sufficient guide.However, attention is drawn to Haukøygrunnen(68 10 3N 16 15 7E), consisting of a group ofdangerous below-water rocks lying in the middle ofthe entrance to the fjord.

Paragraph 9.79 2 lines 3-4 Replace by:Storlysbotn (5½ cables W), which is unmarked.


Ofotfjorden – Bogen — Directions; light

349



4 The track then leads NW, passing (with positionsrelative to Østervik Light):


Ofotfjorden – Ballangen — Directions

350

Paragraph 9.169 5-8 Replace by:5 Thence the track leads SW through Ballangsfjorden,

passing (with positions relative to Kårholmen Light):NW of a rock (1 mile ESE) with a depth of 8 3 m,thence:

NW of Arnesgrunnen (1 mile SE), marked by an ironperch, thence:

NP58A

2 - 130

6 SE of Steingrunnen (5½ cables SSW), markedby a buoy (starboard hand); a rock with adepth of 5 8 m, lies 1½ cables S of the buoy.And:

NW of Hattholmgrunnen (9 cables S), consisting ofseveral dangerous below-water rocks, thence:

NW of Fornesskjeran (1 2 miles SSW), marked byan iron perch, thence:

7 NW of a quay at Fornes (1 4 miles SSW)(9.171), thence:

SE of a rock (1 6 miles SSW) with a depth of 8 0 m,thence:

NW of a rock (1 9 miles SSW) with a depth of 4 0 m.The track then leads directly to the anchorage and

berth at Ballangen (9.172).


Sørlandsvågen – Røssnesvågen —Lights; Directions


368


ESE of the entrances to Sørlandsvågen (67 39 4N12 42 6E) (3 miles SSW) (10.67) andRøssnesvågen, which are marked by severallights, thence:

369


W of a reef, marked by an iron perch, fringing the Wside of the head of Værøy Molo (67 39 0N12 43 2N) (1¾ miles N).

370


1 Røssnesvågen. Værøy Molo Leading Lights:Front light (post, floodlit) (67 39 0N 12 43 2E).Rear light (post) (¼ cable NW).

From a position about 5 cables SE of Værøy MoloFront Light the track initially leads NW on thealignment (320¼ ) of these lights, passing (withpositions relative to Ytre Seiklakken Light (67 38 8N12 43 3E)):

Close NE of a patch (67 38 9N 12 43 4E) (¾ cableENE), with a depth of 4 9 m, thence:

SW of a rock (67 38 9N 12 43 5E) (1½ cables NE),with a depth of 3 7 m, marked by an iron perch,thence:

NE of a rock (67 38 9N 12 43 3N) (½ cable NNE),with a depth of 3 2 m, thence:

NE of an above-water rock (67 38 9N 12 43 2E)(¾ cable N) surrounded by drying ground,thence:

SW of Røstnesvågen S Light (floodlit) (67 39 0N12 43 4E) (1½ cables NNE); a rock, with a depthof 1 9 m, lies close NW of the light.

4 The track then leads NNW, passing close ENE ofthe head of the mole from which Værøy Molo LeadingLights (67 39 0N 12 43 2N) are exhibited, and thencethrough a channel, marked on both sides by lightsand iron perches, into Røstnesvågen.

371Port plan for Sørlandsvågen (10.73) Replace by:New port plan at Annex G (see page 4 - 21).

Norwegian Notices 3/26326/10; 3/26329/10; 6/26855/10;6/26893/10; 6/26895/10(SDDs 2010000 025063; 026160; 059101) [19/10]

Lofoten – South-east coast of Moskenesøya –Å — Anchorage

379Paragraph 11.18 lines 1-5 Delete

Norwegian Notices 2/33274/11(SDD 2011000019417) [08/11]

Lofoten south-east side – Sørvagen —Anchorage

380


1 Anchorage. Vessels may anchor in the harbour ofMoskenes in depths of about 10 m, sand. Mooringrings are available.


Stamsund – Rokkvika — Directions;leading lights

400-401


11.1291 Rokkivika (continued from 11.127). From the

position SSW of Skarvsteinan (68 06 89N 13 50 98E)the track leads WNW for a short distance, passingSSW of Søre Joøyskjersnaget (68 06 81N13 50 11E), a rock with a depth of 0 9 m, marked byan iron perch, lying off the SW side of Joøyskjæran,to the beginning of the alignment of Rokkvika LeadingLights:

2 Front light (68 07 42N 13 50 11E) exhibitedfrom the head of Rokkivika.

Rear light (68 07 38N 13 50 09E).Thence the track leads N on the alignment (006 6 )

of these lights, passing:W of Søre Joøyskjersnaget (68 06 81N13 50 11E), thence:

3 W of Joøyskjæran (68 06 85N 13 50 22E), fromthe S part of which Østre Joøyskjeret Light(white lantern on cairn)(68 06 84N13 50 22E) is exhibited, and:

E of Vestre Joøyskjeret (68 06 90N 13 49 70E), onwhich stands a beacon (black tower, white band),thence:

4 E of an above-water rock from which a light(floodlit) (68 06 98N 13 49 82E) is exhibited,thence:

NP58A

2 - 131

E of a drying rock, from which Stamsund Havn Light(post, 6 m in height) (68 07 01N 13 49 80E) isexhibited, thence:

W of Stamsund Mole (68 07 03N 13 50 16E) fromwhich a light (floodlit) is exhibited.

5 Thence course may be shaped to approach thedistrict boat quay (11.131) on the W side ofStamneset (68 07 24N 13 50 49E), or the W entranceto the inner harbour, S of Stamneset.Useful marks:

Drangelholmen Light (68 06 92N 13 49 21E).Joøyskjæran Vestre Light (68 06 91N 13 49 63E).

6 Joøy Vestre Light (68 07 10N 13 50 42E).Tankholmen Vestre Light (68 07 16N 13 50 45E).

Norwegian Notices 21/39696, 39677, 39714, 39740,39754, 39774/11; 03/42574/12(SDD 2011000 211493; 2012000 032731) [11/12]

Lofoten – South coast of Vestvågøya –Stamsund — Anchorage

401


Norwegian Notices 2/33314/11(SDD 20110000 019417) [08/11]

North side of Vestfjorden – Svolvær —Directions

422

Paragraph 12.80 1 line 3 Including existing Section IVNotice Week 18/10 ForOsan Light Read KleppfiskholmenLight

424

Paragraph 12.96 3 line 4 to 6 line 6 Including existingSection IV Notice Week 18/10 Replace by:

3 The track then leads generally N, and at nightwithin the white sector (008 -013 ) of KleppfiskholmenLight (68 13 6N 14 32 6E), passing (with positionsrelative to Stretarneset Light (68 13 2N 14 32 3E)):

E of the point from which Stretarneset Light isexhibited, thence:

4 W of Stretarholmen (68 13 2N 14 32 6E)(¾ cable ENE), from the W side of which alight (metal column, floodlit) is exhibited,thence:

Between the mainland shore and NedreSteinvikholmen (68 13 3N 14 32 6E)(1½ cables NE), thence:

5 W of Øvre Steinvikholmen Light (68 13 48N14 32 69E) (2 9 cables NNE) exhibited from asmall islet, thence:

W of Salttønna (68 13 5N 14 32 7E) (3 cablesNNE), thence:

E of Kleppfiskholmen Light (68 13 6N 14 32 6E)(3½ cables NNE) (3¾ cables NNE).

6 The track then leads into Osanpollen, passing W ofOsan Havn Light (68 13 70N 14 32 89E) (5 cablesNNE), marking a rock. Attention is drawn to a sunkenwreck (68 13 9N 14 32 5E) (7 cables N) lying on theNW side of Osanpollen, with a depth of 1 0 m, whichis marked by a buoy (S cardinal).

Norwegian Notices 19/30494/10; 19/30496/10;19/30487/10; 19/30636/10(SDDs 2010000 171528) [45/10]

North side of Vestfjorden –Svolvær — Directions

424


...SW of Rødholmskallen (68 12 8N 14 33 1E), which iscovered by the red sector (319 -341 ) of Stretarneset Light(68 13 2N 14 32 3E). Thence the track leads NNW,passing (with positions relative to Stretarneset Light):

ENE of Tennholman (68 12 9N 14 32 0E)(3 cables SSW), and:

2 WSW of an islet (68 13 1N 14 32 8E)(2¼ cables SE), lying off the W side ofRødholman, from which Rødholmen Light(12.60) is exhibited, thence:

ENE of a rock (68 13 1N 14 32 2E) (1½ cablesSSW), with a depth of 9 3 m, lying close off the Sside of Stretarneset.


North side of Vestfjorden – Molldøra –Kjepsøyhamn and Litlmolla — anchorages


Spare12.131


Spare12.132


Lofoten west side – Ramberg — Anchorage



NP58A

2 - 132

Vesterålen – Langøya Northwestwards —Jennegga

492Paragraph 14.175 and heading Replace by:

Spare14.175


Andøya – Nordmela — Depth; Directions

506


2 Controlling depth. There is a least charted depthof 5 0 m in the entrance to the harbour, ¾ cable SSEof Nordmela Mole Head Light (69 08 6N 15 40 5E).


507


9 N of Leisteinen Light (iron pole) (69 08 6N15 39 9E) (3 cables NNW), thence:

Norwegian Notices 24/1190/09; 4/26414/10(SDDs 2010000 000150; 034428) [16/10]

NP58B Norway Pilot Volume 3B(1984 Edition) — Supplement 9-2004

Norway, north coast – Vardø to Røst —Routeing system

2L 38 After existing Supplement amendment Insert:

Traffic separation schemes1.7aA routeing system comprising a series of TSS at

salient points off the Norwegian coast, linked byrecommended routes, is established off the N and Wcoasts of Norway, as shown on the charts. Thesystem is IMO-adopted, and applies to tankers of allsizes and other cargo ships of 5000 gt and above,engaged on international voyages. Vessels oninternational voyages to or from ports in Norwaybetween Vardø and Røst should follow the routeingsystem until a clear course towards the port can beset.

International Maritime Organization(SDD 2006000 406837) [20/07]

Norwegian charts — Accuracy

3

R 65-70 Replace by:In the area covered by this volume there are still

charts based on surveys that are up to 100 years old.The title notes and source diagrams on Norwegiancharts give an indication of the accuracy mariners canexpect from them. In particular, surveys completedbefore about 1960 are likely to be incomplete, andthere may well be shoals which are not shown.Navigation in such areas should therefore beconducted with great care, and passages outside therecommended channels shown on the charts shouldnot be attempted. (See 1.7).In digital charts the data quality is given in the

Zones of Confidence (ZOC) diagram. For Norwegiancoastal waters zones B and C will primarily be used,based on the following classifications: ENCs withsource data from older soundings (before around1960) are given ZOC value ‘C’, while ENCs with morerecent source data are given ZOC value ‘B’. Theborder for the different zones will be added to thechart data so that it is possible to see on screenwhich zone one is in use at all times.Mariners should take great care when using DGPS

and electronic charts with old soundings data sincethe accuracy and completeness of the depthmeasurements do not correspond with modernstandards.Furthermore, mariners should ensure that navigation

takes place at all times with good margins and in linewith responsible navigation practice.For additional information see The Mariner’s

Handbook.

4

L 1-2 Delete

Norwegian Notice 10/623/06(HH. 308/400/02) [33/06]

Pilotage – General regulations — Baseline

5Existing Supplement correction Paragraph 1.38 Add:

See diagram 1.38, which shows the baseline,territorial limits, and areas within the baseline whichare exempt from compulsory pilotage. See alsoAdmiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).

Existing Supplement correction After Paragraph 1.38Insert:

Diagram 1.38 which is printed at Annex H(see page 4 - 23).

Den Norske Los Volume 1 (2004)(HH. 078/360/02) [44/08]

NP58B

2 - 133

Radio navigational warnings; Firing areas

6

L47-64 Paragraph 1.55 Replace by:

World-Wide Navigational Warning Service1.55

1 Coastal navigational warnings and meteorologicalwarnings and forecasts for the area covered by thisvolume are available via the international NAVTEXservice from Bodø, Vardø and Murmansk Coast RadioStations. NAVAREA warnings and METAREAwarnings for NAVAREA/METAREA XIX are alsoavailable via the international SafetyNET service. Theservice is currently on trial, and is scheduled tobecome fully operational on 1st June 2011.See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3(1)

and Volume 5, and the Mariner’s Handbook fordetails.

47

R68-70 Replace by:

Rocket firings take place occasionally fromAndøya rocket range (69 17 6N 16 01 3E), asannounced through NAVTEX and the World-WideNavigational Warning Service forNAVAREA/METAREA XIX. See also 1.55.


NOR VTS

6

Existing Section IV Notice Week 04/07 L64 Paragraph1.55a Replace by:

NOR Vessel Traffic Service1.55a

1 The area covered by this volume lies within theNOR VTS area of operation, which comprises thewaters of the Norwegian EEZ. All tankers, vesselsover 5000 gt and ocean towages in transit arerequested to report. In addition NOR VTS covers thethe approaches to Melkøya (70 41 N 23 36 E) andHammerfest (70 40 N 23 36 E).

2 For details see Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(2).

Kystverket Norway(SDD 2010000 036503) [14/10]

Military prohibited areas

6

R 7-21 Harstad Navy Defence District; Tromsø SeaDefence Area Existing Supplement amendments Delete:

Sandsøya (3.157).Gibostadsundet (6.86).

Norwegian Notices 17/877/05; 17/881/05(HH. 309/410/05; HH 309/420/05) [45/05]

Reporting requirements for vessels carryingdangerous or polluting goods

6

R 46 Existing Supplement amendment Replace by:

Carriage of dangerous or polluting goods.Norwegian regulations require an arrival report and thecompletion of a check list for vessels carryingdangerous or polluting goods arriving from countriesother than the EC and Iceland. All vessels departingfrom Norway, irrespective of destination, must make adeparture report. These regulations apply to vessels ofat least 300 grt and to vessels, irrespective of size,carrying dangerous or polluting goods in bulk orpackaged form, as defined by the InternationalMaritime Dangerous Goods Code. The regulations donot apply to:

Warships and official ships used for non-commercialpurposes.

Fishing vessels, pleasure vessels, and traditionalvessels, provided they are less than 45 m inlength.

Bunkers of less than 5000 tonnes, stores andequipment for use on board vessels.

The regulations, forms and check lists are availablefrom the Norwegian National Coastal Administration asfollows:

E-mail [email protected]

Telephone +47 33034800

Fax +47 33034680

Website www.kystverket.no

Users of the website require a password.Shipmasters and operators requiring a user name andpassword should contact the Brevik Vessel TrafficCentre on +47 35572610.

327

Existing Supplement amendment DeleteAppendix III in its entirety.


Vardø vessel traffic service

6

L 64 Insert:

Vardø vessel traffic service1.55aOn 1 January 2007 a VTS was established for the

waters encompassed by the Norwegian EconomicZone (Appendix II) off the coast of N Norway,between 65 N, in the vicinity of Rørvik (Norway PilotVolume IIB), and the border with Russia. All tankers,vessels over 5000 grt, and sea-going tugs arerequested to report to Vardø VTS Centre uponentering these waters.In addition Vardø VTS covers the approaches to

Melkøya (70 41 N 23 36 E) and Hammerfest (70 40 N23 40 E) (11.59). For further details see Admiralty Listof Radio Signals Volume 6(2).

http://www.kystverket.no


NP58B

2 - 134

209

R 11 Insert:

Vessel traffic service10.96aA vessel traffic service is in operation for the

monitoring of shipping in the approaches to Melkøya(70 41 N 23 36 E) and Hammerfest. See 1.55a andAdmiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2) for details.

220

R 46 Insert:



226

R 17 Insert:



228

L 49 Insert:



Vardø Vessel Traffic Service(SDD 2006000 407084) [04/07]

Andfjorden – Andenes — Directions; light

51

Paragraph 3.39 R46 Replace by:

NNE of the head (floodlit) (1 6 cables W) of the Emole of the inner harbour.

The track then leads W for a short distance into theinner harbour, passing S of a drying patch (2 1 cablesWNW), marked by iron perches.


Andefjorden – Saurabogen –Leading lights; directions

52

R 69-70 Including existing Supplement amendmentReplace by:

Directions: From seaward the track into theharbour leads WNW through a channel marked bydolphins.

53

L 1-2 Delete


Andfjorden – Risøyrenna — Depth

53L60-62 Replace by:

Depth. There is a least charted depth (68 58 69N15 45 44E) of 5 4 m in Risøyrenna, between U LightBeacon and V Light Beacon, at the E end of thechannel.


Sandsøya — Military prohibited area

60

R 55-56 Existing Supplement amendment Delete


Andfjorden – Nergårdsvika — Anchorage

63-64R69-70, L1-5 Replace by:

Anchorage. Small vessels may anchor SW ofSvinøya and secure to the shore; the anchorage isespecially suitable when NE winds raise a sea inNergårdsvika. A mooring buoy is available, mooredbetween Kleppholmen and the shore W.


Tjeldsundet – Balstadstraumen — Directions

74R 14-18 Replace by:

S of Balstadgrunnen Light (8¼ cables W), thence:S of Balstadskallen (7 cables W), an unmarked rockon the N side of the fairway, thence:

N of Sandskjeret (6 cables WSW).The sector limit 275 of Staksvollholmen Light

between white and red sectors, astern, passes closeS of Balstadskallen.


Tjeldsundet – Sandtorgstraumen — Directions

76L 28-35 Replace by:

Close SE of a spar buoy (7 5 cables NE), thence:Through the shallowest part of the channel (for depthsee 4.28), close NW of Ramstadgrunnen LightBuoy (8 9 cables ENE) and thence:

NWof a spar buoy (1 05 miles ENE)marking theNWside of Ramstadgrunnen, and:

SE of Holsflua Østre Light (1 05 miles NE), markingthe E extremity of Holsflua, thence:

SE of Steinsgrunnen Light (1 25 miles ENE).

NP58B

2 - 135

L 47-52 Replace by:

N of Holsflua Nordre Light (8½ cables WNW), whichmarks the N side of Holsflua; it lies just within thewhite sector limit. Thence:

N of HolsfluaØstre Light (5½ cablesW), marking theE extremity of Holsflua, thence:

Close S of Steinsgrunnen Light (4 cables WNW).

L 67 For Light-buoy Read Light

R 5-9 including existing Supplement correction Replaceby:

NNW of Nordøygrunnen Light (1 88 miles SW,thence:

SSE of Stornesgrunnen Nordre Light(1 45 miles WSW), marking a patch, with a depthof 7 0 m over it, near Stornesgrunnen.

R 14-23 Replace by:

NW of Stornesgrunnen Søre Light (6 cables NE),exhibited from theNWside of a shoal, with a depthof 5 5 m over it, thence:

SEof the coastal bank onwhich standsRemmaLight(1 mile NE), thence:

NW of Remma Søre Light (1 1 miles NE), markingshoal water on theE side of the fairway; two rocks,with a depth of 7 0 m over them, lie ½ and¾ cables NE of Remma Søre Light. Thence:

NW of Sandtorghella Light (1 4 miles NE) markingthe NW part of shoals surrounding Hellevoren.

Norwegian Notices 20/1179-1188/07(SDD 2007000 080498) [47/07]

Vågsfjorden – South-eastern part –Tovikskjeret — Light buoy

85

R 58-59 Delete


Mefjorden – Mefjordbotn — Anchorage

98

R22-27 Replace by:

Spare5.61


Senja – Baltsfjord — light

99R 49-55 Replace by:From the position S of Husfallet (69 36 1N

17 42 7E) the track leads SSE through Baltsfjorden,passing (with positions relative to Nøringa Light(69 35 9N 17 41 3E)):

ENE of Renneneset (1 mile SSE), a rounded point,thence:

WSW of Pussegrunnen (2¾ miles SE), an isolatedunmarked rock, thence:

WSW of the shore bank extending S fromOpplandshaugen (3½ miles SE) to the headof thefjord, and:

ENE of Selvågneset (3½ miles SSE).The track then leads to the head of the fjord where

there is an anchorage.


Kattfjorden – Nordre Angstaursundet –Lysgrunnen — Directions; buoyage

106R32AfterNNW) Insert:markedby a spar buoy (E cardinal)


Kvaløya – Ersfjorden —Directions; marine farm

107R38 After given from the light): Insert:

S of Skamtind (2 miles E), and a marine farm whichlies 5 cables farther E with mooring chains whichextendSandSW into the channel indicated by thewhite sector. Thence:


Tranøyfjorden and Solbergfjorden —Marine farms

119After L 3 Insert:

Marine farms6.8aMarine farms have been established on the W side

of Tranøyfjorden in position 69 02 12N 17 15 37Eand on the N side of Solbergfjorden in position69 08 80N 17 38 85E. Ground tackle extends up to7 cables into the fairway from these farms.

L 48 Replace by:

...Dyrøya, and:E of a marine farm (3 9 miles SW) (6.8a).

After R 19 Insert:

S of a marine farm (6 9 miles WSW) (6.8a), thence:

Norwegian Notices 15/736/09; 15/737/09(SDDs 2009000 109960; 109961) [36/09]

NP58B

2 - 136

Solbergfjorden – Indreleia — Dyrøya Light

119L 45 Including existing Supplement amendment For024 -041 Read 026 -041

L 49 Including existing Supplement amendment For064 -073 Read 064½ -074½L 54 Including existing Supplement amendment For100 -216 Read 100 -209½


Gisundet – Gibostadsundet —Controlling depth

126

Paragraph 6.85 L 39-40 Replace by:

Controlling depths. For the depth in the channel(69 18 0N, 17 59 0E) off Leiknesodden see 6.93. InGibostadsundet (69 21 4N 18 05 6E) (6.96) there is aleast charted depth of 10 0 m.


Gibostad — Military prohibited area

126

L 44-47 Existing Supplement amendment Replace by:Military prohibited areas exist in the vicinity of

Rødbergsodden (6.89) and Skorliodden (the NWentrance point to Gisundet) (see 1.57).


Tromsø – Tromsøysundet — Anchorage

142

L 59-60 Existing Supplement amendment Replace by:Anchorage (220 , 1 mile) depth 14 m, coral.Two recommended anchorage areas (014 ,1½ miles and 012 , 1¼ miles) are situated ESEand SE of Breidvika as shown on the chart.Attention is drawn to the submarine cable andpipelines (025 , 2 3 miles) which crossTromsøysundet between Nygård and Kroken.

Norwegian Notice 20/958/04; BA Chart 3751(HH. 309/430/04) [50/04]

Southern part of Sandøyfjorden –Approaches to Skagøysundet — Depth

146R 28 Add: There is a least depth of 8 0 m in this channel,3 cables SE of Nyflua.


Vannøya – Torsvåg — Marine farm

158R 16 After SWmole. Insert: A marine farm and associatedground tackle lies inside the harbour, 100 m NNW of thelight.


Fugløysveet – Burøya — Marine farm

168

After L 13 Insert:Marine farm has been established in the white

sector of Burøynakken Light in position 70 14 1N19 55 8E, as shown on the chart.


East side of Vannøya – Valavågen —Valabotn anchorage

171L19-22 Delete


South side of Arnøya – Akkarvik — Anchorage

177L 16-17 Replace by:

...ground of shells and sand. Care is needed toavoid a submarine cable laid from Slettnes(70 03 8N 20 29 6E), on theWside of the bay, ina SE direction out into Langfjorden; a marine farmalso lies 2½ cables NNW of this anchorage.


Kvænangenfjorden – Lauksundet —Marine farm

177L 53 Delete ...is free from dangers in the fairway and...

Existing Supplement amendment L55 Replace by:

Marine farms are established along both sides ofLauksundet, generally within 1 cable of the shore.

R 25 Replace by:

...of the sound, passing close WNW of a large marinefarm and its associated ground tackle 2 miles NNE ofthe light, and clear of the coastal banks abreast...


NP58B

2 - 137

Søndre Bergsfjorden (Sandlandsfjorden) –Sandland — Depth

181L62-63 Replace by:Depth. A rock, with a depth of 2 3 m, lies in the

middle of the entrance to the harbour, immediatelyinside the moles.


Maursundet – Litle Kobbepollen —Marine farm

191After L6 Insert:

SE of a large marine farm and its associated groundtackle (3 3 miles NE), thence:

L43 After (56 ft). Insert: A large marine farm (9.95) lies inthe SE approach to the anchorage; the ground tackleextends NW to within 2 cables of the charted anchorageposition.


Maursundet – Jekthamna —Anchorage removed

191L 26-37 Replace by:Spare9.97


Breivik — Jetty

203

R 15-16 Delete


Sandøyfjorden – Hønsebyfjorden —Spar buoy

207

R 60-66 Replace by:Directions. Hønsebyfjorden (70 44 N 23 10 E) is

entered by passing E of Hønsebygrunnen, a 3 m(10 ft) patch; a bar, 3 cables within the entrance, hasa least depth of 4 m (13 ft) in mid-channel.


Sørøysundet – Approaches to Hammerfest andMelkøya — Directions; LNG Terminal

210L56-57 For Directions for the entrance to Indreleia, NEof SørøyaReadDirections for the entrance to Indreleiaand the north-west approach to Hammerfest and theMelkøya LNG TerminalL60 Delete ...from NWL67-70, R1-10 Replace by:From a position about 20 miles W of Fruholmen

Light (71 06 N 24 00 E) (10.101), the pilot boardingposition (helicopter) for large vessels bound for theMelkøya LNG Terminal (11.83a), the track leads SEfor 23 miles, passing (with positions relative toTarhalsen Light (70 52 N 23 19 E)):

SW of Ytre Tuboen (8¾ miles N), Nordre Tuboen,1½ miles farther SE and Tubofallet, 2 milesfarther SSE, thence:

SW of Øvre Tuboen (6 miles N), thence:NE of Rolvsøyskolten (2¾ miles N), thence:NE of Tarhalsfallet (2¼ miles NNE), thence:NE of Tarhalsen, the N tip of the island of Sørøya,from which Tarhalsen Light (10.88) is exhibited,thence:

SW of Skipsholmen (8 miles ENE), andYttergrunnen, 2½ miles farther SW, thence;

SW of Revsholmen (7¾ miles E), thence;NE of Litlenæringen Light (column) (6¼ miles SE).

To approximate position 70 49 N 23 46 E.Useful mark:

Mylingen Light (70 45 N 23 42 E) (11.69).(Directions continue for Indreleia inRolvsøysundet at 10.106 and forthe approaches to Hammerfest

at 11.69)R 13-25 Replace by:Spare10.104-10.105

224L12 For Fuglenes Read Fugleneset

226L1 For HAMMERFEST Read HAMMERFEST ANDAPPROACHESL16-17 Replace by:Approach from north. From approximate position

70 49 N 23 46 E in Indreleia, Hammerfest isapproached through the NE part of Sørøysundet,passing E of Håja and S of the Melkøya LNGTerminal (11.83a).

R45 Replace by:Directions for entry from north(continued from 10.103)R47 Insert:From approximate position 70 49 N 23 46 E, the

track leads WSW for 5 miles into the N part ofSørøysundet towards the pilot boarding position forvessels bound for Hammerfest and smaller vesselsbound for the Melkøya LNG Terminal, which lies1½ miles NE of the entrance to Akkarfjorden (11.90).Thence, the track leads S, passing (with positions

relative to Mylingen Light (70 45 N 23 42 E)):

NP58B

2 - 138

E of Sørøya (5½ milesW), which forms theW side ofSørøysundet, thence:

W of Mylingen Light (white lantern on base), thence:W of Fluengrunnen (1 mile SW), thence:W of Melkøya (4 miles SSW).

To a position about 1½ miles NE of Håja Light(column) (70 39 3N 23 27 8E).

(Directions continue for Melkøya LNG Terminalat 11.83e)

Thence the track leads ESE for 3 miles, passing(with positions relative to Fugleneset Light (70 40 N23 40 E)):

SSW of the Melkøya LNG Terminal (1½ miles NW),thence:

NNE of a patch containing 6 dangerous wrecks(6½ cables SSW), and Molvikbåen, 3½ cablesfarther SW, marked by a lit iron perch, thence:

SSW of Fugleneset Light (11.39), thence:NNE of a rocky patch (5 cables SSW), with a leastdepth of 4 5 m over it.

Into the harbour.

Directions for entry from south-west11.69a

228R 50-51 Replace by:...Mylingen Light (70 45 N 23 42 E) (11.69) showsover mainly clear water off the NW...R61 Insert:

Melkøya LNG Terminal

General information11.83aPosition. Melkøya LNG Terminal occupies the

whole of the island of Melkøya (70 41 3N 23 35 9E),2 miles NW of Hammerfest (11.59).Function. The terminal receives LNG via a 165 km

pipeline from the 3 gas fields (Snohvit, Albatross andAskeladd) of the Barents Sea. It is then processed toremove its CO2 content and exported by sea.Operating Authority. Statoil ASA.

Limiting conditions11.83bUnder-keel clearance. The minimum permissable

under keel clearance is 1 5 m.Deepest and longest berth. Product Jetty (11.83f).Maximum size of vessel handled:

LNG. 300 m in length/160 000 m# capacity.LPG. 180 m in length/38 000 m# capacity.Condensate. 180 m in length/50 000 dwt.

Arrival information11.83cPort operations:

Melkøya LNG Terminal operates on a 24 hr basis.Maximum berthing speeds are under ½ kn forvessels over 8000 displacement tonnes, andunder ¾ kn for vessels less than 8000 tonnes.The maximum approach angle is 6 .

Wind speeds and wave heights restrict berthing asfollows:

Vessel size(up to, m#)

Max wind speed(kn)

Max waveheight (m)

15 000 35 1 0

30 000 31 1 0

60 000 29 1 5

160 000 24 no restriction

Vesselswill not be allowed to approach the terminal ifthe visibility is less than 1 mile.

Vessels will not be permitted to sail if the wind is inexcess of 29 kn.

One tug will remain on standby throughout forvessels when loading.

Notice of ETA required. For all vessels, ETA is tobe reported 96 hrs, 48 hrs, 24 hrs and 5 hrs inadvance of arrival. Additionally, for LNG carriers, areport is required 8 days in advance. For details seeAdmiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).Pilotage is compulsory. For vessels over 20 000 gt,

the pilot will board by helicopter in position 71 05 N22 57 E, 20 miles W of Fruholmen Light (71 06 N24 00 E) (10.101). For vessels less than 20 000 gt, thepilot will board by boat in position 70 47 N 23 32 E,1½ miles NE of the entrance to Akkarfjorden (11.90).Pilots should be ordered 24 hours in advance.Changes to ETA/ETD should be reported directly tothe pilot booking centre. For further details seeAdmiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).Tugs. There are 3 tugs available at Melkøya,

based at Rypefjorden, 1½ miles S of Hammerfest.Two are of 70 tonnes bollard pull and are used forberthing and unberthing. The third, of 90 tonnesbollard pull/150 tonnes steering force, is used for bothescorting and berthing.Traffic regulations. A Safety Zone has been

estasblished around Melkøya inside a line joining thefollowing positions:

70 41 93N 23 37 38E.70 41 87N 23 35 83E.70 40 89N 23 34 35E.70 40 62N 23 35 39E.70 40 85N 23 38 19E.

There is no public access to the area within theSafety Zone.Regulations concerning entry and departure.

The minimum tug requirement for berthing/unberthingis as follows:

Vessel size (up to, m#)(ballast and loaded)

No of tugs

15 000 1

30 000 2

60 000 3

160 000 3

Note. All LNG and LPG vessels over 30 000 m# willtake 3 tugs on arrival and departure.Use of an escorting tug is mandatory for vessels

over 500 gt carrying dangerous cargo in bulk, and forvessels over 3000 gt carrying polluting cargo in bulkwhen approaching or departing from Melkøya.

NP58B

2 - 139

Harbour11.83dThe berthing area is on the SE side of the island.

Directions for entering harbour(continued from 11.69)11.83eEntrance. From a position 1¼ miles NE of Håja

Light (70 39 3N 23 27 8E) (11.69), the track leadsENE for 2 miles to the vicinity of the berths.

Berths11.83fProduct Jetty. Concrete, 125 m in length, with a

least depth alongside of 16 2 m, faced with 7Sumitomo rubber fenders, each 8 m by 4 m. The jettyis orientated 228 /048 .Construction Jetty. At the S end of the island,

with a safe berthing depth of 10 m, for the handling ofdry cargo. Vessels over 120 m LOA will not beallowed to remain alongside the Construction Jettywhile LNG is being loaded at Product Jetty.

Port services11.83gFacilities. Garbage disposal.Supplies. Fresh water.

229R 14-25 including Supplement amendment Delete

Statoil ASA; Norwegian Notice 16/980/07; BA Chart 2315;Norwegian Charts 101, 493(SDDs 2007000 062402; 2008000 048828) [29/08]

Trollsundet – south-east of Ingøya — Depths

212

L 20 Replace by:

N of a shoal (1 8 miles ESE), with a depthof 2 5 m (8 ft) over it, thence:

N of a shoal (2 3 miles ESE), with a depthof 4 4 m (14½ ft) over it, and:

S of a pair of 6 m (19 ft) patches (2 1 milesE), thence:

Clear of a patch (2 2 miles ESE), with adepth of 6 2 m (20 ft) over it, thence:

S of a shoal (2 3 miles E), with a depth of4 5 m (14¾ ft) over it, thence:

Clear of a patch (2 6 miles ESE), with adepth of 8 4 m (27½ ft) over it.

Norwegian Notices 11/653/06 and 16/914/06(SEP 000380655) [40/06]

North-east of Ingøya — Depths

214

L 32 Replace by:

W of Litlegrunnen (5 cables N); a rock,with a depth of 9 0 m over it, lies 2 cablesW of Litlegrunnen on the E edge of thewhite sector.

L 41 Replace by:

341 -348astern

W of Stein; a rock,with a depth of 5 3 mover it, lies 3½ cables WNW of Stein onthe W edge of the white sector. Thence:

E of a rock (9½ cables S), with a depth of5 4 m over it, lying 2 cables E ofLikholmgrunnan, thence:

R 10 Add: A rock, with a depth of 7 0 m over it, and a rock,with adepth of 5 0 mover it, lie, respectively, 2½ cablesSEand 2 cables SW of the SW point of Store Gasøy.


Gjesvær – Entrance channel and anchorage —Submarine cable

218R6 After ...close SW. Insert: A submarine cable has beenlaid through the harbour entrance channel, coming ashoreat Springneset (71 06 1N 25 22 8E), on the N side of theanchorage (10.176).

R69 After ...holding ground Insert: , taking care to remainclear of the submarine cable on the N side of the basin(10.170).


North-west side of Magerøya –Gjesvær — Depths

219L 6 Add:Caution. There is a least depth of 0 9 m in the approach tothe anchorages in Leirpollen and Vasslia.


Sørøysundet – Approaches to Hammerfest —Obstruction

228

After L 69 Insert:NE of an obstruction (70 39 6N 23 34 3E)

(1 6 miles WSW), thence:


NP58B

2 - 140

Myrfjorden — Anchorage removed

231R 47-51 Replace by:

Spare11.116


Havøysundet — Havøysund Light deleted

232L 51-55 Including existing Supplement correctionReplace by:Useful mark:

Light (70 59 6N 24 40 8E) exhibited from the headof a former ferry jetty.


South side of Magerøya – Kobbholet — Bridge

237L 54Add:Abridge, with a vertical clearance of 10 m, spansthe entrance to Kobbholet.

Norwegian Chart 103 (07/05)(SDD 2006000 376425) [36/06]

Kvaløya – Forsøl – Sandbukta — Anchorages

259

L 39-43 Delete


Revsbotn – Litlefjorden – Rottnes —Leading lights

260R 32 For 124 5 Read 126


North side of Magerøya – Lille Skarsvåg —Depth

265L 18 Add: There is a least depth of 6 0 m in this channel1½ cables SW of the NE entrance point of Lille Skarsvåg.


Kamøyfjorden – South-west and west ofStora Kamøy — Light sectors and depths

265R 18 Including existing supplement amendment For225 -234 and 291 -304 Read 223½ -234 and289 -302

R 22 Add: A patch, with a depth of 3 3 m over it, lies in theSE approach, within the white sector (289 -302 ) ofKamøyfjord Light, 5 cables from the light.


Kamøyfjorden – Kamøyvær eastwards —Anchorage; submarine cable

265R33 After mooring rings Insert: , noting the presence of asubmarine power cable which is laid 1 cable off, andparallel to, the SW shore.


The head of Porsangen – Kolvik — Anchorage

273R22-36 Replace by:

Spare13.121


North-east side of Laksefjorden – Kifjorden andEidsfjorden — Anchorages

275R55-57 Delete

276L16-18 Delete


Northern part of Tanafjorden – Finnkongkeila —Anchorage

285L21-28 Replace by:

Description. Finnkongkeila, a narrow and deepbay, is entered by passing S of YtreFinnkongkeilnæringen Light (70 54 N, 28 30 E). Thebay does not afford anchorage as a submarine cableis laid within it.Considerable seas are raised in the inlet by E

winds.


Northern part of Tanafjorden – Hopsfjorden –Hopseidet — Anchorage

286R21-25 Delete


NP58B

2 - 141

Båtsfjorden – Båtsfjord -— Anchorage

293R 51-53 Delete


Makkaur to Vardø – Hamningberg — Anchorage


Spare14.78


Varangerfjorden – Vadsøya — Light

302L43 For 27 44 E Read 29 44 E

Kystverket Troms og Finnmark(SDD 2009000 073131) [31/09]

Kirkenes – Small craft anchorages


Spare14.269


NP59 Nova Scotia and Bay of Fundy Pilot(2008 Edition)

Canada – Sable Island — Directions; light

58

Paragraph 2.19 1 line 3 For East End Light Read East EndLight tower

59


Spare2.24

Canadian Eastern Notice 607/06/12(SDD 2012000 128379) [29/12]

Larrys River — Light


...and covers at HW, and by Ram Island. The smallsettlement of Larrys...


Isaacs Harbour — Directions; light


1 From a position abeam Country Harbour Head, thetrack leads NNW to the harbour entrance passing,(positioned from Bear Trap Head (45 10 N 61 40 W)):



Sambro Harbour —Directions to Anchorage Area; buoyage

93


2 WSW of Pennel Shoal (8 cables S), the most Sdanger on the bank surrounding SambroIsland. HS2 Light Buoy (starboard hand) ismoored 2 cables SSW. Thence:

WSW of Shag Rock (4 cables SW), marked2¾ cables SSW by HS2/2 Light Buoy (starboardhand), thence:

94


3 WSW of rocky patches (6 cables WSW) and(9 cables WNW), marked respectively by HS4and HS4/2 Light Buoys (starboard hand).Thence:


4 ENE of Fairweather Rock (1¾ miles WNW) anda bank extending 1½ cables SSE from therock. HSE Light Buoy (E cardinal) is moored2 cables SE of Fairweather Rock. And:


Saint John Harbour and approaches –Limiting conditions — Deepest and

longest berths


1 Tankers. Canaport Deep Water Oil Terminal (8.62);Canaport LNG facility (8.62a).

Canadian Eastern Notice 06/09(SDD 2009000 047015) [44/09]

NP59

2 - 142

Saint John Harbour and approaches –Arrival information — Anchorages

174


1 Designated anchorage areas A, B and D areestablished within the port limits in the approach tothe harbour, as shown on the chart.

Anchorage A, in the SW approaches, centred on45 12 5N 66 04 7W.

Anchorage B, adjoining the S boundary of A, centredon 45 10 0N 66 07 0W. An obstruction has beenreported (1997) in approximate position45 10 5N 66 05 6W.

Anchorage D, centred on 45 09 1N 66 01 7W.2 Pilotage is compulsory in Anchorage A, and in the

N parts of Anchorages B and D.Ships at anchor should remain in a state of

readiness to proceed or manoeuvre at short noticeand maintain continuous listening watch on VHFRadio.Caution. Herring purse seine fishing is carried out

in area A between 1st November and 1st of Aprilannually; care is necessary to avoid fouling nets.


Saint John Harbour and approaches –Arrival information — Pilots and tugs

174


...chart. A pilot boarding position for tankers andLNG carriers is located on a line bearing 295 fromposition 45 08 80N 66 03 65W to position 45 09 50N66 05 80W. The pilot vessel (black hull with whiteband and...

Atlantic Pilotage Authority(SDD 2009000 000375) [44/09]

Saint John Harbour and approaches –Harbour — Canaport LNG facility

174


Canaport LNG jetty is located 6 cables NNE ofCanaport Deep Water Oil Terminal SBM. For detailssee 8.62a.

177


...conspicuous white oil and LNG storage tanks is...


Saint John Harbour and approaches –Berths — Canaport LNG facility

180

After Paragraph 8.62 Add:

Canaport LNG facility8.62a

1 Canaport LNG facility is located at the end of atrestle which extends 300 m from the shore 2 cablesENE of Mispec Point. The facility consists of anunloading platform with four mooring dolphins on eachside. Three conspicuous LNG tanks have beenconstructed to the NE of the unloading platform. Aflare tower is situated adjacent to the E most tank,close to the shoreline.

2 The unloading platform and dolphins, linked bycatwalks, is 425 m in length overall. The unloadingplatform itself has a length of 65 m, with a depthalongside of 29 m. The mooring dolphins adjacent tothe platform are in line with it, giving an effective berthlength of 115 m. Lights (round masts 7 5 m in height)are exhibited from these and the outermost dolphins.Lesser depths of between 23 8 and 25 6 m arereported to be in the vicinity of the mooring dolphins.

3 Sector lights have been established on MispecPoint, Connoly Head and in the vicinity of CapeSpencer for the sole purpose of aiding pilotage to andfrom the facility. They are operated when needed forberthing and unberthing.Adverse weather may cause vessels to be required

to leave the berth and go to anchor.


Cape Spencer to Martin Head —Directions; buoy

229

Paragraph 9.77 4 line 4 For Q Read KW


NP60 Pacific Islands Pilot Volume 1(2007 Edition)

Solomon Islands – Manning Strait – MalagharaIsland Shoal — Directions;

light beacon

125


6 Useful mark:Malaghara IslandShoal Light Beacon (white column,10 m in height) (7 20 8S 158 01 2E).

EU MIP Project, Solomon Islands(SDD 2010000 000144) [04/10]

NP60

2 - 143

Solomon Islands – New Georgia Island –Hathorn Sound — Lights

158


The track then continues SW to a position 2 milesNNW of Tunguivili Point (21 miles SW), from where alight (white column, 11 m in height) (8 11 4S157 12 9E) (see Chart 1735) is exhibited, on thealignment (190 ) of the leading lights for HathornSound (4.92).

159


Front light (white column, 9 m in height) (8 15 3S157 11 4E).

Rear light (similar structure, 11 m in height) (200 mfrom front light).

Nawae Construction Ltd(SDD 2010000 000144) [12/10]

Papua New Guinea – Bonvouloir Islands –East Island — Charts; position

209Paragraph 5.162 Chart heading For Aus Charts 382, 381Read Aus Charts 509, 510, 512Paragraph 5.165 2 lines 1-2 Delete reported To position

Australian Chart 512(SDD 2009000 031590) [50/10]

Papua New Guinea – Louisade Archipelago –Deboyne Lagoon — Directions


211 - 212


2 From a position 10 51 00S 152 31 00E the trackleads NW passing:

Clear of a patch (10 50 86S 152 30 55E) lying inthe middle of the channel, with a depth of 9 6 m(31½ ft).

212


...is easily navigable with care.


..the NW extremity of Rara Island.


North-east side passage is 2 cables wide, passingN of Passage Island (10 47 55S 152 29 28E), 12 m(40 ft) high; the edges of the reefs on either side areirregular and the tidal streams strong.


...Nibub Islet 9 m (30 ft) high.

Paragraph 5.181 6 line 7 For 6 4 m (21 ft) Read 2 7 m(8¾ ft)

Australian Notice 1229/23/10; Aus Chart 512(SDD 2010000 195485) [51/10]

Republic of Palau – Tobi Island —Charts; position

440

Paragraph 11.206 1 line 1 For (3 00 N 131 11E) Read(3 00 13N 131 07 02E)

Paragraph 11.207 Chart heading For Chart 977 Plan ofTobi or Kodgubi Island Read Chart 763

Paragraph 11.207 lines 1-4 Replace by:

1 Description. Tobi Island (3 00 13N 131 07 02E), iscovered with coconut palms and is fringed by...

BA Chart 763 [51/10]

Papua New Guinea – Nuakata Passage —Directions; depth

235Paragraph 5.330 2 line 8 For 5 5 m (18 ft) Read 4 7 m(14½ ft)

Australian Chart 628(SDD2010000 199568) [50/10]

Papua New Guinea – North Coast –Manam Island — Directions; rock

324

AfterParagraph 8.147 1 line 5 Including existing Section IVNotice Week 06/09 Delete:

SW of a rock (4 07 7S 145 16 2E) which coversand uncovers, thence:

Australian Notice 9/539/09(HH. 532/535/02) [03/11]

Papua New Guinea – North-East coast –Lapar Point to Cape Concordia —

Directions; light

334


2 Major light:Oinake Light (white structure) (2 36 4S141 00 1E).

Indonesian Notice 19/187/2010(SDDs 2010000 100663; 106523) [29/10]

NP60

2 - 144

Bismarck Archipelago – New Britain – Kimbe –Kulungi Roadstead — Wreck


...the roadstead. A wreck, depth 20 m, lies about1 mile N of Kimbe Wharf (5 32 9S 150 09 2E).

Australian Notice 1/46/2009(HH. 532/525/04) [06/09]

Papua New Guinea – Bismark Archipelago –New Britain – Vitu Islands —

Charts; position

354Paragraph 9.119 Chart heading For Aus Charts 395, 386,387 Read Aus Charts 386, 387, 678

355Paragraph 9.122 1 lines 3-4 Delete reported To position

Australian chart 678(SDD 2010000 175837) [45/10]

Papua New Guinea – Bismark Archipelago –Islands — Positions

358

Paragraph 9.136 Chart heading For Aus Charts 395, 386Read Aus Chart 386


1 Narage Island (4 32 73S 149 06 69E) is aconical-shaped island surrounded by a reef. The..

359

Paragraph 9.148 Chart heading For Aus Chart 576(see 1.24) Read Aus Chart 391


1 Purdy Islands (2 53 00S 146 20 00E) consisting ofBat, Rat, Mouse and Mole Islands and Lalent Reefare not permanently inhabited but are occasionallyvisited. Bat Islands the W-most, consist of two flatislands and an islet, covered with coconut palms andencircled by reef.

368

Paragraph 9.210 Chart heading For Aus Chart 462 ReadAus Chart 392


1 Description. Tingwon Group (2 37 00S149 40 00E) consists of Tingwon, Kolenusa andBeligila, three wooded islands extending in a NE/SWdirection.

393

Paragraph 10.50 Chart heading For Aus Charts 461, 462Read Aus Chart 392, 393, 462, 4622


NNE of Tench (Enus) Island (1 38 85S150 40 43E), the E-most of the Saint Matthiasgroup. Tench Island is wooded on its W side, withreefs extending about 1½ cables from its coastsexcept at one place on the SW side where landingmay be effected near the village of Tench.Thence:

Paragraph 10.54 Chart heading For Aus Chart 462 ReadAus Chart 392


1 Description. Emirau Island (1 39 60S 149 57 40E)is undulating and densely wooded; from NW itappears saddle-shaped towards its N end andflattened towards the S end. There are severaldisused air strips, one of which is maintained fordomestic use, on the N side of the island, and acoconut plantation on the SW end.


1 Description. Mussau Island (1 25 00S149 37 00E) is the largest of Saint Matthias Groupand lies within an unsurveyed area. From W itappears wedge-shaped, the steepest side of thewedge being to the S.

Australian charts 386, 391 and 392(HH. 060/200/01) [44/10]

Papua New Guinea – Bismark Archipelago –Sae Islands – Kaniet Islands and Manu Island —

Charts; position

368


Chart 4622, Aus Charts 390, 462

369


SSW of Sae Islands (0 45 46S 145 18 25E),reported, in 1992, to lie 1 8 miles NE of theircharted position, as shown on chart Aus 462, butshown in the correct position on chart Aus 390, ...


Aus Charts 390, 462

Paragraph 9.219 1 lines 1-2 Replace by:1 Kaniet Islands (0 53 57S 145 32 41E), reported, in

1999, to lie 3 miles NE of their charted position, asshown on chart Aus 462, but shown in the correctposition on chart Aus 390, consist of five low, flat...

370


Aus Charts 390, 462

NP60

2 - 145

371


1 Manu Island (1 18 80S 143 34 80E), reported, in1985, to lie 1½ miles NW of its charted position, asshown on chart Aus 462, but shown in the correctposition on chart Aus 390, is wooded and fringed by areef.

Charts Aus 390, 462 [02/11]

Federated States of Micronesia –Caroline Islands – Pingelap and Mokil Atolls —

Positions; reference charts

418

Paragraph 11.32 1 line 4 For (6 40 N 159 47 E) Read(6 41 00N 159 45 00E).

Paragraph 11.33 Delete:

Charts 761, 978 Plan of Pingelap Atoll

Paragraph 11.36 Delete:

Charts 761, 978 Plan of Mokil Atoll

Paragraph 11.36 1 line 1 For (6 40 N 159 47 E) Read(6 41 00N 159 45 00E).

Admiralty Notice 07/646/12(HH. 060/200/01) [09/12]

Micronesia – Caroline Islands –Senyavin Islands – Pohnpei Island —

Marine farms

419After Paragraph 11.40 Insert:

Marine Farms11.40aMarine farms around the island are marked by

buoys. Their positions are as follows:Payao No 1, 6 52 1N 158 03 9EPayao No 2, 7 07 4N 158 18 2EPayao No 3, 7 04 4N 158 02 8EPayao No 4, 6 56 4N 158 27 6EPayao No 5, 6 45 4N 158 26 0EPayao No 6, 6 40 0N 158 13 1EPayao No 7, 6 39 9N 158 03 2E

420


Marine Farms. See 11.40a.

US Chart 81435(SDD 2009000 002211) [31/09]

Micronesia – Caroline Islands –Nukuoro Atoll, Ngatik Atoll, Wat Island and

Satawal Island — Charts; positions

424


Chart 762


...(5 47 45N 157 09 70E) being the largest islandsituated at the W end. The islands are inhabited.


...(5 47 40N 157 20 50E), and Ngatik Island 10¾ milesW and...

Paragraph 11.77 Chart heading Delete 909 plan ofNukuoro Islands


1 Description. Nukuoro Atoll (3 51 00N 154 56 35E),consists of more than 40 islands situated for the...

432


Chart 762


1 Description. Satawal Island (7 23 20N147 00 75E), is a...

(Admiralty Notices 49/10 Withdrawn Charts andBA Chart 762) [01/11]

Republic of Palau – Tobi Island —Charts; position

440

Paragraph 11.206 1 line 1 For (3 00 N 131 11E) Read(3 00 13N 131 07 02E)

Paragraph 11.207 Chart heading For Chart 977 Plan ofTobi or Kodgubi Island Read Chart 763


1 Description. Tobi Island (3 00 13N 131 07 02E), iscovered with coconut palms and is fringed by...

BA Chart 763 [51/10]


Nouvelle-Calédonie – Passe du Duroc —Directions; light beacons

104

Paragraph 3.85 Charts Add:

French Chart 6554

Paragraph 3.86 1 line 2 For Pointe Giboudot Read Pointede Gatope


NW of a light beacon (starboard hand) (20 59 85S164 36 88E) marking the N point of Grand Reciféde Koné, thence:


NWof LeGrand Ronfleur (20 59 54S 164 37 45E),marked by a light beacon (starboard hand),thence:

NP61

2 - 146


4 The track then continues to anchorages in BaieChasseloup (3.115) or to the entrance channel toAnse Vavouto (3.114).

(Directions continue for the inshore passage NWat 3.110, Anse de Vavouto at 3.114 and for

Bai Chasseloup at 3.115)

French Chart 6554-12(SDD 2012000 210085) [46/12]

Nouvelle-Calédonie – Anse Vavouto –Baie Chasseloup — Directions; anchorages; port

108


French Chart 6554

Anse Vavouto3.114

1 General information. Anse Vavouto (21 00 00S164 39 81E) is a port development serving localnickel mines, lying SE of Baie Chasseloup (3.115).

2 Directions. (continued from 3.86). From a position1½ miles WSW of Île Gatope (20 58 48S164 38 64E) the track leads N to the entrancechannel to Anse Vavouto. The channel entrance ismarked by a light beacon (N cardinal) (20 58 58S164 37 72E), a light beacon (S cardinal) lies1 3 cables NE.

3 Leading Lights. The alignment (127 5 ) of thefollowing lights leads to the port area.

Front light (white upward pointing triangle on pylon)(21 00 14S 164 40 00E).

Middle light (red rectangle on red and white pylon)(260 m from front).

Rear light (white downward pointing triangle onpylon) (0 69 miles from front).

4 The dredged channel leads SE for 2 6 miles and ismarked by light beacons (lateral), passing:

Between an extensive area of reefs and dangerousrocks lying on either side of the channel, SW of ÎleGatope. Thence:

5 SW of Pointe Vincent (20 59 32S 164 39 37E),thence:

NE of an extensive area of drying reef (21 00 20S164 39 50E).

The channel then leads to a basin area. A jetty lieson the SW side of Pointe de Vavouto.

6 Anchorage may be obtained in the followingpositions:

V3 (Barge anchorage) - 20 59 58S 164 39 64E in4 m.

V4 - 20 59 48S 164 38 60E in 11-14 m.


Baie Chasseloup3.115

1 General information. Baie Chasseloup (20 57 43S164 39 40E), NW of Presqu’île de Gatope, isprotected from S by Grand Récif de Koné and from Wby Grand Récif de Gatope and Plateaux desMassacres. It is well protected from winds from anydirection.

2 Directions (continued from 3.86). From a position1½ miles WSW of Île Gatope (20 58 48S164 38 64E), the track leads N towards theanchorages, passing:

W of a light beacon (N cardinal) (20 58 58S164 37 72E) marking the NW entrance to thebuoyed channel to Anse Vavouto (3.114), thence:

W of Pointe de Gatope (20 58 10S 164 38 87E)(3.86).

The track then continues to the anchorages.3 Useful mark:

Monument (white pyramid) (20 57 98S164 39 37E) stands on a hillock on the S side ofthe bay.

4 Anchorage may be obtained in the bay in thefollowing positions:

V1 - 20 57 40S 164 39 00E in 4-6 m.V2 - 20 57 48S 164 37 59E in 13-18 m.V5 - 20 58 29S 164 37 03E in 12-39 m.

The beach SE of the monument may be used as alanding place.

5 Facilities. Medical centre at Voh, an agriculturaland mining centre 4 km ENE.

French Chart 6554-12(SDD 2012000 210085) [46/12]

Vanuatu - Anatom - Anelghowhat Bay —Beacons; leading lines

177


Front beacon (white triangular topmark, point up)(20 14 46S 169 46 93E).

Rear beacon (similar construction) (30 m from frontbeacon).


Spare6.42


..., on the alignment (060 ) with the front beacon(6.42) 4 cables distant

New Zealand Hydrographic Office(SDD 2012000 106271) [30/12]

Vanuatu – Port-Vila — Vertical clearances

184

Paragraph 6.94 1 lines 6-8 Including existing Section IVNotice Week 42/12 Replace by:

An overhead power cable with a vertical clearance of19 m, spans the entrance to Paray Bay (6.95), asshown on the plan.

SHOM(SDD 2012000 226968) [51/12]

NP61

2 - 147

Fiji Islands – Suva — Wrecks

269



Two wrecks, with depths of 2 8 m and 6 3 m, lieclose N and NW of a mooring buoy in position18 08 48S 178 24 79E.

Fiji Hydrographic Office(SDD 2012000 207975) [47/12]

Îles Wallis - Approaches to Halalo and Mata Utu— Directions; buoyage; depths;

place name changes

367

Paragraph 11.46 1 line 7 For Nukuaeta Read Nukuatea

369

Paragraph 11.49 1 line 4 For Île Fenua Fou Read ÎleFenuafo’ou

Paragraph 11.51 1 line 4 For Nukuaeta Read Nukuatea


The alignment (032 3 ) of these lights leads throughPasse Honikulu, in a least depth of 12 2 m,passing:


2 ESE of beacons (port hand) (13 23 34S176 13 07W and 13 23 20S 176 12 99W)marking the reef on the NW side, and:

WNW of beacons (starboard hand) (13 23 36S176 12 94W and 13 23 20S 176 12 86W)marking the reef on the SE side, and on W end ofwhich lies Île Fenuafo’ou.

3 This alignment leads very close to the beacon NWof Île Fenuafo’ou and, when passing through thenarrows, an adjustment of course may be needed tokeep in mid-channel.

Paragraph 11.52 1 lines 6-7 Delete:

...The recommended track is shown on the chart.


1 Leading beaconsFront light beacon (starboard hand, 4 m in height)(13 22 08S 176 10 70W).

Rear beacon (red and yellow, can topmark,non-IALA) (7¾ cables from front light beacon).

The alignment (064 8 ) of these beacons leads fromthe inner end of Passe Honikulu, across Baie de Mua,to Passe Faïoa, passing:

2 SSE of Pointe Ha’ofa (13 22 81S 176 12 66W),the SE extremity of Nukuatea (11.46), thence:

NNW of a drying reef (13 23 02S 176 12 49W),thence:

SSE of a 2 5 m patch (13 22 80S 176 12 54W)which can be distinguished by the green colour ofthe water, thence:

3 SSE of a 3 9 m patch (13 22 63S 176 12 31W),thence:

NNW of a drying reef (13 22 74S 176 12 03W).Mariners may wish to consider giving a bias to theN of the track into safer water until this reef ispassed.

SSE of Nuku Ta’aki Moa (13 22 17S 176 11 93W),which has the appearance of a boat under sail.

NNW of a 4 2 m shoal (13 22 63S 176 10 82W). Adangerous rock lies close N.


1 The track then leads NE through Passe Faïoa,passing:

SE of a light beacon (port hand) (13 22 07S176 10 90W) marking the edge of the reef on theNW side of the channel, and:

NW of a light beacon (starboard hand) (13 22 08S176 10 70W) marking the edge of the reefextending W from Pointe Faka’afu at the N end ofÎle Faïoa (11.53).

2 From a position close SE of a light beacon (porthand) (13 21 75S 176 10 52W), the track continuesNE, passing:

NW a light beacon (starboard hand) (13 21 26S176 09 88W) marking the inner edge of thebarrier reef on theSE side of the channel. Thence:

3 SE of a light beacon (E cardinal) (13 20 76S176 09 70W) marking a drying reef.

NW of a beacon (starboard hand) (13 20 91S176 09 47W) marking the inner edge of thebarrier reef on the SE side of the channel.

370


1 From a position about 1¼ miles E of PointeMatalaa (13 20 50S 176 10 53W), the line of bearing(340 5 ) of Mata Utu Cathedral, leads towardsMouillage de Mata Utu, passing:

ENE of a light beacon (port hand) (13 19 96S176 09 75W), thence:

2 Between a light beacon (port hand) (13 18 95S176 09 75W) and a Light Beacon (starboardhand) (13 18 80S 176 09 64W).

Useful mark:White monument standing on the coast, 2 cablesSSW of Pointe Tepako (13 16 02S176 09 76W).


1 Anchorage may be obtained in Baie de Mua(13 22 70S 176 11 44W) in 40 m, sand and coral,with Nuku Ta’aki Moa (11.53) bearing 342 . Howeverthis anchorage is inconveniently far from the shore.


Spare11.57

NP61

2 - 148


2 Directions. The channel from Passe Honikulu toHalalo leads through Canal du Nord Ouest(13 23 00S 176 13 00W) rounding Pointe Pa’agogo,the SW extremity of Nukuatea. The reefs on eachside of the passage are marked by beacons, aresteep-to and easily seen. From the N end of Canal duNord-Ouest, the track leads NW for 2 miles, passing:

SW of Pointe Puko (13 22 27S 176 13 22W),thence:

NE of a 4 9 m patch (13 22 47S 176 13 64W),thence:

NE of a reef (13 22 21S 176 13 84W), which driesat 0 3 m, thence:

SW of Nukutapu (13 21 82S 176 13 47W), thence:SW of a beacon (starboard hand) (13 21 76S176 13 73W) which marks a 0 6 m drying reef.

NE of a 4 2 m patch (13 21 82S 176 14 16W).SW of a beacon (starboard hand) (13 21 00S176 14 00W).

The track then continues NW until the alignment ofthe leading marks is reached.

Paragraph 11.60 3 line 2 For (018 ) Read (018 1 )

Paragraph 11.60 4 line 1 For (103¼ ) Read (103 3 )

Paragraph 11.60 5 line 3 For statue Read church


French Chart 6876-12(SDD 2012000 098561) [35/12]


Pitcairn Islands – National limits

17

Paragraph 1.120 1 line 1 For 12 mile Read 3 mile.

NP247(1) Annual Notice 12/10(HH. 062/200/01) [33/10]

Îles Gambier – Port de Rikitea — Directions

122


4 The track then alters NW into the inner bay area ofPort de Rikitea passing:

Between the beacons (port and starboard hand)(23 07 14S 134 57 78W), thence:

SW of the beacon (starboard hand) standing on adetached reef (23 074 4S 134 57 80W), thence:

NW of a beacon (port hand) (23 07 09S134 57 95W), thence;

SW of the beacon (S cardinal) standing on anunnamed detached reef (23 06 93S134 57 88W).

French Chart 6418 [03/12]

Tahiti – Passe de Taapuna — Directions

163-164


2 Passe de Taapuna to Lagon de Punaauia. Froma position W of Passe de Taapuna (17 36 10S149 37 60W) the track leads E, through the entrance,following a buoyed channel, passing:

164


3 Close N of patches, depths 4 6 m (17 36 14S149 37 38W) and 1 6 m (17 36 12S149 37 24W), over which a moderate swellmay cause even boats to ground.

The track then leads NE to a position SE of a lightbeacon (E cardinal) (17 35 80S 149 36 85W) whichmarks the E extremity of Récif Tepuahono at theentrance to Lagon de Punaauia.


1 Lagon de Punaauia to Chenal de Faaa. Marinersusing this channel must be aware of the possibility ofconfusing the lighted beacons and buoys with those ofthe adjacent airport and navigate with caution.

2 From a position at the entrance to Lagon dePunaauia, the track leads NNW following the buoyedchannel, passing:

ENE of the inner edge of Récif Tepuahono, markedby a light beacon (17 35 71S 149 36 85W),thence:

SSW of a light beacon (17 35 29S 149 37 00W),marking a detached reef.

Thence the track leads generally N for 1 miles to aposition 2 cables W of Toa Mao (17 34 00S149 37 30W), a reef island which divides the channelinto two. The use of the E channel is prohibited(6.92).

3 Useful mark:Tower (17 34 15S 149 37 66W). Charted as anaero light beacon on chart 1382.

French NM 09/25-P-03; ENC FR674601(SDD 2009000 049391) [20/12]

Polynésie Française – Moorea –Baie de Cook — Charts; directions;

leading lights

184


Chart 1436 Baie de Cook and Baie d’Opunohu(Undetermined), ENC FR566570 (See 1.22)


Front light (white pylon, 8 m in height) (17 29 36S149 49 06W).

Rear light (similar construction, 10 m in height)(190 m from front light).


3 From a position about 3 miles NNW of PasseAvaroa, the alignment (149 7 ) of these lights whichare synchronised, leads SSE through the pass,passing:

NP62

2 - 149

Between the light buoys (lateral) (17 28 58S149 49 49W and 17 28 63S 149 49 57W)which mark the entrance, thence:

4 WSW of No 4 Light Buoy (17 28 65S149 49 46W) which marks the NW edge of a2 6 m shoal, lying close to the reef on the Eside of the pass, thence:

5 ENE of No 3 Light Buoy (17 28 94S149 49 40W) marking the inner end of thepass on the W side; two beacons standingclose W mark the edges of the reef awash,and Toatane, a group of remarkable lookingstones lie on the barrier reef 2¼ cablesWNW. Thence:

WSW of a beacon (port hand) (17 28 89S149 49 10W) marking the inner end of the passon the E side and the N side of the entrance to aboat passage (6.246).

French Notice 7/52/11 and French Notice 6/KB2008/11(SDD 2011000 033391, SDD 2011000 031533) [13/11]

Republic of Kiribati — Southern Line Group —Vostock Island — Charts; position

238Paragraph 9.16 Chart heading Add:4653, 4654After Paragraph 9.16 1 Insert:

Caution. Vostock Island was reported (1985) to lie4¾ miles ENE from its charted position.

BA Chart 979 [50/10]

NP63 Persian Gulf Pilot (2010 Edition)

Navigational dangers and hazards — Terrorism

2


Terrorism1.10a

1 In a Maritime Advisory (MARAD) issued by the USMaritime Administration in November 2010,Government and industry sources have confirmed thatthe claim by a terrorist group of an attack on a tankertransiting Strait of Hormuz in July 2010, is valid. Thegroup remains active and can conduct further attackson vessels in areas in the Strait of Hormuz, southernPersian Gulf and western Gulf of Oman.

2 It is recommended that all vessels transiting theabove waters exercise increased vigilance andcaution, particularly during night, with increasedmonitoring of small craft activity.

MARLO, Bahrain(SDD 2010000 195794) [09/11]

United Arab Emirates – Fujairah —Pilotage; prohibited area; directions;

Vopak ENOC Tanker Terminal

87

Paragraph 3.176 1 lines 1-4 Replace by:1 Pilotage is compulsory and is available 24 hours.

The pilot boards in position 25 08 80N 56 24 00E, forall Port of Fujairah Berths, Oil Terminals 1 and 2,VHFL Terminal and SPMs.

After Paragraph 3.177 1 Insert:Prohibited area. An area, marked by light buoys

(special) in which navigation is prohibited, lies centredin approximately 25 13 78N 56 24 36E where worksare in progress (2011) to lay submarine pipelines andthree SPMs.

88


Paragraph 3.183 1 Replace by:1 See 3.177. From the vicinity of 25 08 50N

56 30 00E the track leads 5½ miles W in thedesignated approach channel to the pilot boardingposition, 2½ miles SE of the port entrance. Theharbour is entered between the heads of the N and Sbreakwaters from where lights (lateral) (white bands,4 m high) are exhibited.Paragraph 3.190 section heading Replace by:

VOPAK HORIZON FUJAIRAH LIMITED(VHFL) TERMINAL

Paragraph 3.190 1 line 1 including Title For Vopak ENOCTanker Terminal Read Vopak Horizon Fujairah Limited(VHFL) Terminal

Paragraph 3.193 1 line 1 For Vopak ENOC Read VHFL

89

Paragraph 3.197 1 lines 2-3 For Vopak ENOC TankerRead VHFL





90


Paragraph 3.210 2 line 9 Delete ; see NO TAG

Fujairah Notices to Mariners 145, 147 and 148(SDDs 2011000 104901; 110084;112207; 112220) [31/11]

Western approaches to Khørºn Strait –Directions — Light buoy


...N end, marked by a light buoy (W Cardinal),thence:

Iranian Notice No 5/2010(SDD 2010000 217505) [09/11]

NP63

2 - 150

Iran – Bøshehr to Ra’s-e Barkan–Bahregan Oil Terminal—wreck


2 Dangerous wreck. A dangerous wreck (reported2011), marked by two unlit buoys (non - IALA), liesabout 1 mile SW of Berth No 2 in position 29 42 50N50 09 30E.

Master, MT Grand Sea(SDD 2011000 081944) [21/11]

Dubai and Jebel Ali – Arrival information —Outer anchorages

168


1 The approved anchorages off Dubai are boundedby the following coordinates:

Coordinates Description

A 25 19 00N 55 01 00E25 19 00N 55 05 00E

25 22 00N 55 01 00E25 22 00N 54 05 00E

Port Rashid cargoberth, Dry Dockand short termanchorage.

B 25 22 00N 55 01 00E25 22 00N 54 05 00E

25 25 00N 55 01 00E25 25 00N 55 05 00E

Long termanchorage.

C 25 25 00N 55 01 00E25 25 00N 55 05 00E

25 27 00N 55 01 00E25 27 00N 55 05 00E

Anchorage forvessels awaitingSTS andbunkeringoperations.

D 25 30 00N 54 53 00E25 30 00N 54 58 00E

25 33 00N 54 53 00E25 33 00N 55 58 00E

Anchorage forvessels engagedin STS andbunkeringoperations.

There is no protection from the shamºl in this area whichusually blows from WNW with little warning.

2 Anchorages ‘A’ and off Jebel Ali (7.196) may beused for a maximum period of five days with priorpermission from the respective Harbour Masters. Theuse of anchorages ‘B’, ‘C’ and ‘D’ is subject toauthorization from DMCA (Dubai Maritime CityAuthority).Any vessel anchoring outside these anchorages withinDubai’s EEZwithout authorization fromDMCAwill be liableto prosecution.

174


See 7.130.

Dubai Maritime City Authority(SDD 2011000 201119) [47/11]

Dubai to Abu Dhabi — Directions;Khalifa Port

171


NW of Khalifa Port Fairway Light Buoy (safe water)(24 55 20N 54 35 60E), thence;


KHALIFA PORT

General information

Chart 3752, Khalifa Port and ApproachesPosition7.212a

1 Khalifa Port (MØnº’ KhalØfa) (24 49 00N 54 40 00E)is an island port connected to the coast betweenKhawr GhurabØ (24 48 91N 54 42 50E) and Ra’s–anjørah (24 44 40N 54 38 50E) by a causeway andtrestle bridge. The port lies about 24 miles WSW ofJebel Ali (7.182).

Function7.212b

1 The function of the port is to accommodate trafficbound for MØnº’ Zºyid, when it closes in 2012 as wellas facilitate exports from and imports for KhalifaIndustrial Zone (KIZAD) which is being developedalong the adjacent coast and hinterland.

Topography7.212c

1 See 7.215.

Port limits7.212d

1 The port limits are shown on the chart and includeall the waters up to the anchorage area.

Approach and entry7.212e

1 The Khalifa Port Fairway Light Buoy (safe water)(24 55 20N 54 35 60E) may be approached fromWNW through N to NNE. The port is entered througha buoyed channel.

Port Authority7.212f

1 Abu Dhabi Terminals, PO Box 422, Abu Dhabi,United Arab Emirates.

Internet: www.adpc.ae

Limiting conditions

Controlling depth7.212g

1 The entrance channel, width 250 m, has beendredged to 16 3 m (2010) and the harbour basin to15 8 m (2010). Vessels approaching from the outerpilot boarding station, positioned in the anchoragearea, should note depths shoaler than 15 m existbetween the outer and inner pilot boarding stations.

http://www.adpc.ae

NP63

2 - 151

Tidal levels7.212h

1 Mean spring range about 1 3 m; mean neap rangeabout 0 4 m; see Admiralty Tide Tables Vol 3.

Arrival information

Port radio7.212i

1 Khalifa Port Control Station controls operations forthe port.See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (4).

Notice of ETA required7.212j

1 Vessels requiring a pilot should send ETA andmaximum draught at least 12 hours prior to arrival toKhalifa Port Control Station and a confirmation nolater than 4 hours prior to arrival.See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (4).

Outer anchorage7.212k

1 The anchorage area, centred about 25 01 70N54 37 20E with a minimum depth of 16 1 m, liesadjacent to the N boundary of Khalifa Port Limit.

Submarine cables7.212l

1 Submarine cables are laid N and S of theanchorage area; a submarine cable traverses theapproach channel close NW of the breakwater head.

Pilotage7.212m

1 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of LOA 100 mand above, vessels of LOA 60 m and above carryinghazardous cargo in bulk and passenger vessels ofLOA 24 m and above carrying more than 12passengers.Pilot boards in the following positions:

Outer: 25 02 00N 54 39 00EInner: 24 56 20N 54 35 61E

Pilot boarding arrangements will be confirmed byKhalifa Port Control. See Admiralty List of RadioSignals Volume 6 (4).

Regulations concerning entry7.212n

1 Due to works in progress at Khalifa Port mainberth, entry into Khalifa Port limits and anchorageareas is prohibited except for vessels calling at EMALberth (7.212s) and those vessels used by constructioncompanies subject to the Harbour Master’s approval.

Harbour

General layout7.212o

1 The harbour consists of a large basin, 800 m inwidth, protected by breakwaters. Quayage, 3200 m inlength, fronts the N breakwater, joined on its SW sideto the shore by a causeway. The EMAL (EmiratesAluminium) Jetty, connected to the shore by a trestlebridge, lies on the S breakwater.

Future development7.212p

1 Reclamation works, marked by light buoys (lateral),are in progress (2011) within the harbour, as shownon the chart. Khalifa Port is to develop further offshorein five phases to 2030, to become one of the largestports in the world. The first phase is expected tocomplete by September 2012.

Directions for entering harbour

Other aid to navigation7.212q

1 Racon:Khalifa Port Fairway Light Buoy (24 55 20N

54 35 60E).See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.

Entry7.212r

1 From the outer pilot boarding station (25 02 00N54 39 00E) the track leads SSW for about 6 miles tothe inner pilot boarding station thence S for 1 mile tothe fairway light buoy. From the fairway light buoy thetrack leads SE for 7 miles through a buoyed (lateral)and dredged channel to the harbour.

1 Useful marks:Tower (24 48 19N 54 42 43E)Numerous chimneys (24 46 11N 54 41 30E)

Basin and berth7.212s

1 EMAL berth. Emirates Aluminium (EMAL) has adedicated berth on the S side of the basin forreception of alumina, which is transported by conveyorto the silos adjacent to the smelter. The berth, 800 min length, can accommodate two 60,000 dwt vessels.

Abu Dhabi Ports Company(SDD 2011000 044257) [21/11]

JazØrat Dºs Terminals – Arrival information —Anchorage

183

Paragraph 7.275 1 lines 8-9 Delete:

An optional to the island.

Capt M. Elharidy, PPA, Abu Dhabi(SDD 2011000 044382) [13/11]

Abu Dhabi to Jabal Aþ ¹annah includingoffshore oilfields and terminals –JazØrat Dºs Terminals — Pilotage

183


1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels; vesselsarriving from N using the JazØrat Dºs Deep WaterChannel (7.270) or from S using Zaqqøm ChannelTSS (7.286) are boarded in position 25 10 00N52 56 00E. See Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(4).

Das Harbour Master(SDD 2011000 074230) [21/11]

NP63

2 - 152

Al Shaheen Oil Terminal — FSO’s

207

Paragraph 7.473 1 line 5 For Knock Nevis Read Asia.

Paragraph 7.473 1 line 7 For Astro Canopus ReadMaran Canopus.

Paragraph 7.473 2 lines 1-4 Replace by:2 Port Authority. Maersk Oil Qatar AS, Al Jazi

Tower, Asia Street 950, Zone 60, West Bay, PO Box22050, Doha, Qatar.E-mail: [email protected]

208



Maersk Oil, Qatar(SDD 2010000 204902) [09/11]

Al Rayyan Oil Terminal — FSU

208Paragraph 7.474 1 line 3 For Pacific Jewel Read FalconSpirit.

(SDD 2010000 219380) [09/11]

Qatar – Ra’s Laffºn — Pilotage

209Paragraph 7.493 1 line 7 Replace by:...in position 25 56 00N 51 43 00E for the North Channeland in position 25 54 00N 51 43 00E for the SouthChannel. The...

Harbour Master, Ra’s Laffºn(SDD 2010000 186068) [23/11]

Bahrain – MØnº’ Salmºn — Tidal streams

221


In 2011 HMS Echo reported that continuousdevelopment and reclamation have affected tidalstreams in the entrance to Khawr al Qulay’ah andmade the current predictions inaccurate. Localauthorities should be consulted for the latestinformation.

HMS Echo(SDD 2011000 192210) [44/11]

Approaches to Ra’s Tannørah andRa’s al Ju‘aymah – Hazard — Pipe

225

Paragraph 8.100 heading Replace by: Hazards

Paragraph 8.100 1 line 1 Replace by:1 Crossing traffic. All mariners should be aware that

when using Main...


2 Pipe. A conductor pipe (lit), 15 m in height,stabilized by 8 anchors, stands in the approaches toRa’s Tannørah and Ra’s al Ju‘aymah in position27 16 80N 51 02 95E. Mariners are rquested to giveit a wide berth of at least 1½ miles and avoidanchoring in the vicinity. The pipe is reported (2010)to be radar conspicuous at a range of 5 miles.

After Paragraph 8.107 1 line 8 Insert:Clear of a lit platform (27 15 91N 51 23 07E)

position approximate, reported 2008, and clear ofa pipe (lit) (27 16 80N 51 02 95E). Thence:

MV SP5 Eric.G.Gibson; Iranian Notice No 4/2010(SDD 2010000 199595; 208452) [09/11]

Saudi Arabia – Ad Dammºm—Outer anchorages; depth

232


Caution. In October 2012 an estimated depth of11 85 m was reported in the Inner Holding AnchorageArea 5 cables NW of D15 Light Buoy (26 31 79N50 11 59E).

MV NYK Atlas(SDD 2012000 222913) [48/12]

Saudi Arabia – Jubail to Ra’s as SaffºnØyah —Ra’s al Khair Port

241


Ra’s al Khair Port

Chart 3775 and plan of Ra’s al Khair PortGeneral information8.277a

2 Position and function. Port of Ra’s al Khair(27 33 35N 49 11 73E) serves more than eightyindustrial projects in the region. The principal exportsare refined products and minerals including phosphate,low density bauxite, magnesium and carbonate.Topography. See 8.278.

3 Approach and entry. The port is approached fromE and entered through a 13 mile long buoyed channelwith a navigable width of 175 m.Port authority. Saudi Seaports Authority.Website. www.ports.gov.sa


1 Controlling depth. The approach channel andouter harbour have been dredged to 16 2 m (2010).Deepest and longest berth. Berth No 3 (8.277f).Tidal levels. See Admiralty Tide Tables Volume 3.Maximum size of vessel handled. The port can

handle vessels with a maximum draught of 13 50 m atany time or vessels with a maximum draught of14 25 m during HW.

http://www.ports.gov.sa


NP63

2 - 153


1 Outer anchorage. Four designated berths, eachwith a radius of 1000 m; SA1 (27 42 06N 49 26 58E)with a depth of 25 m is the W-most. The outer extentof the anchorage is marked by four light buoys(special).Unsurveyed area. Fasht Al Kashsh (27 30 00N

49 30 00E), a large unsurveyed area with numerousreefs and drying banks, marked by a light beacon(27 32 28N 49 33 45E) lies S of the anchorage.

2 Pilotage is compulsory. Pilot boards in 27 43 38N49 24 45E. See Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6(4).Regulations concerning entry. Deep draught

vessels must remain in the centre of the channel.Spoil ground. A spoil ground lies centred in

27 34 94N 49 19 78E.

Harbour8.277d

1 General layout. The harbour, open E, contains abasin, the NE part of which has been dredged (2010)to 16 2 m. The SE part, dredged (2010) to 15 0 m,contains three berths. A service jetty extends 121 m Nfrom the S part of the E half of the basin.Development. Works are in progress (2011), in the

W part of the basin, to construct additional berths;reclamation is also under way (2011), in both sides ofthe basin, as shown on the plan.

Directions8.277e

1 Landmark:Refinery (27 32 14N 49 11 62E), situated about

1 mile S of the basin.Major lights:

Al FºrisØyah Light (27 59 53N 50 10 37E) (2.22).Racons:

Al FºrisØyah (27 59 53N 50 10 37E).TE 1 Light Beacon (27 45 25N 49 24 35E).

See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.2 Approach. From a position S of Al FºrisØyah

(27 59 53N 50 10 37E) (2.26) the track leads WSWfor about 45 miles to the entrance of the dredgedchannel, passing:

NNW of Al ‘ArabØyah (27 46 63N 50 10 47E) fromwhich a light is exhibited (2.22), thence:

NNW of Middle Shoal (27 49 50N 49 56 50E); alight buoy (isolated danger) is moored close E ofthe shoal; further shoal soundings have beenreported (1982) to lie SW. Thence:

3 NNW of JazØrat Karºn (27 43 18N 49 49 56E),a low islet covered in brushwood; a light(metal tripod) is exhibited from the islet.JazØrat Kurayn, a low sandy islet (27 38 95N49 49 26E), lies 4 miles S; a light (metaltripod) is also exhibited from the islet. Thence:

SSE of JazØrat –arqøî (27 56 15N 49 40 86E)(8.291), thence:

SSE of a detached shoal area (27 50 03N49 36 47E), least depth 4 9 m, thence:

4 Between RAZ 1 (27 43 32N 49 25 10E) andRAZ 2 Light Buoys (lateral), thence:

SSE of TE 1 Light Beacon (27 45 25N 49 24 35E)and clear of a shoal, least depth 6 6 m, lying2½ miles S of the beacon, thence:

BetweenRAZ 3 (27 42 68N 49 24 19E) andRAZ 4Light Buoys, thence:

BetweenRAZ 5 (27 42 68N 49 24 19E) andRAZ 6Light Buoys which mark the entrance to thedredged channel.

5 Leading lights.Front light (15 m in height) (27 33 24N 49 11 16E).Rear light (29 m in height) (450 m from front).

The alignment (231 ) of the above lights leads forabout 13 miles through the centre of the dredgedchannel to the turning circle.Useful marks.

Light Beacon (27 42 93N 49 21 34E), standing onadryingpatchabout 2 milesNWof the entrance tothe channel.

Berths8.277f

1 There are three berths in-line with a total length of783 m, on the E side of the basin; Berth No 3 is thelongest with an assigned length of 274 m and depthalongside of 14 0 m. Berth No 4 is a service jetty witha depth alongside of 6 0 m.

Saudi Ports Authority(SDDs 2011000 034116/155564) [51/11]

Iraq – Khawr al Kafka and Al Baîrah (Al Bakr)Oil Terminal — Directions; depth

274

After Paragraph 9.87.4 line 7 Insert:5 WSW of an obstruction (29 40 53N 48 49 92E),

depth 11 0 m, thence:

Offshore Superintendent, MUSC(SDD 2011000 052973) [16/11]

NP64 Red Sea and Gulf of Aden Pilot(2012 Edition)

Gulf of Masirah – Ad Duqm Port — Limitingconditions; arrival information; anchorages;

pilotage; directions

337



Arrival information

13.99a1 Notice of ETA required, 48, 24, 12 and 6 hours in

advance via email to [email protected] and updateby VHF 2 hours in advance. See Admiralty List ofRadio Signals Volume 6 for more information.Outer anchorage berths are allocated by the port

authority according to size, draught, type of vesseland nature of cargo.

2 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 200 gt andis available on a 24 hour basis. Pilot boards vesselswith a draught of more than 8 4 m in the vicinity ofFairway Light Buoy (safe water) (19 42 70N57 48 90E). Vessels with a lesser draught areboarded 1 5 miles ENE of the breakwater in position19 42 25N 57 45 30E. See Admiralty List of RadioSignals Volume 6 for more information.


NP64

2 - 154


2 Approach – Deep draught route. Gulf of Masirah isinhabited by the endangered humpback whale. Allmariners should keep a sharp lookout to preventcollision and restrict noise. For mitigation purposes allvessels bound for or from Ad Duqm Port should usethe charted deep draught route which has a minimumdepth of 19 m LAT.

338


3 Entry. A channel marked by light buoys (lateral)and dredged to 11.0 m (2012) leads generally W andSSW for about 6 miles to the harbour entrance.

Oman Notice 06/2012(SDD 2012000 134456) [40/12]

NP65 St Lawrence Pilot (2012 Edition)

Îles de la Madeleine – La Passe — depth

120



Trois-Rivières — vertical clearance

178



Approach to Chedabucto Bay —Directions; Light

228

Paragraph 12.14 1 line 1 For Useful Marks Read UsefulMark


Paragraph 12.18 1 line 5 For Useful Marks Read UsefulMark


Canada Eastern Notice *612/06/12(SDD 2012000 128379) [38/12]

Outer Pilot Position to Eddy Point —Directions; Light

229



Baie de Chaleurs — Directions; Light

295



NP66West Coast of ScotlandPilot (2011 Edition)

Firth of Clyde – Upper Part — Pilotage

77


A pilot boarding area and a military pilot boardingarea are positioned 3½ and 7 cables NW of KempockPoint (55 57 78N 4 49 06W) respectively.

HMNB Clyde(SDD 2012000 145310) [35/12]

Firth of Clyde – Dunoon — Berth

87

Paragraph 2.217 4 line 4 After berth, Insert Dunoon Pier,

Maritime and Coastguard Agency(SDD 2012000 176068) [38/12]

Mull of Kintyre – Machrihanish Bay —Directions; depth

136


4 W of a shoal (55 25 69N 5 46 04W), with a depthof 7 1 m, which lies close W of Skerrivore (55 25 75N5 45 45W). Skerrivore is a...


...and the 7 1 mshoal which lies closeW, but passes insideSkerrinagal. Mull of Kintyre Light is...

MV Pole Star(SDD 2012000 223584; 223860) [47/12]

Islay – Port Ellen — Directions

140


NP66

2 - 155


Thence as required for berthing. Vessels shouldrefrain from anchoring in the approaches to the ferryterminal and maintain a clear approach for RoRoferries and other large vessels.

Harbour Master, Caledonian Maritime Assets LimitedNotice 44/12(SDD 2012000 162083) [35/12]

Islay – Port Ellen — Directions

140


...with a depth of 3 7 m marked by a light buoy (Ecardinal) moored close E, thence:

Harbour Master, Caledonian Maritime Assets LimitedNotice 59/12(SDD 2012000 207132) [44/12]

Sound of Jura – North Part – Rèisa an t-Sruith —Position

152

Paragraph 3.148 1 line 4For (56 07 92N 5 39 70W)Read

(56 07 90N 5 38 70W)

154


(56 07 90N 5 38 70W)

158


(56 07 90N 5 38 70W)


(56 07 90N 5 38 70W)


(56 07 90N 5 38 70W)


(56 07 90N 5 38 70W)

160


(56 07 90N 5 38 70W)


(56 07 90N 5 38 70W)

UKHO(Chart 2343) [31/12]

Sound of Luing and North Approach —Directions; buoy

163

Paragraph 3.211 3 line 3 For (port hand) Read (E cardinal)

Northern Lighthouse Board Notice 15/12(SDD 2012000 149891) [33/12]

Scotland – West Coast – Kerrera Sound —Directions; light

184


...extending SWof Heather Island (56 24 47N 5 30 19W)from which a light is exhibited.

185


Heather Island Light (56 24 41N 5 30 24W).

Northern Lighthouse Board(SDD 2011000 213023) [04/12]

Scotland – West coast – Lynn of Lorn —Directions; light beacon

193

Paragraph 4.136 5 lines 3-4 For black metal frameworktower, red band, Readmetal framework structure on whitecolumn,


Loch Linnhe – Corpach — Directions;position; depths; berths

207

Paragraph 4.231 1 line 8 For Scottish Pulp and Paper MillsRead Timber Pier (56 50 46N 5 08 11W)

208


E of a drying reef (56 50 00N 5 07 14W), extending¼ cable E from Rubha Dearg (56 50 04N5 07 22W), the E point of a grassy islet lying¾ cable E of, and connected to the mainland by anarrow tongue of sand and gravel.

209

Paragraph 4.242 1 line 6 For Scottish Pulp and Paper MillsRead Timber Pier

Paragraph 4.245 4 lines 4-5 For Boyd Brothers BerthReadTimber Pier


NP66

2 - 156


Alongside berths. New Wharf (56 50 38N5 07 92W extends E from Eilean nan Craobh which isconnected to the mainland by a causeway. The berthhas a depth alongside of 8 9 m, is about 60 m inlength and its effective berthing length is extended bydolphins to the N and S.

Paragraph 4.247 2 line 1 For Boyd Brothers Jetty ReadTimber Pier

210


BA Chart 2372 (5th Edition) [50/12]

Fort William and Corpach —Directions; buoy; depth

207

Paragraph 4.233 1 line 4 For 5 5 mRead 2 7m (56 50 28N5 07 04W)

209


Clear of a shoal bank (56 50 28N 5 07 04W) withdepth 2 7 m which is marked by a light buoymoored close SE.


Northern Lighthouse Board and BA Chart 2372(SDD 2012000 193390; 207029) [46/12]

Loch Linnhe – Northern part — Directions; buoy

208


WNW of a Light Buoy (starboard hand) (56 49 23N5 07 14W) which marks a commercial dive sitesituated close WNW of Underwater Centre Ltdpierhead (56 49 22N 5 06 86W) (4.241),thence:


Loch Boisdale — Directions; light

296-297


...WNW through the channel N of Gasay in the narrowwhite sector (292 -293 ) of Loch Boisdale Ferry TerminalDirectional Light (57 09 19N 7 18 24W), passing:


3 NNE of an obstruction (57 08 87N 7 16 93W),position approximate, which lies within the redsector of Gasay Light (5.351), thence:

SSW of Loch Boisdale North Side Light (metal post,2 m in height) (57 08 98N 7 17 04W), thence:

4 NNE of Gasay Rock (57 08 90N 7 17 16W)which, when covered in calm weather, cannotbe detected owing to the brownish water andseaweed which covers it. The rock lies withinthe red sector of Gasay Light (5.351). Thence:

NNE of a bank (57 08 98N 7 17 32W) with a depthof 3 8 m, which fronts Gasay Light (3.351),thence:

5 SSW of two isolated shoal patches (57 09 05N7 17 49W and 57 09 07N 7 17 60W), withdepths of 3 8 m.

Thence the track leads as required for berthing atthe pier, passing:

6 SSW of Sgeir Rock (57 09 16N 7 17 70W)marked off its S side by Sgeir Rock LightBuoy (starboard hand).

NNE of the bank (57 09 04N 7 17 70W), withdepths of less than 5 m, which extends from theNW end of Gasay to the RoRo terminal, and:

SSW of a shoal bank (57 09 18N 7 17 88W), with adepth of 1 5 m.

7 Useful marks:Eilean Dubh Light (black column, 2 m in height)(57 09 09N 7 18 11W).

Hotel (57 09 20N 7 18 21W), a two-storeyed stonebuilding with gables facing the harbour.

Harbour Master, Caledonian Maritime Assets Limited(SDD 2012000 243254) [51/12]

The Little Minch – Loch Maddy —Directions; light

336

Paragraph 6.226 7 line 4 Delete reported in 2011 asunreliable,


Sound of Raasay to Rubha Réidh —Directions; shoal

365


E of a shoal bank (57 40 70N 6 07 20W), with adepth of 9 9 m, thence:

366


BA Chart 2210 [49/12]

NP67

2 - 157

NP67 West Coasts of Spain and Portugal Pilot(2011 Edition)

Portugal – Vila do Conde — Bar

135


2 Depths in the river are about 2 m but are subjectto frequent change. The bar is restricted for navigationas it is silted up; all vessels using this bar arerequested to do so only in the period three hourseither side of high water.

Portuguese Notice 351/11(SDD 2011000 226083) [08/12]

Portugal – West coast – Porto de Aveiro —Leading line

146

Paragraph 5.114 1 line 2 For 065.6 Read 063.1

Portuguese Notice 10/325/12(SDD 2012000 221779) [51/12]

Portugal – Foz do Arelho — Buoy

151


Portuguese Notice 348/11(SDD 2011000 226083) [08/12]

Spain – South West Coast – Puerto de Cádiz —Berth

213


...de Levante. Cádiz...

214

Paragraph 6.213 1 lines 8-11 including existing Section IVNotice Week 27/12 Delete

215


Spare6.218


Morocco – Baie de Tanger — Light buoy

228


... lying 5½ cables N of Pointe Malabata. Pointe ...


Portugal – Arquipélago dos Açores –Princesse Alice Bank — Depth

255


...A shoal depth 54 m has been reported (2011) at37 37 70N 31 51 20W.

Portuguese chart 43101(SDD2011000199976) [11/12]

NP68 East Coast of the United States PilotVolume 1 (2009 Edition)

Casco Bay and Portland Harbor —Recommended routes

99


Recommended routes3.131a

1 Recommended two-way routes have beenestablished through Hussey Sound (3.162) to CousinsIsland (3.166), Broad Sound (3.137) to the berth(3.143) at Harpswell Neck, and the approaches toPortland Harbor. Deep-draught vessels, tugs andbarges are requested to follow the designated routes.

2 The routes were designed to reduce the potentialfor conflict with pleasure craft, fishing gear and othersmall craft, and to reduce the potential for groundingor collision. Vessels are responsible for their ownsafety and are not required to remain inside theroutes nor are fishermen required to keep fishing gearoutside the routes. Other vessels, while not excludedfrom these routes, should exercise caution in andaround these areas and should monitor VHF channelsfor information concerning deep-draught commercialvessels, tugs and barges transiting these routes.

103


Recommended route3.173a

1 See 3.131a.

US Coast Pilot 1 40th Edition 2010 Change No 3(HH 078/550/11) [37/10]

Portland Harbor — Pilotage

103


1 See 3.201.

NP68

2 - 158

106


Pilots embark within a 2 mile radius of P Light Buoy(43 32 N...


Massachusetts Bay – Gloucester Harbor —Pilotage

122


...board 2 miles SSE of the harbour entrance.

US Coast Pilot 1 42nd Edition 2012(SDD 2012000 060707) [27/12]

Salem Sound and adjacent waters —Directions; light buoy

125


US Notice 51/13267/09(SDD 2009000 189337) [10/10]

Seaward approach to Nantucket Shoals —Directions; ODAS buoy


US Notice 32/13203/10(SDD 2010000 124632) [35/10]

Vineyard Sound – South-west approaches —Directions; wreck

155


(5.102).

US Chart 13218(SDD 2009000 179678) [10/10]

Nantucket Sound – Woods Hole –Great Harbor — Directions; light

157



...hand), the line of bearing (344 ) of Great HarborDirectional Light (41 31 65N 70 40 55W) leads NNW ...

US Notice 43/13235/11(SDD 2011000 192820) [44/11]

Vineyard Sound and South-west approaches –Woods Hole — Directions; buoy

157


WSW of Great Ledge (3 cables S), marked by No 4Buoy (starboard hand), thence:

US Notice 50/13235/09(SDD 2009000 185313) [10/10]

New Bedford — Regulated navigation area

165


Regulated navigation area. A regulated navigationarea has been established close S of the hurricanebarrier (5.187).For definition and general regulations concerning

regulated navigation areas see Appendix V.

252

After Paragraph §165.122 line 2 Insert:

§165.125 Regulated navigation area; EPA SuperfundSite, New Bedford Harbor, Massachusetts.

US Notice 38/13232/11(SDD 2011000 170299) [41/11]

Narragansett Bay – Old Harbor –Limiting conditions — Depths

168


1 Project depths in the entrance channel, basin andinner harbour anchorage area are 4 6 m (15 ft).

US Coast Pilot 2 39th Edition 2010 Change No 6(SDD 2010000 021096) [10/10]

Great Salt Pond – Limiting conditions — Depths

182


1 Project depth in the entrance channel is 5 5 m(18 ft).


Long Island Sound – Plum Gut —Dangerous wreck

187


US Notice 10/12358/10(SDD 2010000 035239) [12/10]

NP68

2 - 159

Bridgeport Harbor — Vertical clearance

194


US Notice 32/12369/11(SDD 2011000 143892) [35/11]

Port Chester Harbor — Depths

202


1 Project depths are 3 7 m (12 ft) in the anchoragearea and entrance channel, thence 3 0 m (10 ft) to theturning basin, thence 0 9 m (3 ft) to the head of theproject.


East Approach to New York Harbor — Directions

210


Paragraph 7.16 4 lines 3-5 Delete , passing To TSS

US Notice 30/12326/12(SDD 2012000 144702) [32/12]

East Approach to New York Harbor —Directions; buoy

210


US Notice 29/12326/12(SDD 2012000 140213) [31/12]

New York Harbor and adjacent waters –Entrance channels and Lower Bay — Racons

216


‘A’ Light Buoy (40 27 N 73 50 W).‘S’ Light Buoy (40 27 N 73 55 W).

US Light List Corrections Week 46/09(SDD 2009000 164502) [10/10]

Kill Van Kull — Depths

226



South Brother Island Channel — Depths

231

Paragraph 7.165 1 and 7.165 2 lines 1-2 Replace by:

1 South Brother Island Channel, project depth10 7 m (35 ft), leads from deep water E of NorthBrother Island (40 48 N 73 54 W), and along the Wside of Rikers Island to a turning basin on the W sideof Bowery Bay. The channel is marked by buoys andlight buoys.

2 Vessel Mast Heights. Vessels using South BrotherIsland Channel and the turning basin at its S endshould ballast...


Approaches to Boston Harbor —Regulated Navigation Areas, Safety and Security

Zones; Deepwater Ports

252

Paragraph §165.117 including heading Replace by:

§165.117 Regulated Navigation Areas, Safetyand Security Zones; Deepwater Ports, FirstCoast Guard District.(a) Location.(1) Regulated navigation areas. All waters within a

1000 meter radius of the geographical positionsset forth in paragraph (a)(3) of this section aredesignated as regulated navigation areas.

(2) Safety and security zones. All waters within a500 meter radius of the geographic positionsset forth in paragraph (a)(3) of this section aredesignated as safety and security zones.

(3) Coordinates.(i) The geographic coordinates forming the loci

for the regulated navigation areas, safety andsecurity zones for the Northeast GatewayDeepwater Port are: 42 23 38 N.,070 35 31 W.; and 42 23 56 N., 070 37 00 W.(NAD 83).

(ii) The geographic coordinates forming the locifor the regulated navigation areas, safety andsecurity zones for the Neptune DeepwaterPort are: 42 29 12 3 N., 070 36 29 7 W.; and42 27 20 5 N., 070 36 07 3 W.

(b) Definitions. As used in this section–Authorized representative means a Coast Guardcommissioned, warrant, or petty officer or aFederal, State, or local law enforcement officerassisting the Captain of the Port (COTP) Boston.

Deepwater port means any facility or structuremeeting the definition of deepwater port 33 CFR148.5.

Dredge means fishing gear consisting of a mouthframe attached to a holding bag constructed ofmetal rings or mesh.

Support vessel means any vessel meeting thedefinition of support vessel in 33 CFR 148.5.

Trap means a portable, enclosed device with oneor more gates or entrances and one or morelines attached to surface floats used for fishing.Also called a pot.

NP68

2 - 160

(c) Applicability. This section applies to all vesselsoperating in the regulated navigation areas set forth inparagraph (a) of this section, except–(1) Those vessels conducting cargo transfer

operations with the deepwater ports whosecoordinates are provided in paragraph (a)(3) ofthis section.

(2) Support vessels operating in conjunctiontherewith, and

(3) Coast Guard vessels or other law enforcementvessels operated by or under the direction of anauthorized representative of the COTP Boston.

(d) Regulations.(1) No vessel may anchor, engage in diving

operations, or commercial fishing using nets,dredges, traps (pots), or use of remotelyoperated vehicles (ROVs) in the regulatednavigation areas set forth in paragraph (a)(1) ofthis section.

(2) In accordance with the general regulations in§§165.23 and 165.33 of this part, entry into ormovement within the safety and security zonesdesignated in paragraph (a)(2) of this section isprohibited unless authorized by the COTPBoston, or his/her authorized representative.

(3) Notwithstanding paragraph (d)(2) of this section,tankers and support vessels, as defined in 33CFR 148.5, operating in the vicinity of NEGDWPare authorized to enter and move within suchzones in the normal course of their operationsfollowing the requirements set forth in 33 CFR150.340 and 150.345, respectively.

(4) All vessels operating within the safety andsecurity zones described in paragraph (a)(2) ofthis section must comply with the instructions ofthe COTP or his/her authorized representative.


NP69 East Coast of the United States PilotVolume 2 (2011 Edition)

Delaware – Wilmington – Christina River —Depths

78


2 Above Lobdell Canal the project depth to theMarket Street bascule bridge, about 3 miles above theentrance, is 6 4 m (21 ft) with a minimum channelwidth of 60 m.

US Notice 34/12311/11(SDD 2011000 150146) [51/11]

Chesapeake Bay – Great Wicomico River —Directions; obstruction; dangerous wreck

134


US Chart 12235 New Edition(SDD 2011000 179449) [51/11]

Potomac River – Hallowing Point —Directions; beacon

144


E of Hallowing Point (38 38 12N 77 07 84W),thence:

US Notice (OCS) 43/12289/11(SDD 2011000 192820) [51/11]

Chesapeake Bay – Choptank River —Directions; fish haven

150


Clear of a fish haven (38 39 27N 76 16 97W)with aminimum depth of 2 4 m (8 ft), thence:

US Notice 48/12266/11(SDD 2011000 215357) [51/11]

Georgia – St Marys Entrance — Anchorages andharbours; anchorage

236


One mile N of the entrance channel in depths ofabout 12 8 to 14 0 m (42 to 46 ft), sand andshingle.

US Coast Pilot 4/2010 Change 12(SDD 2011000 144218) [51/11]

NP69A East Coasts of Central America andGulf of Mexico Pilot (2012 Edition)

NAVIGATION AND REGULATIONS –Traffic separation schemes

5


(IMO SN.1/Circ.309) [46/12]

The following routeing measures will be implementedat 0000 UTC on 1st December 2012

NP69A

2 - 161

Mexico – Bay of Campeche — Routeing Changes

125


Anchorage may be obtained in depths of 39 to41 m in a charted area 9 miles SE of Cayo ArcasLight.


Track. Charted IMO recommended two-way routesshould be followed.

126


2 Anchorages for tankers and vessels involved in oilrelated activities are charted as follows:

Mid-position Depths

20 14 50N 91 52 50W 39 to 41 m.

19 42 50N 91 52 50W 49 to 59 m.

19 17 50N 91 53 50W 20 to 29 m.

19 19 75N 92 25 50W 50 to 100 m.

18 55 25N 92 46 50W 46 m.

3 An anchorage centred on 18 47 00N 91 47 50W isestablished for vessels arriving at, or manoeuvring NEof the port of Isla del Carmen, located NW of the seabuoy.

4 An anchorage centred on 18 34 00N 93 13 00W isestablished for vessels other than tankers, involved incargo exportation activities, arriving at or manoeuvringNW to the port of Dos Bocas.


1 Description of routeing system. AnIMO-recommended routeing system exists in the areaof offshore oil and gas activity primarily for oilexploration and production support vessels. Othervessels are strongly recommended to avoid therecommended system. The system comprises thefollowing:

(i) Five ATBA’s containing the oil and gas fields,Cayo Arcas terminal, Rebombeo Oilfield, MayOilfield and Dos Bocas Oilfield.

(ii) Recommended tracks NNW, NW, WNW and Win both directions from precautionary area A atthe approaches to Ciudad del Carmen.

(iii) Recommended tracks S of Cayo Arcas terminal.(iv)Six precautionary areas (A, B, C, D, E, F) at the

junctions of the recommended tracks.2 Areas to be avoided:

(i) Most of the associated platforms are in an ATBAcentred on 19 25 00M 92 10 00W.

(ii) ATBA centred on Cayo Arcas terminal.(iii) ATBA centred on Rebombeo Oilfield.(iv)ATBA centred on May Oilfield.(v) ATBA centred on Dos Bocas terminal.

3 Prohibited anchorage. Anchoring is prohibitedwithin the charted restricted areas except indesignated anchorages (6.72).

127


1 From a position about 13 miles E of Cayo Arcas(6.61) the route leads generally S for about 85 miles,avoiding the restricted areas, to the PrecautionaryArea 11½ miles N of Punta Atalaya Light (18 38 67N91 50 65W).

2 Useful Mark:Punta Atalaya Light (white truncated conicalmasonry tower, red cupola, 23 m in height)(18 38 67M 91 50 65W).


BA chart 2626(IMO SN.1/Circ.309) [46/12]

Mexico –Gulf of Campeche – Dos Bocas —Directions; light buoy; AIS

127


2 AIS:Dos Bocas Fairway Light Buoy (18 27 74N93 12 83W).


129




131




Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2(HH. 69A/200/02) [27/12]

United States of America – Calcasieu Pass toSouthwest Pass — Directions; light; AIS

192


2 AIS:Southwest Pass Entrance Light (28 54 36N89 25 72W).


NP69A

196




209




Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2(SDD 2012000 074965) [27/12]

NP70 West Indies Pilot Volume 1(2011 Edition)

United States of America – Straits of Florida –Miami — Traffic Regulation; restricted area

130


For information on regulations covering dangerzones and restricted areas see Appendix VI.

287

After Paragraph §334.600 Insert:

§334.605 Meloy Channel, U.S. Coast GuardBase Miami Beach, FL; restricted area.


NP71 West Indies Pilot Volume 2(2012 Edition)Nil

NP72 Southern Barents Sea and Beloye MorePilot (2010 Edition)

Radio Navigation Warnings

6


Radio navigational warnings and weathermessages1.31

1 Navigational warnings and weather bulletins forBarents Sea and Beloye More are issued byNAVAREA/METAREA XX. They are broadcast inEnglish on the NAVTEX service by Murmansk andArkhangel’sk Coast Radio Stations, and on theSafetyNET service. The latter is currently on trial, andenters full operational capability on 1st June 2011.See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volumes 3(1)

and 5 and The Mariner’s Handbook for details.


Spare1.32


Barents Sea – NE of Kol’skiy Zaliv —submerged mooring buoys

67


Across Skolpen Bank (70 50 N 36 00 E) (1.86),passing clear of two submerged mooring buoysabove a wreck, depth more than 20 m, in position69 54 N 35 11 E, thence:


Barents Sea – Otmel ’ Pakhtusova —Drilling Platform

186


2 The drilling platform Prirazlomnaya situated inposition 69 15 95N 57 17 29E (2011) has a safetyzone of 3 miles radius centred on that position.Vessels should not enter the safety zone of themarine ice-stable platform without permission of theoperator of the platform.


2 - 162

3 - 1

UPDATES TO ADMIRALTY MISCELLANEOUS NAUTICALPUBLICATIONS

PART 3CURRENT EDITIONS OF ADMIRALTY MISCELLANEOUS NAUTICAL PUBLICATIONS

NP No Title Edition Supplement Published /correct fromWeekly EditionNumber

100} The Mariner’s Handbook 9th (2009) 50/09

136 Ocean Passages for the World 5th (2004) 24/04

350(1) Admiralty Distance Tables — Atlantic Ocean 2nd (2011) 07/12

350(2) Admiralty Distance Tables — Indian Ocean 3rd (2008) 15/08

350(3) Admiralty Distance Tables — Pacific Ocean 2nd (2009) 39/09

735 IALA Maritime Buoyage System 7th (2012) 50/12

5011 Symbols and Abbreviations used on Admiralty Paper Charts 5th (2011) 12/11

5012 Admiralty Guide to ENC Symbols used in ECDIS 1st (2012) 30/12

133A Paper Chart Maintenance Record 3rd (2008) 46/12

231 Admiralty Guide to the Practical Use of ENCs 1st (2012) 23/12

294 How to Keep your Admiralty Products Up-to-date 6th (2011)

201 Admiralty Tide Tables United Kingdom and Ireland(including Eurpean Channel Ports) Volume 1

2012 & 2013

202 Admiralty Tide Tables Europe (excluding United Kingdomand Ireland), Mediterranean Sea and Atlantic OceanVolume 2

2012 & 2013

203 Admiralty Tide Tables Indian Ocean and South China Sea(including Tidal Stream Tables) Volume 3

2012 & 2013

204 Admiralty Tide Tables Pacific Ocean (including Tide StreamTables) Volume 4

2012 & 2013

120 Admiralty Manual of Tides 1941

122(1) Admiralty Tidal Handbook No.1 Harmonic Tidal Analysis forLong Periods

1985

122(2) Admiralty Tidal Handbook No. 2 Datums for Hydrographicsurveys

1975

122(3) Admiralty Tidal Handbook No.3 Harmonic Tidal Analysis forShort Periods

1986

160 Tidal Harmonic constants (European Waters) 5th (2010)

164 Dover, Times of High Water and mean ranges (publishedannually)

2012 & 2013

209 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Orkney and Shetland Islands 4th

218 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas North Coast of Ireland andWest Coast of Scotland

5th

219 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Portsmouth Harbour andApproaches

2nd

220 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Rosyth Harbour andApproaches

2nd

221 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Plymouth Harbour andApproaches

2nd

222 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Firth of Clyde and Approaches 1st

233 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Dover Strait 3rd

NP No Published /correct fromWeekly EditionNumber

SupplementEditionTitle

249 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Thames Estuary(with Co-Tidal Charts)

2nd

250 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas The English Channel 4th

251 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas North Sea, Southern Portion 4th

252 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas North Sea North-Western Part 4th

253 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas North Sea, Eastern Part 2nd

254 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas The West Country, Falmouth toTeignmouth

1st

255 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Falmouth to Padstow,including Isles of Scilly

1st

256 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Irish Sea and Bristol Channel 4th

257 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Approaches to Portland 3rd

258 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Bristol Channel(Lundy to Avonmouth)

1st

259 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Irish Sea, Eastern Part 1st

263 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas Lyme Bay 1st

264 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas The Channel Islands andAdjacent Coasts of France

5th

265 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas France, West Coast 2nd

337 Admiralty Tidal Stream Atlas The Solent and AdjacentWaters

4th

214 Admiralty Co-Tidal Atlas Persian Gulf 2nd

215 Admiralty Co-Tidal Atlas South-East Asia 1st

303(1) Rapid Sight Reduction Tables Vol I Selected StarsEpoch 2015.0

28/12

303(2) Rapid Sight Reduction Tables Vol II Lat 0 - 40 Dec 0 - 29 2007

303(3) Rapid Sight Reduction Tables Vol III Lat 39 - 89 ,Dec 0 - 29

2007

314 The Nautical Almanac 2013 13/12

321 The Star Almanac for Land Surveyors 2013 21/12

323 Star Finder and Identifier

GP100 The Astronomical Almanac 2013 03/12

GP200 Astronomical Phenomena 2014 12/11

DP330 NavPac and Compact Data 2011 - 2015

} Volumes on an extended cycle of Continuous Revision of 5 or more years.

3 - 2

4 - 1

UPDATES TO ADMIRALTY MISCELLANEOUS NAUTICALPUBLICATIONS

PART 4

INDEX OF UPDATES IN FORCE ON 31 DECEMBER 2012 (Week 52/12)

NP Publication Page100 The Mariner’s Handbook 4 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Ocean Passages for the World 4 - 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201-12 Admiralty Tide Tables 4 - 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201-13 Admiralty Tide Tables 4 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202-13 Admiralty Tide Tables 4 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 How to Keep Your Admiralty Products Up-to-Date 4 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NP100

4 - 2

NP100 The Mariner’s Handbook(2009 Edition)

ECDIS

39


...implications.3 IMO Safety of Navigation Circular 266 (SN Circ266)

warns that ECDIS that is not updated for the latestversions of IHO Standards may not meet the chartcarriage requirements set out in SOLAS regulationV/19.2.1.4.It also advises that any ECDIS which is not

upgraded to be compatible with the latest version ofthe Product Specification or the S-52 PresentationLibrary may be unable to correctly display the latestcharted features.

4 Additionally, in some cases, the appropriate alarmsand indications may not be activated even though thefeatures have been included in the ENC.An up-to-date list of all the relevant IHO standards

relating to ECDIS equipment is maintained within the“About ENCs” section of the IHO website: www.iho.int


Software anomalies and feedback from users2.82a

1 Since 2010, warnings have been issued to alertmariners to anomalies in the operation of someECDIS systems. To date, these have related todisplay and alarm behaviour in particular systemconfigurations, in that equipment may not displaycertain combinations of chart features and attributescorrectly, and on rare occasions may fail to display anavigationally significant feature. This appears to becaused by anomalous behaviour in some ECDISsoftware, especially early versions.

2 The existence of such anomalies is not surprisinggiven that ECDIS is the first complex, safety-relatedcomputer-based navigational system, and it is quitepossible that further anomalies remain to bediscovered. In the first instance, mariners arerecommended to make appropriate checks with theequipment manufacturer. This is of particularimportance where ECDIS is the only source of chartinformation available to the mariner.

3 As ECDIS is now in widespread use, and itscarriage about to become mandatory (2.84), it isimportant that any anomalies identified by marinersare reported to flag-state Administrations so that theappropriate authorities can investigate them. Marinersare therefore encouraged to make reports in sufficientdetail to permit analysis, and, when appropriate, toissue alerts when such anomalies affect the safety ofnavigation.

4 For UK-flagged vessels, MCA MIN 406 (M+F) hasrequested that reports be made to the MCA by e-mailto [email protected] with the followinginformation:

ECDIS: Manufacturer, model name/type, serialnumber (if available), software version.

ENC: Issuer (eg UKHO), cell name (eg GB40282A),edition number, and the latest update numberapplied.

Date time group.5 Description of anomaly, including location (in

lat/long or otherwise), and screen-shots (ifpossible).

Details of system settings at the time of occurrence,including display mode and display scale, ideallyshown as screen-shots.

Rectifying action (if any).Additionally, for vessels irrespective of nationality, it

is requested that reports are copied to UKHO via theCustomer Service Desk [email protected]

6 Further information will be made available throughNotices to Mariners and within the UK element of theREADME.TXT file included on ENC service media.

40


3 Particular issues. Mariners using ECDIS arereminded not to rely solely on automated voyageplanning and monitoring checks and alarms. SomeECDIS appear only to undertake route check functionson larger scale ENCs and therefore alarms might notactivate. This may not be clearly indicated on theECDIS display. Mariners should always undertakecareful visual inspection of the entire planned routeusing the “other/all” display mode to confirm that it,and any deviations from it, is clear of dangers.

4 Some ECDIS may not display certain combinationsof chart features and attributes correctly and on rareoccasions may fail to display a navigationallysignificant feature. This appears to be caused byanomalous behaviour in some ECDIS software,especially early versions. It is recommended thatappropriate checks are made with the equipmentmanufacturer. This is of particular importance whereECDIS is the only source of chart informationavailable to the mariner.

5 Further information will be made available throughNotices to Mariners and within the UK element of theREADME.TXT file included on ENC service media.

UKHO (HH. 073/200/06) 51/11

Navigational Warnings — Different types

60

Paragraph 4.6 5 lines 4-6 Delete Navigational to localwarnings.

UKHO (HH. 073/200/06) 10/10

http://www.iho.int


NP100

4 - 3

NAVAREAS/METAREAS

60 - 62

Paragraph 4.7 Replace by:1 For the purposes of WWNWS, the world is divided

into 21 geographical sea areas, termed NAVAREAs,each identified by the roman numerals I - XXI, andone sub-area (the Baltic Sea). The authority chargedwith coordinating and promulgating long rangenavigational warnings within a NAVAREA is called theNAVAREA (or Sub-Area) Coordinator. TheCoordinators are listed in Admiralty List of RadioSignals Volumes 3 and 5 and are shown indiagram 4.7.

2 The service in NAVAREAs XVII - XXI is currentlyon trial and is expected to become fully operational in2011.

61

Diagram 4.7 Caption line 3 Replace by:

The service in NAVAREAS XVII - XXI is currentlyon trial and is expected to become fullyoperational in 2011

63


...almost identical to the 21 NAVAREAs (4.7) withinthe World-Wide Navigational Warning Service(WWNWS). The service in METAREAs XVII - XXI iscurrently on trial and is expected to become fullyoperational in 2011. Each...

United States of America Notice 24/10 Section III (SDD 2010000092655) 41/10

PAGE 65, Chapter 4, Section III – Reprints ofNavigational Warnings 4.33

Paragraph 4.33 1 Including existing section VII NoticeWeek 25/11 Replace by:

2 This section lists the serial numbers of allNAVAREA I messages in force with reprints of thoseissued during the week. The full text of all NAVAREAI warnings in force is reproduced in Weekly Editions 1,13, 26 and 39 each year.

UKHO 39/12

PAGE 66, Chapter 4, Summary of periodicalinformation 4.40

Paragraph 4.40 1 including table Replace by:

2 Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Marinersand Notices issued at regular intervals provide detailsof messages, updates and amendments in force.

The table shows where this information can befound:

Weekly NMSection

Subject Recapitulationlist details

IA Temporary andPreliminaryNotices toMariners

Serial numbers ofT&P NMs in forcepublished monthly.Full text published inAnnual SummaryPart 1 (NP247(1))each year.

IB CurrentNautical

Publications

Current edition datespublished every3 months.

II Updates toStandard

Nautical Charts

Cumulative List ofAdmiralty NMspublished in Wk 1(NP234(A)) andWk 26 (NP234(B))each year.

III NAVAREA Iwarnings

Serial numbers ofwarnings in forcepublished weekly.Full text publishedevery 3 months inWks 1, 13, 26 & 39each year.

IV Updates toAdmraltySailing

Directions

Serial numbers ofupdates publishedevery 3 months.Full text published inAnnual SummaryPart 2 (NP247(2))each year.

VI Updates toAdmiralty Listof RadioSignals

Serial numbers ofupdates publishedevery 3 months.

VII Updates toMariner’sHandbook(NP100)

Serial numbers ofupdates publishedevery 3 months.Full text published inAnnual SummaryPart 2 (NP247(2))each year

UKHO 39/12

MARPOL 73/78 — Special Areas

209Existing Section IV Week 41/10 Paragraph 10.7 TableColumn 1 The Wider Caribbean Region Replace by:The Wider Caribbean Region, as defined in article

2, paragraph 1 of the Convention for the Protectionand Development of the Marine Environment of theWider Caribbean Region (Cartagena de Indias, 1983),means the Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea properincluding the bays and seas therein and that portionof the Atlantic Ocean within the boundary constitutedby the 30 N parallel from Florida eastward to 77 30’Wmeridian, thence a rhumb line to the intersection of20 N parallel and 59 W meridian, thence a rhumb lineto the intersection of 7 20 N parallel and 50 Wmeridian, thence a rhumb line drawn south-westerly tothe eastern boundary of French Guiana.

MARPOL 73/78 Annex V Regulation 5(1)h; Roman Dumala (SDD2010000 151016, 200597) 50/10

NP100

4 - 4

MARPOL - Environmental Control Areas (ECAs) — North American and US Caribbean Areas

209After Paragraph 10.7 Table row 14 Insert:

The North American Environmental Control Area (ECA) includes waters adjacent to the Pacific coast,the Atlantic/Gulf coast and the eight main Hawaiian islands (Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, Molokai, Niihau, Kauai,Lanai and Kahoolawe). It extends up to 200 miles from the coasts of the United States of America, Canadaand the French territory of Saint-Pierre et Miquelon, except that it does not extend into marine areas subjectto the sovereignty or jurisdiction of other States. The precise coordinates of the ECA are given in IMOdocument MEPC.1/Circ.723 dated 13 May 2010.

VI

The United States Caribbean ECA includes the sea area located off the Atlantic and Caribbean coasts ofthe Commonwealth of Puerto Rico and the United States Virgin Islands. The precise coordinates of the ECAare given in IMO document MEPC 62/6/2 dated 17 November 2010.

VI

Paragraph 10.7 Table Note Replace by:

Notes.1. * The Special Area requirements for these areas have not yet taken effect because of a lack of notifications from

MARPOL. Parties whose coastlines border the relevant Special Areas on the existence of adequate receptionfacilities (Regulations 38.6 of MARPOL Annex I and 5(4) of MARPOL Annex V).

2. The North American ECA came into force on 1 August 2011 and will become effective from 1 August 2012.3. The US Caribbean ECA comes into force on 1 January 2013 and will become effective from 1 January 2014.

211


The Baltic Sea, North Sea, North American watersand US Caribbean waters as defined in the table at10.7 are designated as SOx Emission Control Areasin the Protocol. North American and US Caribbeanwaters will also enforce restrictions on the emissionsof NOx and Fine Particulate Matter (PM2.5) onbecoming effective on 1 August 2012 and 1 January2014 respectively.

IMO MEPC.1/Circ.723 dated 13 May 2010; IMO MEPC 62/6/2dated 17 November 2010 (HH. 073/200/6) 08/12

MARPOL 73/78 – Annex II — Categorisation ofNoxious Liquid Substances

210

Paragraph 10.15 2-6 Replace by:Category X. Noxious Liquid Substances which, if

discharged into the sea from tank cleaning ordeballasting operations, are deemed to present amajor hazard to either marine resources or humanhealth and, therefore, justify the prohibition of thedischarge into the marine environment.

3 Category Y. Noxious Liquid Substances which, ifdischarged into the sea from tank cleaning ordeballasting operations, are deemed to present ahazard to either marine resources or human health orcause harm to amenities or other legitimate uses ofthe sea and therefore justify a limitation on the qualityand quantity of the discharge into the marineenvironment.

4 Category Z. Noxious Liquid Substances which, ifdischarged into the sea from tank cleaning ordeballasting operations, are deemed to present aminor hazard to either marine resources or humanhealth and therefore justify less stringent restrictionson the quality and quantity of the discharge into themarine environment.

5 Other Substances. Substances which have beenevaluated and found to fall outside Category X, Y or Zbecause they are considered to present no harm tomarine resources, human health, amenities or otherlegitimate uses of the sea when discharged into thesea from tank cleaning or deballasting operations. Thedischarge of bilge or ballast water or other residues ormixtures containing these substances are not subjectto any requirements of MARPOL Annex II.

MARPOL 73/78 Annex II as amended; MT Magda(HH. 073/200/06) 03/10

NP100

4 - 5

Loran-C — Discontinuation of US andCanadian signals

220


Note. The transmission of the US Loran-C signalceased with effect from 8 February 2010 and ispermanently discontinued. This does not affect USparticipation in the Russian-American or Canadianchains. It has also been announced that the Canadiansignal is to be discontinued from 1 October 2010. Thisshould be considered when using volumes of SailingDirections which cover the withdrawn chains.

Paragraph 11.20 4 lines 5-7DeleteHowever, onUSChartsto this effect is shown.

NAVAREA IV 40/10 (SDD 2010000 013752) 07/10

NAVSTAR Global Positioning System (GPS) —Gaps in coverage

224

After Paragraph 11.39 2 line 10 Insert:Persian Gulf (Bahrain) - Approaches toMØnº' Salmºn.

HMS Pembroke (SDD 2010000 020481) 08/10

IALA Maritime Buoyage System –Lateral Marks – Region B –

Preferred channels —characteristics of buoys

315

Diagram C.16.2 Lateral Marks - Region B PREFERREDCHANNELS After...a preferred channel is indicated by:

Left Column Replace by:

Preferred channel to starboard

Colour: Green with one broad red band.Shape: Conical, pillar or spar.Topmark (when fitted): Single green can.Retroflector: Green band or triangle.

Right Column Replace by:

Preferred channel to port

Colour: Red with one broad green band.Shape: Conical, pillar or spar.Topmark (when fitted): Single red cone pointupward.Retroflector: Red band or square.

UKHO (HH. 073/200/06) 07/10

IALA Maritime Buoyage System – Lateral Marks– Region B – Preferred channels —

characteristics of buoys

315

Existing Section IV Notice Week 07/10 Diagram C.16.2Lateral Marks -Region BPREFERREDCHANNELS Leftcolumn Preferred channel to starboard line 2 Replace by:

Shape: Can, pillar or spar.

UKHO; MY Queen K (HH. 073/200/06) 10/10

NP136 Ocean Passages for the World(2004 Edition)

Singapore Hong Kong – Routes —Low-powered vessels; distance

168Paragraph 7.88 2 line 4 For 1460 Read 1925

UKHO (HH. 074/200/01) 26/04

NP201-12 ADMIRALTY TIDE TABLES (2012 Edition)

Page xxxix, Table III, Height in metres of Chart Datum relative to Ordnance Datum in the United Kingdom

Replace the below data:

322 St. Kilda -4.18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

with:

322 St. Kilda -0.33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UKHO 46/12

Page 321, Part II, Time and Height Differences for Predicting the Tide at Secondary Ports


113a Chelsea Bridge 51 29 0 09 +0015 +0020 +0030 +0030 -0.5 -1.1 0.0 -0.3 3.13

with:

113a Chelsea Bridge 51 29 0 09 +0015 +0020 +0030 +0030 -0.6 -0.7 -0.4 -0.2 3.13

UKHO 46/12

Page xxxix, Table III, Height in metres of Chart Datum relative to Ordnance Datum in the United Kingdom


322 St. Kilda -4.18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

with:

322 St. Kilda -0.33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UKHO 46/12( )



113a Chelsea Bridge 51 29 0 09 +0015 +0020 +0030 +0030 -0.5 -1.1 0.0 -0.3 3.13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

with:

113a Chelsea Bridge 51 29 0 09 +0015 +0020 +0030 +0030 -0.6 -0.7 -0.4 -0.2 3.13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UKHO 46/12


NP201-13

4 - 6




113a Chelsea Bridge 51 290 09 +0015+0020 +0030 +0030 -0.6 -1.1 0.0 -0.3 3.12

with:

113a Chelsea Bridge 51 290 09 +0015 +0020 +0030 +0030 -0.6 -0.7 -0.4 -0.2 3.12

UKHO 46/12



177 Burton Stather 5339 0 42 +0105 +0050 +0240 +0205 -2.1 -2.3 -2.3 +0.9 1.88 c§177a Flixborough Wharf 5337 0 42 +0100 +0115 +0305 +0220 -2.3 -2.6 -2.2 -0.9 1.86 c§178 Keadby 5336 0 44 +0135 +0120 +0425 +0410 -2.5 -2.8 -2.3 -0.9 1.53 c§

with:

177 Burton Stather 53 390 42 +0105 +0050 +0240 +0205 -2.0 -2.7 -2.2 -1.1 1.88 c§177a Flixborough Wharf 53 370 42 +0100 +0115 +0305 +0220 -2.1 -2.8 -2.2 -0.9 1.86 c§178 Keadby 53 360 44 +0130 +0115 +0320 +0235 -2.8 -3.3 -2.3 -0.9 1.53 c§

UKHO 46/12


Page xxxvi, Table IV, Height in metres of Chart Datum relative to Land Levelling System in countries outside of theUnited Kingdom


1562 ZEEBRUGGE -0.19 TAW. . . . . . . . . .1564 Oostende -0.39 TAW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1565 Nieuwpoort -0.51 TAW. . . . . . . . . . . . .

with:


UKHO 46/12

NP294 HOW TO KEEP YOUR ADMIRALTY PRODUCTS UP-TO-DATE (Sixth Edition 2011)

Page 15, Chapter 2, Section III Reprints of Radio Navigational WarningsDelete and Replace by:

UKHO 39/12

Section III Reprints of NAVAREA I Navigational WarningsSee the note at the start of Section III of the Weekly Edition. Information included in this Section is:

• a list of the numbers of all NAVAREA I warnings in force;

• a table of all NAVAREA I warnings issued since the last Weekly Edition, with the full text of those that were in force at the time the table was compiled.

• the full text of all NAVAREA I warnings in force is reproduced in Weekly Editions 1, 13, 26 and 39 each year.

It is recommended that in force warnings should be plotted on in-use charts in pencil and kept in a file or logbook.

More details on the World-Wide Navigational Warning Service can be found in the Mariner's Handbook (NP100) and the Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volumes 3 & 5 (NP283(1), NP283(2) & NP285)




113a Chelsea Bridge 51 29 0 09 +0015 +0020 +0030 +0030 -0.6 -1.1 0.0 -0.3 3.12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

with:

113a Chelsea Bridge 51 29 0 09 +0015 +0020 +0030 +0030 -0.6 -0.7 -0.4 -0.2 3.12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UKHO 46/12



177 Burton Stather 53 39 0 42 +0105 +0050 +0240 +0205 -2.1 -2.3 -2.3 +0.9 1.88 c§. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177a Flixborough Wharf 53 37 0 42 +0100 +0115 +0305 +0220 -2.3 -2.6 -2.2 -0.9 1.86 c§. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Keadby 53 36 0 44 +0135 +0120 +0425 +0410 -2.5 -2.8 -2.3 -0.9 1.53 c§. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

with:

177 Burton Stather 53 39 0 42 +0105 +0050 +0240 +0205 -2.0 -2.7 -2.2 -1.1 1.88 c§. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177a Flixborough Wharf 53 37 0 42 +0100 +0115 +0305 +0220 -2.1 -2.8 -2.2 -0.9 1.86 c§. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Keadby 53 36 0 44 +0130 +0115 +0320 +0235 -2.8 -3.3 -2.3 -0.9 1.53 c§. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UKHO 46/12


Page xxxvi, Table IV, Height in metres of Chart Datum relative to Land Levelling System in countries outside of theUnited Kingdom



with:


UKHO 46/12

NP294

4 - 7

PAGE 15, Chapter 2, Information available from Weekly Edition of Admiralty Notices to Mariners, beforeHydrographic Note.

Insert:

Section VII Amendments to Miscellaneous Admiralty NauticalPublications

Amendments to selected miscellaneous Admiralty Nautical Publications are given in Section VII(see Section I of Weekly Bulletin for list of Publications).

UKHO 23/12

PAGE 21, Chapter 4, Equipment – Tools, lines 1 to 6, It is recommended ...to... for this purpose.

Delete and replace by:

UKHO 35/12

PAGE 22, Chapter 4, Equipment – Publications, Paragraph 14.

Delete and replace by:

UKHO 23/12

Section VII Amendments to Miscellaneous Admiralty Nautical PublicationsAmendments to selected miscellaneous Admiralty Nautical Publications are given in Section VII (see Section I of Weekly Bulletin for list of Publications).

It is recommended that you have the proper tools before you begin to update your charts.

1. Pens You need two pens with different sizes of nib - use a 0.18mm nib to insert information and a 0.25mm nib to delete.

14. NP5011 Symbols and Abbreviations used on Admiralty Charts is based on the Chart Specifications of the International Hydrographic Organization (IHO) adopted in 1982, with later additions and updates. The layout and numbering accords with the official IHO version of INT 1. It explains every symbol used on Admiralty Charts and should be used as a guide during the chart updating process. It is updated by NM in Section VII of the Weekly Admiralty Notices to Mariners when necessary.

4 - 8

ANNEX A (NP41) (See Page 2 - 101)

-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

30

40

50

J F M A M J J A S O N D

Mean annual maximum = 22°CMean annual minimum = -13°CPeriod maximum = 26°CPeriod minimum = -18°C

Mean monthly maximum

Mean daily maximum

Mean daily minimum

Mean monthly minimum

Mean maximum and minimumtemperatures (°C)

14 yr period

996

1000

1004

1008

1012

1016

1020

1024

1028

1032


MSL pressure (hPa)Annual mean 1009 hPa

14 yr period

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8


Cloud cover (oktas)Annual

1100 local mean = 61700 local mean = 6

1100 local

1700 local

14 yr period

0

2

4

6

8

10


Days with gales31 days per year

14 yr period

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4


Days with thunder1 day per year

14 yr period

0

50

100

150

200

250

300


Mean precipitation (mm)1815 mm per year

11 yr period

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40


Mean precipitation days(> 0.1mm)

205 days per year

11 yr period

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35


Days with fog42 days per year

14 yr period

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100


Relative humidity (%)Annual

1100 local mean = 751700 local mean = 76

1100 local

1700 local

14 yr period

WMO No 32215 SEVERO-KURIL’SK

SEVERO-KURIL’SK

50°41'N 156°08'E. Height above MSL - 23 m Climate Information for period 1995 - 2008

JanuaryFebruary March

April

MayJune

JulyAugust September

OctoberNovemberDecember

JanuaryFebruary

MarchApril

MayJune

JulyAugust September

October NovemberDecember

Station Wind Distribution - 1100 local

Station Wind Distribution - 1700 local

Wind flow is towards the circle. The figure in the circle gives the percentage of calms.

The frequency of wind is given by scale: 0% 10 20 30 40 50% 4

Beaufort force is indicated by:

6887

6

6

6868527

969

63

1.181

4 - 9

4 - 10

ANNEX B (NP57A) (See Page 2 - 120)4°

4°

4°

4°

5°

5°

6°

6°

7°

7°

8°

8°

9°

9°

3°

3°

3°

3°

2°

2°

2°

2°

1° 1°0°

Meridian of 0° Greenwich

62° 62°

61° 61°

60° 60°

59° 59°

58° 58°

57° 57°

56° 56°

55° 55°

54° 54°

53° 53°

52° 52°

NP57ANORWAY PILOT

VOL 2A

NP57BNORWAY PILOT

VOL 2B

NP56NORWAY PILOT

VOL lS K A G E R R A K

NP55NORTH SEA (EAST)

PILOT

Die

El eb

R Thames

NP54NORTH SEA (WEST)

PILOT

N O R T H S E A

Moray Firth

S h e t l a n dI s l a n d s

NP52NORTH COAST

OFSCOTLAND

PILOT

Firth of Forth

2305

288

2291299

295

219

1942

115

1954

1239

1409

294

1119

292

275 1402

281

286

2672

1422

291

278

2182C

2182D

2182C

2182B

2182

A

2182B

2182A

274

273

268

1423

267266

1407

1192

1191

272

1187

1190

1503

1632 16331635

3767

163016311406

1408

1233

1234

2674

2673

2674

280411

1610

xviiBlock A for NP57A

4 - 11

4 - 12

ANNEX C (NP57A) (See Page 2 - 120)

62° 62°

61° 61°

60° 60°

59° 59°

58° 58°

3°

3°

4°

4°

5°

5°

6°

Longitude 6° East from Greenwich

7° 8°

8°

9°

9°

13

13

NP57BNORWAY PILOT

VOL 2BSvinøya

Stadlandet

Sildegapet

Vågsøy

Bremanger

Måløy

Florø

Sunnmørsfjordens

Nordfjord

Ytterøyane

1211

11

12

Stavfjorden

Buefjorden

UtværSognesjø

en

Mon

gsta

d

Fenfsjorden

Sognef jorden

Årdalstangen

1010

9

StoraSotra

Selbjørnsfjorden

Bergen

Sørfjorden

Odda

8

8

7

7

6

6 5

44

Bømlafjorden

Utsira

Karmøy

Suk

ednesfj

orden

Sauda

Egersund

LindesnesNP56

NORWAY PILOTVOL 1

Norway Pilot Vol 2A NP 57A

Haugesund

Korsfjorden

Ha

rda

nge

rfjo

rden

Stavanger

2305

2673

288

2291

2291

2673

2672

2672

281

288

286

286

299

2674

2674

275

280411

Chapter Index Diagram

xviiiBlock B for NP57A4 - 13

4 - 14

ANNEX D (NP57A) (See Page 2 - 122)

Bergen Plan B (9.202 - 9.206)

N

Breiviken

Nyhavn

Hegreneset

Elsero

Sandviken

Skutevik

Vågen

Skuteviken

Måseskjæret

B y f j o r d e n

8

9

;

<

=

>?

@

KEYThe circled numbers relate to the same symbols inserted in the adjacent text.

NP57A

4 - 15

4 - 16

ANNEX E (NP57A) (See Page 2 - 124)

Måløy

Måløyna

Ivahavet

Kletten

Måløystraumen

Sildoljefabrikk

Morteneset

Fureneset

Trollebø Industriområde

Sæterneset

Brulykter

N

Goteberghammaren

Seljehammaren

Leistholmen

Ulvesundet

Vågsf jorden

1

2

3

KEYThe circled numbers relate to the same symbols inserted in the adjacent text.

4

5

67

8

9

:

;

<12

NP57A

Måløy (13.272a)

See Plan of Måløystraumen

4 - 17

4 - 18

ANNEX F (NP57A) (See Page 2 - 124)

Måløyna

Kulen

Brulykter

N

W

U+E06C

U+E06C

U+E061

U+E061

U+E062

U+E062U+E063 U+E063U+E064

U+E064

U+E065

U+E065

U+E066

U+E066

U+E067

U+E067

U+E068

U+E068

U+E069U+E069U+E06A

U+E06A

U+E06B

U+E06B

Lead

ing

Line

010

·8°

Lead

ing

Line

190

°

Måløysundet West passage South West

Måløysundet East passage No1

Måløysundet East passage No2

Måløysundet West passage North West

Måløysundet West passage North East

Måløysundet East passage North West

Måløysundet East passage North East

Måløysundet West passage West

Måløysundet West passage No2

Måløysundet West passage No1

Måløysundet East passage South West

Måløysundet East passage South East

Måløystraumen (13.272b)

NP57A

4 - 19

4 - 20

ANNEX G (NP58A) (See Page 2 - 130)

N

KeyThe circled numbers relate to the same symbols inserted in the adjacent text

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Kvalneset

Ferry

Tjuvneset Kr Fagertun

Olsen/Michaelson

Municipal quay

Shipyard

Rø

ss

ne

sv

åg

en

M Michaelson

Concretequay

R

RR

R

W

W

W

WG

G

G

G

320·25°

To accompany Section IV Notice for NP58A 7th Edition

Sørlandsvågen (10.73)

4 - 21

4 - 22

Kirkenes

PoluostrovRybachiy

SørøyaHammerfest

Senja

Narvik

Andenes

Lødingen

Tromsø

Honningsvåg

Nordkapp

Norway Pilot Vol IIIB NP 58B

BaselineTerritorial limit

Areas exempted from compulsorypilotage

N O R W A Y

S W E D E NF I N L A N D

R U S S I A

NP 58BNORWAY PILOT

VOL IIIB

Schematic diagram of the Norwegian baselineand areas exempt from compulsory pilotage (1.38)

4-

23

ANNEX H (NP58B) (See Page 2 - 132)

Date post:	28-Dec-2015
Category:	Documents
Upload:	r-ethier
View:	101 times
Download:	3 times

Amends to SDs 2013

Documents